XL-7 Operation Manual (revison D) - e

XL-7 Operation Manual (revison D) - e
Operation Manual
© 2001 E-MU / ENSONIQ
All Rights Reserved
FI11541 Rev. D
E-MU World Headquarters
E-MU / ENSONIQ
P.O. Box 660015
Scotts Valley, CA USA
95067-0015
Telephone: 831-438-1921
Fax: 831-438-8612
Internet: www.emu.com
Europe, Africa, Middle East
E-MU / ENSONIQ
Suite 6, Adam Ferguson House
Eskmills Industrial Park
Musselburgh, East Lothian
Scotland, EH21 7PQ
Tel: +44 (0) 131-653-6556
Fax: +44 (0) 131-665-0473
Important Notice:
In order to obtain warranty service on your XL-7 unit, the serial number sticker
must be intact and you must have a sales receipt or other proof of purchase. If
there is no serial number sticker on the XL-7, please contact E-MU Systems at
once.
This product is covered under one or more of the following U.S. patents:
4,404,529; 4,506,579; 4,699,038; 4,987,600; 5,013,105; 5,072,645;
5,111,727; 5,144,676; 5,170,367; 5,248,845; 5,303,309; 5,317,104;
5,342,990; 5,430,244 and foreign patents and/or pending patents. All other
trademarks belong to their respective companies. Specifications and features
are subject to change without notice.
XL-7 Operation Manual i
Table of Contents
Introduction ............................................................................. 1
Product Description .......................................................................................1
Important Safety Instructions .................................................. 4
Foreign Language Warnings - German ................................... 7
Foreign Language Warnings - French ................................... 10
Setup ...................................................................................... 15
Unpacking ....................................................................................................15
Connection Instructions..............................................................................16
Basic Setup ..............................................................................................16
Studio Setup ............................................................................................17
Performance Setup ..................................................................................18
Power Down Sequence ................................................................................19
Rack Mounting XL-7 ...................................................................................19
Instant Gratification ............................................................... 21
Playing Patterns & Songs ........................................................................21
Playing Songs ..........................................................................................23
Playing Demo Sequences ........................................................................24
Auditioning Presets .................................................................................24
Selecting and Quick Editing Presets .......................................................25
Exploring the Master Arpeggiator ...........................................................27
Multi-Channel Arpeggiator ....................................................................28
Time to Save? .......................................................................................29
Basic Operations .................................................................... 31
Power Switch ...........................................................................................31
Volume Control ......................................................................................31
12VDC Lamp ..........................................................................................31
ii E-MU Systems
Mode/View Buttons ..................................................................................... 32
Track/Channel +/- Buttons ..................................................................... 33
Data Entry Control ................................................................................. 33
Left/Right Cursor Buttons ...................................................................... 33
LED View Select Section .............................................................................. 33
Sequencer Controls...................................................................................... 34
Stop Button ............................................................................................. 34
Play Button ............................................................................................. 34
Record Button ......................................................................................... 34
Song Record modes ............................................................................. 34
Pattern Record modes ......................................................................... 34
Tap Tempo ............................................................................................. 34
Edit Section .................................................................................................. 35
Song Edit Button .................................................................................... 35
Pattern Edit Button ................................................................................. 35
Preset Edit Button ................................................................................... 35
Global Button ......................................................................................... 35
Controllers Button .................................................................................. 35
Arpeggiator Button ................................................................................. 36
Real-time Controller Knobs ......................................................................... 37
Knob Functions ...................................................................................... 38
Quick Edit mode ................................................................................. 38
Programmable Knobs mode ................................................................ 39
Multichannel Volume Knobs .............................................................. 39
Multichannel Pan Knobs .................................................................... 40
Trigger Buttons............................................................................................. 41
Trigger Mode ........................................................................................... 41
Preset Menu Jump Keys .......................................................................... 41
Touchstrip, Transpose, Keypads & Glide ..................................................... 42
Touchstrip Hold ...................................................................................... 42
Transpose Buttons .................................................................................. 42
Rubber Keypads ...................................................................................... 42
Glide Button ........................................................................................... 42
Erase Button ............................................................................................ 43
Repeat Button ......................................................................................... 43
Preset Screen ................................................................................................ 44
MIDI Channel Selection ......................................................................... 44
Preset Selection ....................................................................................... 44
Channel Volume .................................................................................... 45
Channel Pan ........................................................................................... 46
Channel Arpeggiator .............................................................................. 46
Sound Navigator .......................................................................................... 47
Preset Category ....................................................................................... 47
Instrument Category .............................................................................. 47
XL-7 Operation Manual iii
Sequencer .............................................................................. 49
Overview ......................................................................................................50
Definitions ...................................................................................................50
Events ......................................................................................................50
Tracks ......................................................................................................50
Patterns ...................................................................................................50
Pattern Recording & Editing ...............................................................51
The Asterisk .........................................................................................51
Standard MIDI Files .............................................................................51
Songs .......................................................................................................52
Song Record Modes .............................................................................52
Event Timing................................................................................................53
Track Priority .......................................................................................53
Pattern Mode................................................................................................54
Pattern Play .............................................................................................54
Realtime Recording .................................................................................55
Preparing to Record a Pattern .................................................................55
Input Quantize ........................................................................................55
Count In ..................................................................................................57
Pattern Length ........................................................................................58
Metronome .............................................................................................58
Recording a Pattern .................................................................................58
Automatic Channel Assignment .........................................................62
Grid Recording ........................................................................................63
What is Grid Recording? .....................................................................63
Step Time Recording ...............................................................................68
Note Value/Number of Ticks ............................................................68
Pattern Edit Menu ........................................................................................70
Track Enable/Mute Buttons ....................................................................70
Name Pattern ..........................................................................................70
Pattern Length ........................................................................................70
Setting Meter (Time Signature) ...............................................................71
Metronome .............................................................................................72
Quantize ..................................................................................................73
Quantize Parameters ...........................................................................73
More about Swing ...............................................................................74
Scale/Shift Duration ................................................................................75
Thin Events .............................................................................................76
Erase Events ............................................................................................77
Transpose ................................................................................................78
Scale/Shift Velocity .................................................................................79
Extend Sequence Data To .......................................................................80
Erase Track ..............................................................................................81
Cut Track to Clipboard ...........................................................................82
Copy Track to Clipboard ........................................................................83
Paste Clipboard to Track .........................................................................84
Channel Assign .......................................................................................86
Multichannel Track Recording ...............................................................87
Aux Channel Assign ...............................................................................88
iv E-MU Systems
Note List Editor ....................................................................................... 89
Event List Editor ..................................................................................... 90
Continuous Controller Edit ................................................................ 90
Continuous Controller Screen ............................................................ 90
Pitch Strip Edit .................................................................................... 90
Pitch Strip Screen ................................................................................ 90
Poly Pressure Edit ................................................................................ 91
Poly Pressure Screen ............................................................................ 91
Program Change Edit .......................................................................... 91
Program Change Screen ...................................................................... 91
The Conductor Track .......................................................................... 92
Conductor Track Screens .................................................................... 92
Revert to Saved Pattern ........................................................................... 93
Song Mode ................................................................................................... 94
Song Play ................................................................................................ 94
Song Step Recording ............................................................................... 94
Realtime Song Recording ........................................................................ 96
Song Edit Menu ........................................................................................... 99
Song Name .............................................................................................. 99
Event Source ........................................................................................... 99
Setting Meter (Time Signature) .............................................................. 100
Metronome ........................................................................................... 101
Quantize ............................................................................................... 101
Scale/Shift Duration ............................................................................. 102
Thin Events ........................................................................................... 103
Erase Events .......................................................................................... 104
Transpose .............................................................................................. 105
Scale/Shift Velocity ............................................................................... 106
Cut Track to Clipboard ......................................................................... 107
Copy Track to Clipboard ...................................................................... 108
Paste Clipboard to Track ....................................................................... 109
Song Channel Assign ............................................................................ 110
Note List Editor ..................................................................................... 111
Event List Editor ................................................................................... 112
Continuous Controller Edit .............................................................. 112
Continuous Controller Screen .......................................................... 112
Pitch Strip Edit .................................................................................. 112
Pitch Strip Screen .............................................................................. 112
Poly Pressure Edit .............................................................................. 113
Poly Pressure Screen .......................................................................... 113
Program Change Edit ........................................................................ 113
Program Change Screen .................................................................... 113
Revert to Saved Song ............................................................................ 114
Connection Examples................................................................................ 115
Using the Internal Sequencer with an External MIDI Keyboard ......... 115
Using an External Sequencer ................................................................ 117
XL-7 Operation Manual v
Controllers Menu ................................................................. 119
Realtime Control Functions.......................................................................120
Keyboard Transpose ..............................................................................120
Keyboard Channel ................................................................................120
Aftertouch Curves .................................................................................120
Local Control On/Off ...........................................................................121
Footswitch Jack Function .....................................................................122
Trigger Buttons Function ......................................................................123
Trigger Buttons .....................................................................................124
Trigger Button Select .........................................................................124
Latch on/off .......................................................................................124
MIDI Key ...........................................................................................124
MIDI Channel ...................................................................................124
Destination ........................................................................................124
Key Velocity .......................................................................................124
Programmable Knobs ............................................................................125
Knob Preset Quick-Edit .........................................................................125
Real-time Controller Assignment .........................................................126
MIDI Footswitch Assign ........................................................................127
Tempo Controller .................................................................................127
Global Menu ........................................................................ 129
Multisetups.................................................................................................130
Restoring Multisetups ...........................................................................130
Multisetup Name ..................................................................................131
Saving Multisetups ................................................................................131
Defining Global Parameters .......................................................................132
Transpose/Tune .....................................................................................132
Bend Range ...........................................................................................132
Velocity Curve ......................................................................................133
Mix Output ...........................................................................................134
Master Effects .............................................................................................136
Effects Mode ..........................................................................................136
Effects Multi Mode Control ..................................................................136
Master FXA Algorithm ..........................................................................137
A Effect Types ....................................................................................137
FXA Parameters: Decay/HF Damping FxB -> FxA .................................138
FXA Send Amounts ...............................................................................138
Master FXB Algorithm ..........................................................................138
B Effect Types ....................................................................................139
FXB Parameters: Feedback/LFO Rate Delay Time .................................139
FXB Send Amounts ...............................................................................139
Miscellaneous Parameters ..........................................................................140
Edit All Layers Enable ...........................................................................140
User Key Tuning ...................................................................................140
Output Format ......................................................................................140
Screen Viewing Angle ...........................................................................141
vi E-MU Systems
MIDI Menu ............................................................................143
Base Tempo ........................................................................................... 144
Rechannelize Input ............................................................................... 144
Keyboard Outputs MIDI ....................................................................... 146
Knobs Output MIDI .............................................................................. 146
Transmit MIDI Clock ............................................................................ 146
External Song Start/Stop ....................................................................... 146
Merge MIDI In to MIDI Out ................................................................. 147
MIDI In Channels ................................................................................. 147
MIDI Enable .......................................................................................... 147
Receive Program Change ...................................................................... 148
MIDI Program Change -> Preset ........................................................... 148
MIDI SysEx ID ....................................................................................... 149
MIDI SysEx Packet Delay ...................................................................... 150
Send MIDI System Exclusive Data ........................................................ 150
MIDI Mode ........................................................................................... 152
Programming Basics .............................................................153
Modulation ................................................................................................ 154
Modulation Sources ................................................................................... 155
Random Sources ................................................................................... 156
Modulation PatchCords............................................................................. 156
Envelope Generators.................................................................................. 157
Tempo-based Envelopes .................................................................... 158
Envelope Repeat ................................................................................ 158
Low Frequency Oscillators (LFOs) ............................................................. 159
Clock Modulation...................................................................................... 160
Modulation Destinations........................................................................... 162
Modulation Processors............................................................................... 163
Preset Modulation Processors .................................................................... 165
Using the Modulation Processors ......................................................... 167
More Examples ..................................................................................... 169
Dynamic Filters.......................................................................................... 171
What is a Filter? .................................................................................... 172
Parametric Filters .................................................................................. 175
The Z-Plane Filter .................................................................................. 176
Signal Flow................................................................................................. 177
MIDI Channels & Real-time Controls ....................................................... 178
Bank Select Commands ........................................................................ 180
Stereo Mix Outputs.................................................................................... 181
XL-7 Operation Manual vii
Preset Edit Menu .................................................................. 183
Preset Name ..........................................................................................184
Four Layer Architecture..............................................................................184
Selecting Layers .....................................................................................185
Defining Layer Parameters .........................................................................186
Selecting an Instrument ........................................................................186
Sound Navigator ................................................................................186
Defining Key Range ..............................................................................187
Defining the Velocity Crossfade Range ................................................189
Defining the Real-time Crossfade Range ..............................................191
Transposing the Instrument .................................................................194
Tuning ...................................................................................................195
Background: Transpose vs. Coarse Tuning .......................................195
Amplifier ...............................................................................................195
Volume Envelope ..................................................................................196
Selecting the Mode ............................................................................196
Defining the Volume Envelope .........................................................197
Chorusing the Layer .............................................................................198
Sound Start Offset and Delay ................................................................198
Non-Transpose Mode ............................................................................199
Solo Mode .............................................................................................199
Assign Group .........................................................................................200
Glide ......................................................................................................201
Z-Plane Filters ........................................................................................202
XL-7 Filter Types ...................................................................................202
Filter Types ........................................................................................202
Filter Parameters ................................................................................204
Filter Envelope ......................................................................................205
Defining the Filter Envelope .............................................................206
Auxiliary Envelope ................................................................................206
Low Frequency Oscillators (LFOs) ........................................................207
Shape .................................................................................................207
Sync ...................................................................................................208
Rate ....................................................................................................208
Delay ..................................................................................................210
Variation ............................................................................................210
PatchCords ............................................................................................211
Modulator Polarity ............................................................................212
Pitch Bend Range ..................................................................................214
Mix Output ...........................................................................................214
Common Preset Parameters.....................................................................215
Preset Effects .........................................................................................215
FXA Algorithm ......................................................................................217
A Effect Types ....................................................................................217
FXA Parameters .....................................................................................218
FXA Send Amounts ...............................................................................218
FXB Algorithm ......................................................................................218
B Effect Types ....................................................................................218
FXB Parameters .....................................................................................219
viii E-MU Systems
FXB Send Amounts ............................................................................... 219
Preset Patchcords .................................................................................. 219
Initial Controller Amount .................................................................... 221
Keyboard Tuning .................................................................................. 222
Preset Links ........................................................................................... 224
Preset Tempo Offset .............................................................................. 225
Audition Riff Selection ......................................................................... 225
Play Solo Layers .................................................................................... 225
Arpeggiator/Beats Menu ......................................................227
Arpeggiators ............................................................................................... 228
Arp Controllers ..................................................................................... 229
Arpeggiator Resolution ...................................................................... 229
Arpeggiator Extension ....................................................................... 229
Arpeggiator Velocity ......................................................................... 229
Arpeggiator Gate ............................................................................... 229
Arpeggiator Interval .......................................................................... 229
Master Arpeggiator Parameters .................................................................. 229
Status ..................................................................................................... 230
Mode ..................................................................................................... 230
Note Value ............................................................................................ 231
Arpeggiator Pattern Speed .................................................................... 231
Pattern .................................................................................................. 231
Velocity ................................................................................................. 232
Gate Time ............................................................................................. 232
Extension Count ................................................................................... 233
Extension Interval ................................................................................ 233
Sync ...................................................................................................... 234
Pre-Delay ............................................................................................... 234
Duration ............................................................................................... 235
Post-Delay ............................................................................................. 235
Recycle .................................................................................................. 236
Keyboard Thru ...................................................................................... 236
Latch ..................................................................................................... 236
Send MIDI System Exclusive Data ............................................................. 237
Editing a User Arpeggiator Pattern ....................................................... 238
Pattern Step Number ............................................................................ 238
Key ........................................................................................................ 238
Key Offset .......................................................................................... 239
Tie ...................................................................................................... 239
Rest .................................................................................................... 239
Skip .................................................................................................... 239
End .................................................................................................... 239
Velocity ................................................................................................. 240
Duration ............................................................................................... 240
Repeat ................................................................................................... 240
User Pattern Name ................................................................................ 241
Multichannel Arpeggiating .................................................................. 241
XL-7 Operation Manual ix
Beats ...........................................................................................................242
Beats Mode ............................................................................................244
Status .................................................................................................244
Beats Channel ....................................................................................244
Trigger Channel .................................................................................244
Beats Controllers ...................................................................................247
Beat Velocity Group 1-4 ....................................................................247
Beat Xpose Group 1-4 .......................................................................247
Beat Busy ...........................................................................................247
Beat Variation ....................................................................................248
Beats Keys/Trigger Layout .....................................................................249
1-Bar Trigger Option .........................................................................249
Beats Keys Offset ...................................................................................250
Beats Part Velocity ................................................................................250
Beats Part Transpose .............................................................................251
Beats Part Group ...................................................................................252
Master Riff .............................................................................................252
Riff Tempo ............................................................................................253
Riff Controllers .....................................................................................253
Effects ................................................................................... 255
Effects Overview.........................................................................................255
The Effects Sends ..................................................................................255
Effect Types ................................................................................................257
Effect Parameters ...................................................................................257
Decay .................................................................................................258
High Frequency Damping .................................................................258
Feedback ............................................................................................258
LFO Rate ............................................................................................258
Delay ..................................................................................................258
Effects Programmed in the Preset ..............................................................259
Master Effects .............................................................................................260
Effects Mode ..........................................................................................262
Flexible Effects Control .........................................................................262
Using the Effects Channel Settings in Multi Mode ..........................264
Effect B Into Effect A .............................................................................264
General Effect Descriptions........................................................................266
Reverb ...................................................................................................266
Chorus ...................................................................................................267
Doubling ...............................................................................................267
Slapback ................................................................................................267
Stereo Flanger ........................................................................................267
Delay .....................................................................................................268
Stereo Delay ..........................................................................................268
Panning Delay .......................................................................................268
Dual Tap ................................................................................................268
Vibrato ..................................................................................................268
Distortion ..............................................................................................268
x E-MU Systems
Save/Copy Menu ..................................................................269
Save Pattern .......................................................................................... 269
Saving a Preset ...................................................................................... 270
Copying Information ............................................................................... 271
Copy Preset ........................................................................................... 271
Copy Layer ............................................................................................ 271
Copy PatchCords .................................................................................. 272
Copy Preset PatchCords ....................................................................... 273
Copy Arpeggiator Settings .................................................................... 273
Copy Arpeggiator Pattern ..................................................................... 274
Copy Preset Bank .................................................................................. 274
Copy Sequencer Pattern ....................................................................... 275
Save Song .............................................................................................. 275
Copy Song ............................................................................................ 276
Sound Authoring ....................................................................................... 277
Rename Flash SIMM ............................................................................. 278
Duplicate Flash ..................................................................................... 279
Create Random Preset................................................................................ 280
Preset Programming .............................................................281
Editing Presets............................................................................................ 281
Changing the Instrument .................................................................... 281
Changing the Tuning of an Instrument .............................................. 282
Chorus .................................................................................................. 283
Volume Envelope ................................................................................. 283
Working with Filters ............................................................................. 285
Adding the Filter Envelope ............................................................... 287
Changing Filter Types ....................................................................... 289
Envelope Repeat ................................................................................ 289
Practice Modulating .............................................................................. 290
Troubleshooting ................................................................................... 291
Linking Presets ........................................................................................... 292
Appendix ...............................................................................293
Front Panel Knob Functions ...................................................................... 293
Knob Controller Descriptions .............................................................. 294
Presets ........................................................................................................ 294
Preset Categories ................................................................................... 294
Preset Listing.............................................................................................. 295
Pattern Layout .......................................................................................... 299
Pattern Listing............................................................................................ 300
Riff Listing.................................................................................................. 301
Instrument Listing ..................................................................................... 303
Velocity Curves .......................................................................................... 313
PatchCord Amount Chart ......................................................................... 315
Rhythmic Notation.................................................................................... 316
XL-7 Operation Manual xi
Time Signatures..........................................................................................316
Block Diagrams ..........................................................................................317
Volume & Pan .......................................................................................317
Pads Routing .........................................................................................318
MIDI In .................................................................................................319
Block Diagrams .....................................................................................320
Triggers & Programmable Knobs ..........................................................320
Quick Edit .............................................................................................321
E-MU Expansion Sound Sets......................................................................322
Installing Sound SIMMs.............................................................................324
MIDI ...........................................................................................................327
Received Channel Commands .............................................................334
SysEx Specification ...............................................................................334
Technical Specifications .............................................................................335
Warranty ....................................................................................................336
Index .................................................................................... 339
xii E-MU Systems
Introduction
XL-7 truly represents the ultimate melding of E-MU’s pristine audio quality
and cutting edge controller technologies, making it uniquely qualified to
serve as the control center of your MIDI studio or live performance rig.
Product
Description
Upgradable Sounds
XL-7 contains a thorough collection of Electronica/Dance presets. These
sounds are rich in harmonic texture and a perfect complement to the Zplane filters. XL-7 contains three additional, user-upgradable sound SIMM
sockets, allowing you to mix and match sound sets according to your
needs. New sounds can be added as easily as plugging in a new 16MB or
32MB SIMM module. Each E-MU sound set has been meticulously crafted
to be the finest of its kind. Samples are matched across the keyboard,
perfectly looped, and rich in harmonic texture.
1024 Presets & more
XL-7 contains 512 user presets and 512 factory ROM presets, but it can be
expanded with literally thousands of ROM presets. (ROM presets are
automatically added when sound SIMMs are installed. As an example, a 32 MB
SIMM may contain up to 1024 ROM presets.) XL-7’s Sound Navigator makes it
easy to find the exact sound you want. It’s powerful, yet simple to use.
Velocity & Pressure Sensitive Pads
Thirteen velocity-sensitive pads with aftertouch allow you to perform live
or into the 16-track sequencer. These pads have been specifically designed
for the Command Station and are extremely responsive, capturing all the
subtle nuances of your performance.
Multi-Function Controllers
Multi-function buttons allow you to trigger sequences, arpeggiators and
loops internally or on any of your other MIDI devices. They can act as Note
Inputs for Grid or Step recording, Track Select, Mute or MIDI Trigger
buttons (latched or unlatched).
XL-7 Operation Manual 1
Introduction
Sixteen real-time controller knobs are also multi-function controls. These
knobs make it a snap to edit and modify internal preset parameters.
Another useful mode allows the knobs to control volume and pan for all
sixteen MIDI channels. These controllers are fully programmable and can
control internal preset or other MIDI equipment on multiple MIDI
channels. They can be programmed to adjust multiple internal parameters
at once, allowing complex levels of control. For example, a single knob can
simultaneously turn up filter cutoff, while detuning one sample, and
adjusting the release time of the volume envelope. Virtually every synth
parameter in the XL-7 is controllable using the real-time knobs or by any
internal or external control source.
Super Sequencer
XL-7contains a powerful, yet simple to use 16-track interactive sequencer.
You can record in real-time, step and grid modes and can switch modes
without ever stopping your creative flow. Sixteen dedicated Mute/Select
buttons allow you to add, monitor and modify parts on the fly with
cumbersome menu scrolling. It’s never been this easy to lay down your
ideas. The XL-7Command Station can store over 300,000 notes and you
can import and export MIDI files to and from your Mac or PC using E-MU’s
E-Loader program.
Multi-Channel Arpeggiators
XL-7’s Rhythmic Pattern Generator/Arpeggiator can play up to 32 synchronized arpeggiator patterns at once using a different sound for each! Patterns
can be edited using pattern flow commands such as: delay for 2 bars, play
for 4 bars, hold for 2 beats and repeat. You can program or download 100
user patterns in addition to the 200 factory patterns.
Ultra Powerful Synthesizer
The extremely flexible yet easy to use 4-layer synthesizer voices make it
easy to build sounds of any kind. Layers can be switched or crossfaded
using key position, velocity, real-time controllers or any modulation source.
128 voice polyphony ensures that you can play and sequence the most
complex material. XL-7 also contains 50 different 2nd to 12th order
resonant & modeling filters which are used to shape and modify over 1200
waveforms contained in 32 megabytes (MB) of ROM.
Sixty four modulation sources include three multistage envelopes and two
LFOs per layer, as well as full MIDI control over virtually every parameter.
The digital patch bay, with 24 cords per layer, (and 12 more cords per
preset) lets you connect modulation sources to 64 destinations in any
imaginable way. The patch bay also contains a set of arithmetic modifiers,
allowing you to create complex synthesis models. Synth parameters as well
as arpeggiator and BEAT tempos can be controlled from XL-7’s internal
clock (or an external MIDI clock). Up to 8 LFOs and 12 envelopes can be
perfectly synchronized at different rates. This is an extremely powerful
synthesizer!
2 E-MU Systems
Introduction
24-bit Effects
Once you have created your preset, you can add richness to your sound
using XL-7’s 24-bit stereo effects. You can choose a different effects setup
for each preset from over 60 algorithms. XL-7’s effects section is actually
two separate effects processors with control over each wet/dry mix level on
four effects sends. Effects Processor “A” contains primarily ambiance
algorithms like reverb and delays, while effects processor “B” contains
primarily spectral algorithms such as chorus, flange, phase, distortion, and
delay. Effects can be linked to each preset or used globally to further
enhance your sound.
Other features include multiple solo, voice assignment and performance
modes for expressive control, 12 user-definable alternate tunings, and, of
course, an extensive MIDI implementation.
XL-7 Operation Manual 3
Important Safety Instructions
Important Safety Instructions
Use in countries other than the U.S.A. may require the use of a different
line cord or attachment plug, or both. Refer all servicing to qualified service
personnel. There are no user serviceable parts or adjustments inside the
unit. There are no user serviceable parts inside the power supply enclosure.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of fire or electric shock, do not expose this
product to rain or moisture.
Grounding
Instructions
Danger!
Caution!
4 E-MU Systems
This product must be grounded. If it should malfunction or break down,
grounding provides a path of least resistance for electric current, reducing
the risk of electric shock. This product is equipped with a cord having an
equipment-grounding conductor and a grounding plug. The plug must be
plugged into an appropriate outlet properly installed and grounded in
accordance with all local codes and ordinances.
Improper connection of the equipment’s grounding conductor can result in
the risk of electric shock. Check with a qualified electrician or service
personnel if you are in doubt as to whether the product is properly
grounded. Do not modify the plug provided with this product. If it will not
fit the outlet, have a proper outlet installed by a qualified technician.
If your XL-7 (Model Number 7750) is rack mounted, you must use a
standard 19 inch open frame rack. Screw-on rack mount ears are available
from your E-MU dealer for this purpose (order E-MU PN 7770).
Important Safety Instructions
User
Maintenance
Instructions
1.
2.
The XL-7 should be kept clean and dust free. Periodically wipe the unit
with a clean, dry, lint free cloth. Do not use solvents or cleaners.
There are no user lubrication or adjustment requirements.
Caution -Servicing instructions are for use by qualified personnel only. To reduce
the risk of electric shock, do not perform any servicing other than that contained
in these operating instructions unless you are qualified to do so. Refer all servicing
to qualified service personnel.
INSTRUCTIONS PERTAINING TO A RISK OF FIRE,
ELECTRIC SHOCK, OR INJURY TO PERSONS
READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS: When using electric products, basic precautions should always be adhered to, including the following:
1.
Read all instructions before using XL-7.
To reduce the risk of injury, close supervision is necessary when using
XL-7 near children.
3. Do not use XL-7 near water — for example near a bathtub, washbowl,
kitchen sink, in a wet basement, on a wet bar, or near or in a swimming
pool.
4. Do not expose the unit to drips or splashes. No liquid-filled objects,
such as vases, shall be placed on the XL-7.
5. The XL-7 should be situated so that its location or position does not
interfere with its proper ventilation.
6. The XL-7 should be located away from heat sources such as radiators,
heat registers, fireplaces, stoves, or ovens.
7. No open flame sources, such as lit candles, should be placed on the
XL-7.
8. The XL-7 is designed for use in moderate climates.
9. The XL-7 should be connected only to a power supply of the type
described in the operating instructions and marked on the product.
10. Care should be taken so that objects do not fall and liquids are not
spilled into the enclosure of XL-7 through openings.
11. This XL-7 may be equipped with a polarized line plug (one blade wider
than the other) or a grounding-type plug (a grounding plug has two blades
and a third grounding prong). This is a safety feature. If you are unable to
insert this plug into the outlet, do not defeat the safety purpose of the
plug. Contact an electrician to replace your obsolete outlet.
12. Protect the power cord from being walked on or pinched, particularly at
plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point where they exit from the
unit.
13. Unplug the XL-7 from the power outlet during lightning storms or
when left unused for a long period of time.
2.
This symbol is intended to
alert you to the presence of
important operating and
maintenance (servicing)
instructions in the literature
accompanying the unit.
This symbol is intended to
alert you to the presence of
uninsulated dangerous
voltage within the product’s
enclosure that may be of
sufficient magnitude to
constitute a risk of electric
shock to persons.
XL-7 Operation Manual 5
Important Safety Instructions
14.
15.
16.
This product, in combination with an amplifier and headphones and
speakers, may be capable of producing sound levels that could cause
permanent hearing loss. Do not operate for a long period of time at a
high volume level or at a level that is uncomfortable. If you experience
any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, consult an audiologist.
Only use attachments and accessories specified by E-MU Systems.
Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel. The XL-7 should be
serviced by qualified service personnel when:
A. The power supply cord or plug has been damaged; or
B. Objects have fallen, or liquid has been spilled into the unit; or
C. The unit has been exposed to rain or moisture; or
D. The unit has been dropped or damaged in any way; or
E. The XL-7 does not operate normally or exhibits a marked change in
performance.
Save These Instructions
Heed All Warnings
Follow All Instructions
Radio and
Television
Interference
The equipment described in this manual generates and uses radiofrequency energy. If it is not installed and used properly —that is, in strict
accordance with our instructions— it may cause interference with radio
and television reception.
This equipment has been tested and complies with the limits for a Class B
computing device in accordance with the specifications in Subpart J of Part
15 of the FCC rules. These rules are designed to provide reasonable
protection against such interference in a residential installation. However,
there is no guarantee that the interference will not occur in a particular
installation, especially if a “rabbit ear” TV antenna is used.
If XL-7 does cause interference to radio or television reception, you can try
to correct the interference by using one or more of the following measures:
•
•
•
•
Turn the television or radio antenna until the interference stops.
Move XL-7 to one side or the other of the television or radio.
Move XL-7 farther away from the television or radio.
Plug XL-7 into an outlet on a different circuit than the television or
radio.
• Consider installing a rooftop antenna with a coaxial lead-in between the
antenna and television set.
6 E-MU Systems
Foreign Language Warnings - German
Foreign Language Warnings
- German
Wichtige
Sicherheitsvorschriften
Erdungsinstruktionen
Gefahr
Vorsicht
In Ländern ausserhalb den U.S.A. können andere Kabel oder Stecker
notwendig werden. Zur Verminderung des Risikos von Feuer oder eines
elektrischen Schlages übergebe man den Service an qualifizierte Fachleute.
Das Gerät niemals Regen oder Nässe aussetzen.
Das Gerät muss geerdet sein. Bei einem Defekt oder Ausfall bietet Erdung
dem elektrischen Strom den Weg des geringsten Widerstandes und
reduziert das Risiko eines Schlages. Dieses Gerät ist mit einem geerdeten
Kabel und Stecker ausgerüstet. Der Stecker muss in eine passende,
einwandfrei montierte und geerdete Steckdose in Übereinstimmung mit
den örtlichen Vorschriften eingeführt werden.
Unvorschriftsgemässer Anschluss des Gerätes kann zum Risiko eines
elektrischen Schlages führen. Im Zweifelsfalle über die ordnungsgemässe
Erdung soll ein qualifizierter Elektriker oder eine Serviecestelle beigezogen
werden. Ändern Sie den mitgelieferten Stecker nicht. Sollte er nicht in die
Steckdose passen, soll die einwandfreie Installation durch einen qualifizierten Techniker erfolgen.
Wird der XL-7 (Modell Nummer 7750)in einem Rackgestell montiert, muss
ein offener 19-Zollrahmen verwendet werden.
XL-7 Operation Manual 7
Foreign Language Warnings - German
Unterhaltsinstruktionen
für anwender
1.
2.
3.
Vorsicht
XL-7 soll sauber und staubfrei gehalten werden. Das Gerät mit einem
sauberen und säurefreien Tuch periodisch abreiben. Keine Lösungsoder Reinigungsmittel anwenden.
Schmieren und Justieren sind nicht notwendig.
Bei weiteren Servicefragen wende man sich an eine qualifizierte Servicestelle.
Diese Gebrauchsanweisungen sind nur für qualifizierte Techniker
beabsichtigt. Um die Gefahr eines elektrischen Schlages zu vermeiden,
sollen Sie keine Arbeit unternehmen, die nicht in diesen Instruktionen
vorgeschrieben ist. Wenden Sie Sich bei weiteren Servicefragen an eine
qualifizierte Servicestelle.
INSTRUKTIONEN BETR. FEUERRISIKO,
ELEKTROSCHOCK ODER VERLETZUNG VON
PERSONEN
WARNUNG; Beim Einsatz elektrischer Geräte sollten
folgende Vorsichtsmassregeln stets beachtet werden:
1.
Dieses Symbol weist den
Anwender auf wichtige
Gebrauchs- und ServiceVorschriften in den beiliegenden Drucksachen.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Dieses Symbol verweist auf
nicht-isolierte Stromspannungen im Geräte-Innern,
welche zu einem elektrischen
Schlag führen könnten.
8 E-MU Systems
8.
Lesen Sie vor dem Einschalten des XL-7 alle Instruktionen.
Zur Vermeidung von Verletzungsrisiken müssen Kinder bei eingeschaltetem XL-7 sorgfältig überwacht werden.
XL-7 nicht in der Nähe von Wasser in Betrieb nehmen -- z.B. in der
Nähe von Badewannen, Waschschüsseln, auf nassen Gestellen oder am
Swimmingpool.
XL-7 stets so aufstellen, dass seine Belüftung nicht beeinträchtigt wird.
XL-7 nicht in der Nähe von Hitze aufstellen, wie Heizkörper, offenem
Feuer, Öfen oder von Backöfen.
XL-7 ausschliesslich mit einem Netzgerät gemäss Bedienungsanleitung
und Gerätemarkierung verwenden.
Dieses Gerät kann bei Verwendung von Kopfhörern und Verstärkern
hohe Lautpegel erzeugen, welche zu bleibenden Gehörschäden führen.
Arbeiten Sie nicht während längerer Zeit mit voller Lautstärke oder
hohem Lautpegel. Stellen Sie Gehörverlust oder Ohrenläuten fest,
wenden Sie sich an einen Ohrenartz.
XL-7 kann mit einem polarisierten Kabelstecker (mit ungleichen
Stiften) ausgerüstet sein. Das geschieht für Ihre Sicherheit. Können Sie
den Stecker nicht in die Steckdose einführen, ändern Sie nicht den
Stecker ab, sondern wenden Sie sich an einen Elektriker.
Foreign Language Warnings - German
9.
10.
11.
12.
Das Netzkabel des XL-7 bei längerem Nichtgebrauch aus der Steckdose
ziehen.
Vermeiden Sie sorgfältig das Eindringen von Gegenständen oder
Flüssigkeiten durch die Gehäuseöffnungen.
Das Gerät soll durch qualifizierte Serviceleute gewartet werden, falls:
A. das Netzkabel beschädigt wurde, oder
B. Gegenstände oder Flüssigkeit in das Gerät gelangten,
C. das Gerät Regen ausgesetzt war, oder
D. das Gerät nicht normal oder einwandfrei arbeitet, oder
E. das Gerät stürzte oder sein Gehäuse beschädigt wurde.
Servicearbeiten sollten nur qualifizierten Fachleuten anvertraut werden.
DIESE INSTRUKTIONEN AUFBEWAHREN
XL-7 Operation Manual 9
Foreign Language Warnings - French
Foreign Language Warnings French
Instructions
de Sécurité
Importantes
Instructions
de Mise à la
Terre
Danger
Attention
Instructions
de
Maintenance
Une utilisation dans des pays autres que les U.S.A. peut nécessiter l’usage
d’un cordon d’alimentation différent. Afin de réduire les risques d’incendie
ou d’électrocution, référez-vous à un personnel de service qualifié, et
n’exposez pas cet appareil à la pluie ou à l’humidité.
Cet appareil doit être relié à la terre. Dans le cas d’une malfonction
éventuelle, la terre fournit un passage de moindre résistance pour le
courant électrique, réduisant ainsi les risques d’électrocution. Le XL-7 est
équipé d’un cordon muni d’un conducteur et d’une fiche devant être
branchée dans une prise appropriée et reliée à la terre en conformité avec
les normes locales.
Une connexion incorrecte peut résulter en des risques d’électrocution.
Vérifiez avec un technicien qualifié si vous avez des doutes quant à la
connexion. Ne modifiez pas vous-même le cordon d’alimentation livré avec
cet appareil; s’il ne rentre pas dans la prise, faites-en installer un autre par
un technicien qualifié.
Si le XL-7 (Model 7750) est installé dans un rack, utilisez un rack standard
ouvert de 48.25cm.
1.
2.
3.
10 E-MU Systems
Le XL-7 doit être maintenu propre et sans poussière. Nettoyez-le
périodiquement à l’aide d’un chiffon propre et non-pelucheux.
N’utilisez pas de solvants, ou d’autres produits de nettoyage.
Aucune lubrification et aucun réglage ne sont nécessaires de votre part.
Pour tout autre service, référez-vous à un personnel qualifié.
Foreign Language Warnings - French
Instructions Concernant les Risques d’Incendie,
d’Electrocution, ou de Blessures Corporelles.
ATTENTION: Lorsque vous utilisez des appareils électriques,
certaines précautions élémentaires doivent toujours être prises,
incluant les suivantes:
Ces instructions de dépanage sont destinées uniquement aux personnes
qualifiées. Afin d’éviter les risques d’électrocution, n’effectuez que les opérations décrites dans ce manuel, à moins que vous ne soyez qualifiê pour cela.
Faites effectuer toute r’eparation par une personne qualifié.
1.
2.
3.
Ce symbole vous alerte de la
présence d’instructions
importantes d’opération et
de maintenance dans la
notice accompagnant
l’appareil.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Ce symbole vous alerte de
la présence d’un voltage
non-isolé dangereux à
l’intérieur de l’appareil,
pouvant être d’une
magnitude suffisante pour
constituer un risque
d’électrocution.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
Lisez bien toutes les instructions avant d’utiliser le XL-7.
Afin de réduire les risques de blessures, une attention particulière est
nécessaire en la présence d’enfants en bas âge.
N’utilisez pas le XL-7 dans ou près d’endroits humides - par exemple
près d’une baignoire, d’un lavabo, dans les toilettes, dans une cave
humide, sur un bar fréquenté, en présence d’un bull-dog en rut, ou
dans une piscine pleine. Protégez cet appareil de tout liquide,
éclaboussure ou fuite.
Le XL-7 doit être placé de façon à ce que sa position n’interfére pas avec
sa propre ventilation.
Le XL-7 doit être placé loin de sources de chaleur telles que des radiateurs, cheminées, fours, ou groupies en chaleur.
Le XL-7 doit uniquement être connecté à une alimentation du type
décrit dans les instructions d’opération et tel qu’indiqué sur l’appareil.
Une attention particulière doit être observée quant aux objets pouvant
tomber et aux liquides pouvant être versés sur et à l’intérieur de le XL-7.
Le XL-7 peut être équipé d’une fiche secteur polarisée (avec une broche
plus large que l’autre). C’est une mesure de sécurité. Si vous ne pouvez
pas brancher cette fiche dans une prise, ne neutralisez pas cette sécurité.
Contactez plutôt un électricien pour remplacer la prise obsolète.
Evitez de marcher sur le cordon d’alimentation ou de le coincer,
particuliêrement prês des prises de courant, des boitiers ‘electriques dt
du point de sortie de l’appareil.
Le cordon d’alimentation de le XL-7 doit être débranché lorsque ce
dernier n’est pas utilisé pendant une longue période.
Cet appareil, combiné avec un amplificateur, des haut-parleurs, et/ou
un casque, est capable de générer des niveaux sonores pouvant
occasionner une perte de l’ouïe permanente. Ne travaillez pas trop
longtemps à un volume trop élevé ou même inconfortable. Si vous
observez une perte de l’audition ou un bourdonnement dans les
oreilles, consultez un O.R.L.
N’utilisez que les accessoires sp’ecifi’es par E-MU Systems.
Cet appareil doit être examiné par un personnel qualifié lorsque:
A. Le cordon d’alimentation a été endommagé, ou
XL-7 Operation Manual 11
Foreign Language Warnings - French
14.
B. Des objets sont tombés, ou du liquide a été versé sur/à l’intérieur
de l’appareil, ou
C. Le XL-7 a été exposé à la pluie, ou
D. Le XL-7 est tombé, ou
E. Le XL-7 ne fonctionne pas normalement, ou affiche un
changement radical de performance.
Tout service doit être effectué par un personnel qualifié.
SAUVEGARDEZ CES INSTRUCTIONS
Interférences
Radio et
Télévision
L’appareil décrit dans cette notice génére et utilise une énergie de
fréquence-radio. S’il n’est pas installé et utilisé correctement - c’est à dire en
suivant strictement nos instructions - il peut occasionner des interférences
avec la réception d’une radio ou d’une télévision.
Cet appareil a été testé et est conforme aux normes de Classe A en accord
avec les spécifications du paragraphe J de la section 15 des lois FCC. Ces lois
sont désignées pour fournir une protection raisonnable contre de telles
interférences dans une installation résidentielle. Toutefois, il n’est pas
garanti qu’aucune interférence n’apparaisse dans des installations
particulières, et plus spécialement lorsqu’une antenne de télévision en
«oreilles de lapin» est utilisée.
Si le XL-7 occasionne des interférences , vous pouvez essayer de les corriger
en utilisant une ou plusieurs des mesures suivantes:
• Tournez l’antenne de la télé ou de la radio jusqu’à ce que les interférences disparaissent.
• Déplacez le XL-7 d’un côté ou de l’autre de la télé ou de la radio.
• Eloignez le XL-7 de la télé ou de la radio.
• Branchez le XL-7 sur une prise différente que la télé ou la radio.
• Installez une antenne sur le toit munie d’une connexion coaxiale entre
elle et le poste de télévision.
12 E-MU Systems
Foreign Language Warnings - French
Declaration of Conformity
Manufacturer:
E-MU / Ensoniq
1600 Green Hills Road
Scotts Valley, CA 95067-0015 USA
We hereby declare that the equipment listed herin conforms to the
harmonized standards of the following European Commission Directives:
89/336/EEC and 72/23/EEC.
Trade Name:
XL-7
Model Number:
7750
Under 89/336/EEC as amended by 92/31/EEC, and 93/68/EEC
In accordance with EN 55103-1:1996, Emission Environments E4
In accordance with EN 55103-2:1996, Immunity Environments E4
Test information is contained in a report by Atlas Compliance and
Engineering, Inc.
Dated July 5, 2001
Report No.: 0126EMUx17_103
Under 73/23/EEC as amended by 93/68/EEC
In accordance with EN 60950 with amendments A1, A2, A3, A4, A11
This Declaration is made July 5, 2001
XL-7 Operation Manual 13
Foreign Language Warnings - French
14 E-MU Systems
Setup
This section thoroughly describes how to set up your new XL-7 for use.
Setup includes unpacking instructions, how to hook up the unit to your
sound system and, most importantly, how to turn the thing on and off.
Unpacking
Carefully remove XL-7 from the packaging material. Take care to save the
packing materials in case you need to transport the unit. Check to make
sure all components are included and in good condition. If there are
missing or damaged components, contact E-MU Systems immediately for
replacement or repair.
The XL-7 box should include the following components:
•
•
•
•
XL-7 unit
Power cable
This operation manual
Command Station CD-ROM
The following optional accessories are NOT included with your XL-7, but
are available from your E-MU dealer for a nominal fee:
• Model 7770 - Rack Mounting Ears
• Model 7771 - XL-7 Gig Bag
• Model 7773 - Locking 12VDC Lamp
XL-7 Operation Manual 15
Setup
Basic Setup
Connection
Instructions
Basic Setup
MIDI Sound Module
SAMPLE
I
TRANSPOSE
MASTER/GLOBAL
SAMPLE MANAGEMENT
MULTIMODE
PRESET MANAGEMENT
PRESET DEFINITION
The Headphone
Output is located
on the Front Panel
TRIGGERS
DIGITAL PROCESSING
INC/YES
ABC
1
O
DEC/NO
PRESET
DYNAMIC PROCESING
ENTER
VOLUME
GHI
LOAD
SAVE
AUDITION
TRIGGER MODE
ESCAPE
3
MNO
5
6
WXY
8
9
QZ
0
Basic Setup
DEF
2
TUV
7
DRIVE SELECT
JKL
4
PRS
MIDI
MIDI In
Power
Switch
110V/220V
50-60 Hz
(auto-select)
Main Outs to Mixer In
TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRICAL SHOCK,
DO NOT EXPOSE THIS PRODUCT TO RAIN OR MOISTURE.
Footswitch
Footswitch
Mixer
Amp
Speakers
Power Switch & AC Receptacle
The AC power switch located on the rear panel is a “hard” power switch.
The front panel On/Off switch is a “soft” power switch that can be used to
turn power on and off when the XL-7 is rack mounted. There is no 110/220
Volt power selector switch since XL-7 utilizes an auto-switching power
supply which accepts from 100V-250V, 50-60Hz.

The Right Main output
jack carries a mono mix of the
left and right channels when the
Left Main plug is not plugged in.
The Left Main output jack is a
stereo jack carrying both
channels when the right output
jack is empty.
16 E-MU Systems
Outputs
In order to reproduce XL-7’s wide dynamic range and frequency response,
use a high quality amplification and speaker system and a stereo setup is
highly desirable The headphone output is the same as the Main output
signal. The headphone jack is located on the left side of the front panel.
Footswitches 1 & 2
Connect one or more momentary footswitches for additional control. XL-7
auto-senses either normally-open or normally-closed switches when they
are plugged in. Their functions are programmable in the Controllers,
Footswitch menu and the Preset Edit, PatchCord menu.
Setup
Studio Setup
Studio Setup
MIDI Controller
(MIDI Keyboard, etc.)
REAL
TIME
CONTROLLERS
ASSIGNABLE
KEYS
PRESET
LEVEL
EXIT
ENTER
SAMPLE
PAGE
SEQUENCER
PRESET SELECT
1
2
3
4
5
6
RETURN
7
8
9
0
.
Computer
EMULATOR
MIDI In
Additional
MIDI
Devices
MIDI Out
MIDI In
In
MIDI
Interface
Out
In
channels
1A-16A
Out
In
channels
1B-16B
S/PDIF = Main Outs
TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRICAL SHOCK,
DO NOT EXPOSE THIS PRODUCT TO RAIN OR MOISTURE.
Footswitches
Mixer
Digital Audio Device
Amp
MIDI In
In this setup, XL-7 is controlled by MIDI messages received at the MIDI
input, which are routed by a computer MIDI interface. Any MIDI
controller, such as a MIDI keyboard or a computer, can control the module.
MIDI Out
XL-7 contains two MIDI output ports (A & B) so that it can transmit on 32
MIDI channels instead of the usual 16.Audio Outputs
Three sets of programmable stereo outputs (Main, Sub 1, and Sub 2) are
provided. The internal effects are available only on the Main outputs.
Specific presets (or MIDI channels) can be routed to one of these stereo
pairs in order to be processed further or mixed separately. The S/PDIF
output duplicates the function of the main outputs.

Channels 01A-16A
normally go to MIDI Out port A
and channels 01B-16B
normally go to MIDI Out port B.
Footswitches 1 & 2
The two footswitch inputs accept either normally-open or normally-closed
momentary footswitches and are programmable in the Controllers,
Footswitch menu and the Preset Edit, PatchCord menu.
XL-7 Operation Manual 17
Setup
Performance Setup
Performance Setup
MIDI Controller
(MIDI Keyboard, Sequencer)
REAL
TIME
CONTROLLERS
ASSIGNABLE
KEYS
PRESET
LEVEL
EXIT
ENTER
SAMPLE
PAGE
Additional
MIDI
Devices
SEQUENCER
PRESET SELECT
1
2
3
4
5
6
RETURN
7
8
9
0
.
EMULATOR
MIDI In
MIDI Out
Effect Device
Main Outs to Mixer In
Send/Return
Send
TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRICAL SHOCK,
DO NOT EXPOSE THIS PRODUCT TO RAIN OR MOISTURE.
Digital Effect
S/PDIF In
Volume
Mix
Data Entry
Control 1
Control 2
Control 3
Control 4
Effect: Swirling Reverb
Parameter Edit
Analog Out
Sub Output
Return
(To Main Output)
Tip
To Effect
Ring
From Effect
SEND/RETURN CABLE
Signal is sent out on tip of plug and
returned to main outputs via ring of plug.
MIDI In
In this setup, XL-7 is additionally controlled by a MIDI keyboard.
MIDI Out
In this setup, XL-7 is controlling another MIDI sound module using its
‘“B” MIDI Port. MIDI data from the keyboard can be merged with XL-7‘s
MIDI data and then be retransmitted out port B. See page 146.
Audio Outputs
The Sub 1 and Sub 2 output jacks are stereo jacks. The tip of each jack
(accessed when a standard phone plug is inserted) connects to the left or
right output of that group. The S/PDIF output is a digital copy of the stereo
signal on the main outputs.
If you insert a stereo plug into one of the Sub Outputs, the ring of the plug
serves as a signal Return which sums into the Main outputs.
18 E-MU Systems
Setup
Power Down Sequence
Therefore, the Sub 1 and Sub 2 jacks can serve as effect sends and
returns in order to further process selected instruments and then
return them to the main mix.
You can use the Sub 1 and Sub 2 jacks as send/returns in order to further
process selected XL-7 presets without using the effects bus on the mixing
board. In a pinch, the effect returns can be used to sum additional instruments into the main outputs. It’s like having an extra line mixer when you
need more inputs!
Output Section
Effects
Processors
L Bus
R Bus
Tip
Tip
Tip
Tip
Ring
Ring
Ring
Ring
R
L
R
L
SUB 2
R
SUB 1
L
MAINS
You can use the Sub 1 and Sub 2 jacks as effect returns to the Main Outputs.
Note that the Effects Processors are only routed to the Main Outputs.
Power Down
Sequence
To avoid accidentally turning off the power while playing XL-7, the front
panel power switch incorporates a five second “fail-safe” feature when
powering down. Once the power down sequence has begun, you have five
seconds to press the power switch again and stop XL-7 from turning off.
POWERING DOWN : 4
Press On / Off to Abort . . .
****
Rack Mounting XL-7
XL-7 can be rack mounted if you so desire. You’ll need (6) rack spaces to fit
XL-7 into your rack. The black end caps remove easily with three screws to
reduce the width to 19 inches. Rack mounting ears are available from your
E-MU dealer (Model 7770).
XL-7 Operation Manual 19
Setup
Rack Mounting XL-7
20 E-MU Systems
Instant Gratification
This section presents step-by-step instructions for the most fundamental
operations to get you up and running as quickly as possible.
Playing Patterns &
Songs
When you turn XL-7 on, it comes up in Pattern mode. XL-7 comes with
over a hundred factory patterns. The Pattern screen is shown below.
T 01
STOP Ln:08
0000 Ambideep
1.
2.
Bar:01 .1
To Play Patterns
Select a pattern using the data entry control.
Press the Play button, located near the center of the unit. The pattern
begins playing and the lower line of the display changes.
T 01
STOP Ln:08 Bar:01 .1
CurPat: 0020 NextPat: 0020
3.
While the pattern is playing, select another pattern using the data
entry control. The name of the pattern to be played next is now shown.
Notice that the Home/Enter LED is now flashing.
T 01
STOP Ln:08
0150 Club Luv
4.
Bar:01 .1
Press the Home/Enter button to select the new pattern. The lower line
of the display now shows the numbers of the Current and Next
XL-7 Operation Manual 21
Instant Gratification
Playing Patterns & Songs
patterns. The new pattern will begin playing when the current pattern
has finished.
T
01 STOP Ln:08 Bar:01 .1
CurPat: 0020 NextPat: 0220
5.
O
Select a new pattern, press Stop, then press Play to change patterns
without waiting for the current pattern to end.
Track Muting
6. Press the Track Enable/Mute buttons to bring tracks in and out. Every
factory pattern has from eight to sixteen tracks. The LED in each button
illuminates when a track is enabled (unmuted). The diagram below
shows the default factory track assignments.
XL-7’s buttons have
been designed so that you can
slide your fingers across them to
quickly mute and unmute
tracks.
Kick 1
Snare 1
Hi-Hat 1
Perc 1
or Fill 1
Kick 2
Snare 2
Hi-Hat 2
Perc 2
or Fill 2
Instr or
Perc 1
Instr or
Perc 2
Instr or
Perc 3
Instr or
Perc 4
Instr or
Perc 5
Instr or
Perc 6
Instr or
Perc 7
Instr or
Perc 8
Main
Bass
Main
Lead
Main
Comp
Track Mixing
7. Press the Mix button (located beneath the LCD) while a pattern is
playing. The Channel Volume display screen appears, showing the
volumes of all 32 channels.
CH VOLS
01A:125
8.
9.
22 E-MU Systems
Now press the Controller Function Select button (located above the
controller knobs) twice so that Volume is selected.
The sixteen controller knobs now function as volume controls for MIDI
channels 01A-16A.
Instant Gratification
Playing Songs
• While we’re on the subject of Tracks and Channels, it might be a good
time to mention that in all the factory patterns, a given track will control
the MIDI channel of the same number. That means Track 1 will play the
preset on channel 01A, track 2 will play channel 02A and so on up to 16.
Feel free to turn the knobs and remix the pattern. The LEDs next to the
knobs flash to indicate activity on that channel/track.
O
If you move the cursor
underneath the Preset Name
before changing the preset,
another bass preset will be
selected.
Change the Sound
10. Adjust your remix so that track 9 (the bass) is the most prominent
instrument in the mix.
11. Press the Preset View button and select Track 9 using the Track/
Channel buttons to the left of the LCD.
12. Now repeatedly press the Controller Function Select button until
“Quick Edit” is selected.
13. Now the knobs control the bass sound. You know what to do.
14. Turn the data entry control to completely change the preset.
15. Use the Track/Channel select buttons to change any of the presets. In
XL-7’s default mode, the rubber keypads are active on whichever preset
is showing in the preset view screen. They can be set to always play a
specific channel in the Controllers menu (page 120).
• Nothing is made permanent until you save the pattern or preset, so play
around as much as you like.
Jump Back
16. You can jump between Volume mode, Quick Edit mode or Pattern
mode at any time without missing a beat. Select a new pattern, tweak
parameters, change the mix, enable or mute tracks.
Playing Songs
O
Press the Pattern Mode
button while a Song is playing
to loop on the current pattern.
Pressing Song Mode continues
playing the song.
Now that you’ve explored Pattern mode a little, check out Song mode. In its
most basic form, a song is just a sequence of patterns chained together one
after another.
1.
2.
3.
To Play a Song
Select Song mode by pressing the Song button located underneath the
LCD. (Stop the sequencer first.)
Select one of the factory programmed songs using the data entry
control.
Press Play. The song begins playing.
XL-7 Operation Manual 23
Instant Gratification
Playing Demo Sequences
Playing Demo
Sequences
XL-7 has several factory demonstration sequences that let you hear what
this incredible machine can do. The actual number of demo sequences
depends on which ROM sounds sets are installed. You can play these demo
sequences by accessing the Demo Sequence page.
DEMO SEQUENCES
Arctic Drift
1.
2.
3.
XL-7
To Play a Demo Sequence
Press and hold the Song and Pattern buttons at the same time to enter
the Demo Sequence page. The screen shown above appears.
Select a sequence using the data entry control. The Enter LED will be
flashing.
Press the Enter button to begin playing the selected sequence. The
following screen appears.
PLAYING: Arctic Drift
Press ENTER to stop
4.
5.
6.
Auditioning Presets
O
To audition presets with
their programmed effects, switch
to Omni or Poly mode (located
in the MIDI menu). Remember
to switch back to Multi mode
before playing sequences again.
24 E-MU Systems
Press the Enter button again to stop playing the sequence.
When a demo sequence plays to the end, the next demo will automatically begin playing. The screen will display the new demo name.
With the sequence stopped, press any other button to Exit demo
sequence mode.
The front panel audition button allows you to hear any preset in XL-7
without even playing a note! When the Audition button is pressed, the
button’s LED will illuminate and a short “Riff” (programmed as part of the
preset) will play. The Riff is latched on and plays continuously until the
button is pressed again. Presets can be changed while Audition is latched.
The top line of the Preset View display changes to show the MIDI Bank
Select controller values needed to select the preset being auditioned. This is
an extremely handy feature when sequencing.
Instant Gratification
Selecting and Quick Editing Presets
Bank
1252
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Selecting and Quick
Editing Presets
MSB:007 LSB:1
XL-7
key: SynhissOrgan
To Audition a Preset
Select Preset View mode by pressing the preset button in the Mode/
View section immediately below the LCD.
Select a preset by turning the data entry control while the cursor is
anywhere on the lower line. The preset number field (shown above) is
the normal position of the cursor and pressing the Enter button will
return the cursor to this position.
Press the Audition button on the front panel. The Audition LED will
illuminate and a short riff will play the selected preset.
Continue to select and audition presets.
Press the Audition button again to turn Audition mode off. The LED
will extinguish.
Play the rubber keypads.
Be sure to check out the Transposition buttons and Touchstrip.
The first thing you’ll do with the XL-7 is select and play the factory
provided presets. XL-7 comes standard with 8 banks containing 128 presets
each. See “Preset Screen” on page 44.
Channel
Number
C01A
1252
Initial
Volume
Setting
Initial
Pan
Setting
Arpeggiator
Setting
Preset
Location
V127 P01R A:off
key: SynhissOrgan
Blinking
Preset
Cursor Number
Bank
Number
Preset
Category
User
Preset
Name
The first four banks are USER locations that can be overwritten and used to
store your own presets. The presets that come stored in the USER presets are
duplicated in banks 0-3 of the “XL-7” ROM bank, so feel free to overwrite
them with your own presets. You won’t be losing anything.
XL-7 Operation Manual 25
Instant Gratification
Selecting and Quick Editing Presets
The ROM Card identifier is shown in the top right of the display. The preset
is identified in the bottom line of the main screen (the screen that appears
when you press the Mode/View Preset button).
Each bank of 128 presets is identified by a superscripted Bank Number to the
right of the preset number. The bank numbers reset to 0 at the start of each
ROM card you have installed. So with the XL-7 ROM installed, the USER
banks will go from 0-3, then start over from 0-3 for the XL-7 ROM banks.
Bank Organization
}
USER
USER
USER
USER
Bank 0
Bank 1
Bank 2
Bank 3
128 Presets
128 Presets
128 Presets
128 Presets
XL-7
XL-7
XL-7
XL-7
Bank 0
Bank 1
Bank 2
Bank 3
128 Presets
128 Presets
128 Presets
128 Presets
The User Banks
are duplicated
in the XL-7
ROM bank.
The four User Banks can hold 512 custom presets. Feel free to overwrite these since the
factory user presets are duplicated in nonvolatile ROM.
To the right of the preset number and bank is the preset Category name
followed by the Preset Name.
1.
2.
O
You can select presets
from the Preset Number, Bank
Number, Preset Category or
Preset Name fields.
3.
4.

Notice that an asterisk
appears in the display when you
change the knobs. This indicates
that you have edited the preset.
26 E-MU Systems
5.
To Change the Preset
Press the Preset button in the Mode/View box directly below the liquid
crystal display. The main Preset selection screen appears.
The cursor will be located under the first character in the Preset Number
field. This is the “Home” position which is selected instantly when you
press the Home/Enter button. Pressing either of the two cursor buttons
repeatedly also gets you there.
Turn the data entry control knob on the front panel to select a new
preset number. If you turn the knob slowly, the presets advance one
number for each “click” of the knob. If you spin the knob quickly, the
numbers advance much faster (more than one number per click).
Play the keyboard (or press the Audition button) and listen to the
sounds made by your XL-7!
TRY OUT ANY OF THE 16 KNOBS on the front panel (in Quick Edit
mode) and note how they change the sound of each preset! Don’t worry
about ruining the sound, the values are automatically reset as soon as
you select a new preset.
Instant Gratification
Exploring the Master Arpeggiator
Exploring the Master
Arpeggiator
XL-7’s multi-channel Pattern Generator/Arpeggiator is one of the greatest
features ever put in a synth. Let’s explore the Master Arpeggiator.
1.
2.
To Arpeggiate a Single Preset:
Select a preset. Note that the factory presets all have prefixes which
describe the type of sound. For this investigation it might be best to
choose a preset with the prefix “arp,” for arpeggiator. These presets are
optimized for use with the arpeggiator.
Set the Arp parameter in the main preset selection screen to “M” for
Master Arpeggiator.
C01
1233
3.
V127 P01R
A:M
arp: OrbisTabula1
Press the Arp button in the Edit section of the front panel to access the
master Arpeggiator menu, then use the data entry control to scroll to
the screen shown below.
MASTER ARPEGGIATOR
Status
4.
O
Try using control knobs
15 & 16 to change the
arpeggiator parameters.
5.
6.
XL-7
on
Make sure the arpeggiator Status is “on.” Play the keyboard to start
arpeggiating.
Press either cursor key repeatedly to move the cursor below the Status
field.
Turn the data entry control clockwise one click. The Mode screen
appears.
MASTER ARPEGGIATOR
Mode
up
7.
8.
Use the cursor keys to move the cursor to the Mode field (up, down, up/
down, forw asgn, backw asgn, forw/backw, random, pattern). Try out
the different modes as you play the keyboard.
Move the cursor back to the lower left position and explore the other
parameters. The Note Value parameter changes the rate of the arpeggios.
By the way, note value is a divisor based on the Master Tempo. Try
changing the tempo, but come right back.
XL-7 Operation Manual 27
Instant Gratification
Multi-Channel Arpeggiator
9.
10.
Let’s check out the pattern generator. Go back to the Mode screen and
set the mode to “Pattern”.
Now advance to the Pattern screen (shown below) and move the cursor
to the Pattern Number field (the second field from the left).
MASTER ARPEGGIATOR
Pattern 380 Inversions
O
Try the various patterns. There are 200 permanent factory patterns and
100 user locations to store the patterns you create. Each pattern can
have up to 32 notes.
See the Arpeggiator
Chapter for detailed information
on creating Patterns.
11.
Multi-Channel
Arpeggiator
XL-7 is totally unique in its ability to run up to 32 arpeggiators at once!
Even two or three patterns at once can create very complex sequences and
dynamic landscapes of sound.
Here’s one way to access this ultra-powerful feature. There is one arpeggiator for each MIDI channel. First you’ll assign three of the Trigger Keys to
MIDI channels 01A-03A. Next, you’ll assign arpeggiator presets to these
channels. Then you’ll become addicted to this new way of making music.
Program the Trigger Keys
1. Press the Controllers button, then turn the data entry control until the
screen shown below appears.
T1 TRIGGERS Latch: off
Key:C3 Ch: Basic Vel: 064
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
28 E-MU Systems
Move the cursor until it is underneath the Latch field and turn Latch
mode On.
Move the cursor until it is underneath the Channel field (Ch) and set
the channel to 01A.
Move the cursor until it is underneath the Trigger field (T1) and
change the Trigger to T2 (trigger button 2).
Turn Latch On for trigger button 2 and set the channel to 02A.
Change the Trigger to T3 (trigger button 3).
Turn Latch On for trigger button 3 and set the channel to 03A.
Instant Gratification
Multi-Channel Arpeggiator
Set up the Presets
8. Press the Preset View button (located beneath the LCD). The preset
select screen appears.
9.
Move the cursor underneath the Category field (as shown above) and
C01A
0263
10.
11.
12.
13.
V127 P00
A:P
arp:Hollographik
XL-7
select the “arp” category.
Move the cursor underneath the preset name and select any “arp”
preset for channel 1A.
Press the “+” Track/Channel select button (located to the left of the
LCD), so that C02A is displayed.
Select any other “arp” preset for channel 2A.
Select channel 03A and choose another arp preset.
Select Trigger Mode
14. Press the Selector Button in the upper left corner of the Command
Functions section. Pressing this button will switch between Track
Enable/Mute and Triggers mode. Select Triggers mode.
O
Sometimes a simple
volume change will bring out
hidden voices and patterns.
Play it!
15. Now press Trigger Buttons 1, 2 and 3. You should be hearing three
arpeggiators playing at once.
16. Change the arp preset on the current MIDI channel. Since the cursor is
located on the preset name, all your selections will be in the arp
category.
17. Press the Track/Channel button and change the arp presets for
channels 1A, 2A & 3A. Since each factory preset has differently
programmed arpeggiator settings, changing the preset not only changes
the sound, but the arpeggiator as well.
18. You can also play the keypads. You’ll be playing the preset currently
showing in the display.
19. Press the Control Select button above the knobs so that “Quick Edit” is
selected. Adjusting the front panel control knobs now modifies the
preset showing on the LCD.
20. Press the Control Select button above the knobs again so that
“Volume” is selected. The first three knobs now control the volume of
each arpeggiator preset.
There’s lots more to the arpeggiators. To find out more, refer to the
arpeggiator chapter beginning on page 227.
XL-7 Operation Manual 29
Instant Gratification
Multi-Channel Arpeggiator
Time to Save?

Multisetups save your
entire XL-7 setup. Find out more
on page 130.
If you want to SAVE everything exactly as it is, continue on.
1.
2.
Press the Save/Copy button.
Rotate the data entry control until you get to the menu shown below.
MULTISETUP NAME
User Setup
3.
4.
5.
Press the right cursor button to move to the lower line.
Name your Multisetup so you can find it later, then press Enter.
Scroll to the next screen using the data entry control.
SAVE SETUP TO
002 User Setup
6.
30 E-MU Systems
Move the cursor to the lower line, select a location and press Enter.
Basic Operations
Basic Operations
The XL-7 front panel contains an LCD screen, 13 velocity & pressure
sensitive performance pads, a bi-directional touchstrip, 49 buttons, and 16
real-time controller knobs. Functions are grouped logically and the controls
are arranged for ease of use.
Power Switch
The front panel On/Off switch is a “Soft” power switch that can be used to
turn power on and off when the XL-7 is rack mounted. Use the AC power
switch on the rear panel if you wish to completely disconnect XL-7 from
the AC mains.
The power switch incorporates a “fail-safe” feature when powering down.
Once the power down sequence has begun, you have five seconds to press
the power switch again and stop XL-7 from turning off.
Volume Control
This control is the master volume control for all audio outputs. The Volume
Control does not affect any editing or user interface operations. The front
panel volume control is a digital attenuator. For maximum dynamic range,
turn this knob all the way up and control the volume from your mixer or
amplifier.
12VDC Lamp
The BNC connector in the upper left corner of the XL-7 panel supplies 12
volts DC at 250 mA to power a standard mixing desk lamp. (Order E-MU
Model Number 7773 - Locking Lamp from your E-MU dealer.)
XL-7 Operation Manual 31
Basic Operations
Mode/View Buttons
Mode/View
Buttons
The Song and Pattern buttons change both the mode and current display
view. Pressing Song or Pattern places the XL-7 in the selected mode.
Since Song and pattern are Mode buttons, the LEDs stay on when they have
been selected, even if Preset or Mix view buttons are activated.

An asterisk (*) appears in
the Pattern, Song or Preset
display to indicate that the item
needs to be saved.
Song Mode
Display
:100 M:04/4
Bar:001.1
000 256 bar blank
Pattern Mode
Display
T 01
STOP Ln:01 Bar: 01.1
009 1 Smooth 6
The Preset button brings up the Preset/MIDI Channel selection screen
shown below. This important screen allows you to change the Preset,
Volume and Pan position for all 32 MIDI channels. The Preset button does
not change the Song or Pattern mode status and this screen can be edited
while a Pattern or Song is playing back.
Preset Select
Screen
C01
079 3
V127
P01 R
A:off
USER
bts: Logic
The Mix button brings up a graphic display of the volume settings for all 32
MIDI channels. This is the same volume setting as in the Preset Select
screen except that all 32 MIDI channels can be simultaneously viewed and
edited. The Mix button does not change the Song or Pattern mode status
and this screen can be edited while a Pattern or Song is playing back.
Mix Screen
1.
32 E-MU Systems
CH VOLS
01A:125
To View the Pan Settings for all 32 Channels
Press the Home/Enter key (to move the cursor to “Home” position) and
turn the data entry control clockwise from the Mix screen.
Basic Operations
LED View Select Section
Track/Channel +/Buttons
These very handy buttons, located to the left of the LCD, serve as a shortcut
to increment or decrement the Track (in Pattern mode), the MIDI Channel
(in Preset mode), Layer (in Preset Edit mode) or Step Numbers (in Arpeggiator Edit mode).
Data Entry Control
The data entry control is a stepped, variable control switch used to change
parameter values. The wheel increments or decrements the current value
one unit with each click. This control incorporates acceleration, which
advances the value faster if the data entry control is turned quickly.
Left/Right Cursor
Buttons
These buttons move the cursor to the next parameter on the display. (The
cursor is a little flashing line underneath one of the parameters in the
display.) Press either cursor button until the cursor is underneath the
desired parameter. The cursor buttons have an auto-repeat feature which
advances the cursor when the button is held continuously.
The cursor can be moved bidirectionally using the data entry control while
either cursor select button is held down (for example, press and hold the
right cursor button and turn the data entry control).
LED View
Select Section
O
Selecting patterns using
this method allows you to see
the current and next pattern
numbers.
The numeric LED display in the center of the XL-7 can display: Tempo,
Pattern Number, the current Bar/Beat, or the MIDI Channel. Repeatedly
pressing the Select button cycles through the four modes.
Pressing the Edit button lights its associated LED and allows you to edit the
displayed value using the data entry control. Pressing Edit again deactivates
this mode. To select a new pattern, you must exit Edit mode for the new
pattern to be selected.
By pressing and holding the Edit button, and then turning the data entry
control, the displayed parameter can be quickly edited without latching the
Edit mode on.
XL-7 Operation Manual 33
Basic Operations
Sequencer Controls
Sequencer
Controls
Stop Button
These buttons control the sequencer transport functions.
Pressing the Stop button immediately stops any currently playing Pattern
Sequence or Song Sequence. The sequence remains at its current location.
Press the Play button to resume from the current location.
Press the Stop button when the sequence is stopped to return to the
beginning of the sequence (RTZ). Pressing the Stop button a third time
reloads the initial setup information for the Pattern or Song.
Play Button
The Play button engages the transport, regardless of sequencer mode
(except in step edit). The LED in the button will be illuminated when the
sequence is running.
Pressing Play while in Record mode puts the sequencer into Pause mode.
The sequencer stops and the Play LED flashes. Pressing Play again resumes
Record mode.
Record Button
The Record button selects one of the three Pattern record modes or two
Song record modes.
Song Record modes (from Song mode)
• One press .............. Realtime record mode
• Two presses ........... Step record mode
Pattern Record modes (from Pattern mode)
• One press .............. Realtime record mode
• Two presses ........... Grid record mode
• Three presses ........ Step record mode
O
While a pattern is
playing, press and hold the Play
button and press Record to
jump into Grid Edit mode.
Tap Tempo
34 E-MU Systems
The LEDs to the right of the button indicate the record mode. After
selecting a record mode, the Play button LED will be flashing. Press Play to
begin recording.
You can press Record at any time during recording or playback to go in and
out of Realtime Record mode (i.e. Punch In & Out)
The Tap Tempo button allows you to change the tempo at any time by
tapping the button at the desired tempo. Three taps are initially required to
change the tempo and then the tempo follows with each subsequent tap.
Basic Operations
Edit Section
Edit Section
Song Edit Button
The Song Edit menu allows you to name and edit songs. An illuminated
LED in the button indicates that you are in Song Edit mode. For more information about Songs and Song mode, see page 94. When pressed in combination with the Pattern Edit button, Song Edit puts the XL-7 in Demo
mode.
Pattern Edit Button
The Pattern Edit menu allows you to name and edit patterns. An illuminated LED in the button indicates that you are in Pattern Edit mode. For
more information about Patterns and Pattern Editing, see page 54. When
pressed in combination with the Song Edit button, this button puts XL-7 in
Demo mode.
Preset Edit Button
The Preset Edit menu allows you to create and edit presets. An illuminated
LED in the button indicates that you are in Preset Edit mode. For more
information about the Preset Edit menu, see page 183.
Global Button
The Global menu contains parameters that affect the entire machine. An
illuminated LED in the button indicates that you are in the Global menu.
For more information about the Global menu, see page 129
Controllers Button
The Controllers menu contains parameters that are related to the front
panel controller knob and button triggers. An illuminated LED in the
button indicates that you are in the Controllers menu. For more information about the Controllers menu, see page 119.
XL-7 Operation Manual 35
Basic Operations
Edit Section
Arpeggiator Button
The Arpeggiator menu contains parameters that are related to the Master
Arpeggiator such as creating and editing arpeggiator patterns. An illuminated LED in the button indicates that you are in the Arpeggiator menu.
For more information about the Arpeggiator menu, see page 227
MIDI Button
The MIDI menu contains parameters that are MIDI related. An illuminated
LED in the button indicates that you are in the MIDI menu. For more information about the MIDI menu, see page 143.
MIDI Panic Button
Pressing the MIDI and Home/Enter buttons simultaneously sends a MIDI
“All Notes Off” and “All Sound Off” for all 32 MIDI channels.
Home/Enter Button
The Home/Enter button is dual purpose. In general, this button acts as the
“Home” button. For example, when in an Edit menu, this button snaps the
cursor to the page name field of the current screen. When viewing the
Preset Select screen, this button snaps the cursor to the preset number field.
The flashing green LED of the Home/Enter button indicates that pressing
the button will initiate a particular operation.
Save/Copy Button
The Save/Copy button is used to save changes to a pattern, song, preset,
copy data between presets, randomize presets and to move other types of
data. Selected groups of parameters, such as PatchCord settings, can be
copied between Presets and/or between Layers using this menu. The menu
is context-sensitive and will start at the appropriate save screen. See Save/
Copy on page 269 for more information.
The LED in the button illuminates to indicate that you are in the Save/
Copy menu. The LED also illuminates when any preset parameter has been
changed in the Edit menu (or if the front panel knobs have been moved
with Quick-Edit mode enabled).
Compare Button
The Compare button allows you to toggle between an edited version of a
preset and the original, unedited version. When a preset has been edited,
an asterisk appears in the preset name field and the Save/Copy LED flashes.
Press the Compare button, lighting it’s LED, to hear the unedited preset.
Press the Compare button again to hear the edited preset. If edits are made
to the preset while listening to the compared original version, compare
mode is aborted and the compare LED goes off.
Audition Button
When the Audition button is pressed, the LED next to the button will
illuminate and a short “Riff” (programmed as part of the preset) will play.
The Riff is latched on and plays continuously until the button is pressed
again. Presets can be changed while Audition is latched on. See “Bank Select
Commands” on page 180 for more information on selecting banks via MIDI.
36 E-MU Systems
Basic Operations
Real-time Controller Knobs
The top line of the Preset display changes to show the MIDI Bank Select
controller values needed to select the preset being auditioned. This handy
feature lets you know the exact Bank and Preset number.
MSB
Preset #
Real-time
Controller
Knobs
Bank
082 3
LSB
MSB:007 LSB:3
bts: Kraftwork
XL-7
The Real-time Controller Knobs can serve several purposes. The first four
functions are selected using the Controller Function Select button above
the realtime control knobs. Preset Quick Edit can be enabled to use the
knobs for editing in the Preset Edit menu.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Quick Edit - Real-time control of internal synthesizer parameters and
“Quick Editing” the initial settings of the real-time controllers
Programmable Knobs - Real-time control of MIDI continuous
controllers on external synthesizers
Volume - Setting the volume of 16 channels.
Pan - Setting the pan position of 16 channels.
Controller Function Select
XL-7 Operation Manual 37
Basic Operations
Real-time Controller Knobs
Knob Functions
Quick Edit mode
The Real-time controller knobs provide direct control of the XL-7’s synthesizer parameters when the Controller Function Select is set to Quick Edit.
O
Quick Edit knob
movements can be recorded into
the sequencer using realtime
song or pattern record modes.
There is an LED next to each of the control knobs which illuminates to
indicate that the knob setting has been changed from the value
programmed in the preset (“Knobs Preset Quick Edit” mode must be
enabled in the Controllers menu). If the knob position is returned to the
original setting, the LED is extinguished.
Initial controller values can be stored in every preset. When you move a
knob with Quick-Edit enabled, the Initial Controller Value is updated with
the knob’s new value. The knob’s LED lights indicating that the preset value
has been changed. The MIDI A-P values are stored in the corresponding
Initial Controller Amount parameter in the Preset Edit menu (see “Initial
Controller Amount” on page 221). The Save/Copy button LED flashes to
remind you that the preset has been edited. “Quick-Edits” made to a preset
are lost if you select another preset before saving them.
The four rows of knobs always control the preset on the basic MIDI channel
(the channel showing on the preset select screen), when the control switch
is set to Quick Edit.
The labels (Filter Cutoff, Filter Q, Filter Attack, Filter Decay, etc.) printed on
these rows show how the factory ROM presets are programmed to respond.
(The controls may not exactly conform to the front panel labels depending on the
preset.) You can change the way a preset responds to MIDI A-P messages
from the Preset Edit menu (PatchCords). The knobs only generate a
message when you move a knob to a new value. The current value jumps to
the new value.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
38 E-MU Systems
To Quick-Edit a Preset
Select Quick Edit mode using the Controller Function Select button.
Use the Control Knobs to change the sound of the current preset as
desired. An asterisk (*) appears in the preset view display indicating that
the preset has been modified.
Press the Save/Copy button. You may have to turn the data entry
control so that the display reads, “Save PRESET to.”
Press the right cursor button to select the bottom row.
Optional: Select a new preset location if you don’t want to overwrite
the current preset, or if the current preset is a ROM preset.
Press the Enter button to save the preset.
Basic Operations
Real-time Controller Knobs
Programmable Knobs mode
If the “Programmable Knobs” parameter in the Controllers menu is set to
“Ext,” or “Both,” the system sends MIDI controller messages when you turn
the Controller knobs. Each knob can be programmed to send on any MIDI
channel (01A-16B) and on any continuous controller number from 1-95.
The knobs only generate a message when you move a knob to a new value.
The Controller Knob LEDs always remain off in this mode. See “Programmable Knobs” on page 125.
O
Turning a knob while in
this screen automatically selects
that knob for programming!
1.
2.
To Program the Programmable Knobs
Press the Controllers button. Its LED will illuminate.
Turn the data entry control to select the Programmable Knobs screen.
Knob #
K1 PROGRAMMABLE KNOBS
Ctrl: 22
Ch:01A
Ext
CC#
3.
4.
5.
MIDI Chan
Int/Ext/Both/Seq
Use the left/right cursor controls to select the fields.
Select the MIDI Continuous Controller number, the MIDI channel, and
Internal/External or Both for each of the 16 knobs.
Save the Multisetup if you want to save these settings. See page 131.
Multichannel Volume Knobs
In this mode, each of the 16 knobs will control MIDI Channel Volume for
the like-numbered channel. This directly edits the value shown on the
preset select screen and is equivalent to sending MIDI cc#7.
CH VOLS
01A:098
View Mode must be set to “MIX” in order to see the display shown above.
When “Knobs MIDI Out” in the MIDI menu is enabled, any knob change
will send MIDI cc#7 to the MIDI out port as well as controlling the internal
channel volume.
In this mode, the LEDs next to the sixteen knobs blink to indicate MIDI
activity on the same numbered MIDI channel (from the keypads, sequencer
or external MIDI sources).
XL-7 Operation Manual 39
Basic Operations
Real-time Controller Knobs
Multichannel Pan Knobs
In this mode, each of the 16 knobs will control MIDI Channel Pan for the
like-numbered channel.This directly edits the value shown on the preset
select screen and is equivalent to sending MIDI cc#10.
CH PANS
01A:56 R
View Mode must be set to “MIX” in order to see the display shown above.
When “Knobs MIDI Out” in the MIDI menu is enabled, any knob change
will send MIDI cc#10 to the MIDI out port as well as controlling the
internal channel volume.
In this mode, the LEDs next to the sixteen knobs blink to indicate MIDI
activity on the same numbered MIDI channel (from the keypads, sequencer
or external MIDI sources).
40 E-MU Systems
Basic Operations
Trigger Buttons
Trigger
Buttons
The trigger button section serves multiple purposes which are listed below.
•
•
•
•
Assignable & latchable note triggers. See page 124.
Sequencer track select buttons See page 22 and page 54.
Sequencer grid edit entry keys. See page 63.
Preset Edit menu jump keys. See below.
Mode Switch
O
Trigger button
presses can be recorded into
patterns and songs.
The mode switch is normally used to select between Triggers and Track
Select/Mute. In Sequencer Grid Edit, the mode switch is used to select step
resolution.
Trigger Mode
Select Triggers mode by pressing the mode select button so that the
“Triggers” LED is illuminated. Now the 16 buttons work like keyboard
notes. Each of the 16 buttons can be assigned to any MIDI note, on any
MIDI Channel (01A-16B), with any velocity (0-127), and can be set to be
latched or momentarily on. Latched note will hold until the button is
pressed again. Latched notes will be indicated by the LEDs. When Beats
mode is selected, the Trigger Keys are used to enable or mute Beats Parts.
Trigger keys are assigned from the Controllers menu. See page 124 for more
information.
Preset Menu
Jump Keys
Whenever you are in the Preset Edit menu, the sixteen command buttons
function as “jump” buttons to the various screens in the Preset Edit menu.
The jump location is labelled directly below each button.
Pressing a jump button instantly takes you to the first screen in the selected
category. Pressing the button again takes you to the second screen in the
category and so on. Repeated pressing will rotate you back to the first
screen in the category.
XL-7 Operation Manual 41
Basic Operations
Touchstrip, Transpose, Keypads & Glide
Touchstrip,
Transpose,
Keypads &
Glide
The Touchstrip is a bi-directional controller which is normally connected to
control pitch. It can, however, be patched in to any modulation destination
in the Cords section of the Preset Edit menu. The Touchstrip is referred to
and programmed as “Pitch Wheel” in the Cords menu. See page 211.
Simply slide your finger along the touchstrip while playing the keypads to
hear pitch bend. There is a slight “dead band” in the very center of the strip
to facilitate starting on pitch. You can press anywhere along the strip and
the pitch will instantly jump to that setting. When you release your finger,
the pitch will jump back to normal.
Touchstrip Hold
The Touchstrip Hold button holds the pitch at the position last touched so
that it doesn’t jump back to center when released. The LED in the button
illuminates when this function is on.
Transpose Buttons
These buttons transpose the current range of the rubber keyboard up and
down in one octave intervals. The LEDs on either side of the transpose
buttons show the currently selected range. With no LEDs illuminated, the
keyboard is in its normal range, Middle C to High C (60-72). Each LED to
the right of the buttons stands for one octave up. Each LED to the left of
the buttons stands for one octave down.
Rubber Keypads
The velocity and pressure-sensitive keypads can play on any MIDI channel
as programmed in the Controllers menu. They are normally set to play on
the “Basic” channel, which means that they play the preset currently
showing in the preset view screen. The keypads output channel (mono)
pressure internally (routed in the PatchCords) and both channel and
polyphonic pressure over MIDI.
Glide Button
This button turns Glide (portamento) on or off for the current preset. The
LED in the button illuminates when Glide is on. See Glide on page 201.
42 E-MU Systems
Basic Operations
Touchstrip, Transpose, Keypads & Glide
Erase Button
When this button is latched on (LED illuminated) while recording a
pattern, any note played on the keyboard will remove that note from the
pattern as long as the keyboard key is held down. This allows you to
quickly removed any “flubbed” notes without having to enter Pattern Edit
mode.
In Grid record mode, pressing the Erase button while the cursor is on one of
the grid locations, removes the note from that location.
In Song step record mode, pressing the Erase button erases the currently
selected step from the song.
Repeat Button
When this button is latched on (LED illuminated) while recording a
pattern, played notes will repeat at the current pattern quantize setting
(page 55). You can get some great effects with this feature by simultaneously changing the volume or pitch as the sound repeats.
In Song step edit mode, the Repeat button functions as a “Pattern Insert”
button. See page 95 for more information.
XL-7 Operation Manual 43
Basic Operations
Preset Screen
Preset Screen
The Preset Select screen is accessed by pressing the Preset View button
located directly under the LCD. From this screen you can examine or
change the Preset, Volume, Pan Position and Preset Location for each of the
32 MIDI channels.
C01A
079 3
MIDI Channel
Selection
1.
2.
V127
P01 R
A:off
User
kit: Hide & Seek
To Change the MIDI Channel
Press the Preset View button to display the Preset Select screen.
Press the Track/Channel inc/dec buttons located to the left of the liquid
crystal display to select channels 01A through 16B. The preset, volume
and pan settings for each channel will be displayed as you scroll
through the channels.
The channel number shown in the main screen is the “basic MIDI channel”
when in Omni or Poly modes.
Preset Selection
1.
2.
Contents
128 RAM Presets
128 RAM Presets
128 RAM Presets
128 RAM Presets
128 ROM Presets
128 ROM Presets
128 ROM Presets
??
Depending on
ROM sets installed
ROM 1
USER
Bank
0
1
2
3
0
1
2

*
An asterisk in the
preset view screen indicates
that the preset has been
modified.
(Change the preset without
saving to remove the
asterisk.)
44 E-MU Systems
3.
To Change the Preset
Press the Preset View button to display the Preset Select screen.
Press either cursor key until the cursor is underneath the preset
number. (The cursor is a little flashing line underneath one of the
parameters in the display.) As you rotate the data entry control, the
preset number and name changes.
The displayed preset is assigned to the displayed MIDI channel. Presets
are arranged into banks of 128, as shown in the diagram at left.
Bank Number
Preset
Number
C01A
V127
P01 R
079 3
bts: Logic
A:off
User
*
Indicates that the
preset was modified
Using the screen above as an example, the superscripted number 2 in the
second line of the display identifies the current bank number.
• Select banks independently of the of the preset number by locating the
cursor on the Bank field and turning the data entry control.
Basic Operations
Preset Screen
MIDI BANK SELECT
MSB LSB
cc00 cc32
USER
USER
USER
USER
00
00
00
00
00
01
02
03
Bank 0
Bank 1
Bank 2
Bank 3
XL-7
XL-7
XL-7
XL-7
14
14
14
14
00
01
02
03
Bank 0
Bank 1
Bank 2
Bank 3
This chart shows the MSB and LSB numbers needed to select preset banks over MIDI.
Select a bank, then send the program change number. Without a bank select command,
presets are selected from within the current bank.
Channel Volume
Channel Volume sets the volume of the selected MIDI channel in relation
to the other channels. This is the same parameter as MIDI volume control
#7, and changes made over MIDI are shown in the display.
Volume
1.
2.
3.
C01
V127
P01 R
079 3
bts: Logic
A:off
User
To Change the Channel Volume
Press the Preset View button to display the Preset Select screen.
Press either cursor key until the cursor is underneath the volume value.
Rotate the data entry control to select a volume level. The Channel
Volume range is 000-127.
XL-7 Operation Manual 45
Basic Operations
Preset Screen
Channel Pan
Channel Pan sets the stereo position of the selected MIDI channel. This
control operates like the balance control on your home stereo system.
Channel Pan is the same parameter as MIDI pan controller #10, and
changes made over MIDI are shown in the display.
Pan Position
C01
079 3
V127
P01 R
A:off
User
bts: Logic
Note: Pan settings in the preset ADD algebraically with the Channel Pan
setting. Therefore, if the pan setting in the preset were set to “63R,” moving
the Channel Pan setting full left would return the sound to the center
position.
1.
2.
3.
Channel Arpeggiator
To Change the Channel Pan
Press the Preset View button to display the Preset Select screen.
Press either cursor key until the cursor is underneath the pan field.
Rotate the data entry control to select a pan value. 64L indicates a hard
left pan, 63R indicates a hard right pan. With a setting of “00,” the
sound is centered in the stereo field.
This function controls the arpeggiator for each MIDI channel. When the
channel arpeggiator mode is set to Off, then there is no arpeggiation on
that channel, regardless of what is set up in the Master Arpeggiator or
preset. If the channel arpeggiator is On, the preset’s arpeggiator is used,
regardless of whether or not it is turned on in the Preset Edit menu. This
lets you turn on arpeggiation from the main screen.
If the mode is set to “P” (for preset), the preset’s arpeggiator settings and
on/off status is used. If the mode is set to “M” (for master), the master
arpeggiator settings and on/off status (located in the Arp menu) are used.
See the “Arpeggiator/Beats Menu” on page 227 for more information.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
46 E-MU Systems
To Play the Arpeggiator (Quick Start)
From the Preset View screen, press either cursor key repeatedly until
the cursor is underneath the arpeggiator field (A:).
Rotate the data entry control to select “P” for preset.
Press either cursor key repeatedly until the cursor is underneath the
Preset Category field and select “arp:” using the data entry control.
Press the right cursor button to move it to the Preset Name field.
Play notes or chords on the keyboard. Change presets as desired to
audition the various patterns and presets.
Basic Operations
Sound Navigator
Sound
Navigator
Preset Category
Sound Navigator allows you to search through preset and instrument
categories to find the type of sound you’re looking for. Each preset and
instrument has a name and a three letter preset category. You can create
your own categories in order to group favorite presets. The preset category
is assigned in the Preset Edit menu (Preset Name). Instrument categories are
fixed.
When you want to find presets in a particular category, you simply change
the category field in the Preset View screen, then move the cursor to the
preset name field to scroll through all the presets in the selected category.
When the cursor is on the Preset Category field, turning the data entry
control selects different preset categories. The Name Field will change to
show the first preset in each category.
C01
064
V127
1
P00
1.
2.
1.
2.
Instrument Category
User
w al: Raverotic
Preset Category
A:off
Preset Name
To Change the Preset Category
From the Preset View screen (shown above), press either cursor key
repeatedly until the cursor is underneath the preset category field.
Rotate the data entry control to select one of the preset categories.
Preset Categories are displayed in alphabetical order.
To Select a Preset within a Category
After selecting a category, move the cursor to the Preset Name field.
Rotate the data entry control to scroll through the presets in the
selected category. Note that the preset numbers will no longer change
sequentially.
When the cursor is on the Instrument Category field (Preset Edit menu),
turning the data entry control selects different instrument categories. The
Name Field changes to show the first instrument in each category. Move
the cursor back to the instrument name to choose other instruments in the
selected category.
L1
INSTRUMENT
064 1
ROM:XL-7
wal: Raverotic
XL-7 Operation Manual 47
Basic Operations
Sound Navigator
48 E-MU Systems
Sequencer
The XL-7 Sequencer is an extremely powerful, yet easy to use MIDI
recording device. Several different methods of creating and editing
sequences are provided to suit your personal style of composition.
To Enable the Sequencer
XL-7 always powers up in pattern mode. Pattern mode can be selected from
any other screen by pressing the Pattern mode button below the LCD.
A Pattern can be immediately started by pressing the Play button. Press the
Song mode button to select Song mode.
_
Warning: Sequencer
Patterns and Songs are NOT
saved until you save them in the
Save/Copy menu.
An asterisk (*) appears in the
Pattern or Song display to
indicate that the item needs to
be saved. The Save/Copy button
LED will also be flashing to
remind you.
To Select a Song or Pattern
With the XL-7 in Song mode and the cursor in the Home position, turn the
data entry control to select a new song.
With the XL-7 in Pattern mode and the cursor in the Home position, turn
the data entry control to select a new pattern.
To Edit a Pattern
Select the pattern you wish to edit, then press the Pattern Edit button. Turn
the data entry control to scroll through the Pattern Edit menu items.
See page 70.
To Edit a Song
Select the song you wish to edit, then press the Song Edit button. Turn the
data entry control to scroll through the song edit menus. See page 99.
XL-7 Operation Manual 49
Sequencer
Overview
Overview
Definitions
XL-7’s sequencer is a Song/Pattern based recorder featuring high resolution
recording at 384 ticks per beat. Multiple record modes - Song, Pattern, Grid,
Step & Realtime Record allow you ultimate flexibility in the way you
compose you music. You can add, monitor and modify parts on the fly or
switch recording modes without stopping. The sequencer features 16 tracks,
each of which can record up to 16 channels. Automated mixing and synth
control is a snap. Read on and discover just how easy recording can be.
The various components of XL-7 sequences are described below, starting
from the smallest units “events” and ending with the largest element, a
“song”. Songs can be up to 999 bars in length.
Events
Events are the smallest bits of information that are recorded into a
sequencer. Note-on, note-off, continuous controller messages, MIDI clocks,
and program change commands are all events.
Tracks
Tracks are groups of events that will be assigned to a specific MIDI channel
for playback. A single track can be assigned to one or two MIDI channels
(one normal, one aux). A track can play internally only, externally only,
both internally and externally, or not assigned at all. See page 86.
Tracks may also contain information encoded on multiple MIDI channels.
XL-7 can assign these multichannel events to play on their assigned MIDI
channels or it can force them all to a new assigned channel. See page 86.
Individual tracks can be muted on playback. The sequencer supports 16
tracks (T1 - T16).
Patterns
Patterns are collections of tracks and are the basic unit of storage for
sequences. You cannot save a track unless it is part of a pattern.
Patterns can be up to 32 bars in length. After playing to the end of its
specified length, a pattern will loop back to the start. Looping repeats
indefinitely as long as the sequencer is running.
_
Important: Pattern
Setup information is saved as it
was set at the moment you
saved the pattern.
50 E-MU Systems
Patterns store the following information in non-volatile Flash memory
which is recalled just before the pattern is played.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Pattern Name & Number
Track Events
Initial Tempo & Meter
Master FX setup
Track to MIDI Channel mapping....
Track Mutes .....................................
Bank/Program changes....................
Volume & Pan settings ....................
Mix Output setup ............................
Arp Status (off, on, preset, master)..
These parameters are
stored for each track
used in the pattern.
Sequencer
Definitions
Pattern Recording & Editing
Patterns can be edited in three ways:
• Realtime Record - Events are stored in the designated track as they are
played on the keypad or from the MIDI input port. Events are overdubbed into the track as the track plays and loops. The original channel
of each event is maintained when recorded.
Individual events can be erased by pressing the realtime erase button
and re-playing the event during the time that the event occurs in the
pattern.
Press Once
Press Twice
• Grid Editing - In this mode, the sixteen trigger buttons become a time
grid. A note event is first selected and is then placed at any time location
by pressing the appropriate grid button.
The grid resolution can be changed to allow a whole measure or a fraction of a measure to be displayed on the button grid.
Press 3 Times
• Step Edit - In this mode, you can single-step through the time locations
(bars, beats, & ticks) and place events anywhere you want.
The play button jumps from the current location to the next note value
as determined by the resolution setting.
Asterisk
Appears
No
Asterisk
Pressing Rec
Changing:
tempo,
meter,
length,
name, chan.
asssign, etc.
List Edit
(press enter)
Executing
an Edit
function
The Asterisk
When a pattern (or song) has been edited and needs to be saved an asterisk
(*) appears in the display. The Save/Copy LED will also be flashing as a
reminder to save your work. The asterisk and your edits remain in the
single edit buffer even if you change patterns. Edits are only erased by
saving the pattern, editing another pattern, invoking the “Revert To Saved”
feature, or turning the unit off. Saving saves the current pattern and NOT
the edit buffer.
T01
STOP Ln: 08
000 Start of IT
0
O
Use the “Revert to
Saved Pattern” feature to
remove the asterisk and discard
your pattern edits. See page 93
for more information.
Bar: 01 . 1
*
Indicates that the Pattern
needs to be saved.
Standard MIDI Files
Patterns can also be imported from a Standard MIDI File (SMF) dump. SMF
type 0 files are imported with MIDI channels 1-16 going to the same
numbered XL-7 track. SMF type 1 files are imported with tracks 1-16 going
to the same numbered XL-7 track. Tracks 17 and above will not be imported
into XL-7.
XL-7 Operation Manual 51
Sequencer
Definitions
Songs
Songs are recorded on a single track which allows you to record Pattern Play
messages as well as real-time note and controller information. This lets you
link previously recorded patterns together to form more intricate arrangements, then overdub controller information such as volume, pan or other
controller information or additional note information. You can change
pattern length and track mutes in song mode without affecting your stored
patterns.
Song mode is also useful when you wish to record, playback or import a
sequence longer than 32 bars. For example, you could import a long multichannel sequence created on another sequencer as an XL-7 song.
…as set
when the
Song was
saved
tempo
preset
volume
pan
mix
arp
FX
Note
data
The Song Track
Note
data
Controller
data
Note
data
Pattern 032
Pattern 002
Pattern 204
Pattern
play/mutes
Pattern
play/mutes
Pattern
play/mutes
End
The Song Track contains Pattern Play events as well as real-time data (note-on/off,
continuous controllers and other MIDI data).
Press Once
Press Twice
Song Record Modes
• Realtime Record - Events are stored as they are played on the keypad,
controllers or from the MIDI input port as the single realtime track
plays. The original channel of each event is maintained when recorded.
• Step Edit - In this mode, you can single-step through the bar locations
and place Pattern Inserts wherever you want.
Songs store the following information in non-volatile Flash memory:
• Song Name & Number
• Realtime note & controller information
• Track Mutes for each Pattern Play event (these can be different than the
mutes stored in each Pattern.)

The 16 tracks of a song
can be assigned to either the A
or B channels using the “Song
Channel Assign” function on
page 110.
52 E-MU Systems
The following events are also saved as they were set when the Song was
saved. The “Event Source” option in the Song Edit menu (page 99) determines whether song or pattern events will be used in the song.
• Initial Tempo
• Master FX setup
• Event Source
• Volume ...................................................
These parameters are
• Pan..........................................................
stored for each channel
• Mix Output setup ...................................
used in the song.
• Arp channel status (off/on/preset/master)
Sequencer
Event Timing
The following information is intended for advanced users. If you are just
getting started with XL-7 you can skip this section for now.
Songs and patterns both contain pre-sequence setup information that is
loaded just before a song or sequence plays. This pre-sequence information
is not reloaded when a pattern loops. Reloading this setup information
each time a pattern looped would cause data clogging and possible timing
errors in the sequence.
• The first two ticks (0 & 1) are reserved for pre-sequence setup information. Tick 0 is reserved for the internal pre-sequence setup information.
Tick 1 is used to place your own pre-sequence setup information so
that it won’t loop and cause timing errors.
• Events (controller data, program changes, sysex, etc.) are played before
Notes, even if they are located on the same numbered Tick. This is done
so that volume changes and other programming information will be in
place when the notes turn on.
When a track is set to "ext" (external transmit only), you will be allowed
to see the tick 0 spot for EVENTS. This allows you to remove any presequence setup data (which is stored at Tick 0) left over from when the
track may have been internal or both.
Events
tick 0
Notes
Pattern/Song Setup Info Pre-Sequence
Reserved for User Events
tick 1
Setup Info
tick 0
tick 1
Loop
Event Timing
tick 2
tick 2
tick 3
tick 3
This chart shows how notes and other MIDI events are recorded at the beginning of a
pattern or song.
Notes are played after other MIDI events. Ticks 0 and 1 are reserved for pre-sequence
setup information which does not loop. Beginning at tick 2 of the pattern or song,
information is recorded normally (events first, then notes).
Track Priority
The XL-7sequencer handles lower numbered tracks first. Therefore, you
should put your most timing-critical data on low numbered tracks.
Normally this will not be important since the sequencer timing is so good,
but if you create very dense sequences, this information might be useful.
XL-7 Operation Manual 53
Sequencer
Pattern Mode
Pattern Mode
Pattern mode is selected by pressing the Pattern mode button beneath the
liquid crystal display. The screen shown below is displayed in Pattern mode
when the sequencer is stopped.
T01
STOP Ln: 08
0000 Start of IT
Pattern Play
Bar: 01 . 1
Pressing Play in Pattern mode causes the selected pattern to
continuously play and loop. The display changes as shown.
T 01
STOP Ln:08 Bar:01 .1
CurPat: 0020 NextPat: 0020

The Track Mute buttons can be used to select specific tracks for playback.
The track mute settings are saved when the pattern is saved and restored
when the pattern is run.
L.E.D. Beat Markers
• The Tap Tempo LED stays on
slightly longer at each bar.
• The Tap Tempo LED flashes to
mark each quarter note.
Pressing the Stop button stops the pattern immediately. Pressing
Stop again rewinds the pattern to the beginning (RTZ).
Pressing the Stop button a third time reloads the initial setup
information for the Pattern (or Song).
To select another pattern while one is already playing: Turn the data
entry control in Pattern Mode/View. The lower line of the display changes
to show the name and number of the pattern you have selected. The
Home/Enter LED will be flashing.
T 01
STOP Ln:08
0150 Club Luv
54 E-MU Systems
Bar:01 .1
Sequencer
Pattern Mode
Press Enter to jump to the new pattern when the current pattern ends. The
lower line of the display now again shows the current and next pattern
numbers.
T
01 STOP Ln:08 Bar:01 .1
CurPat: 0020 NextPat: 0220
To start a new pattern immediately, press Stop, select the new pattern
and press Play.
or… To select a pattern while playing, press Enter, press Stop, then Play.
Realtime Recording
As described on page 51, there are three ways to record patterns. Realtime
recording is the easiest way to begin recording. Notes and Controller events
are recorded into a pattern. External MIDI data can also be recorded.
Preparing to Record
a Pattern
Before you record a pattern there are a few things you’ll want to set up.
Most of these steps apply to realtime or step recording.
•
•
•
•
•
Erasing the pattern (if necessary).
Program the Metronome (if necessary). Page 72.
Define the pattern’s Time Signature and Pattern Length. Page 58.
Setting the Count-in length (if necessary). Page 57.
Setting Input Quantize (to correct timing errors in Realtime Recording,
to set the step rate in Step Recording, or to set the repeat rate when using
the front panel Repeat button). Page 55.
Select the desired Channel, Track and Preset for recording.
Input Quantize
Input quantize corrects your timing and places notes exactly on the note
value of your choice. You can choose any of the following note values:
quarter notes, quarter note triplets, eighth notes, eighth note triplets,
sixteenth notes, sixteenth note triplets, thirty second notes, or thirty
second note triplets.
The illustration below shows one measure of 4/4 music (there are four
quarter notes, 8 eighth notes, and 16 sixteenth notes in a measure of 4/4).
1
4
1
8
1
16
XL-7 Operation Manual 55
Sequencer
Pattern Mode
Suppose you wanted to record a bass drum beat on every quarter note. The
upper row of dots in the diagram below shows where you might have
played the four drum beats. The lower row of dots shows what happens
when Input Quantize is set to eighth note resolution. Each beat is now
moved to the nearest eighth note.
What you play
Beats fall on
Eighth Note Input Quantize
In the next example we’ll set Input Quantize to sixteenth note resolution.
In this example the beats you played have been assigned to the nearest
sixteenth note, which works on beats 3 & 4, but not on 1 & 2.
What you play
Beats fall on
Sixteenth Note Input Quantize
This brings up an important point.
Use the Lowest Quantization value needed.
If you’re recording a simple snare backbeat, there’s no point in using higher
quantization than eighth notes. To record something more complex, use a
finer resolution such as sixteenth or thirty-second notes.
You can change the Input Quantize setting in Pattern mode whether the
XL-7 is running or stopped, recording or not. You can also use different
resolutions on the same part. Use low resolution to record most of the part,
then switch to a finer resolution to add complexity.
Recording triplets is easy since there are four triplet modes (1/4t, 1/8t, 1/16t
and 1/32t). You can also switch between triplet and non-triplet modes to
record complex polyrhythms.
When Input Quantize is turned Off, you are recording in XL-7’s high
resolution mode in which beats can be placed on any one of 384 ticks per
measure. High resolution recording is great if you’re a good player and want
your performance captured as accurately as possible.
56 E-MU Systems
Sequencer
Pattern Mode
To Set Input Quantize:
Input Quantize only works in Pattern mode.
1.
2.
Choose Pattern mode and select a Pattern.
Go into Record mode by pressing the Record button. The Pattern
Record screen shown below appears.
T01
REC
Quan: 8
Ln: 08 Bar: 01. 1
Met: on
Cnt: 0
Note
Value
3.
4.
Count In
Choose the desired Input Quantize value using the data entry control.
Press Play to begin recording.
The Count-in feature lets you hear the metronome for either one or two
measures before recording begins. This helps you get the feel of the beat
before you actually begin recording.
1.
2.
To set Count-in:
Choose Pattern mode and select a Pattern.
Go into Record mode by pressing the Record button. The Pattern
Record screen shown below appears.
T01
REC
Quan: 8
Ln: 08 Bar: 01. 1
Met: rec
CntIn: 0
Metronome
3.
4.
5.
Count-in
Move the cursor underneath the Count-in (Cnt) field using cursor keys.
Select 0, 1, or 2 bars of count-in using the data entry control.
Press Play to begin recording.
XL-7 Operation Manual 57
Sequencer
Pattern Mode
Pattern Length
You can set the length of a pattern from 1 to 32 bars, either before, after or
even during recording.
1.
2.
To Set the Pattern Length from the Main Pattern Screen:
Select the pattern in Pattern mode.
Move the cursor to the Length (Ln) field using the cursor keys.
T01
STOP Ln: 02
000 Start of IT
Bar: 01 . 1
0
3.
Metronome
The metronome is a timing aid when recording or playing back patterns
which produces an accented click on the first beat of each measure and a
softer click on other beats. This setting is NOT saved with the pattern.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Recording a Pattern
Set the Length of the pattern using the data entry control.
1.
To Set the Metronome:.
Go into Record mode by pressing the Record button.
Scroll to the Metronome screen using the data entry control.
Move the cursor underneath the Metronome field and set it to On, Off
or Rec using the data entry control. Set to On, the metronome plays
during recording and playback. Set to Rec, the metronome only plays
while recording.
The metronome value is set in the Pattern Edit menu. See page 72.
To Record a new Pattern:
Press the Pattern mode button. The screen shown below appears.
T01
STOP Ln: 08
0000 Start of IT

For these instructions,
make sure Keyboard/Knob
Channel in the Controllers menu
is set to “Basic Channel”.
2.
3.
Select a Blank pattern to begin recording using the data entry control.
Press the Record button. The screen shown below appears.
Track Number
T01
REC
Quan: 8
Auto-Correct
58 E-MU Systems
Bar: 01. 1
Pattern Length
Current Position
Ln: 08 Bar: 01. 1
Met: on
Cnt: 0
Metronome on/off
Count-in Bars
Sequencer
Pattern Mode
4.
5.
6.
7.
Set the Pattern Length and Input Quantize value. For more information on Input Quantize see page 55.
Set the number of count-in bars if you wish.
Select a Track number. The default value is Track one. This is fine for
the first track.
Press the Preset View button. The preset screen shown below appears.
C01A V127 P00 A:P
0503 kit:80’s Tones
8.
9.
O
You can go in and out of
Record mode at any time by
pressing the Record button
User
Select a Preset for your first track.
Press the Preset View button again after you’ve selected a preset. The
LED will go out and you’ll be returned to the Pattern screen.
Get ready to record the first track!
10.
11.
Press Play to begin recording. Recording will begin after the count-in
period (if any). The pattern will loop when it reaches the end of its
length.
Press Stop when you’re finished recording.
Are you happy with your performance? If not, you can erase the track and
try again.
O
To Erase an Entire
Pattern: Copy an “Empty
Sequence” over the pattern.
(Save/Copy menu).
To Erase the Track:
12.
13.
14.
15.
Press the Pattern Edit button and turn the data entry control until you
find the “Cut Track to Clipboard” screen.
Move the cursor to the lower line of the display under Track 1.
Press the flashing Enter button to erase the track.
Press the Pattern Edit button again to exit the menu, then go back to
step 10 and re-record the track.
To Erase Specific Notes:
16.
Press the Erase button in Realtime Record mode and hold down the
keyboard note you wish to erase. The note will be erased when it
comes around in the pattern.
To Record another Track:
17.
18.
19.
Press the +Track button located to the left of the LCD. The track
number increments to Track 02.
Press the Preset View button. Notice that the MIDI channel has also
incremented to C02A. Select a preset.
Press the Preset View button again after you’ve selected a preset. You’ll
be returned to the Pattern screen.
XL-7 Operation Manual 59
Sequencer
Pattern Mode
Press the Stop button to return the beginning of the pattern.
Press Record, then Play to begin recording on track 2.
22. After recording track 2, check out the Track Enable buttons to mute
and un-mute the tracks.
23. A pattern must be SAVED or it will be erased when you change the
pattern. See “Save Pattern” on page 269.
You can continue to add up to 16 tracks. If you need more than this,
keep in mind that you can add up to 16 channels of data to each track!
Normally, it’s simpler to use just one channel per track.
• To setup a track for multichannel playback see “Channel Assign” on
page 86.
20.
21.
O
The Event Source
parameter (page 99) controls
how pattern settings are used in
Song mode.
_
Too much controller
information can clog the
sequencer causing sluggish
performance and sloppy timing.
Use the “Thin Events” function
(page 76) to reduce the amount
of controller data in the pattern.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Tempo & Meter
Master FX setup (See page 136)
Track to MIDI Channel mapping (See page 86)
Track Mutes .....................................................
Bank/Program changes....................................
Initial Volume & Pan settings .........................
Mix Output setup (See page 134) .....................
Arp Status (off, on, preset, master).....................
These parameters
are stored for each
track used in the
pattern.
To Record Realtime Controller Data
You can mix and embellish your patterns by recording continuous
controllers along with note data.
1.
Start by recording and saving a pattern.
Recording Quick Edits
The Quick Edit knobs are only active on the Basic Channel (the channel
currently displayed in the Preset View screen).
2.
3.
4.
5.
60 E-MU Systems
Saving Patterns
When you save a pattern (page 269), the following settings are also saved
(as set at the moment you saved). These setting are restored just before
pattern playback.
Select Quick Edit mode by pressing the Controller Function Select
button.
Select the channel with the preset you wish to Quick Edit.
Practice your knob movements before recording by Playing the
pattern and twisting the knobs.
When you’re ready to record, press Record while the sequencer is
playing (to punch-in), then perform the knob movements.
Sequencer
Pattern Mode
Record Multitrack Volume and Pan Information
You can record Volume and Pan information for all 16 channels simultaneously by using Volume Knob mode. You’ll be recording multichannel
volume or pan data onto a track. The default channel assignment will
rechannelize this data to a single channel. You must change this.
6.
7.
8.
9.

Use the “Erase cc#
Events” function (page 77) to
erase controller data from the
pattern.
Select a track for the Realtime Controller data.
Press the Pattern Edit button and scroll to the “Channel Assign” page.
Set the track to MultiA. Now the track will record multichannel data.
Press the Pattern Edit button to exit the menu.
Automating the Volume of each Channel
10. Select Volume knob mode by repeatedly pressing the Controller
Function Select button (page 37).
11. Select Mix View mode if you wish to view the volume settings.
12. Press the Stop button twice to make sure the pattern starts at the
beginning.
13. Press the Record button in Pattern mode to get ready to realtime
record. The Play button LED will be flashing.
14. Press the Play button to begin recording. The controller knobs now
adjust the volumes of all 16 channels.
15. Press Stop when you’re finished recording.
Real-time Panning
16. Select Pan Knob mode by pressing the Controller Function Select
button.
17. Select Mix View mode by pressing the Mix button (if it’s not already
selected).
18. Turn the data entry control clockwise to select Ch Pan view.
19. Press the Stop button twice to make sure the pattern starts at the
beginning.
20. Press the Record button in Pattern mode to get ready to record. The
Play button LED will be flashing.
21. Press the Play button to begin recording. The controller knobs now
adjust the pan positions of all 16 tracks.
22. Press Stop when you’re finished recording.
XL-7 Operation Manual 61
Sequencer
Pattern Mode
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Erasing Controller Data
The Erase Events function (page 77) can be used to erase controller
data from a pattern.
Find the realtime controller number of the knob you wish to erase in
the Controllers menu.
(Volume is always cc#7, and Pan is always cc#10. The numbers of the 16
controller knobs can vary.)
Press the Pattern Edit button.
Scroll to Erase Events and move the cursor to the lower line of the
display.
Select the realtime controller number from step 2.
Press Enter to erase the controller data.
Using Realtime Repeat
When this button is latched on (LED illuminated) while recording a pattern
(or song), played notes will repeat at the current pattern quantize setting
(page 55). You can get some great effects with this feature by simultaneously changing the volume or pitch as the sound repeats.
Press the Record button once to go into Realtime Record mode.
Set the Input Quantize resolution on the LCD to the desired rate.
3. Press the Repeat button illuminating the LED.
4. Press Play to begin recording.
5. Play the Keypads (or keyboard). Notes now repeat according the Input
Quantize setting.
• You can change the Input Quantize setting at any time while recording.
1.
2.
Automatic Channel Assignment
Whenever you change a channel, the sequencer looks for a track that is
assigned to that channel. This feature automatically selects the proper track
in most cases, freeing you from having to think about it.
For your information, the algorithm works as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
If the current track is already assigned to this channel, or if this track is
a “multi” track containing this channel (i.e. MultiA if channel was set
to 07A) it does not change the current track.
If not, it starts at track 1 and looks for a track that is assigned to this
exact channel, and sets it to the first track that is.
If there wasn't one, again it starts at track 1 and looks for a “multi” track
that contains this channel, and sets it to the first track that does.
If none of the above succeed (meaning that this channel is not being
played on any track), it does not change the current track.
Also, changing the track in the list editors or channel assignment screens
sets the current track and vice versa.
62 E-MU Systems
Sequencer
Pattern Mode
Grid Recording
Grid recording allows you to lay out notes along a pre-defined grid. This is a
very visual way to lay down a beat and it makes it easy to experiment, since
you can change everything by just turning buttons on and off. XL-7 brings
a host of new features to the party.
What is Grid Recording?
Grid recording can be visualized as a series of notes placed along a line
where each note can be turned On or Off with a button. In the example
below, you’ll hear sixteen notes to a measure in 4/4 time.
1
16
To program quarter notes, you would turn on one note out of every four as
shown below.
Quarter Notes
Turning on every other button with the 16th note grid selected gives you
Eighth notes.
Eighth Notes
XL-7 Operation Manual 63
Sequencer
Pattern Mode
The grid can be set up for 16th notes, 32nd notes, 8th note triplets or 16th
note triplets.
O
When using 32nd notes or recording patterns longer than one bar, the grid
displays as much of the pattern as it can then switches to the next section.
When playing one bar of 32nd notes, for example, the sixteen grid buttons
and LEDs show the first 16 notes, then switch to the second group of
sixteen notes.
Press and hold Play, then
press Record while a pattern is
playing to jump right into Grid
Record mode.
1
32
1
32
The liquid crystal display shows the status of the16 grid locations.
T01
GRID K: D5
B: 1. 1 03 V: 127
The time signature determines how the grid is laid out. The pattern below is
in 3/4 time and so only12 locations are needed.
T01
GRID K: D5
B: 1. 1 03 V: 127
Grid mode can also be used in conjunction with either of the other record
modes. You can go into grid record mode and edit a pattern you created in
realtime record mode, or you could start with grid recording and record
over it in either realtime or step mode.
To examine a pattern in grid mode, place the cursor under the Key field and
turn the data entry control while the pattern is playing. When you find a
recorded note, you’ll see bars appear and the grid button LEDs will
illuminate.
64 E-MU Systems
Sequencer
Pattern Mode
1.
To Record a Pattern using Grid Recording:
Press the Pattern mode button. The screen shown below appears.
T01
STOP Ln: 08
000 Start of IT
Bar: 01. 1
0
2.
3.
4.
Select an empty sequence to begin recording using the data entry
control.
For now, set the pattern Length to 1 Bar. This will make Grid mode
easier to understand at first.
Press the Record button. The Realtime LED illuminates and the screen
shown below appears.
T01
REC
Quan: 8
5.
Press the Record button again. The Grid LED illuminates and the screen
shown below appears.
Track
Number
T01
GRID
B: 01. 1
Bar:Beat
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Ln: 01 Bar: 01. 1
Met: on
Cnt: 0
Current
Key
K: C1
V:000
Note
Velocity
8 note
positions
________
________
8 note
positions
Press the Preset View button and select a preset to use for track one. A
“prc” or “kit” preset might be a good choice. Press the Preset View
button again after you’ve made your selection to return to the Grid
recording screen.
Select a note using the rubber keypad. Press the transposition buttons
to find other sounds. Note that the Current Key field in the LCD
changes as you play the keypad.
Now turn on a few of the grid buttons. It doesn’t matter which for now.
Press Play. You’ll be hearing some sort of rhythm.
Go ahead and change the grid buttons. Play around until you get
something you like.
XL-7 Operation Manual 65
Sequencer
Pattern Mode
The LCD will now probably look something like the next screen. The
vertical bars correspond to the grid buttons you’ve selected.
T01
GRID
B: 01. 1
O
You could also assign
each new part to another Track
… or not. It’s up to you.
O
If you accidentally press
the Stop button by mistake,
simply press the Record button
twice to return to Grid mode.
Another Rhythm?
11. Without even stopping, play another note. Keep hunting until you find
one you like. The last played key will be the selected sound.
12.
With the new sound selected, turn on some grid buttons. (Note that
they all went off when you changed sounds.)
Change of Velocity
13. To pause the sequencer without exiting Grid mode, press the Play
button. Press the Play button again to continue.
14. Press one of the Grid buttons. The flashing cursor is now positioned
underneath that bar in the display.
T01
GRID
B: 01. 1
15.
16.
17.
O
You can also use the
data entry control to select
notes.
K: D5
V: 127
18.
19.
K: D5
V: 127
Now turn the data entry control. The height of the selected bar
changes, as does the velocity readout. This is one way to change the
velocities of grid notes. (You can also simply play the velocity on the
keypads.)
Turn some of the grid buttons on and off. Note that they now have the
same velocity as the last note you modified. Since velocity is often
coupled to volume in the preset, changing the velocities of note can
have a dramatic effect on the sequence.
Now press the Home/Enter button. The cursor is now underneath the
Key field. pause the sequencer by pressing the Play button.
Re-key the note. If you didn’t hit the right note the bars will disappear.
When you find a recorded note the bars will reappear.
Re-key the note playing hard and soft on the keypads. Note that when
you select grid buttons, the last played velocity is used.
Double Time
20. With the sequencer running, select one of the Grid positions by
pressing its button.
21. Press the Repeat button located below the controller knobs. A number
now appears at the grid location which indicates the number of times
that the grid resolution has been increased for that location. For
example, if the number is 2, the note will play twice in that time slot.
66 E-MU Systems
Sequencer
Pattern Mode
• Pressing the Erase button while the cursor is on one of the grid locations, removes the note from that location.
T01
GRID K: D5
B: 1. 1 01 V: 127
22.
23.
2
Repeatedly pressing the repeat button increments the number. The
display goes up to nine times, but it will go even faster if you keep
pressing the repeat button. Special effects anyone?
The Erase button, located right next to the Repeat button, turns off the
grid locations (as does the grid button itself).
XL-7 Operation Manual 67
Sequencer
Pattern Mode
Step Time Recording
In this mode, you can insert events one at a time and place them exactly
where you want. In Step mode, key events, knobs or external MIDI events
are recorded into the current pattern step. The resolution of the step is
selected and indicated in the “Res” field on the LCD. In Step Record mode,
the Resolution (Res) setting determines the rhythmic value of each step. For
example, with Resolution set to 1/8 notes, you will step through the pattern
an eighth note at a time. Step recording records the actual “played” velocity
of note-on events.
Another cool feature is that each quantized step is from the current time
setting. This allows you to easily create complex offbeats using the quantize
feature.The way it works is simple. If you offset the current time using the
data entry control, the next step will be quantized from that point!
As an example, let’s say you started at Bar:01.01.0000 with Resolution set to
8. The next step would be Bar:01.01.0192, the next at Bar:01.02.0000 and
so on. If the initial time setting was instead, Bar:01.01.0050, the next step
would be, Bar:01.01.0242 (192 + 50).
When Auto mode is enabled (Y), the step is automatically incremented
when a note is entered. The step is not recorded and incremented until the
last “key up” of a chord. This allows you to make changes to the step as
long as one key is still held.
The Gate field allows you to set the note-on duration for note-on events. A
setting of 50% with eighth note resolution would keep the note held for
half that period (or a 16th note). Settings of greater than 100% hold the
note over into the next note.
Note Value/Number of Ticks
Resolution
1.
Ticks
Resolution
Whole notes
1536
Eighth note triplets
128
Half notes
768
Sixteenth notes
96
Quarter notes
384
Sixteenth notes triplets
64
Quarter note triplets
256
32nd note
48
Eighth notes
192
32nd note triplets
32
To Record a new Pattern in Step Time:
Press the Pattern mode button. The screen shown below appears.
T01
STOP Ln: 02
0000 Start of IT
2.
68 E-MU Systems
Ticks
Bar: 01. 1
Select an empty sequence to begin recording using the data entry
control.
Sequencer
Pattern Mode
3.
4.
Set the Pattern Length. Choose a one or two bar length to start.
Press the Record button three times to select Step Record mode. The
screen shown below appears.
Track
Number
Bar
Beat
Tick
T01
STEP Bar: 01. 01. 0000
Res: 8
Gate: 85%
Auto:Y
Step
Resolution
5.
6.
7.
Gate On
Percentage
Select a Track number. The default value is Track one.
Turn Auto Increment On. This feature automatically increments the
step (by the selected step resolution) each time you press the Play
button.
Press the Preset View button. The preset screen shown below appears.
C01A V127 P00 A:P
0503 kit:80’s Tones
8.
9.
Auto Increment
On/Off
User
Select a Preset for your first track.
Press the Preset View button again after you’ve selected a preset. The
LED will go out and you’ll be returned to the Pattern screen.
Get ready to record!
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
Set the Step Resolution to eighth notes for now (8).
Play a note (or notes) on the keypad. The step records and increments
when you release the keys. Note the setting of the bar.beat.tick display
as the steps increment.
Keep adding notes to steps. You can also record knob settings. Simply
turn the knobs in any of the controller knob modes and these moves
will be recorded.
Press Stop when you’ve finished recording.
Press Stop again to rewind to the beginning of the pattern.
Change the Resolution and record another pass.
To Erase the Pattern:
There are several ways to erase entire pattern. Probably he easiest way is
to simply Save an empty sequence over the pattern you want to erase.
• You could also “Erase All Events” from the Pattern Edit menu.
16.
XL-7 Operation Manual 69
Sequencer
Pattern Edit Menu
Pattern Edit
Menu
Track Enable/Mute
Buttons
The Pattern Edit menu contains housekeeping, pattern editing filters and
other tools.
The Pattern Edit button is DISABLED unless you are in Pattern Mode!
IMPORTANT: In Pattern Edit mode, Track Enable/Mute buttons are used
to select which tracks will be affected by the editing operation.
Any enabled tracks will be edited and any disabled tracks will be unaffected
by the editing operation—Quantize, Thin Events, Erase Events, Velocity
Scale/Shift, Extend or Transpose.
Name Pattern
Patterns can be named with up to 16 characters. Position the cursor under
the character location and use the data entry control to change the
character.
PATTERN NAME
0061 Metallic 6
Pattern Length
Patterns can be anywhere from one to thirty two measures in length. A
pattern loops when it reaches the end whether in record or playback
modes.
A pattern’s length can also be changed at any time, before or after
recording. If you increase the length of a pattern after recording, it will play
silently for the extra time unless new data is recorded there. If you shorten
a pattern’s length after recording, it will play up to it’s new length then
loop. Changing the length of a pattern does not change any data until you
save it. If you save a shortened pattern, the unplayed data will be erased.
1.
2.
To Set the Pattern Length from the Pattern Edit menu:
Select Pattern Edit mode from Pattern mode.
Locate the Pattern Length screen using the data entry control.
PATTERN LENGTH
Length: 32 bars
3.
70 E-MU Systems
Move the cursor to the lower line of the display using either cursor key,
then set the length of the pattern using the data entry control.
Sequencer
Pattern Edit Menu
1.
2.
To Set the Pattern Length from the Main Pattern Screen:
Select the pattern in Pattern mode.
Move the cursor to the Length (Ln) field using the cursor keys.
T01
STOP Ln: 02
000 Start of IT
Bar: 01 . 1
0
3.
Setting Meter
(Time Signature)
Set the Length of the pattern using the data entry control.
XL-7 allows you to set almost any conceivable time signature. The
numerator (indicating number of beats in a measure) can be set from 1 to
99. The denominator (indicating the rhythmic value of each beat) can be
set to 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, or 64. The time signature can be changed at any
time before or after recording.
The meter setting affects the bar:beat display, the pattern length,
metronome accent, and the grid recording display.
For background information about Time Signatures, see page 316.
1.
2.
3.
To Set the Time Signature:
Select the pattern in which you want to record.
Press the Pattern Edit button. The Pattern Edit menu screen displays
the menu page most recently selected since powering up XL-7.
Scroll to the Meter screen using the data entry control. The meter
setting will probably show the 04/4 default time signature.
METER
04 / 4
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
METRONOME
off
VALUE
1/8
Press the right cursor button once to move the cursor underneath the
numerator field.
Set the time signature numerator value using the data entry control.
Press the right cursor button again to move the cursor underneath the
denominator field.
Set the time signature denominator value using the data entry
control.
Press the Pattern Edit button again to exit pattern edit mode.
XL-7 Operation Manual 71
Sequencer
Pattern Edit Menu
Metronome
O
The metronome is a timing aid when recording or playing back patterns
and songs and can be set to a wide variety of different beats. The
metronome produces an accented click on the first beat of each measure
and a softer click on other beats. The following metronome beat options are
available:
The higher metronome
speeds are useful when recording
a fast part since you may slow
the tempo way down and still
hear where you are in the
pattern.
Symbol
Symbol
1/1
whole notes
1/2d
dotted half notes
1/2
half notes
1/4d
dotted quarter notes
1/4
quarter notes
1/8d
dotted eighth notes
1/8
eighth notes
1/4t
quarter note triplets
1/16
sixteenth notes
1/8t
eighth note triplets
1/32
thirty-second notes
1/16t
sixteenth note triplets
denom
uses the denominator
value of the meter setting
The metronome setting is NOT saved with the pattern.
1.
O
Play the pattern to listen
to the Metronome while you set
the Value.
2.
To Set the Metronome:
Press the Pattern Edit button. The Pattern Edit menu screen displays
the menu page most recently selected since powering up XL-7.
Scroll to the Metronome screen using the data entry control.
METER
04 / 4
3.
METRONOME
off
VALUE
1/8
Move the cursor underneath the Metronome field and turn the
metronome to On, Off or Rec using the data entry control.
• Off - the metronome doesn’t play.
• On - the metronome plays during recording and playback.
• Rec - the metronome only plays while recording.
4.
72 E-MU Systems
Move the cursor underneath the Value field and set the metronome
beat value using the data entry control.
Sequencer
Pattern Edit Menu
Quantize
The timing can also be changed after a pattern has been recorded. Quantize
moves all the note start times in the track to fall on (or closer to) the
specified time values.
1.
2.
3.
4.
To Quantize a Pattern:
Select the pattern.
Select the Track(s) you wish to quantize using the Track Enable/Mute
buttons.
Press the Pattern Edit button.
Scroll to the Quantize screen shown below using the data entry
control.
QUANTIZE Resolution: 16
Amount: 75% Swing: 50%
5.
6.
Set up the Quantize parameters as desired. The Home/Enter LED will
be flashing once the cursor is moved to one of the editable fields.
Press Enter to Quantize or add Swing. Press any other button to Cancel
the operation.
Quantize Parameters
Resolution- Sets the desired note value to which note-on events will be
corrected. With sixteenth notes selected, Quantize will move
played notes toward, or exactly onto, sixteenth note time slots.
Amount -
Controls how much quantization is applied. With a setting of
100%, events are moved all the way to the specified note value.
With a setting of 50%, events are moved 50% closer to the
specified note value.
Before
After
Quantization
Resolution: 8
Amount:
50%
With an amount of 50%, notes are moved 50% closer to the
specified Quantization value.
Swing -
Swing adds a rhythmic feel by shifting the time allocated to
every other grid point in a pattern. In the default case where
swing is set to 50% (No Swing), the first eighth note takes up
50% of the quarter note and the second eighth note takes up
the remaining 50% of the time.
XL-7 Operation Manual 73
Sequencer
Pattern Edit Menu
50% Swing
Eighth notes play at regular intervals
0%
50% 100%
If swing were set to 67%, the first eighth note falls on the beat, but the
second eighth note is delayed by 67%.
67% Swing
Every other eighth note plays late
67%
0%
Values below 50% give a kind of “reverse swing” where every other eighth
note comes in early. Odd, but maybe just the thing for your style of music.
30% Swing
Every other eighth note plays early
30%
More about Swing
Swing can help add a more human “feel” to a series of repeating patterns.
For example, if you repeat the same pattern four times, try setting a swing
factor of 54% for, say, the third pattern. This results in a series of patterns
which are more psycho-acoustically interesting than merely repeating the
same pattern over and over.
67% is considered the “classic” jazz swing factor, where the first eighth note
is 2/3 of a quarter note, and the second eighth note is 1/3 of a quarter note
(i.e. the second eighth note behaves more like an eighth note triplet). If this
sounds too “perfect”, try a swing factor of 64% instead. The results will be
similar, but the “feel” will be slightly different.
74 E-MU Systems
Sequencer
Pattern Edit Menu
Scale/Shift Duration
This filter allows you to either scale (multiply by a value) or shift (add a
value to) the note durations in the selected tracks. The Scale function is
performed before the Shift value is added.
Scale -
Shift -
1.
2.
3.
4.
O
Tip: To set all notes to a
particular value, set Scale to 0%,
(this zeros the value) then set
Shift to the desired duration.
Multiplies all note durations by a percentage from 0% to 125%.
Scaling by 100% would leave all note durations untouched.
Scaling by 50% would cut all note durations in half.
Adds or subtracts a specific note duration in quarter notes and
ticks to note-on events in the selected tracks.
To Scale or Shift Note Duration:
Select the pattern you wish to edit.
Select the Track(s) you wish to Scale or Shift using the Track Enable/
Mute buttons.
Press the Pattern Edit button.
Scroll to the Scale/Shift Note Duration screen shown below using the
data entry control.
SCALE/SHIFT NOTE DURATION
Scale: 87% Shift: +00.000
Quarter Notes
5.
6.
Ticks
Select the amount of note duration scaling or shift (offset). The
Home/Enter LED will be flashing once the cursor is moved to the lower
line of the display.
Press Enter. The screen shown below appears to remind you to select
the tracks you want to filter. Select a key range for filtering. The default
setting is all keys.
SELECT TRACKS
Key Range: C-2 to:G8
Low Key
7.
High Key
Press Enter to scale/shift the note durations. Press any other menu
button to Cancel the operation.
XL-7 Operation Manual 75
Sequencer
Pattern Edit Menu
Thin Events
Event thinning is usually performed to reduce the amount of extraneous
controller data and thus reduce the memory size of patterns. This filter
reduces the number of events in a musical fashion. Events may be reduced
by a specified amount from 1 to 128. The setting represents the smallest
change that will be kept. For example, if the setting were set to 3 and you
were thinning a controller sweep that went 1-2-3-4-5-6-7, you would be left
with:1-4-7. The filter also keeps any change in direction values.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
1
3
4
3
7
The setting
represents the smallest
change that will be kept.
_
If too much data is
recorded into a pattern, the
sequencer may slow or clog. Use
the “Thin Events” function to
reduce the amount of
extraneous data in the pattern.
(All the “|” get kept.)
3
Direction Changes are always kept.
The following types of events can be thinned:
•
•
•
•
•
1.
2.
3.
4.
Tempo
Poly Aftertouch
Channel Aftertouch
Pitch Wheel (Touchstrip)
Any Continuous Controller (1-95)
To Thin Events in a Pattern:
Select the pattern you wish to edit.
Select the Track(s) you wish to thin using the Track Enable buttons.
Press the Pattern Edit button.
Scroll to the Thin Events screen shown below using the data entry
control.
THIN EVENTS
chan aftertouch
5.
76 E-MU Systems
Amt: 40
Select the type of event you want thinned, then set the amount of
thinning. The Home/Enter LED will be flashing once the cursor is
moved to one of the editable fields.
Sequencer
Pattern Edit Menu
6.
Press Enter. The screen shown below appears to remind you to select
the tracks you want to thin. Select a key range for thinning. The default
setting is all keys.
SELECT TRACKS
Key Range: C-2 to:G8
Low Key
7.
Erase Events
High Key
Press Enter to thin events. Press any other menu button to Cancel the
operation.
Specific types of events can be completely erased from a pattern.
The following types of events can be erased:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
All Track Events
Notes
All Controllers
Program Changes
SysEx Data
Meter
Tempo
Poly Aftertouch
Channel Aftertouch
Pitch Wheel (Touchstrip)
Any Continuous Controller (1-119)
To Erase Events from a Pattern:
1.
Select the pattern you wish to edit.
2.
Select the Track(s) you wish to erase using the Track Enable/Mute
buttons.
Press the Pattern Edit button.
Scroll to the Erase Events screen shown below using the data entry
control.
3.
4.
ERASE EVENTS
program change
5.
Select the type of events you want erased. The Home/Enter LED will be
flashing once the cursor is moved to the lower line of the display.
XL-7 Operation Manual 77
Sequencer
Pattern Edit Menu
6.
Press Enter. The screen shown below appears to remind you to select
the tracks you want to erase. Select a key range. The default setting is all
keys.
SELECT TRACKS
Key Range: C-2 to:G8
7.
Transpose
Press Enter to erase the events. Press any other menu button to Cancel
the operation.
All notes in a pattern can be transposed up or down from -127 to +127
semitones. For example with a setting of +7, all notes in the pattern would
be transposed up a perfect fifth.
Warning: If you transpose notes past the hard limits of 0 and 127, those
notes will be erased from the pattern.
1.
2.
3.
4.
To Transpose a Pattern:
Select the pattern you wish to edit.
Select the Track(s) you wish to Transpose using the Track Enable/Mute
buttons.
Press the Pattern Edit button.
Scroll to the Transpose screen shown below using the data entry
control.
TRANSPOSE
+7 semitones
5.
6.
Select the amount of transposition you want. The Home/Enter LED
will be flashing once the cursor is moved to the lower line of the
display.
Press Enter. The screen shown below appears to remind you to select
the tracks you want to transpose. Select a key range. The default setting
is all keys.
SELECT TRACKS
Key Range: C-2 to:G8
7.
78 E-MU Systems
Press Enter to transpose the selected tracks. Press any other button to
Cancel the operation.
Sequencer
Pattern Edit Menu
Scale/Shift Velocity
This filter allows you to either scale (multiply by a value) or shift (add a
value to) the velocity values of notes in a pattern. The Scale function is
performed before the Shift value is added.
Scale -
Shift -
1.
2.
3.
4.
O
Tip: To set all notes to a
particular velocity value, set
Scale to 0%, then set Shift to the
desired velocity.
Multiplies all note-on velocities by a percentage from 0% to
125%. Scaling by 100% would leave all velocity values
untouched. Scaling by 50% would cut all velocity values in half.
Adds or subtracts a specific velocity value (-127 to +127) to
every note-on event in the pattern.
To Scale or Shift Velocity:
Select the pattern you wish to edit.
Select the Track(s) you wish to Scale or Shift using the Track Enable/
Mute buttons.
Press the Pattern Edit button.
Scroll to the Scale/Shift Velocity screen shown below using the data
entry control.
SCALE/SHIFT VELOCITY
Scale: 87% Shift: +0
5.
6.
Select the amount of velocity scaling or shift. The Home/Enter LED
will be flashing once the cursor is moved to the lower line of the
display.
Press Enter. The screen shown below appears to remind you to select
the tracks you want to velocity scale or shift. Select a key range. The
default setting is all keys.
SELECT TRACKS
Key Range: C-2 to:G8
7.
Press Enter to change velocity in the selected tracks. Press any other
button to Cancel the operation.
XL-7 Operation Manual 79
Sequencer
Pattern Edit Menu
Extend Sequence
Data To
This feature lets you change the length of any selected tracks after recording
a pattern. If you are lengthening a pattern, the pattern is looped to fill in
the empty space. If you set the length shorter than the existing pattern, the
pattern will be truncated.
You can set the pattern length before you extend so that only those
bars will be copied. The copied data will be merged with the data in the
subsequent bars of the pattern.
To Extend the 1st Bar over 4 Bars
1. Set Pattern
Length to 1-bar
Bar 1
Bar 2
Bar 3
Bar 4
Bar 1
Bar 2
Bar 3
Bar 4
2. Extend Sequence
Data to 4-bars
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
To Extend the Length of Selected Tracks:
Select the pattern you wish to extend.
Select the Track(s) that you want to extend using the Track Enable/
Mute buttons.
Press the Pattern Edit button from pattern mode.
Scroll to the Pattern Length screen and set the length to the measures
you wish to extend. For example, if you want to copy the first measure,
set the length to 1.
Scroll to Extend Sequence Data using the data entry control.
EXTEND SEQUENCE DATA TO
bar: 8
6.
7.
Move the cursor to the lower line of the display and select the new
pattern length.
Press Enter. The following screen appears.
--- PERFORM OPERATION? --Enter = Yes
8.
80 E-MU Systems
Other = Cancel
Press Enter again to extend the pattern or any other menu button to
cancel the operation.
Sequencer
Pattern Edit Menu
Erase Track
An entire track or a section of a track can be erased in a single operation.
This feature makes it easy to erase a flubbed take or erase a section of track
before pasting new data.
Erase Pattern or Song Track
Start
Bar
Length = 3Bars
Before
Bar - 1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
After
Bar - 1
1.
2.
To Erase a Track:
Press the Pattern Edit or Song Edit button.
Scroll to the Erase Track screen shown below using the data entry
control.
ERASE TRACK
Track: 1
Bar:01
Track to be
Erased
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Start
Location
Len:32
Length in
bars
Select the track you want to erase. The Home/Enter LED will be
flashing once the cursor is moved to the lower line of the display.
Select the first Bar you want to erase. The bar range for patterns is 0132; the bar range for songs is 001-999.
Select the Length of the track you want erased.
Press Enter to erase the selected section of the Track.
Press any other menu button or exit the edit menu to Cancel the
operation.
XL-7 Operation Manual 81
Sequencer
Pattern Edit Menu
Cut Track to
Clipboard
O
An individual track or a section of a track can be cut or copied and held on
a digital “clipboard” so that it can be pasted into another track or pattern.
This function cuts or removes a track (or section of a track) from the pattern
and places it on the clipboard, where it will be held until it is replaced with
another cut or copy operation, or the power to XL-7 is turned off.
Cutting a section from a track will leave a blank space in the track.
Cut track can be used as
a way to erase a track.
The cut section is placed on the clipboard leaving a blank space in the
track where the data was cut out.
O
Tracks can be freely cut,
copied or pasted between songs
and patterns.
1.
2.
3.
To Cut a Track:
Select the pattern you wish to edit.
Press the Pattern Edit button.
Scroll to the Cut Track to Clipboard screen shown below using the
data entry control.
CUT TRACK TO CLIPBOARD
Track: 1
Bar:04 Len:07
4.
5.
6.
82 E-MU Systems
Select the track to be cut. The Home/Enter LED will be flashing once
the cursor is moved to the lower line of the display.
Select the Start Bar and the Length (in bars) to be cut.
Press Enter to cut the track. Press any other menu button to Cancel the
operation.
Sequencer
Pattern Edit Menu
Copy Track to
Clipboard
An individual track or a section of a track can be copied and held on a
digital “clipboard” so that it can be pasted into another track or pattern.
This function makes a digital copy of the selected track and places it on the
clipboard, where it will be held until it is replaced with another cut or copy
operation, or the power to is turned off.
1.
2.
3.
To Copy a Track:
Select the pattern you wish to edit.
Press the Pattern Edit button.
Scroll to the Copy Track to Clipboard screen shown below using the
data entry control.
COPY TRACK TO CLIPBOARD
Track: 1
Bar:06 Len:07
4.
5.
6.
Select the track to be copied. The Home/Enter LED will be flashing
once the cursor is moved to the lower line of the display.
Select the Start Bar and the Length (in bars) to be copied.
Press Enter to copy the track. Press any other menu button to Cancel
the operation.
XL-7 Operation Manual 83
Sequencer
Pattern Edit Menu
Paste Clipboard to
Track
Once a track (or a section of a track) has been cut or copied to the
“clipboard”, it can be pasted into another track or pattern from 1 to 99
times. The Paste operation Merges the clipboard data with the data on the
destination track. It adds the new information to the existing data with the
start of the data in the clipboard placed at the selected bar position.
Because of the data merging feature, the Paste operation can be used to
“bounce down” multiple tracks to a single multichannel track. See below.
Specified
Bar
Paste
Clipboard
Tracks
Paste x3
Specified
Bar
2-bars
1
2
3
Total Extension = 6 bars
O
Tracks can be freely cut,
copied or pasted between songs
and patterns.
1.
2.
3.
Clipboard
To Paste the Clipboard into a Track:
Press the Pattern Edit button.
Cut or Copy data to the clipboard. See pages 82 and 83.
Scroll to the Paste Clipboard to Track screen shown below using the
data entry control.
PASTE CLIPBOARD TO TRACK
Track: 1
At Bar:06
X:3
Destination
Track
84 E-MU Systems
Start
Location
Number
of Pastes
Sequencer
Pattern Edit Menu
4.

You will not hear the
results of the Paste operation
until the sequence cycles around.
(Hint: Press RTZ)
5.
6.
7.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Select the track where you want the clipboard data to be pasted. The
Home/Enter LED will be flashing once the cursor is moved to the lower
line of the display.
Select the bar where the clipboard contents will be pasted.
Select the number of times you want the clipboard data pasted.
Press Enter to paste the data. Press any other menu button to Cancel
the operation.
To Bounce Tracks:
Copy the first track you wish to bounce.
Paste the track to the desired destination track.
Repeat steps 1 & 2 for the other tracks you wish to bounce down.
Press the Pattern Edit button and scroll to the Channel Assign screen.
Set the Track containing all your bounced tracks to MultiA.
(or MultiB if the original tracks were recorded using the “B” channels.)
XL-7 Operation Manual 85
Sequencer
Pattern Edit Menu
Channel Assign
This important screen assigns each track to a Main channel (01A-16B). This
“rechannelizes” the data on the track to the channel you choose here. The
default mode of operation for XL-7 is to have tracks assigned to the samenumbered MIDI channel. This convention makes it easy to keep everything
organized and it works well for most recording.
Because tracks can be recorded with multiple MIDI channels, “Multi A” and
“Multi B” options are provided in the channel selection field. The Multi
options route data to either the A or B channels (internal or external). For
example, you could route a multichannel track to only use the B channels.
O
You might want to
designate a certain track to
handle external program
changes. Set this track to “Ext”
and choose “MultiA” or
“MultiB”.
Each track can also be routed to: internal MIDI channels, the external MIDI
ports, both, or none. Channels 1A-16A and Multi A are routed to MIDI port
A and channels 1B-16B and Multi B are routed to MIDI port B, if “ext” or
“both” is selected as a destination for that track.
Important Note: Program change messages are NOT transmitted externally if the destination is set to Both. To transmit program changes to
external MIDI devices, set the destination to External (EXT).
Track
Channel
Destination
Track
1
Chan
1A
Track
2
Chan
2A
Internal
Track
3
Multi
B
Internal
Track
16
Chan
3B
Internal
both
Internal
Multiple
Channels
none
86 E-MU Systems
Sequencer
Pattern Edit Menu
1.
2.
3.
To Assign Tracks to MIDI Channels:
Select the pattern you wish to edit.
Press the Pattern Edit button.
Scroll to the Select Track Changes screen shown below using the data
entry control.
T 01
CHANNEL ASSIGN
Channel: 01A:
Dest:both
4.
5.
6.
7.
Multichannel Track
Recording
1.
The Channel Assignment
screen is a MIDI rechannelizer.
The Multi A or B assignments
allow multiple MIDI channels on
a track.
Select the desired destination for the track.
Press the Pattern Edit button again to exit the module.
Each of XL-7‘s 16 tracks can contain multichannel MIDI data. Because
tracks can be routed internally or externally on either of the two MIDI
ports, the XL-7 sequencer can actually control up to 64 separate MIDI
channels (16 internal-A, 16 internal-B, 16 MIDI port-A, 16 MIDI port-B).
Once a track is enabled for multichannel recording you can record into it
using the rubber keypads or external MIDI.
O
Select the desired track(s).
Select the desired channel for the track.
To Setup a Track for Multichannel Recording
Select the pattern you wish to record.
Playback Setup (steps 2-7 set up the track for multi-channel play back)
2. Press the Pattern Edit button.
3. Scroll to the Select Track Changes screen shown below using the data
entry control.
T01
CHANNEL ASSIGN
Channel: 01A:
Dest:both
4.
5.
6.
7.
Select the desired track.
Set the track to MultiA or MultiB.
Select the desired destination for the track (internal, external or both).
Press the Pattern Edit button again to exit the module.
XL-7 Operation Manual 87
Sequencer
Pattern Edit Menu
Continue on to Record a Multichannel Track using the Rubber Keypads…
8. Press the Controllers button and make sure “Keyboard/Knob Channel”
is set to “Basic”. This feature automatically changes the channel of the
keypad to whatever channel is shown in the preset view display.
9. Make sure the multichannel track you set up (step 4 above) is selected.
10. Set the Pattern Length.
Ready to Record
11. Press the Preset View button.
12. Select a preset for channel 01A.
13. Press Record, then Play. Start playing!
Record Channel 2
14. Select channel 02A.
15. Select a preset for channel 02A.
16. Press Record, then Play. Start playing!
17. Continue to record channels.
Aux Channel Assign
Each track can also be assigned to a separate Aux channel. This assignment
works exactly like the main channel assignment (page 86). In certain situations it may be useful to transmit using two MIDI channels or both MIDI
ports.
The Aux Channel assignments are NOT saved with the pattern or multisetup and reverts to its default state upon power-up.
88 E-MU Systems
Sequencer
Pattern Edit Menu
Note List Editor
Individual MIDI notes in the pattern can be edited, inserted or deleted from
this screen. Place the cursor underneath the “Event Scroll Field” shown
below and turn the data entry control to navigate through events.
• Hold the Enter button and turn the data entry control to scroll through
events when the cursor is on any other field
Event Scroll Field
(scroll though events)
Track Number
T
01 NOTE <->
C01 C#1
v:100
MIDI
Channel
MIDI
Note
Note
Velocity
Time Location
002.03.008
dur:00.083
Note
Duration
• Erase button - - - - - Erases the currently selected note.
• Repeat button - - - - Duplicates the currently selected note, allowing you
to edit and create a new note.
1) Press Repeat.
2) Change the time, channel, or MIDI note.
Note: You cannot have two events with the exact same time and data in
a pattern. XL-7 will delete any duplicate events as soon as you increment
the event or exit the screen.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
To Edit a MIDI Note:
Select the pattern you wish to edit.
Press the Pattern Edit button.
Scroll to the Note List Editor screen shown below using the data entry
control.
Press the Enter button as prompted by the display to begin editing.
Select the Track that you want to edit using the Track/Channel select
button near the LCD.
T
01 NOTE <->
C01 C#1
v:100
6.
7.
O
You can edit notes and
note velocity by playing the
keyboard.
8.
9.
002.03.008
dur:00.083
Press the right Cursor button to move the cursor underneath the Event
Scroll field (<->).
Turn the data entry control to scroll through the event list and locate
the event you want to edit.
Move the cursor to the data field you want to edit and make changes
using the data entry control.
Press the Pattern Edit button to exit the Pattern Edit module.
XL-7 Operation Manual 89
Sequencer
Pattern Edit Menu
Event List Editor
Continuous controller, pitch wheel. mono pressure, poly pressure and
program change MIDI messages can be edited, inserted or deleted using this
menu. Place the cursor underneath the “Event Scroll Field” shown
below and turn the data entry control to navigate through events.
The event list editor also allows you access to the Conductor Track which sets
the tempo and meter for the pattern.
Hold the Enter button and turn the data entry control to scroll through
events when the cursor is on any other field.
• Erase button - - - - - Erases the currently selected event.
• Repeat button - - - - Duplicates the currently selected event, allowing
you to edit and create a new event.
1) Press Repeat.
2) Change the time, channel, or MIDI event type.
• Note: You cannot have two events with the exact same time and data in
a pattern. XL-7 will delete any duplicate events as soon as you increment
the event or exit the screen.
Continuous Controller Edit
Continuous controller numbers 1-95 can be edited. Continuous controllers
and Channel Pressure messages may range in value from 0-127.
Continuous Controller Screen
Track Number
Event Scroll Field
(scroll though events)
Time Location
T
01 EVENT <->
002.03.008
C01 controller #1
v:52
MIDI
Channel
Event
Type
Controller
No. Field
Event
Value
Pitch Strip Edit
Pitch Strip messages are bidirectional and may range in value from -8192 to
+8191.
Pitch Strip Screen
T
01 EVENT <->
C01 pitch strip:
002.03.004
-49
Bidirectional Pitch Value
90 E-MU Systems
Sequencer
Pattern Edit Menu
Poly Pressure Edit
Polyphonic pressure messages are assigned on a per note basis and have
range of 0-127. XL-7 can generate polyphonic pressure messages, but it
cannot receive them.
Poly Pressure Screen
T
01 EVENT <->
C01 polypress:
002.03.004
C1
62
MIDI
Note
Poly Pressure
Value
Program Change Edit
_
In order to send program
changes to external devices, the
Track must be assigned to an
“external” channel. See page 86
for details.
Program change numbers from 0-127, and on any bank number, can be
inserted, deleted or edited in this screen. If you do not select bank numbers
(off), the program change will be sent to the currently selected bank. See
“Bank Select Commands” on page 180.
Program Change Screen
T
01 EVENT <->
C01 prog: 10
Program
Change
Number
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
003.02.026
m:off
l:off
Bank
Number MSB
cc:0
Bank
Number LSB
cc:32
To Edit a MIDI Event:
Select the pattern you wish to edit.
Press the Pattern Edit button.
Scroll to the Event List Editor screen shown below using the data entry
control.
Press the Enter button as prompted by the display to begin editing.
Select the Track that you want to edit using the Track/Channel select
button near the LCD.
T
01 EVENT <->
C01 controller #1
002.03.008
v:52
XL-7 Operation Manual 91
Sequencer
Pattern Edit Menu
6.
7.
8.
9.
Press the right Cursor button to move the cursor underneath the Event
Scroll Field (<->).
Turn the data entry control to scroll through the event list and locate
the event you want to edit.
Move the cursor to the data field you want to edit and make changes
using the data entry control.
Press the Pattern Edit button to exit the Pattern Edit module.
The Conductor Track (track 0)
The conductor track allows you to insert tempo and meter changes
anywhere in the pattern. Select the track below track 1 and the first screen
shown below will appear.
Conductor Track Screens
T
CT EVENT <->
003.01.000
C01 tempo: 138 bpm
T
CT EVENT <->
003.01.000
C01 meter:
04/4
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
To Insert a Tempo Change into the Conductor Track:
Select the pattern you wish to edit.
Press the Pattern Edit button.
Press the (-) Track/Channel button until “CT” appears in the track
field.
Press the Enter button as prompted by the display to begin editing.
Move the cursor to the lower line of the display and select tempo.
Track field
T
CT
Time Location
EVENT <->
002.03.008
tempo: 120 bpm
Tempo/Meter field
6.
7.
92 E-MU Systems
BPM field
Move the cursor under the bpm field and set the tempo.
Set the Time Location where you want the tempo change to occur.
Sequencer
Pattern Edit Menu

To Insert a new Event:
1) Press the Repeat button.
2) Modify the Time & Tempo.
8.
9.
10.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
If you want to add another tempo change, press the Repeat button on
the XL-7 front panel.
Change the Time Location and Tempo.
Press the Pattern Edit button to exit the Pattern Edit module.
To Remove or edit a Tempo Change from the Conductor Track:
Select the pattern you wish to edit.
Press the Pattern Edit button.
Press the (-) Track/Channel button until “CT” appears in the track
field.
Press the Enter button as prompted by the display to begin editing.
Press the right Cursor button twice to move the cursor underneath the
Event Scroll field (<->).
Turn the data entry control to scroll through the event list and locate
the tempo change you want to edit.
Event Scroll Field
(scroll though events)
T
7.
8.
9.
CT
EVENT <->
002.03.008
tempo: 120 bpm
Press the front panel Erase button on XL-7 to erase the tempo event.
Simply change the Tempo or Location fields to modify the tempo or
time of the event.
Press the Pattern Edit button to exit the Pattern Edit module.
To Insert or Edit Meter Changes:
Meter changes are inserted and edited exactly like tempo changes.
Revert to Saved
Pattern
_
This screen allows you to discard any edits made to the pattern and restore
the last saved version. This is not the same as an “Undo” function since
Revert permanently discards any edits you have made since saving. This
function removes the asterisk in the display that appears after you’ve edited
the pattern.
Caution: Never “Revert
to Saved” while the sequencer is
in record mode or the computer
may crash.
XL-7 Operation Manual 93
Sequencer
Song Mode
Song Mode
Song mode is selected by pressing the Song mode button beneath the
liquid crystal display. The screen shown below is displayed in Song mode.
See “Songs” on page 52.
:150 M: 04 / 4
0000 Start of IT
Song Play
Bar: 001 . 1
Pressing Play in Song mode causes the selected song to play.
Pressing the Stop button stops the song immediately. Pressing
Stop again rewinds the song to the beginning (RTZ). Pressing Stop
a third time reloads the initial setup information for the Song.
Song Step Recording
As described on page 52, songs can be recorded in two ways. Step recording
involves linking patterns together to form more intricate arrangements.
1.
To Step Record a Song:
Press the Song mode button. The screen shown below appears.
Song Tempo
(if song events selected)
Song Meter
:150 M: 04 / 4
0000 Start of IT
Current Location
Bar: 001 . 1
Song Name
2.
3.
Select a Blank song to begin recording using the data entry control.
Press the Record button twice to select Step Record mode. The Step
record LED illuminates and the screen shown below appears.
Song Step
Number
S01
Step
Length
STEP Ln: 04
Bar:001
-----------NONE----------Step Contents
(None, Stop, Pattern)
94 E-MU Systems
Current
Position
Sequencer
Song Mode
4.

Hot Tip: You can
audition patterns In Song Step
Record by pressing the Play
button. Press Play again to stop
auditioning.
S01
STEP Ln: 04
0000 Ambideep
5.

You must press the
Enter button to confirm each
step change. Any changes
you make without pressing
Enter will be discarded.
The cursor is on the lower line of the display. Turn the data entry
control to select a Pattern for step one.
6.
Press Enter to choose the pattern and increment the step counter. Note
that the current position (Bar) field now indicates the bar position just
beyond the length of the first pattern.
Select another pattern for song step 2. Press the Play button to
audition the pattern before pressing Enter.
S02
0010
7.
8.

You can move the cursor
to any field can change it while
in step record mode.
Bar:001
STEP Ln: 99
Amsterdam
Bar:009
Press Enter when you’ve made your selection and the step counter
increments again.
Continue to add Patterns. When you’re ready for the Song to end,
turn the data entry control counter-clockwise and select the STOP
command. If you don’t insert a “Stop” command, the last pattern will
simply continue to play indefinitely.
Changing the Length of Patterns
9.
While in Step Record mode, you can move the cursor to the Length
(Ln) field and change the length of the pattern at that step. Lengthening a pattern will cause it to loop. Shortening a pattern will truncate
the playback to the selected length.
Deleting a Pattern
10. Pressing the Erase button (located below the controller knobs) erases
the currently selected step from the song.
Inserting a Pattern
11. You can insert a pattern at any bar of the song. Select the insert point
by moving the cursor beneath the Step Number or the Bar field.
12. Select the pattern you wish to insert, press and hold the Repeat button
(located below the controller knobs), then press Enter. The new pattern
will be inserted at the selected bar location.
Inserting Track Mutes
You can set the Track Mutes for each step in the song by simply
selecting them. Track mutes are selected at the beginning of each step.
13.
XL-7 Operation Manual 95
Sequencer
Song Mode
Stop the Song
14. Turn the data entry control counter-clockwise until you find the
STOP command. This will be the last step of your song.
Time to Save?
15. Changes are not made permanent until you Save the song. An asterisk
will appear in the Song display if the Songs has been modified and
needs to be saved. The Save/Copy button LED will also be flashing.
Press Save/Copy, scroll to the Save Song screen, select a location and
press Enter.
The following parameters are also saved with the Song. Set these parameters, then save the song again if you wish. The “Event Source” option in
the Song Edit menu (page 99) determines whether song or pattern events
will be used in the song.

The 16 tracks of a song
can be assigned to either the A
or B channels using the “Song
Channel Assign” function on
page 110.
Realtime Song
Recording
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Initial Tempo
Volume for 16 channels
Pan for 16 channels
Mix Output setup for 16 channels
Arp channel status (off/on/preset/master) for 16 channels
Master FX setup
Event Source
Realtime Song Recording lays down a single track which may contain
multichannel: note, program change and controller data (but no SysEx).
Realtime data will retain its recorded channel information so you can lay in
multichannel note and controller information. Multiple channel information received over MIDI will also be recorded.
1.
To Record a Song in Realtime mode:
Press the Song mode button. The screen shown below appears.
Song Tempo
(if song events selected)
Song Meter
(for metronome)
:150 M: 04 / 4
0000 Start of IT
Current Location
Bar: 001 . 1
Song Name
2.
96 E-MU Systems
Select a Blank song to begin recording using the data entry control.
Sequencer
Song Mode
3.
4.
Press the Record button once to select Realtime Record mode. The
Realtime record LED illuminates and the screen shown below appears.
If you have already step recorded any pattern inserts, their numbers will
appear on the lower line of the display.
Set the metronome to On or Rec if you want a timing reference.
Song Tempo
Current Location
:130 - - - REC - - - Bar: 001 . 1
Quan: off
Met: rec
CntIn: 0
AutoCorrect
5.
Metronome
on/off/rec
Count-in
Bars
Press the Play button to begin realtime recording. As in Pattern Record
Mode, the Record button can be pressed at any time to disable
recording. Similarly, the Play button can be pressed while recording to
affect a “record-pause” mode.
To Erase Specific Notes:
6.
_
Too much controller
information can clog the
sequencer causing sluggish
performance and sloppy timing.
Use the “Thin Events” function
(page 103) to reduce the
amount of controller data in the
song.
Press the Erase button in Realtime Record mode and hold down the
keyboard note you wish to erase. The note will be erased when it
comes around in the pattern.
To Overdub Realtime Controller Data over Patterns
This may be the most common way to use Realtime Song mode. After
arranging your song using step record mode, you can mix and embellish
your song by recording continuous controllers over the top. You might also
want to add additional musical lines over your patterns.
1.
Start by recording and saving a song by following the instructions on
page 94.
Volume Mixing
2. Press Song Edit and scroll to the Event Source page.
3. Move the cursor to the lower line and select “volume: song events
only”.
4. Press Song Edit again to exit the menu.
5. Select Volume knob mode by repeatedly pressing the Controller
Function Select button (page 37).
6. Select Mix View mode if you wish to view the volume settings.
7. Press the Stop button twice to make sure the song starts at the
beginning.
8. Press the Record button in Song mode to get ready to record. The Play
button LED will be flashing.
XL-7 Operation Manual 97
Sequencer
Song Mode

Use the “Erase cc#
Events” function (page 104) to
erase controller data from the
song.
9.
10.
Press the Play button to begin recording. The controller knobs now
adjust the volumes of all 16 tracks.
Press Stop when you’re finished recording.
Realtime Panning
11. Select Pan Knob mode by pressing the Controller Function Select
button.
12. Select Mix View mode by pressing the Mix button (if it’s not already
selected).
13. Turn the data entry control clockwise to select Ch Pan view.
14. Press the Stop button twice to make sure the song starts at the
beginning.
15. Press the Record button in Song mode to get ready to record. The Play
button LED will be flashing.
16.
17.
Press the Play button to begin recording. The controller knobs now
adjust the pan positions of all 16 tracks.
Press Stop when you’re finished recording.
Recording Quick Edits
The Quick Edit knobs always record on the Basic Channel (the channel
currently displayed in the Preset View screen).
18.
19.
20.
21.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
98 E-MU Systems
Select Quick Edit mode by pressing the Controller Function Select
button.
Select the channel with the preset you wish to Quick Edit.
Practice your knob movements before recording by playing back the
song and twisting the knobs.
When you’re ready to record, press Record, then Play, then perform
the knob movements.
Erasing Controller Data
The Erase Events function (page 104) can be used to erase controller
data.
Find the realtime controller # of the knob you wish to erase in the
Controllers menu.
(Volume is always cc#7, and Pan is always cc#10. The numbers of the 16
controller knobs can vary.)
Press the Song Edit button.
Scroll to Erase Events and move the cursor to the lower line of the
display.
Select the realtime controller number from step 2.
Press Enter to erase the controller data.
Sequencer
Song Edit Menu
Song Edit
Menu
Song Name
The Song Edit menu allows you to name and edit songs as well as control
which controller data will be used when the song is played.
The Song Edit button is DISABLED unless you are in Song Mode.
An XL-7 Song is a one track sequence of any length. Pattern Play events will
typically be recorded into a song so that specific patterns will begin playing
at specific bar locations (only one pattern can play at a time). Note-on/off,
controller and program change information can also be recorded into the
Song track.
Songs can be named with up to 16 characters. Position the cursor under the
character location and use the data entry control to change the character.
SONG NAME
Blue Beats
Event Source
This function determines how certain controls programmed into the
pattern will be used in the song.
Event Source is a playback filter. Realtime Song data will be recorded
regardless of the Event Source settings, but it might be confusing if you
don’t hear what you just recorded. Therefore, it’s always a good idea to
check the Event Source settings before recording realtime song data.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

When you save a
sequence (song or pattern) it
picks up the current settings and
saves them at the head of the
track.
Tempo
Preset (program change)
Volume
Pan
Mix
Arp
Master Effects (FX)
For each type of control listed above, you can choose one of these options:
•
•
•
•
Song Events Only
1st Pattern Only
All Patterns
Song & Patterns
Uses song events; ignores pattern events
Uses events from the 1st pattern; ignores song events
Uses the events programmed into each pattern
Uses both song and pattern events
The song and pattern option makes the song track extremely flexible
because the song track can be used for volume mixing, realtime control or
lead lines over a traditional pattern-based song structure. The song and
pattern option also allows presets to be selected correctly when using
channels 1B-16B for song events.
XL-7 Operation Manual 99
Sequencer
Song Edit Menu
1.
2.
3.
To Set the Event Sources for a Song:
Select the Song you wish to edit in Song mode.
Press the Song Edit button.
Scroll to the Event Source screen shown below using the data entry
control.
EVENT SOURCE
tempo:
song events only
Setting Meter
(Time Signature)
4.
Select: Song Events Only, First Pattern Only, All Patterns, or Song &
Patterns for each event type.
5.
Press the Song Edit button again to exit the module.
XL-7 allows you to set almost any conceivable time signature. The
numerator (indicating number of beats in a measure) can be set from 1 to
99. The denominator (indicating the rhythmic value of each beat) can be
set to 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, or 64. The time signature can be changed at any
time before or after recording.
The meter setting affects the bar:beat display, the pattern length,
metronome accent, and the grid recording display.
For more information about Time Signatures, see page 316.
1.
2.
3.
To Set the Time Signature:
Select the song in which you want to record in Song mode.
Press the Song Edit button. The Song Edit menu screen displays the
menu page most recently selected since powering up XL-7.
Scroll to the Meter screen using the data entry control. The meter
setting will probably show the 04/4 default time signature.
METER
04 / 4
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
100 E-MU Systems
METRONOME
off
VALUE
1/8
Press the right cursor button once to move the cursor underneath the
numerator field.
Set the time signature numerator value using the data entry control.
Press the right cursor button again to move the cursor underneath the
denominator field.
Set the time signature denominator value using the data entry
control.
Press the Song Edit button again to exit Song Edit mode.
Sequencer
Song Edit Menu
Metronome
The metronome is a timing aid when recording or playing back songs and
can be set to a wide variety of different beats. The metronome produces an
accented click on the first beat of each measure and a softer click on other
beats. The metronome beat options are listed on page 72.
The metronome setting is NOT saved with the Song.
1.
O
Play the pattern to listen
to the Metronome while you set
the Value.
2.
To Set the Metronome:
Press the Song Edit button. The Pattern Edit menu screen displays the
menu page most recently selected since powering up XL-7.
Scroll to the Metronome screen using the data entry control.
METER
04 / 4
3.
METRONOME
off
VALUE
1/8
Move the cursor underneath the Metronome field and turn the
metronome to On, Off or Rec using the data entry control.
• Off - the metronome doesn’t play.
• On - the metronome plays during recording and playback.
• Rec - the metronome only plays while recording.
4.
Quantize
Move the cursor underneath the Value field and set the metronome
beat value using the data entry control.
The timing of note events can be changed after a song has been recorded.
Quantize moves all the note start times in the track to fall on (or closer to)
the specified time values. See “Quantize” on page 73 for more information
about quantization.
Note: This filter quantizes note data recorded in Realtime Song mode. It
does NOT affect the notes in Patterns.
1.
2.
3.
To Quantize Note Events in a Song:
Select the song.
Press the Song Edit button.
Scroll to the Quantize screen using the data entry control.
QUANTIZE Resolution: 16
Amount: 75% Swing: 50%
4.
5.
Set up the Quantize parameters as desired. The Home/Enter LED will
be flashing once the cursor is moved to one of the editable fields.
Press Enter to Quantize or add Swing. Press any other button to Cancel.
XL-7 Operation Manual 101
Sequencer
Song Edit Menu
Scale/Shift Duration
This filter allows you to either scale (multiply by a value) or shift (add a
value to) the note durations in the song track. The Scale function is
performed before the Shift value is added.
Scale -
Shift -
1.
2.
3.
O
Tip: To set all notes to a
particular value, set Scale to 0%,
(this zeros the value) then set
Shift to the desired duration.
Multiplies all note durations by a percentage from 0% to 125%.
Scaling by 100% would leave all note durations untouched.
Scaling by 50% would cut all note durations in half.
Adds or subtracts a specific note duration in beats and ticks to
note-on events in the selected tracks.
To Scale or Shift Note Duration:
Select the song you wish to edit.
Press the Song Edit button.
Scroll to the Scale/Shift Note Duration screen shown below using the
data entry control.
SCALE/SHIFT NOTE DURATION
Scale: 87%
Shift: +00.000
Beats
4.
5.
Ticks
Select the amount of note duration scaling or shift. The Home/Enter
LED will be flashing once the cursor is moved to the lower line of the
display.
Press Enter. Select a key range for filtering. The default setting is all
keys.
SELECT TRACKS
Key Range: C-2 to:G8
Low Key
6.
102 E-MU Systems
High Key
Press Enter to scale/shift the note durations. Press any other button to
Cancel the operation.
Sequencer
Song Edit Menu
Thin Events
Event thinning is usually performed to reduce the amount of extraneous
controller data and thus reduce the memory size and microprocessor load.
This filter reduces the number of events in a musical fashion. The setting
represents the smallest change that will be kept. See page 76 for more information. The filter also keeps change in direction values.
Note: This filter thins note and controller data recorded in Realtime Song
mode. It does NOT affect Pattern data.
The following types of events can be thinned:
•
•
•
•
•
1.
2.
3.
Tempo
Poly Aftertouch
Channel Aftertouch
Pitch Wheel (Touchstrip)
Any Continuous Controller (1-95)
To Thin Events from a Song:
Select the song you wish to edit.
Press the Song Edit button.
Scroll to the Thin Events screen shown below using the data entry
control.
THIN EVENTS
chan aftertouch
4.
5.
Amt: 40
Select the type of event you want thinned, then set the amount of
thinning. The Home/Enter LED will be flashing once the cursor is
moved to one of the editable fields.
Press Enter. Select a key range for thinning. The default setting is all
keys.
SELECT KEY RANGE
Key Range: C-2 to:G8
Low Key
6.
High Key
Press Enter to thin events. Press any other button to Cancel the
operation.
XL-7 Operation Manual 103
Sequencer
Song Edit Menu
Erase Events
Specific types of events can be completely erased from a song.
Note: This filter erases event data recorded in Realtime Song mode. It does
NOT affect Pattern data.
Events that can be Erased
Notes
Program Changes
SysEx Data
Meter
Any Continuous Controller (1-95)
1.
2.
3.
Tempo
Poly Aftertouch
Channel Aftertouch
Pitch Wheel (Touchstrip)
To Erase Events from a Song:
Select the song you wish to edit.
Press the Song Edit button.
Scroll to the Erase Events screen shown below using the data entry
control.
ERASE EVENTS
program change
4.
5.
Select the type of events you want erased. The Home/Enter LED will be
flashing once the cursor is moved to the lower line of the display.
Press Enter. Move the cursor to the lower line to select a key range for
erasure. The default setting is all keys.
SELECT KEY RANGE
Key Range: C-2 to:G8
Low Key
6.
104 E-MU Systems
High Key
Press Enter to erase the events. Press any other button to Cancel the
operation.
Sequencer
Song Edit Menu
Transpose
All notes in a song can be transposed up or down from -127 to +127
semitones. For example with a setting of +7, all notes in the song would be
transposed up a perfect fifth.
Note: This filter transposes note data recorded in Realtime Song mode. It
does NOT affect notes recorded into Patterns.
1.
2.
3.
To Transpose Notes in a Song:
Select the song you wish to edit.
Press the Song Edit button.
Scroll to the Transpose screen using the data entry control.
TRANSPOSE
+7 semitones
4.
5.
Select the amount of transposition you want. The Home/Enter LED
will be flashing once the cursor is moved to the lower line of the
display.
Press Enter. Move the cursor to the lower line to select a key range to be
transposed. The default setting is all keys.
SELECT KEY RANGE
Key Range: C-2 to:G8
Low Key
6.
High Key
Press Enter to transpose the pattern. Press any other button to Cancel
the operation.
XL-7 Operation Manual 105
Sequencer
Song Edit Menu
Scale/Shift Velocity
This filter allows you to either scale (multiply by a value) or Scale (add a
value to) the velocity values of notes in a song. The Scale function is
performed before the Shift value is added.
Scale -
Shift -
Multiplies all note-on velocities by a percentage from 0% to
125%. Scaling by 100% would leave all velocity values
untouched. Scaling by 50% would cut all velocity values in half.
Adds or subtracts a specific velocity value (-127 to +127) to
every note-on event in the song.
Note: This filter scales velocity data recorded in Realtime Song mode. It
does NOT affect the velocity values of Pattern data.
1.
2.
3.
O
Tip: To set all notes to a
particular value, set Scale to 0%,
(this zeros the value) then set
Shift to the desired duration.
To Scale or Shift Velocity:
Select the song you wish to edit.
Press the Song Edit button.
Scroll to the Scale/Shift Velocity screen shown below using the data
entry control.
SCALE/SHIFT VELOCITY
Scale: 87%
Shift: +0
4.
5.
Select the amount of velocity scaling or shift. The Home/Enter LED
will be flashing once the cursor is moved to the lower line of the
display.
Press Enter. Move the cursor to the lower line to select a key range to be
velocity scaled or shifted. The default setting is all keys.
SELECT KEY RANGE
Key Range: C-2 to:G8
Low Key
6.
106 E-MU Systems
High Key
Press Enter to change velocity in the song. Press any other button to
Cancel the operation.
Sequencer
Song Edit Menu
Cut Track to
Clipboard
O
A section of the a track can be cut or copied and held on a digital
“clipboard” so that it can be pasted into another location in the track. The
clipboard contents will be held until replaced with another cut or copy
operation, or the power to XL-7is turned off. Cutting a section from a track
will leave a blank space in the Song.
Pattern Play events are NOT affected by the cut operation. Pattern play
events must be edited using Step Record.
Cut track can be used as
a way to erase a track.
The cut section is placed on the clipboard leaving a blank space
in the song track where the data was cut out.
1.
2.
3.

To Cut a Section of the Song Track:
Select the song you wish to edit.
Press the Song Edit button.
Scroll to the Cut Track to Clipboard screen shown below using the
data entry control.
The Track Number
cannot be changed in a Song
since there is only one track.
CUT TRACK TO CLIPBOARD
Track: 1
Bar:04 Len:07
4.
5.
Select the Start Bar and the Length (in bars) to be cut. The Home/Enter
LED will be flashing once the cursor is moved to the lower line of the
display.
Press Enter to cut the track. Press any other menu button to Cancel the
operation.
XL-7 Operation Manual 107
Sequencer
Song Edit Menu
Copy Track to
Clipboard
A section of a track can be copied and held on a digital “clipboard” so that
it can be pasted into another location on the song track. This function
makes a digital copy of the track and places it on the clipboard, where it
will be held until it is replaced with another cut or copy operation, or the
power to XL-7 is turned off. The copied Paste functions.
Pattern Play events are NOT affected by the copy operation. Pattern play
events must be edited using Step Record.
Song Track
The copied section is placed on the clipboard leaving the song
track intact and untouched.
1.
2.
3.

The Track Number
cannot be changed in a Song
since there is only one track.
Select the pattern you wish to edit.
Press the Pattern Edit button.
Scroll to the Copy Track to Clipboard screen shown below using the
data entry control.
COPY TRACK TO CLIPBOARD
Track: 1
Bar:06 Len:07
4.
5.
108 E-MU Systems
To Copy a Track:
Select the Start Bar and the Length (in bars) to be copied. The Home/
Enter LED will be flashing once the cursor is moved to the lower line of
the display.
Press Enter to copy the track. Press any other menu button to Cancel
the operation.
Sequencer
Song Edit Menu
Paste Clipboard to
Track
O
Once a track or track section has been cut or copied to the clipboard, it can
it can be pasted into another location on the song track from 1 to 99 times.
The Paste operation Merges the clipboard data with the data on the destination track at the selected bar position. This feature allows you to “bounce
down” multiple tracks to a single multichannel track. See below.
Pattern Play events are NOT affected by the Paste operation. Pattern
play events must be edited using Step Record.
Tracks can be freely cut,
copied and pasted between
songs and patterns.
Specified
Bar
Paste
Song Track
Clipboard
Paste x3
Specified
Bar
2-bars
3
1
2
Total Extension = 6 bars
1.
2.
3.

The Track Number
cannot be changed in a Song
since there is only one track.
_
You will not hear the
results of the Paste operation
until the sequence cycles around.
(Hint: Press RTZ)
Clipboard
To Paste the Clipboard into a Track:
Select the pattern you wish to edit.
Press the Pattern Edit button.
Scroll to the Paste Clipboard to Track screen shown below using the
data entry control.
PASTE CLIPBOARD TO TRACK
Track: 1
At Bar:06 X:1
4.
5.
6.
Select the number of times you want the clipboard data pasted.
Select the bar where the clipboard contents will be pasted.
Press Enter to paste the data. Press any other menu button to Cancel
the operation.
XL-7 Operation Manual 109
Sequencer
Song Edit Menu
Song Channel Assign
_
This screen allows you to assign the song track to channels1A-16A, or 1B16B, or to MIDI Out port A or B. The song track can be routed to: internal
MIDI channels (either A or B), the external MIDI ports, both, or none. Multi
A is routed to MIDI port A and Multi B is routed to MIDI port B, if “ext” or
“both” is selected as a destination. Selecting “None” disables playback.
Important Note:
Program change messages are
NOT transmitted externally if
the destination is set to Both. To
transmit program changes to
external MIDI devices, set the
destination to External (EXT).
SONG CHANNEL ASSIGN
Channel: MultiA
Dest:both
To Assign the Song Track to the A or B channels:
1.
Press the Song Edit button.
2.
Scroll to the Song Channel Assign screen shown above using the Data
Entry control.
3.
Select MultiA if you want the song track to go to channels 1A-16A or
MIDI port A. Select MultiB if you want the song track to go to channels
1B-16B or MIDI port B.
Select the desired destination for the track (internal channels, external
MIDI channels, both, or none).
Press the Song Edit button again to exit the module.
4.
5.
A or B
Destination
A
Channels
Song
Track
B
Channels
Internal
Channels 1B-16B
used internally
Song
Track
B
Channels
Internal
MIDI Port B used
Song
Track
B
Channels
Internal
Song disabled
both
none
110 E-MU Systems
Channels 1A-16A
used internally
Song
Track
Internal
MIDI Port A used
Sequencer
Song Edit Menu
Note List Editor
Individual MIDI notes in the song can be edited, inserted or deleted from
this screen. Place the cursor underneath the “Event Scroll Field” shown
below and turn the data entry control to navigate through events.
• Hold the Enter button and turn the data entry control to scroll through
events when the cursor is on any other field
Event Scroll Field
(scroll though events)
Track 01
T
01 NOTE <->
C01 C#1
v:100
MIDI
Channel
MIDI
Note
Note
Velocity
Time Location
002.03.008
dur:00.083
Note
Duration
• Erase button - - - - - Erases the currently selected event.
• Repeat button - - - - Duplicates the currently selected note, allowing you
to edit and create a new note.
1) Press Repeat.
2) Change the time, channel, or MIDI note.
Note: You cannot have two events with the exact same time and data in
a song. XL-7 will delete any duplicate events as soon as you increment
the event or exit the screen.
1.
2.
3.
4.
To Edit a MIDI Note:
Select the song you wish to edit.
Press the Song Edit button.
Scroll to the Note List Editor screen shown below using the data entry
control.
Press the Enter button as prompted by the display to begin editing.
T
01 NOTE <->
C01 C#1
v:100
5.
6.
O
You can edit notes and
note velocity by playing the
keyboard.
7.
8.
002.03.008
dur:00.083
Press the right Cursor button to move the cursor underneath the Event
Scroll Field (<->).
Turn the data entry control to scroll through the event list and locate
the event you want to edit.
Move the cursor to the data field you want to edit and make changes
using the data entry control.
Press the Song Edit button to exit the Song Edit module.
XL-7 Operation Manual 111
Sequencer
Song Edit Menu
Event List Editor
Continuous controller, pitch wheel. mono pressure, poly pressure and
program change MIDI messages can be edited, inserted or deleted using this
menu. Place the cursor underneath the “Event Scroll Field” shown
below and turn the data entry control to navigate through events.
The event list editor also allows you access to the Conductor Track which sets
the tempo and meter for the pattern.
Hold the Enter button and turn the data entry control to scroll through
events when the cursor is on any other field.
• Erase button - - - - - Erases the currently selected event.
• Repeat button - - - - Duplicates the currently selected event, allowing
you to edit and create a new event.
1) Press Repeat.
2) Change the time, channel, or MIDI event.
• Note: You cannot have two events with the exact same time and data in
a pattern. XL-7 will delete any duplicate events as soon as you increment
the event or exit the screen.
Continuous Controller Edit
Continuous controller numbers 1-95 can be edited. Continuous controllers
and Channel Pressure messages may range in value from 0-127.
Continuous Controller Screen
Track 01
Event Scroll Field
(scroll though events)
Time Location
T
01 EVENT <->
002.03.008
C01 controller #1
v:52
MIDI
Channel
Event
Type
Controller
No. Field
Event
Value
Pitch Strip Edit
Pitch Strip messages are bidirectional and may range in value from -8192 to
+8191.
Pitch Strip Screen
T
01 EVENT <->
C01 pitch strip:
002.03.004
-49
Bidirectional Pitch Value
112 E-MU Systems
Sequencer
Song Edit Menu
Poly Pressure Edit
Polyphonic pressure messages are assigned on a per not basis and have
range of 0-127. XL-7 can generate polyphonic pressure messages, but it
cannot receive them.
Poly Pressure Screen
T
01 EVENT <->
C01 polypress:
002.03.004
C1
62
MIDI
Note
Poly Pressure
Value
Program Change Edit
Program change numbers from 0-127, and on any bank number, can be
inserted, deleted or edited in this screen. If you do not select bank numbers
(off), the program change will be sent to the currently selected bank. See
“Bank Select Commands” on page 180.
Program Change Screen
T
01 EVENT <->
C01 prog: 10
Program
Change
Number
003.02.026
m:off
l:off
Bank
Number MSB
cc:0
Bank
Number LSB
cc:32
To Edit a MIDI Event:
1.
Select the pattern you wish to edit.
2.
Press the Pattern Edit button.
Scroll to the Event List Editor screen shown below using the data entry
control.
Press the Enter button as prompted by the display to begin editing.
3.
4.
T
01 EVENT <->
C01 controller #1
5.
002.03.008
v:52
Press the right Cursor button to move the cursor underneath the Event
Scroll Field (<->).
XL-7 Operation Manual 113
Sequencer
Song Edit Menu
6.
7.
8.
Revert to Saved Song
_
Caution: Never “Revert
to Saved” while the sequencer is
in record mode or the computer
may crash.
114 E-MU Systems
Turn the data entry control to scroll through the event list and locate
the event you want to edit.
Move the cursor to the data field you want to edit and make changes
using the data entry control.
Press the Pattern Edit button to exit the Pattern Edit module.
This screen allows you to discard any edits made to the song and restore the
last saved version. This is not the same as an “Undo” function since Revert
permanently discards any edits you have made since saving. This function
removes the asterisk in the display that appears after you’ve edited the
song.
REVERT TO SAVED PATTERN
0000 Arctic Drift
Sequencer
Connection Examples
Connection
Examples
Using the Internal
Sequencer with an
External MIDI
Keyboard
The internal architecture has been changed in this software revision. These
examples will help you with some common setups. When you have a
working setup, it’s a good idea to save and name the Multisetup to preserve
your work.
In this setup, an external MIDI keyboard transmitting on a single MIDI
channel is used to record into the internal sequencer. This demonstrates the
new Rechannelize Input feature which frees you from changing the MIDI
channel of your controller keyboard.

If Channel Assign in the
song/pattern edit menu is set to
to external or both, you’ll get
duplicate MIDI data if steps 2 &
3 in the setup are not set to Off.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Setup the Following Controls:
RECHANNELIZE INPUT (MIDI) - always
KEYBOARD OUTPUTS MIDI (MIDI) - don’t transmit
KNOBS OUTPUT MIDI (MIDI) - don’t transmit
MERGE MIDI IN TO OUT (MIDI) - Out A: off, Out B: off
LOCAL CONTROL (Controllers) - on
Save and Name the Multisetup. (Global)
Optional Steps:
7.
8.
TRIGGERS (Controllers) - Seq
(If you want to record them into the sequencer.)
PROGRAMMABLE KNOBS (Controllers) - Seq
(If you want to record them into the sequencer.)
XL-7 Operation Manual 115
Sequencer
Connection Examples
1.
2.
3.
4.
To Record a Sequence:
Select an empty pattern or song.
Press Preset View and select a preset for your first track.
Press Record, then setup the Quantize, Metronome and Length
parameters.
Press Play to begin recording. Recording begins after the count-in
period (if any). If you’re recording into a Pattern it will loop when it
reaches the end of its length.
To Record another Track
5. Press the Track button to the left of the LCD to increment the track
number.
6. Press Preset View and select a preset for the next track.
7. Press the Stop button twice to return to the beginning of the song or
pattern.
8. Press Record, then Play to begin recording.
9. Repeat steps 5 through 8 to continue laying down tracks.
Optional: Recording Tracks to control an External Sound Module
The diagram on page 115 shows two external sound modules connected.
The channel assignment screen controls the routing of sequencer tracks
to internal and external MIDI channels.
1. Set CHANNEL ASSIGN (Song/Pattern Edit) - Destination - ext
T
08 CHANNEL ASSIGN
Channel: 08A
Dest: ext
2.
116 E-MU Systems
Set the MIDI channel as desired for the external sound module.
Channels 01A-16A go to the “A” MIDI port; channels 01B-16B go to the
“B MIDI port.
Sequencer
Connection Examples
Using an External
Sequencer
In this setup, an external computer sequencer is used with the XL-7 acting
as a controller/sound module. As an optional connection, another sound
module can connected to the second MIDI Out of the XL-7.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
Setup the Following Controls:
RECHANNELIZE INPUT (MIDI) - off
KEYBOARD OUTPUTS MIDI (MIDI) - transmit
KNOBS OUTPUT MIDI (MIDI) - transmit
EXTERNAL SONG START/STOP (MIDI) - ignored
MERGE MIDI IN TO OUT (MIDI) - Out B: off (Out A optional)
KEYBOARD CHANNEL (Controllers) - 01B
(Your sequencer will rechannelize to the proper MIDI channel.)
LOCAL CONTROL (Controllers) - off
Enable Echo Thru on your external sequencer.
TRIGGERS (Controllers) - ext
PROGRAMMABLE KNOBS (Controllers) - ext
Save the Multisetup. (Global)
Optional Steps:
12.
13.
BASE TEMPO (MIDI) - ext
(If you want to synchronize internal LFOs and clocks to the sequencer.)
MERGE MIDI IN TO OUT (MIDI) - Out A: on
(If Output A is connected to another MIDI sound module or device.)
XL-7 Operation Manual 117
Sequencer
Connection Examples
118 E-MU Systems
Controllers Menu
The Controllers menu contains functions related to the keypad, knobs or
trigger buttons of XL-7. For example, the programmable knobs and triggers
are programmed in this menu. All Controllers menu data is saved with the
Multisetup. See page 130 for more information about Multisetups.
To enable the Controllers menu
Press the Controllers button, lighting the LED. The Controllers Menu
screen displays the menu page most recently selected since powering up
XL-7. The cursor appears below the first character of the screen heading on
line one.
To select a new screen
Press the Home/Enter button or press the Cursor button repeatedly until
the cursor is below the screen title heading. Rotate the data entry control to
select another screen.
To modify a parameter
Press either Cursor button repeatedly (or hold down the right cursor button
while turning the data entry control) until the cursor is below the desired
parameter value. Rotate the data entry control to change the value.
To return to the previously selected Mode/View screen
Press the Controllers button, turning off the LED.
XL-7 Operation Manual 119
Controllers Menu
Keyboard Transpose
Realtime
Control
Functions
Keyboard Transpose
This section describes how set up the Realtime Controllers on XL-7.
Realtime Controllers are performance controls such as the controller knobs,
velocity-sensitive keypads, and trigger buttons.
This option allows you to offset the transposition of the rubber keypads in
semitone intervals. This is allows you to easily play in different keys with
the one octave keypad and lets you access different groups of instruments
in a drum map. The transpose range is ±36 semitones.
KEYBOARD TRANSPOSE
+00 semitones
Keyboard Channel

This option allows you to select which channel is controlled by the
Keypads, Knobs and Touchstrip. You can select any of the 32 channels or
“Basic”. The “Basic” channel is the normal connection. With Basic selected,
the Keypads and knobs always control the preset showing in the Preset
View screen.
in Quick Edit mode the
front panel knobs only control
the “Basic Channel”.
Aftertouch Curves

Aftertouch is called
“Pressure” in the Preset Edit,
Cords menu. Pressure must be
programmed in the Cords
section for Aftertouch to have
any effect on the sound. See
page 211 for more information
about PatchCords.
KEYBOARD CHANNEL
Channel: Basic
XL-7 ‘s internal voices do not use the poly aftertouch data, even though it
can be transmitted out over MIDI.
AFTERTOUCH CURVES
channel: 1
1.
2.
3.
4.
120 E-MU Systems
poly: off
To Change the Aftertouch Curve:
Press the Controllers button.
Scroll to the Aftertouch Curves screen using the data entry control.
Move the cursor to the channel field and select curve 1-4 or off.
Press the Controllers button again to leave the menu.
Curve 2
Linear
Played Pressure
Played Pressure
Curve 3
Curve 4
Played Pressure
Local Control On/Off
Result Pressure
Curve 1
Result Pressure
Result Pressure
Result Pressure
Controllers Menu
Local Control On/Off
Played Pressure
Local Control is used to disconnect the keypad and controllers (knobs,
touchstrip, footswitches) from the sound generating section. Even though
disconnected from the internal synthesizer, the keypad and controllers are
still transmitted over MIDI. Local Control is normally turned Off when
recording into an external MIDI sequencer (set sequencer to Echo Thru).
Played data and recorded data are merged in the computer sequencer and
then sent back to the module. This feature can also be used if you want to
control another MIDI sound generator from the rubber keypads without
playing internal sounds.
LOCAL CONTROL
on
CHANGE
ignored
MIDI local control mode change messages can either be accepted or
ignored depending on the setting of the change field. With this set to
“ignored”, an incoming command to turn local control on or off would be
ignored.
XL-7 Operation Manual 121
Controllers Menu
Footswitch Jack Function
Turning Local Control Off allows you to use the Echo Thru feature on your sequencer
while sequencing. In conjunction with Echo Thru, Local Control Off allows you to record
into the external sequencer and hear the correct sounds whether you are recording or
playing back the sequence.
Footswitch Jack
Function
The two footswitch jacks on XL-7’s rear panel can be programmed to
perform a variety of functions. The footswitch jacks are designed to accept
momentary footswitches which connect the tip and ring. XL-7 senses
either normally-on or normally-off switches on power-up.
Each footswitch can be independently programmed. The following
functions can be controlled via the footswitches.
FOOTSWITCH JACK FUNCTION
1: MIDI FtSw
2: Tap Tempo
122 E-MU Systems
• MIDI Footswitch
In this mode the footswitch is routed to the PatchCord in the Preset Edit, Cords menu. (See pages 213
and 220.) It is also transmitted out on the Footswitch Controller number as programmed in the
Controllers menu. (See page 127.)
• Play/Stop
Pressing the footswitch once activates the Play
button on the front panel. Pressing the footswitch
again activates the front panel Stop button.
• Play
Pressing the footswitch activates the Play button on
the front panel. This works well in combination
with the following function.
Controllers Menu
Trigger Buttons Function
• Stop/RTZ
Pressing the footswitch activates the front panel
Stop button. Pressing the footswitch again invokes
the Return-to-Zero function.
• Punch I/O
When the sequencer is playing, the footswitch will
activate the Record button in order to punch-in to
record mode. Pressing the footswitch again will
punch-out of record.
When the sequencer is stopped, repeatedly pressing
the footswitch cycles through the three record
modes: realtime, grid & step record.
Trigger Buttons
Function
• Tap Tempo
Pressing the footswitch activates the front panel Tap
button, allowing you to tap in the current tempo
with your foot.
• Channel +
Pressing the footswitch increments the MIDI
channel number.
• Channel -
Pressing the footswitch decrements the MIDI
channel number.
• Sequence +
Pressing the footswitch increments the current
pattern or song number. The next pattern will begin
playing when the current pattern ends.
• Sequence -
Pressing the footswitch decrements the current
pattern or song number. The next pattern will begin
playing when the current pattern ends.
This option selects the function of the front panel “Triggers” button. The
“Triggers” button can be used either to Play Beats Parts or to Play Note
Events.
• Play Beats Parts
In this mode and when the Triggers button is
selected, the sixteen command buttons turn Beats
parts on and off.
• Play Note Events
In this mode and when the Triggers button is
selected, the sixteen command buttons work like
keyboard notes. Each button can be assigned to any
MIDI note, on any MIDI Channel (01-16), with any
velocity (0-127), and can be set to be latched or
momentarily on.
TRIGGER BUTTONS FUNCTION
Play Note Events
XL-7 Operation Manual 123
Controllers Menu
Trigger Buttons
Trigger Buttons
O
Use the Trigger Button
Key Velocity to adjust the volume
of Beats relative to volume of the
Pattern or Song.
Select Triggers mode by pressing the mode select button so that the
“Triggers” LED is illuminated. Now the 16 buttons work like keyboard
notes. Each of the 16 buttons can be assigned to any MIDI note, on any
MIDI Channel (01A-16B), with any velocity (0-127), and can be set to be
latched or momentarily on. Latched notes will hold until the button is
pressed again. Latched notes will be indicated by the LEDs. Each trigger can
also be routed to: the internal synth engine, to the MIDI ports, both
internal and MIDI, or to the sequencer input.
Simply move the cursor from the “TRIGGERS” field and play a note to enter
the MIDI key and velocity. Pressing a Trigger Button anytime while in this
screen automatically selects that trigger button for programming!
See the block diagram showing “Triggers & Programmable Knobs” on
page 320 for detailed information about the actual routing path.
Trigger Button Select
O
Trigger button
presses can be recorded
into patterns and songs.
T1 TRIGGERS D3
Latch:off Ch: 01A
Latch on/off
O
Latched buttons are
especially useful for triggering
arpeggiated presets.
MIDI Channel
Key Velocity
Vel: 127
seq
Destination
To Setup the Trigger Buttons
1.
Press the Controllers button. Its LED will illuminate.
2.
Turn the data entry control to select the “TRIGGERS” screen.
Use the left/right cursor controls to select the fields shown above.
Select the MIDI key, the MIDI channel, the Velocity, Latch on/off and
destination for each of the 16 trigger buttons.
Save the Multisetup if you want to save these settings. See page 131.
3.
4.
5.
1.
2.
124 E-MU Systems
MIDI Key
To Play the Trigger Buttons
Press the Mode button so that the Triggers LED illuminates.
Play the Trigger buttons.
Controllers Menu
Programmable Knobs
Programmable
Knobs
If this parameter is set to “Ext,” or “Both,” the system sends MIDI controller
messages when you turn the Controller knobs. If set to External, the knobs
do NOT control internal synth parameters and only used as external MIDI
controllers. When the programmable knobs are routed to “Seq” they can be
recorded into the internal sequencer.
Each knob can be programmed to send on any MIDI channel (01A-16B)
and on any continuous controller number from 1-95 The “Controller
Function Select” button (page 37) must be set to “Program” in order to
transmit. The knobs only generate a message when you move a knob to a
new value. The Controller Knob LEDs always remain off in this mode.
See the block diagram showing “Triggers & Programmable Knobs” on
page 320 for detailed information about the actual routing path.
O
Turning a knob while in
this screen automatically selects
that knob for programming!
To Program the Programmable Knobs
1.
Press the Controllers button. Its LED will illuminate.
2.
Turn the data entry control to select the “Programmable Knobs” screen.
Knob #
K1 PROGRAMMABLE KNOBS
Ctrl: 22
Ch:01A
Ext
CC#
3.
4.
5.
Knob Preset
Quick-Edit
MIDI Chan
Int/Ext/Both/Seq
Use the left/right cursor controls to select the fields.
Select the MIDI Continuous Controller number, the MIDI channel, and
Internal/External/Both/Sequencer for each of the 16 knobs.
Save the Multisetup if you want to save these settings. See page 131.
“Quick-Edit” changes the initial controller setting in the preset whenever
you move a Control Knob. This parameter selects whether or not the front
panel Controller Knobs are used to Quick-Edit the currently selected preset.
See “Real-time Controller Knobs” on page 37 in the Operations chapter for
more details.
KNOBS PRESET QUICK-EDIT
disabled
XL-7 Operation Manual 125
Controllers Menu
Real-time Controller Assignment
Real-time Controller
Assignment
O
Tip: XL-7 factory presets
have certain synth parameters
assigned to each controller letter
and so these are “Global”
controller assignments.
For example, assigning a MIDI
controller to “A” in this screen
would let you control filter Fc for
all the factory presets. See
“Front Panel Knob Functions” on
page 293.
Use these three pages to assign sixteen real-time control sources. Each MIDI
Controller is assigned a letter (A - P). The front panel Controller Knobs and
sixteen MIDI controller numbers share the A-P controller routings. These
screens let you select which MIDI real-time controllers numbers will be
received (from 1 to 31 and from 64 to 95) and which controller numbers
will be transmitted over MIDI if the front panel controls are turned.
The PatchCord routing and amount in the Preset Edit menu determine
what effect the controller has on each preset. Real-time controllers are
shown in the PatchCord menu as MIDI A through MIDI P.
The Real-time Controller assignment also specifies which controller
numbers are transmitted when the “Knobs MIDI Out” is enabled (see
“Knobs Output MIDI” on page 146).
REALTIME CONTROLLER #
A: 74 B: 71 C: 25 D: 26
REALTIME CONTROLLER #
E: 73 F: 75 G: 85 H: 72
REALTIME CONTROLLER #
I: 78 J: 77 K: 27 L: 28
REALTIME CONTROLLER #
M: 01 N: 03 O: 82 P: 83
Note: Controllers 7 and 10 are already assigned to Volume and Pan for each
MIDI channel. Controllers 91 & 93 are the standard controller numbers for
reverb and chorus send amounts, but are not assigned.
Following are a few of the standardized MIDI Controller numbers as
defined by the MIDI manufacturers association. The controllers shown in
Bold are automatically routed to the destination (volume & pan) or have
their own PatchCord source. Others, such as Portamento Time, can be
routed using a PatchCord to have the desired effect.
126 E-MU Systems
Controllers Menu
MIDI Footswitch Assign
1 - Modulation Wheel
2 - Breath Controller
3 - Aftertouch
4 - Foot Pedal
5 - Portamento Time
6 - Data Entry
MIDI Footswitch
Assign
7 - Volume
8 - Balance
9 - Undefined
10 - Pan
11 - Expression
Like the MIDI Controllers, you can assign three MIDI footswitches to MIDI
footswitch numbers. Footswitches numbers are from 64-79. Destinations
for the footswitch controllers are programmed in the PatchCord section of
the Preset Edit menu. The rear panel footswitches 1 & 2 are connected to
footswitch controllers 1 & 2 in this screen. Pressing a footswitch transmits
on the MIDI controller number programmed here. Footswitch 3 routes
incoming MIDI footswitch data to the PatchCord section of XL-7.
FOOTSWITCH CONTROLLER #
1: 64
2: 65
3: 66
Tempo Controller
This function allows a MIDI controller to change the Base Tempo of the
Master Clock. The Master Clock is used by the sequencer, arpeggiators,
clock divisor PatchCords, tempo-based envelopes and synced LFOs. (See
“Clock Modulation” on page 160.) You can assign any controller number
from 0-31, mono key pressure, or the Touchstrip to change the Global
Tempo.
A different controller can be used to change the tempo up or down. The
Touchstrip can be assigned to both the up and down parameters to vary the
tempo up and down from a single controller. If any other controller is
assigned to both the up and down parameters, XL-7 redefines the center of
the controller’s range as zero (so it acts like a pitch wheel).
MIDI Controller values are added to the Base Tempo with a range of ±64.
When the controller is set to “off” the tempo returns to its original setting.
Controllers are only recognized on the selected MIDI channel, unless XL-7
is in Omni mode, in which case all channels are accepted. This control has
no effect when using an external clock.
TEMPO CONTROLLER#
Up: 03
Down: 09
CHAN
16B
XL-7 Operation Manual 127
Controllers Menu
Tempo Controller
128 E-MU Systems
Global Menu
The Global menu contains functions that affect the overall operation of
XL-7. For example, changing the Master Tune parameter changes the
tuning of all the presets, not just the one currently displayed.
To enable the Global menu
Press the Global button, lighting the LED. The Global Menu screen displays
the menu page most recently selected since powering up XL-7. The cursor
appears below the first character of the screen heading on line one.
_
Warning: Global Menu
changes are automatically
saved when you exit the menu.
If the power is turned off before
you exit the menu any changes
you have made will be lost.
To select a new screen
Press the Home/Enter button or press the Cursor button repeatedly until
the cursor is below the screen title heading. Rotate the data entry control to
select another screen.
To modify a parameter
Press either Cursor button repeatedly (or hold down the right cursor button
while turning the data entry control) until the cursor is below the desired
parameter value. Rotate the data entry control to change the value.
To return to the previously selected screen
Press the Global button, turning off the LED.
XL-7 Operation Manual 129
Global Menu
Multisetups
Multisetups
A Multisetup is a group of parameters that you might associate with a
particular performance setup or song. It is like a “snapshot” of the current
configuration of the XL-7. There are 64 setups numbered 0-63. All the
Multisetups are user programmable except 63, the factory setup.
A Multisetup includes ALL the following parameters:
•
•
•
•
Preset/Volume/Pan/Arp assignments for each of the 32 MIDI channels.
Multisetup Name
ALL Controllers menu parameters
ALL Global Menu parameters, except…
User Key Tuning Tables
• ALL Arp Menu parameters, except…
User Arp Patterns
• ALL MIDI Menu parameters, except…
MIDI Program Change->Preset Map
When a Multisetup is selected, it overwrites the current Preset/Vol/Pan/Arp
selections on all MIDI channels. It also overwrites the Controllers, Global,
Arp, and MIDI menu parameters (with the exceptions noted above).
If you make changes to any of these menus, XL-7 will retain the changes,
even if power is turned off. They are of course, overwritten when you
restore a Multisetup.
Restoring
Multisetups
XL-7 contains 64 Multisetup locations. These are all User locations except
location 63, which is a factory defined Multisetup.
Multisetups can be restored using a MIDI Bank Select command.
Select: cc00 = 80, cc32 = 00, (dec) then send a Program Change command
corresponding to the Multisetup you wish to select.
RESTORE MULTISETUP
003 Jazzercide
1.
130 E-MU Systems
To Restore (Select) a Multisetup:
From the Global menu, scroll to the Restore Multisetup screen using
the data entry control. The menu page most recently selected since
powering up XL-7 will be displayed. The cursor appears below the first
character of the screen heading on line one.
Global Menu
Multisetups
2.
3.
4.
Multisetup Name
Press either cursor button to move the cursor to the bottom line of the
screen.
Now, use the data entry control to select a Multisetup. The Enter LED
will be flashing.
Press the Enter button to load the selected Multisetup.
Multisetups can be named to make it easier to remember their purpose.
1.
Scroll to the “Setup Name” screen (shown below) using the data entry
control.
MULTISETUP NAME
020 User Setup 23
2.
3.
4.
Saving Multisetups
1.
2.
Press either cursor button to move the cursor to the bottom line of the
screen.
Change the characters using the data entry control. Change the cursor
position using the cursor buttons.
Press Enter or move the cursor to the top line when you’re finished
naming the multisetup.
To Save a Multisetup:
Set the Preset, Volume, Pan and Arp settings (in Preset View mode) for
all channels. Set the Global, MIDI, and Controllers menu parameters
the way you want them.
Press the Global button, then scroll to the “Save Setup” screen (shown
below) using the data entry control.
SAVE SETUP TO
020 Destination Multisetup
3.
4.
5.
Press either cursor button to move the cursor to the bottom line of the
screen.
Now, use the data entry control to select the destination location. The
Enter LED will be flashing.
Press the Enter button to save the Multisetup.
XL-7 Operation Manual 131
Global Menu
Defining Global Parameters
Defining
Global
Parameters
Transpose/Tune
Global setup parameters affect overall performance, range, and global
effects. This section describes the Global parameters and how to define
them.
The Transpose parameter transposes the key of all presets, in semitone
intervals. The transpose range is ± 24 semitones.
Master Tune adjusts the fine tuning of all presets so that you can tune XL-7
to other instruments. The master tuning range is ± 1 semitone in 1/64th
semitone increments (1.56 cents). A master tune setting of “+00” indicates
that XL-7 is perfectly tuned to concert pitch (A=440 Hz).
MASTER TRANSPOSE
+00 semitones
Bend Range
The Master Bend Range parameter sets the range of the touchstrip or pitch
wheel if you have a MIDI keyboard connected. This affects only presets that
have their individual Pitch Bend range (defined in the Preset Edit menu) set
to Master. See page 214. The maximum pitch bend range is ±12 semitones or
one octave in each direction.
MASTER BEND RANGE
+/- 7 semitones
132 E-MU Systems
TUNE
+00
Global Menu
Defining Global Parameters
Incoming velocity data or keypad velocity can be altered by one of thirteen
velocity curves. These specially designed curves allow you to customize the
dynamic feel of the pads to your individual playing style, or to better adapt
XL-7 to a external MIDI controller. You can select one of thirteen global
velocity curves or to leave the data unaltered (linear).
MASTER VELOCITY CURVE
13
120
Result Velocity
Result Velocity
120
100
Linear
80
60
40
20
100
Curve 2
80
60
40
20
0
0
0
20
40
60
0
80 100 120
20
40
60
80 100 120
Played Velocity
Played Velocity
120
Result Velocity
120
Result Velocity
Velocity Curve
100
Curve 9
80
60
40
20
100
80
60
Curve 13
40
20
0
0
0
20
40
60
80 100 120
Played Velocity
0
20
40
60
80 100 120
Played Velocity
For a complete list of all available velocity curves, see “Velocity Curves” on
page 314 of the Appendix.
XL-7 Operation Manual 133
Global Menu
Defining Global Parameters
Mix Output
The Mix Output parameter allows you to override the routing assignments
made in each preset and instead assign the outputs according to MIDI
channel. For each of the 32 MIDI channels, you can select Send 1-4, or
Preset. When Preset is selected, the output assignment defined in the Preset
Edit menu is used.
MIX OUTPUT
channel 16A: Send2->main
Indicates that the dry signal is
routed to the Main output jacks.
The Output Routing field (pointed to by the arrow) reflects the true
routing of Send 2 or Send 3 to either:
1) the effects processor input or… 2) the rear panel submix jacks.
Since the Sub 1 output is NOT being used, the signal is routed through the
effects processors, then on to the main outputs. If a plug were inserted into
one of the Sub 1 jacks the destination field would read “Sub1” and the dry
signal would be routed directly to the Sub 1 outputs on the back panel.
MIX OUTPUT
channel 15A: use preset

Send Routings
Send 1 - Main Outputs
Send 2 - Subout 1 or Main Outs
Send 3 - Subout 2 or Main Outs
Send 4 - Main Outputs
The Sends function as effect processor inputs (effect sends). Send 2 and
Send 3 are also used to route sounds to the Sub 1 and 2 outputs on the back
panel. When a plug is inserted into the associated Submix jack on the back
panel, the Dry portion of the Send is disconnected from the effects
processor and the signal is routed directly to the output jack. The Arrow
points to the actual output routing. If you don’t want the wet portion of
the signal in the main mix, turn down the Send Level. The entire Send is
disconnected from the Effects Processors even if only one plug is inserted into the
Submix jack.
The four Effect Sends allow you to get the most out of the two effect
processors. For example, with Effect B set to an echo algorithm, you could
route one MIDI channel to Send 3 and set the effect amount to 80%.
Another MIDI channel could be routed to Send 4 with an effect amount of
only 5%. This is almost like having two different effects!
The Mix Output function is also useful when sequencing since it lets you
route specific MIDI channels (and thus sequencer tracks) to specific Sub
outputs (on the back panel) where there they can be processed with EQ or
other outboard effects.
134 E-MU Systems
Global Menu
Defining Global Parameters
OUTPUT SECTION
& EFFECTS PROCESSORS
MIDI Channel 1A
FX Sends
Preset
Send 2 10%
MIDI Channel 2A
Preset
Send 3 0%
Send 4 0%
MIDI Channel 3A
S
E
N
D
MIDI Channel 16A
1
FX Sends
Send 4 15%
S
E
Chorus
M
A
I
N
Send 1 0%
Send 3 20%
MIDI CHANNEL
Effect
A
B➟A
Send 2 0%
MIDI Channel 1B
Hall 1
Send 1 15%
Effect
B
Jack
Detect
N
D
2
S
U
B
1
MIDI Channel 2B
MIDI Channel 3B
S
E
N
D
3
MIDI Channel 16B
S
E
MIDI CHANNEL
N
D
Jack
Detect
S
U
B
2
4
Sends 2 and 3 can be routed to the effects processors or to rear panel submix jacks.
When a plug is inserted into a Submix jack, the dry portion of the Send is disconnected
from the effects processor and is routed directly to the Submix output jacks.
XL-7 Operation Manual 135
Global Menu
Master Effects
Master Effects
The digital effect processors can be programmed as part of the preset (using
the Preset Edit menu) so that effects will change along with the preset.
However, there are only two effect processors, and so you cannot have a
different effect on each preset when in Multi mode.
The Master Effects settings assign the effect processors “globally” for all
presets to provide a way to use the effects in Multi mode. Detailed information is presented in the Effects chapter (see Effects on page 255).
Effects Mode
The FX Mode page enables or bypasses the effects. When the FX Mode is set
to “bypass,” the effects are turned off on a global scale. This includes Effects
programmed in the preset.
FX MODE
enabled
Effects Multi Mode
Control
The routing scheme for the two stereo effects processors provides a lot of
versatility. When in multi mode, you can “use master settings” which
applies the Master effects settings to all 32 MIDI channels.
FX MULTIMODE CONTROL
use master settings
If you want more control, you can use the “channel” setting which applies
the effects settings of the preset on a specified channel to all the other
channels. Changing the preset on the specified channel changes the effect.
FX MULTIMODE CONTROL
preset on channel 1
If you are in Omni or Poly modes this parameter is disabled and the
message in parentheses explains that XL-7 is currently in Omni mode.
FX MULTIMODE CONTROL
(using Omni mode)
136 E-MU Systems
Global Menu
Master Effects
Master FXA
Algorithm
This function selects the type of effect used for the “A” effect. The following
effect types are available.
MASTER FXA ALGORITHM
Room 1
A Effect Types
1.
Room 1
23.
BBall Court
2.
Room 2
Room 3
Hall 1
Hall 2
Plate
Delay
Panning Delay
Multitap 1
Multitap Pan
3 Tap
3 Tap Pan
Soft Room
Warm Room
Perfect Room
Tiled Room
Hard Plate
Warm Hall
Spacious Hall
Bright Hall
Bright Hall Pan
Bright Plate
24.
Gymnasium
Cavern
Concert 9
Concert 10 Pan
Reverse Gate
Gate 2
Gate Pan
Concert 11
Medium Concert
Large Concert
Large Concert Pan
Canyon
DelayVerb 1
DelayVerb 2
DelayVerb 3
DelayVerb 4 Pan
DelayVerb 5 Pan
DelayVerb 6
DelayVerb 7
DelayVerb 8
DelayVerb 9
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
25.
26.
27.
28.
29.
30.
31.
32.
33.
34.
35.
36.
37.
38.
39.
40.
41.
42.
43.
44.
XL-7 Operation Manual 137
Global Menu
Master Effects
FXA Parameters:
Decay/HF Damping
FxB -> FxA
This page lets you define the parameters of the selected Effects algorithm.
Use this page to setup the effect decay, high frequency damping amount
and to route “B” effects through the “A” effects. See “Effect Parameters” on
page 257 for more details.
FXA
FXA Send Amounts
DECAY
040
HFDAMP
096
These parameters set the effects amounts for each of the four stereo effects
busses. See “Master Effects” on page 260 for detailed information.
FXA SEND AMOUNTS
2: 50%
3: 10%
Master FXB
Algorithm
1:100%
4: 0%
This parameter selects the type of effect used for the “B” effect. The
following effect types are available.
MASTER FXB ALGORITHM
Chorus 1
138 E-MU Systems
FxB>FxA
001
Global Menu
Master Effects
B Effect Types
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
FXB Parameters:
Feedback/LFO Rate
Delay Time
Chorus 1
Chorus 2
Chorus 3
Chorus 4
Chorus 5
Doubling
Slapback
Flange 1
Flange 2
Flange 3
Flange 4
Flange 5
Flange 6
Flange 7
Big Chorus
Symphonic
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
29.
30.
31.
32.
Ensemble
Delay
Delay Stereo
Delay Stereo 2
Panning Delay
Delay Chorus
Pan Delay Chorus 1
Pan Delay Chorus 2
Dual Tap 1/3
Dual Tap 1/4
Vibrato
Distortion 1
Distortion 2
Distorted Flange
Distorted Chorus
Distorted Double
The FXB parameters setup the characteristics of the effect. Use this page to
define the feedback amount, the LFO rate and delay amount for the
selected type “B” effect. See “Effect Parameters” on page 257 for details.
FXB
FXB Send Amounts
17.
FEEDBK
000
LFORATE
003
DELAY
0
These parameters set the effects amounts for each of the four stereo effects
busses. See the Effects chapter for detailed information.
FXB SEND AMOUNTS
2: 50%
3: 10%
1:100%
4: 0%
XL-7 Operation Manual 139
Global Menu
Miscellaneous Parameters
Miscellaneous
Parameters
Edit All Layers Enable
This function allows you to turn the Edit All Layers feature on or off. “Edit
All Layers” is an Edit menu feature which allows you to select all layers (the
letter “A” appears in the layer field) in order to edit all four layers simultaneously. Because this feature can be confusing to the beginning
programmer, it can be disabled here in the Global menu.
EDIT ALL LAYERS
enabled
User Key Tuning
O
The user key tuning can
be used to tune individual
percussion instruments.
Output Format
User Key Tuning lets you create and modify 12 user definable tuning tables.
The initial frequency of every key can be individually tuned, facilitating the
creation of alternate or microtonal scales.
Using the cursor keys and the data entry control, select the user table
number, the key name, the coarse tuning and the fine tuning. The key
name is variable from C-2 to G8. Coarse Tuning is variable from 0 to 127
semitones. The fine tuning is variable from 00 to 63 in increments of 1/64
of a semitone (approx. 1.56 cents). For each preset, the specific tuning table
is selected in the Preset Edit menu. See page 222.
USER KEY TUNING
Key: C1
Crs: 036
The Output Format parameter sets the digital audio output format. The
available formats are S/PDIF, and AES pro. If you are using the digital
output, choose either S/PDIF or AES pro to match the format of the
receiving device.
OUTPUT FORMAT
S/PDIF
140 E-MU Systems
Table: 1
Fine: 00
Global Menu
Miscellaneous Parameters
_
Although the S/PDIF digital output can transmit AES Pro format, you’ll
need an adapter cable for the electrical connections. The diagram below
shows how an adapter cable for AES pro should be wired.
DON’T CHEAP OUT!
Always use high quality cable for
digital audio connections.
To AES
Device
1
+
2
N.C.
3
-
Pin
RCA
Shield
From
XL-7
Digital OUT
If you use an adapter cable to connect the S/PDIF digital audio output to AES gear, make
sure to use high quality, low capacitance cable.
Screen Viewing
Angle
This function changes the viewing angle of the display so that you can read
it easily from either above or below the unit. The angle is adjustable from
+7 to -8. Positive values will make the display easier to read when viewed
from above. Negative values make the display easier to read from below.
VIEWING ANGLE
+0
XL-7 Operation Manual 141
Global Menu
Miscellaneous Parameters
142 E-MU Systems
MIDI Menu
Most of the parameters in XL-7 that relate to MIDI are contained within
this menu. You can merge MIDI data, change the continuous controller
assignments, turn program changes off or on, and lots more.
MIDI menu settings are saved with the current Multimap.
To enable the MIDI menu
Press the MIDI button, lighting the LED. The MIDI Menu screen displays
the menu page most recently selected since powering up XL-7. The cursor
appears below the first character of the screen heading on line one.
_
Warning: MIDI Menu
changes are automatically
saved when you exit the menu.
If the power is turned off before
you exit the menu any changes
you have made will be lost.
To select a new screen
Press the Home/Enter button or press the Cursor button repeatedly until
the cursor is below the screen title heading. Rotate the data entry control to
select another screen.
To modify a parameter
Press either Cursor button repeatedly (or hold down the right cursor button
while turning the data entry control) until the cursor is below the desired
parameter value. Rotate the data entry control to change the value.
To return to the previously selected Mode/View screen
Press the MIDI button, turning off the LED.
XL-7 Operation Manual 143
MIDI Menu
Base Tempo
Base Tempo
XL-7 contains an internal Master Clock which runs the sequencer, arpeggiators, synchronizes the LFOs when in tempo-based mode, controls the
times of tempo-based envelopes, and can be used as a modulation source in
the PatchCords section.
You’ll notice that there are two tempo values shown in the display.
• Base Tempo - This is the base tempo setting before being modified by
the Tempo Controller (if engaged). See “Tempo Controller” on page 127.
• (Current Tempo) - This is the actual tempo! The current tempo is
equal to the base tempo modulated by the MIDI controller specified in
the Tempo Controller screen. If no MIDI Tempo controller message has
been received since the last Base Tempo change, the Current Tempo will
be equal to the Base Tempo.
The LED to the right of the button blinks at the current tempo rate.
To
1.
2.
Change the Base Tempo
Move the cursor to the lower line of the display.
Adjust the Base Tempo using the data entry control.
BASE TEMPO (0 = MidiClk)
120 bpm (current: 182)
O
You can also tap tempo
using a footswitch. See
page 122.
3.
1.
2.
Rechannelize Input
To Tap Tempo - Tap the Tap button at least three times. Keep tapping
to continuously update the tempo on each tap. The tap tempo range is
25-300 bpm. The Base Tempo values range from 1 through 300 beats
per minute (BPM).
To Use an External MIDI Clock:
Move the cursor to the lower line of the display.
Turn the data entry control all the way counter-clockwise and select
“ext” to use an external MIDI clock source.
This feature makes it easier to record to the internal sequencer using an
external keyboard. Rechannelize Input changes the channel of incoming
MIDI data according to the settings in the Channel Assignment screen.
To record multiple tracks, you simply change the track number and preset.
You don’t have to change the channel number of your external MIDI
controller.
Rechannelize Input can be set to Off, Always or On Record. When set to
On Record, the input will only be rechannelized when the Record LED is
illuminated (Record or Record-Pause mode). This allows normal MIDI
144 E-MU Systems
MIDI Menu
Rechannelize Input
channel routing except when recording, when the channel data will be
changed to match the current track.
RECHANNELIZE INPUT
To Track Dest: always
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Using Rechannelize Input to Record from a MIDI Keyboard:
Select an empty pattern.
Set Rechannelize Input to Always.
Select a preset for Channel 1 (C01A) from the Preset View screen.
(Note that your MIDI keyboard always plays the preset assigned to the
channel shown in the display.)
Turn Preset View Off to show the pattern screen again.
Press Record, then set the Pattern Length, Quantize & Metronome.
Press Play to begin recording.
Press Stop when finished. (Press Stop twice to Return to Zero.)
Select a preset for Channel 2 (C02A) from the Preset View screen.
Notice that the keyboard now plays the new preset.
Press Record, then Play to begin recording.
Continue to record tracks.
Out A
Out B
Rechannelize
Input
Screen
Rechan
On/Off
MIDI In
Pads
Off
Channel
Assignment
Screen
On
Sequencer
Track
Routing
MIDI Out
(0-31)
Synth
Engine
Sequencer
Recording
Input
The Rechannelize Input feature routes performance data through the Sequencer
Track Routing so that you don’t have to change channels on your MIDI keyboard.
XL-7 Operation Manual 145
MIDI Menu
Keyboard Outputs MIDI
Keyboard Outputs
MIDI
This option allows you select whether or not the keypad, touchstrip, and
footswitch data is transmitted on MIDI output port A or B. When this
option is set to: “don’t transmit”, the keypads, touchstrip, and footswitch
only control the “current” preset. (The current preset is the one currently
showing in the Preset View window). Touchstrip data is transmitted as the
Pitch Wheel controller. Footswitches are transmitted on the MIDI CC
numbers defined for Footswitch 1 & 2 in the Controllers menu.
KEYBOARD OUTPUTS MIDI
transmit
Knobs Output MIDI
This function allows you to select whether or not knob data is transmitted.
The knobs transmit on the controller numbers defined by the Real-time
Controller Assign parameter (See page 126).
KNOBS MIDI OUT
don’t transmit
Transmit MIDI Clock
This option enables or disables the transmission of MIDI clock from the
MIDI out port. When XL-7 is running on its own internal clock (page 144)
it transmits 24 MIDI clocks per quarter note. When XL-7 is slaved to an
external MIDI clock, it mirrors the incoming clock data.
TRANSMIT MIDI CLOCK
off
External Song Start/
Stop
This feature lets the sequencer receive or ignore incoming MIDI Song Start
(0xFA), Continue (0xFB), Stop (0xFC) and Song Position Pointer (0xF2)
messages.
EXTERNAL SONG START/STOP
accepted
146 E-MU Systems
MIDI Menu
Merge MIDI In to MIDI Out
To use the instrument as a MIDI sound module with an external sequencer,
set this control to “ignored.” In this setting the internal sequencer won’t
start up every time your computer sequencer sends a start command.
If you’re using and external MIDI controller to start and stop the internal
sequencer, set this control to “accepted.”
Merge MIDI In to
MIDI Out
MIDI data received at the MIDI In port can be merged with outgoing MIDI
data at either, or both of the two MIDI out ports. This allows you to
connect a MIDI keyboard to XL-7MP-7 and control both XL-7MP-7 and any
other external synthesizers down the line.
MERGE MIDI IN TO OUT
Out A: off
Out B: on
MIDI In Channels
This menu allows MIDI data received at the MIDI input port to control
either the internal “A” or “B” channels. With this switch set to “B”, you
could play an external MIDI keyboard on channels 1B-16B while channels
1A-16A remain dedicated to the internal sequencer.
MIDI IN CHANNELS
0 to 16: A
MIDI Enable
MIDI Enable lets you turn each MIDI channel on and off independently
when in Multi mode. This feature is helpful when you have other devices
connected to the same MIDI line and do not want the XL-7 unit to respond
to the MIDI channels reserved for the other devices.
MIDI ENABLE
channel 01A: On
Because the MIDI Enable function only makes sense if you are in Multi
mode, XL-7 disables this feature when in Omni or Poly mode.
XL-7 Operation Manual 147
MIDI Menu
Receive Program Change
Receive Program
Change
In Multi
Mode
MIDI ENABLE
channel 16B: On
In Omni
Mode
MIDI ENABLE
(using Omni mode)
Use this function to instruct XL-7 to utilize or ignore incoming MIDI preset
changes or Bank Select commands for each channel. Use the cursor buttons
to select the channel number field, then use the data entry control to select
a channel number. Use the cursor button again to select the On/Off field
and the data entry control to change the value.
RECEIVE PROGRAM CHANGE
channel 01A : on
MIDI Program
Change -> Preset
You can also remap incoming MIDI program changes to a different
numbered preset. This is a handy feature when your master keyboard
cannot send a bank change or you want to reorder preset numbers. Any
preset can be mapped to any incoming MIDI program change number.
For example, you could set up the Program -> Preset map to call up preset
#12 whenever XL-7 receives MIDI program change #26.

The Program->Preset
Change only works for program
changes received in Bank 0.
The four fields shown below are editable.
MIDI PROG CHNG
000
Incoming Program
Change in Bank 0
148 E-MU Systems
ROM Bank
->
PRESET
User
0000
Program No.
Bank No.
MIDI Menu
MIDI SysEx ID
O
Programs and presets are
the same thing. “Preset” is the
E-MU term for MIDI Program.
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
2
0
1
0
0
0
1
0
4
0
1
0
0
0
2
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09
10 44 91 50 01 15 88 99 78 32 88
2
20 34 73 106 55 43 75 12 120 121 100
Selected
Program
30 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39
40 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49
Mapped
Program
50 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59
60 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69
70 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79
80 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89
90 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
100 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109
110 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119
120 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127
In this chart, program changes 10-29 have been remapped to new preset numbers. All
other presets are selected normally.
MIDI SysEx ID
_
WARNING: When
transferring SysEx data from one
XL-7 to another, the ID numbers
of both units must be the same.
This page defines the MIDI system exclusive (SysEx) device ID number. The
SysEx ID lets an external programming unit to distinguish between
multiple XL-7 units connected to the same preset editor. In this case each
unit must have a unique SysEx ID number.
MIDI SYSEX ID
000
XL-7 Operation Manual 149
MIDI Menu
MIDI SysEx Packet Delay
MIDI SysEx Packet
Delay
The MIDI SysEx Packet Delay command lets you specify the amount of
delay between MIDI SysEx packets going out of XL-7 so that your computer
sequencer can record this large chunk of data over a longer period of time.
On playback from the sequencer, the SysEx data will be fed more slowly
into XL-7 so that the its input buffer does not overflow, causing an error.
Many sequencers allow you to “Time Stamp” SysEx data as it is recorded.
This is the preferred mode for recording SysEx data.
The packet delay range is from 0 through 8000 milliseconds. A delay value
of zero allows full speed MIDI transfer. If you are experiencing data transmission errors, try increasing the delay value until the problem disappears.
MIDI SYSEX PACKET DELAY
300 milliseconds
Send MIDI System
Exclusive Data
This command transmits MIDI System Exclusive (SysEx) data to the MIDI
Out port of XL-7. The MIDI data can be sent to a computer, sequencer or to
another XL-7. When transferring data between two XL-7s be sure both
units have the same SysEx ID number! Using the cursor key and the data
entry control, select the type of MIDI data you want to transmit. Following
are descriptions of the types of MIDI data that can be transmitted.
Current Multisetup
Transmits all parameters in the Global menu except Tuning Tables,
Program/Preset Map and Viewing Angle. Transmits the entire Controllers
menu.
Program /Preset Map
Transmits the MIDI Program -> Preset Map.
Tuning Tables
Transmits all 12 user User Tuning Tables.
O
The Preset, Volume,
and Pan information for all 32
channels is included when the
Multi mode Map settings are
transmitted or received.
Multimode Map
Transmits the following parameters:
• Multimode Basic Channel
• Multimode Effects Control Channel
• Multimode Tempo Control Channel
and for each MIDI Channel…
•
•
•
•
•
150 E-MU Systems
Preset, Volume, & Pan
Mix Output
Multimode Channel Enable
Multimode Bank Map
Multimode Receive Program Change
MIDI Menu
Send MIDI System Exclusive Data
_
WARNING: When
transferring SysEx data from one
XL-7 to another, the ID numbers
of both units must match.
Bank 0 User Presets
Transmits all the user defined presets in Bank 0.
Bank 1 User Presets
Transmits all the user defined presets in Bank 1.
Bank 2 User Presets
Transmits all the user defined presets in Bank 2.
Bank 3 User Presets
Transmits all the user defined presets in Bank 3.
Any Individual Preset
Transmits only the selected preset.
The Enter LED will be flashing. Press the Enter button to confirm the
operation. To receive MIDI data, simply send the MIDI data into XL-7 from
another XL-7 or from a computer/sequencer.
SEND MIDI SYSEX DATA
bank 1 user presets
To Record MIDI SysEx Data into an External Sequencer:
1.
Setup the sequencer to receive system exclusive data.
Place the sequencer into record mode, then Send MIDI Data.
2.
To Receive MIDI SysEx Data from an External Sequencer:
Simply play back the sequence containing the SysEx data into XL-7.
XL-7 Operation Manual 151
MIDI Menu
MIDI Mode
MIDI Mode
MIDI Mode selects one of the three MIDI modes: Omni, Poly or Multi.
MIDI MODE
multi
CHANGE
ignored
The MIDI Mode Change parameter specifies whether mode changes made
through an external MIDI controller are accepted or ignored.
The MIDI modes are as follows:
Omni
Responds to note information on all MIDI channels and plays the preset
currently displayed in the main screen.
Poly
Responds only to note information received on the currently selected MIDI
channel (on the preset selection screen) and plays that channel’s associated
preset.
Multi
Responds to data on any combination of MIDI channels and plays the
specific preset associated with each of the MIDI channels. You must select
multi mode for multitimbral operation.
152 E-MU Systems
Programming Basics
This chapter explains how XL-7 sounds are constructed and contains
important background information on how to create your own custom
presets.
Your initial involvement with XL-7 will most likely be using the existing
presets and selecting MIDI channels. While the factory presets are very
good, there are some things you will probably want to change eventually,
perhaps the LFO speed, the filter frequency or the attack time. You may also
want to make your own custom presets using complex modulation
routings. This module will do far more than you ever imagined and there
are whole new classes of sound just waiting to be discovered.
Each preset can consist of up to four instrument layers. Each of the four
layers can be placed anywhere on the keyboard and can be crossfaded or
switched according to key position, velocity, or by using a real-time control
such as a wheel, slider, pedal, LFO or envelope generator. A preset can also
be “linked” with up to 2 more presets creating additional layering or splits.
XL-7 has an extensive modulation implementation using two multi-wave
LFO’s (Low Frequency Oscillators), three multi-stage envelope generators
and the ability to respond to multiple MIDI controllers. You can simultaneously route any combination of these control sources to multiple destinations.
There are 512 user locations (USER Banks 0-3) available to store your own
creations or edited factory presets. It’s easy and fun to edit or create your
own unique presets.
XL-7 Operation Manual 153
Programming Basics
Modulation
Modulation
To modulate means to dynamically change a parameter, whether it be the
volume (amplitude modulation), the pitch (frequency modulation), and so
on. Turning the volume control on your home stereo rapidly back and
forth is an example of amplitude modulation. To modulate something we
need a modulation source and a modulation destination. In this case, the
source is your hand turning the knob, and the destination is the volume
control. If we had a device that could turn the volume control automatically, we would call that device a modulation source.
Turning the volume control back and forth on your home stereo is an example of
Amplitude Modulation.
XL-7 is designed so that each of the variable parameters, such as the
volume, has an initial setting which is changed by a modulation source.
Therefore in the case of volume, we have an initial volume that we can
change or modulate with a modulation source.
Two main kinds of modulation sources on XL-7 are Envelope Generators and
Low Frequency Oscillators. In the example above, an envelope generator
could be routed to automatically turn the volume control as programmed
by the envelope. Or, a low frequency oscillator could be routed to turn the
volume up and down in a repeating fashion.
Positive modulation adds to the initial amount. Negative modulation
subtracts from the initial amount.
Summing Nodes
All the modulation inputs on XL-7 are summing nodes. This means that
you can connect as many modulation sources as you want to an input (such
as Pitch or AmpVol). Modulation sources are simply added algebraically—
connecting two knobs one set to -100 and the other set to +100 yields a net
value of zero.
154 E-MU Systems
Programming Basics
Modulation Sources
Modulation
Sources
Modulation sources include Envelope Generators, Performance Controllers and
Low Frequency Oscillators. In the previous example, an envelope generator
was routed to automatically turn the volume control as programmed by the
envelope, or, a low frequency oscillator could be routed to turn the volume
control up and down in a repeating fashion. The following is a list of the
modulation sources used in XL-7.
Keyboard Key
Which key is pressed.
Key Velocity
How fast the key is pressed.
Release Velocity
How fast the key is released.
Gate
High if the key is pressed, low when the key is released.
O
Tip: Try routing Key
Glide to Filter Frequency if you
want the filter to smoothly
follow pitch in solo mode.
Routing Key Glide to Pan creates
another interesting effect.
Key Glide
A smoothly changing control source based on the Glide Rate and the
interval between the last two notes played.
Pitch (Touchstrip) and Mod Controllers
Synthesizer pitch bend and modulation controllers.
Keyboard Pressure (mono aftertouch)
Key Pressure applied after the keypad is initially pressed.
Pedal
A continuously variable pedal controller.
Miscellaneous Controllers A -P
Any type of MIDI continuous controller data.
Low Frequency Oscillators (2 per layer)
Generate repeating waves.
Envelope Generators (3 per layer)
Generate a programmable “contour” which changes over time when a key
is pressed.
Noise & Random Generators
Generate spectrums of noise and random signals.
Footswitches
Change a parameter when the switch is pressed.
Clock Divisor
The master tempo clock can be divided and used as a modulation source.
XL-7 Operation Manual 155
Programming Basics
Modulation PatchCords
Random Sources
Random modulation sources can be used when you want the timbre of the
sound to be “animated” in a random or non-consistent manner.
• Key Random 1 & 2 generate different random values for each layer
which do not change during the note.
• The White & Pink Noise Generators produce varying random values.
Both white and pink noise sources are low frequency noise designed
for control purposes. Either noise source can be filtered even more by
passing it through a lag processor.
• The Crossfade Random function generates the same random value
for all layers in a preset. This source is designed to be used for crossfading and cross-switching layers, although you may find other uses.
Modulation
PatchCords

The controller Knobs
assignments printed on the front
panel are the system defaults.
You can change any of these
assignments using the Real-time
Controller Assignment page in
the MIDI menu (see page 147
for details).
When setting up modulation with the XL-7, you define a modulation
source and a modulation destination. Then, you connect the source to the
destination using “PatchCords.” XL-7’s PatchCords are connected in the
software. XL-7 has 24 general purpose PatchCords for each layer.
You can connect the modulation sources in almost any possible way to the
modulation destinations. You can even modulate other modulators. Each
PatchCord also has an amount parameter which determines “how much”
modulation is applied to the destination. The modulation amount can be
positive or negative. Negative values invert the modulation source.
Modulation
Source
LFO 1
156 E-MU Systems
Amount +/-
-
+
Destination
Amp
Volume
Modulation
Source
Destination
LFO 1
LFO 2
Amp Env
Filt Env
Aux Env
Wheel
Pressure
etc.
Amp Vol
Pitch
Pan
LFO Rate
Aux Env
Env Atk
Glide
etc.
Programming Basics
Envelope Generators
Envelope
Generators
_
An envelope can be described as a “contour” which is used to shape the
sound over time in a pre-programmed manner. There are three envelope
generators per layer and all of them are the rate/level type.
This is how the rate/level (time based) envelopes work: When a key is
pressed, envelope starts from zero and moves toward the Attack 1 Level at
the Attack 1 Rate. As soon as it reaches this first level, it immediately begins
the next phase and moves toward the Attack 2 level at the Attack 2 rate. As
long as the key is held down, the envelope continues on through the Decay
1 and Decay 2 stages. If the key is still held when the envelope reaches the
end of Decay 2, it simply waits there for you to release the key. When you
release the key, the envelope continues into the Release 1 and Release 2
stages, stopping at the end of the Release 2 stage. XL-7’s envelope generators provide great flexibility for programming both complex and simple
envelopes.
2
y1
Dcy2
Rl
s1
At
k1
Atk
Dc
If two adjacent segments
have the same level in a “timebased” envelope, the segment
will be skipped. Adjacent
segments must have different
levels for the rate control to
work.
Sustain
Level
Rls2
level
time
Key
Down

ADSR mode: To create
a standard ADSR envelope: Set
Atk1, Atk2 & Dcy1 Level to 100,
Rls 1 & 2 level to 0, and Atk2,
Dcy1, Rls2 Rates to 0. Program
Atk1, Dcy2 and Rls1 segments
as you wish. See page 285.
O
By routing the Auxiliary
or Filter Envelopes to control the
pitch (PatchCords) you can
easily hear the shape of the
envelopes you are creating.
Key
Released
All three envelope generators have the six stages described above. The
Volume Envelope generator controls the volume of the voice over time.
The Filter Envelope generator is a general purpose envelope most often
used to control the filter frequency. Unlike the Volume Envelope, however,
the Filter Envelope can have a negative level value as well as a positive
level. There is also an Auxiliary Envelope generator which is a general
purpose envelope. The Auxiliary Envelope is identical to the Filter Envelope
and can have negative as well as positive levels. You can adjust the time of
each stage to create myriad envelope shapes, which in turn shape the
sound over time.
• Volume envelopes contour the way the volume of a sound changes
over time determining how we perceive that sound. For example, a
bell struck with a hammer is instantly at full volume, then slowly dies
away. A bowed violin sound fades in more slowly and dies away
slowly. Using XL-7’s Volume Envelope, you can simulate the different
types of natural instrument volume envelopes by programming them
appropriately.
XL-7 Operation Manual 157
Programming Basics
Envelope Generators
Tempo-based Envelopes
Tempo-based envelopes are based on Time which is controlled by the
Master Tempo (located in the Global menu). The Master Tempo rate scales the
time of the Tempo-based envelope segments. The Master Tempo can also be
derived from an external MIDI clock to synchronize the envelope times
with external sequencer or arpeggiator tempo changes. See page 144.
Tempo-Based Envelopes
= Initial Setting
= Increase Master Tempo
= Decrease Master Tempo
Envelope Repeat

The Envelope Generators can also be made to repeat. When the envelope
repeat function is On, the Attack (1&2) and Decay (1&2) stages will
continue to repeat as long as the key is held. As soon as the key is released,
the envelope continues through its normal Release stages (1 & 2).
Only the Filter and
Auxiliary Envelopes have the
repeating feature.
1
Dcy
1
s1
Atk
Rl
2
Dcy
2
Atk
Rl
s1
level
Repeat
Re..
time
Key Down
Key Released
The diagram above show how the looping envelopes work. When the key is
pressed the envelope goes through its regular Attack 1, Attack 2, Decay 1
and Decay 2 stages. In non-looping mode, the envelope would hold at the
end of the Decay 2 stage until the key was released. In looping mode
however, it jumps back to the Attack 1 stage and repeats the first four
stages. It continues to loop through these four stages until the key is
released where it immediately jumps to the Release 1 stage.
158 E-MU Systems
Programming Basics
Low Frequency Oscillators (LFOs)
Low
Frequency
Oscillators
(LFOs)
A Low Frequency Oscillator or LFO is simply a wave which repeats at a slow
rate. The XL-7 has two multi-wave LFOs for each channel. The LFO
waveforms are shown in the following illustration.
Random
Triangle
Sawtooth
Sine
Squ are
33% Pulse
2 5 % Pu lse
1 6 % Pu lse
12% Pulse
LFO Tricks & Tips:
• The Random LFO wave is
truly random and is different
for each voice and layer.
• The Pattern (Pat) waveforms
will sound the same on
different layers and voices.
• Sine + Noise is very useful for
simulating trumpet and flute
vibrato.
Pat: Octaves
(two cords)
Pat: Sus4 trip
C
F
G
★ When routing Hemi-quaver
to Pitch:
+38 = major scale
-38 = phrygian scale
+76 = whole tone scale
(+38) + (+76) = diminished
Pat: Fifth+Octave
+ Octave
- Octave
Pat: Neener
C
G
C
Sine 1 ,2
Sine 1,3,5
C
A#
G
odd amount = S+H sound
Sine + Noise
Note: References to musical
intervals in the pattern LFO
shapes are with the LFO
routed to pitch and a
PatchCord amount of +38.

Try combining the
Pattern LFOs, or controlling the
amount of one with another, or
combining them with the clock
divisors.
Hemi-qu aver
By examining the diagram of the LFO waveforms, you can see how an LFO
affects a modulation destination. The shape of the waveform determines
the result. Suppose we are modulating the pitch of an instrument. The sine
wave looks smooth, and changes the pitch smoothly. The square wave
changes abruptly and abruptly changes from one pitch to another. The
sawtooth wave increases smoothly, then changes back abruptly. The
sound’s pitch follows the same course. Controlling the pitch of an
instrument is an easy way to hear the effects of the LFO waves.
Like the Auxiliary Envelope, LFOs can be routed to control any real-time
function such as Pitch, Filter, Panning, or Volume. A common use for the
LFO is to control the pitch of the sound (LFO -> Pitch). This effect is called
vibrato and is an important performance effect. Many presets use this
routing with the modulation wheel controlling “how much” LFO
modulation is applied. Another common effect, Tremolo, is created by
controlling the volume of a sound with the LFO (LFO -> Volume).
XL-7 Operation Manual 159
Programming Basics
Clock Modulation
You might use the LFOs to add a slight bit of animation to the sound by
routing the LFO to control the filter. For this effect, set the LFO “amount”
low for a subtle effect.
When a PatchCord amount is a negative value, the LFO shape is inverted.
For example, inverting the sawtooth wave produces a wave that increases
abruptly, then smoothly glides down.
Negative Amount
-
Sawtooth
Clock
Modulation

Envelopes are triggered
on the positive going edge of the
clock. LFOs are triggered on the
negative going edge of the
clock.

+
I n v e rt e d S a w t o o t h
You can use the Master Clock as a modulation source, to trigger the Filter or
Auxiliary Envelope generators, trigger Sample Start, synchronize the LFOs,
or directly as a square wave modulation source. The Clock source is
available in eight divisions (octal whole note, quad whole note, double
whole note, whole note, half note, quarter note, eighth note, sixteenth
note). You can use the different rates separately or in conjunction to create
complex “synchro-sonic” rhythm patterns. You can also use a MIDI Clock
as the Master Clock to synchronize to an external MIDI device such as a
drum machine or sequencer. (See Master Tempo in the Global menu.)
Clocks are routed exactly like the other modulations sources using the
PatchCords. The PatchCord Amount MUST be positive (+) for the clock to
pass. By modulating the PatchCord Amount, you can route the divided
clocks using real-time controllers or other modulation sources.
When an LFO is triggered by a clock, the LFO wave resets to zero every time
the clock wave goes low. If the LFO rate is close to the clock rate, the LFO
virtually synchronizes with the clock. If the two rates are far apart, the
waveform of the LFO will be mildly or radically altered.
The tempo of the master
clock is set in the Global menu.
Triggered LFO
LFO Wave
Clock
LFO Trigger causes the LFO to reset each time the clock waveform goes low.
160 E-MU Systems
Programming Basics
Clock Modulation
LFOs can also be perfectly synchronized with the clock at any of 25 note
divisions. This allows you to create very cool “synchro-sonic” effects that
work perfectly at any tempo. Choosing one of the note divisors in the LFO
rate screen selects the synced LFO function.
There are many possibilities for clock modulation and retrigger. For
example, you can create a repeating six segment curve of any shape by
triggering the Filter or Auxiliary Envelope generators with the clock. A few
other possibilities are listed below.
LFO Synced to 1/4 Note Clock
• Turn different voice layers on and off using different clock divisors.
• Switch between Auxiliary and Filter Envelope retriggering using a
slider or footswitch.
• Retrigger LFOs or Envelopes using noise or other LFOs to create
random or semi random effects.
• Alter the LFO waveform by modulating the rate of a triggered LFO.
• Route multiple clocks with different divisors to the same destination
(such as pitch) to create complex patterns. (Hint: Adjust the PatchCord
Amounts.)
Eighth
Note
Quarter
Note
Adding these two clocks together in equal amounts produces a stairstep waveform.
16th
Note
8th
Note
Quarter
Note
Adding multiple clocks with unequal amounts produces complex repeating patterns.
XL-7 Operation Manual 161
Programming Basics
Modulation Destinations
Modulation
Destinations
The PatchCords section of the Preset Edit menu is where you connect
sources to destinations. Each PatchCord has an amount associated with it
which controls how much modulation is applied.
L1
PATCHCORD
ModWhl -> RTXfade
Layer
L
Z-Plane
Filter
Instrument
Amp
R
Gain
Envelope
Gen.
LFOs
Vol
Pan
Chorus
Pitch
Freq.
Glide
All the modulation
destinations are summing
nodes. This means that you can
connect as many modulation
sources as you want to a
destination. Modulation sources
are simply added algebraically
— connecting two sources, one
with a value of -100 and the
other with a value of +100
yields a net value of zero.
The PatchCords screen above and the diagram below show how
modulation sources are connected to destinations. The modulation sources
can control any of the destinations in the layer.
Start Offset

#01
+036
Mod
Wheel
Envelope
Gen.
MIDI
Controls
Envelope
Gen.
Key #
Velocity
Gate
Mod.
Proc.
• Note-on modulation sources, such as key, velocity and gate output a
single value at note-on time. Realtime modulation sources such as
LFOs, envelope generators and modulation wheels output
continuously changing values.
The possible modulation routings are completely flexible as shown in the
diagram above. Multiple sources can control the same destination, or a
single source can control multiple destinations.
162 E-MU Systems
Programming Basics
Modulation Processors
Modulation
Processors
Modulation processors are devices which can modify modulation sources
such as LFOs and envelope generators before they are applied to a destination. Modulation processors let you create patches and do tricks which
would not be possible otherwise. These modulation processors are independently programmable on each of the four layers.
Switch
Outputs a digital “1” when the input is greater than “0”.
Switch
(above zero)
Summing Amp
Lets you add several modulation signals together before applying them to a
destination. This processor can save PatchCords when routing the output
to multiple destinations.
DC
Sum
Lag Processors
Slows down rapid changes in the input signal. The output “lags” behind the
input at a pre-programmed rate. There are two lag processors, Lag 0 and Lag
1. Lag 1 has a longer lag time than Lag 0.
Lag
Processor
Absolute Value
This function inverts negative input values and outputs only positive
values. This device is also called a full wave rectifier.
Absolute
Value
XL-7 Operation Manual 163
Programming Basics
Modulation Processors
Diode
The diode blocks negative input values, passing only positive values.
Diode
Flip-Flop

The value of a digital
“1” is equal to the PatchCord
amount.
The output of this processor alternates between a digital “1” and digital “0”
each time the input goes positive from zero or a negative value. With an
LFO input, the output will be a square wave of half the input frequency.
x
x
Flip-Flop
y
y
Quantizer
With the input PatchCord set to 100%, the output value is limited to 16
discrete values. The value of the input PatchCord controls the number of
steps. The value of the output PatchCord controls the size of the steps.
# of
Steps
Size of
Steps
Quantizer
4x Gain
This processor amplifies the modulation source by a factor of 4.
4x
Gain
O
Summing Amps can be
useful in complicated patches
where you want to control a
combination of modulation
signals with a single patchcord.
Lag Inputs
The Lag processors can be used as 2 additional summing amps. Lag0sum
and Lag1sum are modulation sources which equal the sum of PatchCords
connected to the Lag in destination. The summing amp is located before
the lag processor as shown in the following illustration.
Sum Node
Lag
Lag 0 sum
164 E-MU Systems
Lag 0
Programming Basics
Preset Modulation Processors
Preset Modulation
Processors start working as soon
as the preset is selected. The
Layer Modulation Processors
take effect only when a key is
pressed.
Preset Lag
Like the Layer Lag processors (described on page 163) the Preset Lag slows
down rapid changes in the input signal. The output “lags” behind the input
at a pre-programmed rate. Unlike the layer level lag processors, the preset lag
takes effect as soon as the preset is selected. In contrast, the layer level lag
processors begin acting only after a keyboard key has been depressed. The
Preset Lag also has a Lag Amount input which controls the lag time. Positive
lag amounts increase the lag time. A MIDI controller (front panel knob) is
commonly used to control lag amount.
The preset lag can be used to “spin-up” and “spin-down” an LFO which
controls some other effect, perhaps left/right panning, pitch, or the filter. A
MIDI footswitch could be used as the input to the lag which acts to slow
down the instantaneous change of the switch. The slowly changing output
value is then routed using a layer patchcord to crossfade between layers or
change the speed of an LFO.
Preset
Lag
ex. footswitch
Lag Amount
(+ value = longer)
Preset Ramp
This processor generates a positive or negative going slope whenever the
first key is depressed on the MIDI channel.
1st Note
Played
Preset Ramp
Preset Ramp
Positive Rate
Negative Rate
original
value
time
original
value
decrease
O
There are also two “Preset Level” modulation processors located in the
“Preset Patchcords” screen of the Edit menu. It is important to understand
that although the preset processors originate at the Preset Level PatchCords,
their output is used in the Layer PatchCords.
increase
Preset
Modulation
Processors
time
1st Note
Played
XL-7 Operation Manual 165
Programming Basics
Preset Modulation Processors
The preset ramp instantly resets when all notes have been released and the
next first key on the MIDI channel is pressed. The Ramp Rate polarity
(+ or -) determines if the ramp will be positive or negative going. The value
of the ramp rate sets the increment. Large values produce fast ramps and
small values produce slow ramps. Multiple inputs can be connected to the
ramp rate (just like all the other destinations in XL-7).
The patch below shows an application for the Preset Ramp which generates
an adjustable decay envelope ONLY on the first note played to bring in the
sound from another layer. Instead of routing the output to the Amp
Volume you could just as easily route it to control Pitch, LFO Speed or any
other destination you can think of. Study this patch if you want to learn a
few new tricks using the patchcords.
One Layer
Real Rocket Science
Initial Setting
-96 dB (off)
Percussion
Instrument
Z-Plane
Filter
R
Amp
Vol
Pan
L
Cord
+100
Invert
DC
Rate
Preset
Ramp
Out
Cord
-100
Decay Time
(MIDI G)
Cord
-100
Perc. Amount
(MIDI H)
Preset
Cords
1.
O
The combination of the
DC & Perc. Decay Time Cords
has the effect of reversing the
Percussion Decay Time knob.
The decay time increases as the
knob is turned up.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
166 E-MU Systems
Cord
+100
Layer
Cords
DC - Sets initial ramp Fast-Positive (+100)
Decay Knob - Inverted value slows ramp as the knob value is increased.
Ramp Out Cord - Inverts Ramp slope (downward).
Amp Vol - Initial setting is Off (-96dB). Ramp cannot overcome this
negative bias.
Perc. Amt - When this knob is turned up, the positive bias on the Amp
is restored so that so that the Ramp can now affect Amp Volume.
Volume Envelope - Fast Attack, Full Sustain, No Release
Programming Basics
Preset Modulation Processors
Using the
Modulation
Processors
Modulation processors are inserted into a modulation routing as shown in
the following diagram.
The modular analog synthesizers of yesteryear were incredibly flexible,
partly because processing devices could be connected in any order.
Modulation processors are designed according to this modular concept.
They can be linked and used in a wide variety of ways limited only by your
imagination. Consider the following example:
Velocity ~
Switch
Cord
Pitch
Cord
Switch On when
Velocity > 0
Switch value
is Scaled by
Cord Amount
The patch illustrated above is programmed by setting the PatchCord
screens as shown below.
L1
#01
+100
L1
#02
+022
PATCHCORD
Vel+- -> Switch
PATCHCORD
Switch -> Pitch
This particular modulation shifts the overall pitch up a fifth when the key
velocity exceeds 64. Velocities below 64 play at normal pitch. Notes with
velocities of 64 and above are raised a perfect fifth. The Velocity “~” source
scales the played velocity around zero. In other words, low velocities (below
64) will have negative values and high velocities (64 and above) will be
positive. A velocity of 64 would be zero. The Switch module only outputs a
“1” if the input value is greater than zero. This digital “1” value can be
scaled through the attenuator on the PatchCord to raise or lower the pitch
by any amount. In this case, a scaling value of +22 raises the pitch by a
perfect fifth. The amount of the PatchCord on the input to the switch is
unimportant because ANY velocity value equal or greater than 64 will flip
the switch. If the input PatchCord amount were a negative value however,
the action of the velocity would be reversed and velocities less than 64
would raise the pitch and velocities equal or greater than 64 would play the
original pitch.
XL-7 Operation Manual 167
Programming Basics
Preset Modulation Processors
But what if you want the velocity switch point to be something other than
64? Thanks to modulation processors, it can be done. Here's how.
Velocity ~
Cord
Switch
21
DC
Pitch
Cord
Switch On when
Velocity > 0
Cord
Switch value
is Scaled by
Cord Amount
Connect the DC level to the input of the switch along with the velocity
value. Note that more than one modulation source can be applied to the
input of a processor.
DC offset adds a fixed value based on the PatchCord Amount setting. If
applied to the switch along with the velocity, it changes the velocity value
required to trip the switch. By setting the DC amount to a negative
amount, higher velocity values are required to trip the switch. Setting the
DC value to a positive value would bring the velocity switch point down.
The PatchCord screens for this patch are shown below.
L1
#01
+100
L1
#02
-021
L1
#03
+022
PATCHCORD
Vel+- -> Switch
PATCHCORD
DC ->
Switch
PATCHCORD
Switch -> Pitch
168 E-MU Systems
Programming Basics
Preset Modulation Processors
More Examples
To derive a smooth random function you could route the Pink Noise
generator through one of the Lag Processors. A smooth random wave is
useful in small amounts to add a degree of natural variation to timbre when
routed to filter cutoff. Normal pink noise is low pass filtered audio
frequency noise with a 3 dB/octave slope to give equal energy per octave.
XL-7 pink noise is actually more like very low frequency filtered noise, but
it is perfect for use as a random control source.
Pink
Noise
Lag
Processor
Cord
Filter
Cutoff
Cord
Lag Smooths
Pink Noise
Smooth
Random Function
The Quantizer can generate interesting whole-tone scales when envelope
generators or LFOs are routed to the input. The quantizer turns a smoothly
changing input signal into a series of steps. By routing the output of the
quantizer to Pitch and adjusting the PatchCord amounts, you can control
both the number of steps and the pitch interval of each step.
Number
of
Steps
Size
of
Steps
Quantizer
Cord
Cord
The input PatchCord amount controls how many steps will be generated.
With a sawtooth wave (LFO+) feeding the input and the PatchCord amount
set to 100%, sixteen steps are generated. The output PatchCord amount
controls the size (or interval) of the steps.
Try setting up the following patch exactly as shown below using your
favorite preset as a starting point.
L1
LFO1
SHAPE
sawtooth
L1
LFO1
RATE
0.35Hz
SYNC
key sync
DELAY
000
VAR
000
XL-7 Operation Manual 169
Programming Basics
Preset Modulation Processors
O
The 4x Amp can be used
to get more steps or increase the
interval of the Quantizer.
L1
#01
+030
L1
PATCHCORD
Quantize -> Pitch
#02
+100
L1
#03
-050
PATCHCORD
LFO1+ -> Quantize
O
Experiment with this
patch by connecting other
sources and destinations to the
Quantizer.
PATCHCORD
DC ->
Pitch
This patch generates an ascending arpeggio every time a key is pressed. A
diagram of the patch is shown below. The patch is very straightforward
except for the DC offset which was added to bring the pitch down into
tune. (Sometimes you have to fix a problem, but using the mod processors
there's usually a way around it to achieve the desired result.)
LFO+
Number
100%
Size
100%
Quantizer
Pitch
Cord
Cord
Cord
DC
-50%
You can start to see some of the possibilities (and there are many).
Whenever you find yourself wishing for some esoteric type of control, take
a minute to think and see if there is a way to achieve the desired result
using the modulation processors.
170 E-MU Systems
Programming Basics
Dynamic Filters
The block diagram of the XL-7’s signal path is shown below.
L
Z-Plane
Filter
Instrument
Amp
R
Q
Vol Pan
Start Offset
Glide
Retrigger
Glide
Freq.
Pitch
To understand how a filter works, we need to understand what makes up a
sound wave. A sine wave is the simplest form of sound wave. Any
waveform, except a sine wave, can be analyzed as a mix of sine waves at
specific frequencies and amplitudes.
Any waveform can be analyzed as a mixture of sine waves.
One way to represent complex waveforms is to use a chart with frequency
on one axis and amplitude on the other. Each vertical line of the chart
represents one sine wave at a specific amplitude and frequency.
100
80
Amplitude
Dynamic
Filters
60
40
20
40
80
160
360
720 1440 2880 ...
Frequency
XL-7 Operation Manual 171
Programming Basics
Dynamic Filters
What is a Filter?
Most sounds are complex waves containing many sine waves of various
amplitudes and frequencies. A filter is a device which allows us to
remove certain components of a sound depending on its frequency. For
example, a low-pass filter lets the low frequencies pass and removes only the
high frequencies as illustrated in the following diagram.
Cutoff Frequency
100
Amplitude
80
Output of Filter
Low Pass
Filter
60
40
20
40
80
160 360 720 1440 2880 ...
Frequency
A filter that lets only the high frequencies pass is called a high-pass filter as
illustrated in the following diagram.
Initial Frequency
100
Amplitude
80
Filter Output
High Pass
Filter
60
40
20
40
80
160 360 720 1440 2880 ...
Frequency
172 E-MU Systems
Programming Basics
Dynamic Filters
A filter which only lets a certain band of frequencies pass is called a
band-pass filter.
Center Frequency
100
Filter
Output
Amplitude
80
Band Pass
Filter
60
40
20
40
80
160 360 720 1440 2880 ...
Frequency
A notch filter is just the opposite of a band-pass filter and is used to
eliminate a narrow band of frequencies.
Amplitude
Another control found on traditional filters is called Q or resonance. A
lowpass filter with a high Q emphasizes the frequencies around the cutoff
frequency. The following chart shows how different amounts of Q affect
the low-pass filter response. In terms of sound, frequencies around the
cutoff tend to “ring” with high Q settings. If a filter with high Q is slowly
swept back and forth, various overtones are “picked out” of the sound and
amplified as the resonant peak sweeps over them. Bells and gongs are real
world examples of sounds which have a high Q.
Low Q
Med Q
High Q
Frequency
XL-7 Operation Manual 173
Programming Basics
Dynamic Filters
Another characteristic of a filter is the number of poles it contains. Traditional synthesizer filters were usually either 2-pole or 4-pole filters. The XL7 has selectable 2, 4, and 6-pole low-pass filters. The number of poles in a
filter describes the steepness of its slope. The more poles, the steeper the
filter's slope and the stronger the filtering action. The tone controls on your
home stereo are probably one-pole or two-pole filters. Parametric equalizers
are usually either two-pole or three-pole filters.
Amplitude
In terms of vintage synthesizers, Moog and ARP synthesizers used 4-pole
filters, Oberheim and E-mu synthesizers were famous for their 2-pole filter
sound.
6-pole
4-pole
Lowpass Lowpass
2-pole
Lowpass
Frequency
Using a filter, we have a way to control the harmonic content of a sound.
As it turns out, even a simple low-pass filter can simulate the response of
many natural sounds.
For example, when a piano string is struck by its hammer, there are initially
a lot of high frequencies present. If the same note is played softer, there are
fewer high frequencies generated by the string. We can simulate this effect
by routing keyboard velocity to control the low-pass filter. The result is
expressive, natural control over the sound.
If you use an envelope generator to control the cutoff frequency of a filter,
the frequency content can be varied dynamically over the course of the
note. This adds animation to the sound as well as simulates the response of
many natural instruments.
174 E-MU Systems
Programming Basics
Dynamic Filters
A more complex type of filter is called a parametric filter or Swept EQ. A
parametric filter allows control over three basic parameters of the filter. The
three parameters are: Bandwidth, Frequency and Gain. The Bandwidth allows
you to select the width of the range of frequencies to be boosted or cut, the
Frequency defines the center frequency of the bandwidth, and the Gain
parameter either boosts or cuts the frequencies within the selected band by
a specified amount. Frequencies not included in the selected band are left
unaltered. This is different from a band-pass filter which attenuates
(reduces) frequencies outside the selected band.
Freq.
+18 dB
Boost
Amplitude
Parametric
Filter
0 dB
Bandwidth
Cut
-18 dB
Frequency
The parametric filter is quite flexible. Any range of frequencies can be either
amplified or attenuated. Several parametric sections are often cascaded in
order to create complex filter response curves.
If four parametric filter sections were cascaded, it would be possible to
create the following complex filter response.
4 Parametric Equalizers
20
dB Magnitude
Parametric Filters
15
10
5
0
-5
500
10,000
15,000
20,000
Linear Frequency - Hertz
Many natural instruments have complex resonances which are based on
their soundboard or tube size. The resonance shown above would be impossible to create using a normal synthesizer filter.
XL-7 Operation Manual 175
Programming Basics
Dynamic Filters
The Z-Plane Filter
A Z-plane filter is a filter which can change its function over time. In a
Z-plane filter, we start with two complex filter types and interpolate
between them using a single parameter. See the following diagram.
Morph
Amplitude
B Filter
A Filter
Morph
Frequency
The Z-plane filter has the unique ability to change its function over time.
Filters A and B represent two different complex filters or “frames.”
Changing a single parameter, the Morph, changes many complex filter
parameters simultaneously. Following along the Morph axis you can see
that the filter response smoothly interpolates between the two filters. This
is the essence of the Z-plane filter. Through the use of interpolation, many
complex parameters are condensed into one manageable entity.
Consider, as an example, the human vocal tract, which is a type of complex
filter or resonator. There are dozens of different muscles controlling the
shape of the vocal tract. When speaking, however, we don't think of the
muscles, we just remember how it feels to form the vowels. A vowel is really
a configuration of many muscles, but we consider it a single object. In
changing from one vowel to another, we don't need to consider the
frequencies of the resonant peaks. You remember the shape of your mouth
for each sound and interpolate between them.
This Z-plane filter sweep can be controlled by an envelope generator, an
LFO, modulation wheels or pedals, keyboard velocity, key pressure, and so
on. In fact, any of the modulation sources can control the Z-plane filter.
Because creating the complex filtering is difficult and very time consuming,
we have created 50 different filters and installed them permanently in ROM
for your use. You simply select and use the filters in a manner similar to
choosing an instrument. Because there are so many types of instruments
and filters to choose from, the number of possible permutations is
staggering.
176 E-MU Systems
Programming Basics
Signal Flow
Signal Flow
Going back to the Signal Path diagram for a single channel we can
reexamine the complete signal path.
Instrument
Sample
Pitch Start
Z-Plane
Filter
Freq
R
DCA
Pan
Q
L
Volume
Filter
Envelope
Velocity
Volume
Envelope
Instrument
This is the sampled sound wave. The pitch of the instrument can be
modulated by any modulation source. The sample start point can be
changed only at the time the note is played.
Z-Plane Filter
The Z-Plane Filter is used to shape the harmonic content of an instrument.
The filter envelope is commonly used to shape the harmonic content
dynamically over time but the filter frequency can be modulated by any
source. The Q parameter can be modulated only at note-on time. There are
50 types of filters available. See “XL-7 Filter Types” on page 202 for a
complete list of the filters.
Digitally Controlled Amplifier (DCA)
Together with the Volume Envelope, the DCA is used to shape the volume
contour of a sound. The DCA can be controlled by any modulation source.
Velocity is often used as a modulation source for the DCA so that the harder
you play, the louder the sound becomes.
Pan
Adjusts the balance of sound to the left and right channels. Pan can be
modulated by any modulation source.
XL-7 Operation Manual 177
Programming Basics
MIDI Channels & Real-time Controls
MIDI Channels
& Real-time
Controls
The front panel control knobs send out real-time controller information on
separate continuous controller numbers. There is a set of 32 continuous
controller numbers for each MIDI channel. Some continuous controllers,
such as modulation wheel, volume, and pan have standardized numbers.
For example, volume is usually sent on continuous controller #7. The front
panel controller knobs on are pre-programmed to control the XL-7.

The following MIDI
controls are automatically routed
in XL-7:
Pitch Wheel
Modulation Wheel
Aftertouch
Pedal
Volume
Pan
Expression
The MIDI real-time controllers may seem confusing at first, but they are
really very simple once you understand them. You already know that there
are 16 MIDI channels per MIDI cable. Each MIDI channel uses three basic
types of messages; note on/off, preset changes, and continuous controller
messages. The rubber keypads, in addition to telling XL-7 which note was
played, can also send real-time control information, which simply means
control occurring in real-time or “live.” Real-time control sources include
such things as controller knobs, pitch wheels or touchstrips, modulation
wheels, control pedals and aftertouch. These are used to add more
expression or control.
pwh
01
03
04
07
10
11
MIDI
Channel 1
MIDI
Channel 2
MIDI
Channel 3
MIDI
Channel 16
Note
On/Off
Note
On/Off
Note
On/Off
Note
On/Off
Program
Change
Program
Change
Program
Change
Program
Change
Continuous
Controllers
Continuous
Controllers
Continuous
Controllers
Continuous
Controllers
Any MIDI controller can be routed to any modulation destination. First,
you have to know which controller numbers your keyboard transmits. Most
modern MIDI keyboards let you select a controller number for each control
on the keyboard. For example, it may let you select a number from 0-31 for
the data slider. The realtime controller numbers that the keyboard
transmits must match the numbers XL-7 is receiving, otherwise nothing
will happen when you move the controls.
Suppose you wanted to send the four data sliders on your master keyboard.
XL-7 can handle up to 16 MIDI controllers (A-P) of your choosing. “MIDI
A-P” are simply names for the internal connections that link external MIDI
continuous controllers to the PatchCord section of XL-7. There are two
parts to the connection. First, MIDI controller numbers are assigned to the
letters A-P in the Controllers menu. Next, the letters A-P are connected to
synthesizer control parameters in the PatchCord section of the Preset Edit
menu. The PatchCord Amount scales the amount of each controller by a
positive or negative value.
The factory presets have the MIDI A-P controls connected to standard
synthesizer functions (marked on the front panel). By choosing any four of
178 E-MU Systems
Programming Basics
MIDI Channels & Real-time Controls
the 16 standard functions, the four sliders on your keyboard will work the
same on every preset. The chart below shows how this might work if your
keyboard transmitted the slider settings on MIDI controllers 21-24.
MIDI Controller # Routing Standard Function
74
A
Controls Filter Frequency
71
B
Controls Filter Resonance
25
C
Controls Filter Attack
26
D
Controls Filter Decay
16 Control
Knobs
Preset Edit
Menu
A
31
64
95
MIDI
A
-
B
-
C
-
P
-
+
Controller
A
B
0
1
2
31
64
95
+
Controller
B
C
0
1
2
31
64
95
MIDI
+
Controller
C
Cord
MIDI
MIDI
P
0
1
2
31
64
95
Cord
0
1
2
Cord
MIDI
Menu
Cord
Control
Slider 1
Slider 2
Slider 3
Slider 4
MIDI
Controller
P
+
Amount
Patchcord Destinations
Key Sustain
Fine Pitch
Pitch
Glide
Chorus Amount
Sample Start
Sample Loop
Sample Retrigger
Filter Frequency
Filter Q
Amplifier Volume
Amplifier Pan
Amplifier Crossfade
Volume Envelope Rates
Volume Envelope Attack
Volume Envelope Decay
Volume Envelope Release
Filter Envelope Rates
Filter Envelope Attack
Filter Envelope Decay
Filter Envelope Release
Aux. Envelope Rates
Aux. Envelope Attack
Aux. Envelope Decay
Aux. Envelope Release
LFO 1 & 2 Rates
LFO 1 & 2 Trigger
Lag Processor
Summing Amp
Switch
Absolute Value
Diode
Quantizer
4x Gain
Cord 1-24 Amount
FXA Send 1-4
FXB Send 1-4
Preset Lag In
Preset Lag Amount
Preset Ramp Rate
Preset
Cords
MIDI A-P are internal connections which simultaneously carry front panel controller knob
data and MIDI continuous controller data.
The 16 controller knobs on the XL-7 front panel work just like MIDI realtime controllers. The four controller knobs are permanently assigned to
controllers A-P. The front panel knob (A-P) and incoming MIDI controller
messages assigned to that letter, both control the same parameter that you
select in the PatchCord screen.
XL-7 Operation Manual 179
Programming Basics
MIDI Channels & Real-time Controls
Bank Select
Commands
When the original MIDI specification was developed, no synthesizer had
more than 40 preset locations. At that time being able to select up to 128
presets didn’t seem like much of a limitation. So it was that the original
MIDI specification provided for the selection of up to 128 presets.
Musicians wanted MORE presets and so the MIDI specification was later
amended to include Bank Select Commands. It was decided that Bank
Select Commands would use Continuous Controllers 0 and 32 to allow the
selection of up to 16,384 banks of 128 presets (over two million presets).
Because Bank Selects are implemented using Continuous Controllers, the
Bank Selections can be made per channel. (This is getting better and better.)
For each MIDI channel, you can select any of 16,384 banks and then one of
the 128 presets in the bank. Of course no synthesizer has 16,384 banks
(yet), but hey, it’s nice to know it’s possible (for that really BIG project).

When you press the
Audition button, the Bank Select
MSB and LSB are displayed on
the top line of the display.
Continuous Controller (CC) 0 is the MSB (most significant byte) and CC 32
is the LSB (least significant byte). Normally you send both the MSB and LSB
controllers to implement a bank change.
XL-7 remembers the MSB and the LSB that were last sent (or last changed
from the front panel). For example, if you have already set the Bank MSB to
04, you need only send the LSB to change banks within the XL-7 sound set.
See the MIDI Bank Select chart below.
The selected bank remains selected until you change it (either via MIDI or
by changing the bank from the front panel). Standard MIDI Program
Change commands select from 128 presets within the selected bank.
MIDI BANK SELECT
MSB LSB
cc00 cc32
180 E-MU Systems
USER
USER
USER
USER
00
00
00
00
00
01
02
03
Bank 0
Bank 1
Bank 2
Bank 3
XL-7
XL-7
XL-7
XL-7
14
14
14
14
00
01
02
03
Bank 0
Bank 1
Bank 2
Bank 3
Programming Basics
Stereo Mix Outputs
Stereo Mix
Outputs
This feature is useful for adding signal processing (EQ, reverb, etc.) of
individual sounds prior to final mixdown.
The routing can be performed according to MIDI channel from the Mix
Output screen in the Global menu. Simply assign each channel to the
desired output.
Global
Menu
MIX OUTPUT
channel 01: Send 2
To route a particular preset to a Send, first go to the Mix Output screen in
the Global menu and set the MIDI channel to “Preset”.
Global
Menu
MIX OUTPUT
channel 01: Preset
Next set the Mix Output routing in the preset to the desired output (for
each layer). Yes, you can send each layer to a different send if you want.
Preset Edit
Menu
L1
MIX OUTPUT
Send 2
By sending different amounts of presets to the effects, subtle or striking
effects can be achieved using the two effect processors. This feature allows
you to get the most out of two effects since you can have eight different
mixes.
For more information, refer to the diagram on the following page or, See
“Mix Output” on page 134.
XL-7 Operation Manual 181
Programming Basics
Stereo Mix Outputs
OUTPUT SECTION
& EFFECTS PROCESSORS
FX Sends
Send 2 10%
Send 3 0%
Send 4 0%
Mix
Output
Send 1
S
E
N
D
1
FX Sends
PRESET
Send 4 15%
Ch 2A
SEND 2
Ch 3A
SEND 3
S
E
S
U
B
1
Jack Detect
2
S
E
3
GLOBAL MENU
Effect
B
N
D
N
D
Ch 16B SEND 4
Chorus
M
A
I
N
Send 1 0%
Send 3 20%
Mix Output
Effect
A
B➟A
Send 2 0%
Ch 1A
Hall 1
Send 1 15%
PRESET
EDIT MENU
Jack Detect
S
U
B
2
S
E
N
D
4
The Mix Output screen in the Global menu assigns each MIDI channel to a
Send (1-4) or to “Preset”.
The Mix Output screen in the Preset Edit menu is ONLY used if the Global
Mix Output is set to “Preset”. Otherwise the Preset Edit menu Mix Output
settings are ignored.
182 E-MU Systems
Preset Edit Menu
The Preset Edit Menu contains four layers of preset parameters that you can
modify and then save as preset information in one of the user preset
locations. There are four instrument layers in the Preset Edit menu. See the
illustration on page 184 for a description of the Preset Layer model.

While the Preset Edit
menu is activated, all incoming
MIDI preset changes on the
selected channel are ignored.
_
If there is no “A” option
in the Layer field, you must
enable the “Edit All Layers”
function in the Global Menu
(page 140).
To Access the Preset Edit Menu
Press the Preset Edit button, lighting the LED. The Preset Edit Menu screen
displays the menu page most recently selected since powering up XL-7. The
cursor appears below the first character of the screen heading on line one.
To Scroll through Layers
Place the cursor below the layer field. Rotate the data entry control to select
a layer (1-4).
You can also select All Layers by choosing “A” in the layer field. When All
Layers is selected, the existing parameter value for any field will be
displayed if the values of all four layers are equal. If the values of all four
layers are NOT equal, the value of layer 1 will be displayed with flashing
characters. If you change the parameter value, all layers will assume the
new value and the display will stop flashing.
To Scroll through Pages
Whenever you are in the Preset Edit menu, the sixteen command buttons
function as “jump” buttons to various screens in the Preset Edit menu,
which are labelled below each button. Pressing a jump button instantly
takes you to the first screen in the selected category. Pressing the button
again takes you to the second screen in the category and so on. Repeated
pressing will rotate you back to the first screen in the category.
You can also change pages by placing the cursor below the page title field.
This will automatically be done when you press the Home/Enter button.
Rotate the data entry control to scroll through the pages.
To Change a Parameter
Place the cursor below the parameter field. Rotate the data entry control to
change the parameter value.
XL-7 Operation Manual 183
Preset Edit Menu
Four Layer Architecture
Preset Name

The Preset names consists of two parts: a 3 letter preset category and a 12
letter preset name. Position the cursor under the character location and use
the data entry control to change the character.
The preset category is used in conjunction with the Sound Navigator
feature. Using the Sound Navigator, a category is selected and the presets in
that category are listed in alphabetical order. Creating categories makes it
easier to find specific sounds when you need them. For more information
on Sound Navigator, see Sound Navigator in Chapter 2: Operations.
You can also select
characters using the keypads or
MIDI keyboard.
Four Layer
Architecture
PRESET NAME
0001 syn: VOSIM-Voc
XL-7 provides a 4 layer instrument structure. Each layer is a complete
synthesizer voice with 50 filter types, over 64 modulation sources, more
than 64 modulation destinations and 24 patchcords to connect everything
together. In addition, the four layers can be crossfaded or switched by key
position, velocity or any real-time modulation source.
Instrument
Z-Plane Filter
Layer 1
R
DCA
Pan
L
Instrument
Z-Plane Filter
Layer 2
R
DCA
Pan
L
Instrument
Z-Plane Filter
Layer 3
R
DCA
Pan
L
Instrument
Layer 4
Z-Plane Filter
R
DCA
Pan
L
184 E-MU Systems
Preset Edit Menu
Selecting Layers
Selecting Layers
In most of the Preset Edit screens, the selected layer is shown in the upper
left corner of the display. Layers 1-4 or All can be selected by positioning
the cursor on this field and using the data entry control to change the layer.
In the screen shown below, Layer 1 is selected.
L1
INSTRUMENT
0305 bas:Moog Sub
ROM:XL-7
When “All Layers” (A) is selected, the existing parameter value for any field
will be displayed if all layers are equal. If the layer parameter values are
NOT equal, the value of Layer 1 will be displayed with flashing characters.
If you move the data entry control all values will be equal to this new value
and the parameter value will no longer flash.
XL-7 Operation Manual 185
Preset Edit Menu
Defining Layer Parameters
Defining
Layer
Parameters
Selecting an
Instrument
The Preset Edit menu parameters define the four layers and include the
instrument assigned to the layer, the ranges of the layer, tuning, envelopes,
filters, and patch cords. These parameters are defined for each layer on an
individual basis (based on the currently selected layer). See “Common
Preset Parameters” on page 215 for global preset settings.
The Instrument parameter defines which of the available instrument
sounds is played by the current layer.
ROM SIMM Name
L1
INSTRUMENT
ROM: XL-7
0078 bas : Booty Q 2
Instrument Category
Instrument Name
To select an instrument for the selected layer(s), move the cursor to the
bottom line of the display and change the instrument using the data entry
control.
Sound Navigator
Sound Navigator also works to help select Instruments although the
category names are predefined. When the cursor is on the Instrument
Category field, turning the data entry control selects different instrument
categories. The Name Field will change to show the first instrument in each
category. Move the cursor to the instrument name to select instruments in
the selected category.
L1
INSTRUMENT
ROM: XL-7
0078 bas : Booty Q 2
1. Choose Category
2. Scroll through Instruments
Selecting Categories of Instruments using Sound Navigator.
186 E-MU Systems
Preset Edit Menu
Defining Key Range
Defining Key Range
The Key parameter defines the range on the keyboard used by the current
layer. The Key range is from C-2 through G8.
Middle C
C-2
C-1
C0
C1
C2
C3
C4
C5
C6
C7
C8
G8
To define the range, set the low key value and the high key value.
You can select key numbers by simply pressing the desired keyboard key
when the cursor is positioned on the low or high key field in the display.
Fade In
L1
KEY:
LO FADE
C-2 000
Fade Out
HIGH
C2
FADE
012
Layers can be crossfaded according to key position by adjusting the Low
and High Fade parameters. The first Fade field determines how many
semitones it takes the layer to Fade In from the low key. The second Fade
field determines how many semitones it takes the layer to Fade Out to the
high key. The screen shot above and the diagram below show Layer 1 being
faded out over a one octave range.
C-2
C-1
C0
C1
C2
C3
C4
C5
C6
C7
C8
G8
Layer 1
Layer 2
Layer 3
Switch
Layer 4
With a High Fade value of zero (as in layer 3 of the diagram), the layer
simply switches off at the high key.
XL-7 Operation Manual 187
Preset Edit Menu
Defining Key Range
To Switch Layers According to Key Position
The Key Range parameter allows you to create a “split” keyboard with up to
four sounds adjacent to each other on the keyboard. This is shown in the
diagram below.
C0
C1
C2
Layer 1
Layer 2
Switch

You can select key
numbers by simply pressing the
desired keyboard key when the
cursor is positioned on the low
or high key field n the display.
C3
C4
C5
Layer 3
Switch
Layer 4
Switch
Just assign the low and high key range for each of the four layers with Fade
set to zero. Set the Low and High Keys so they don’t overlap other layers.
L1
KEY:
LO
C0
FADE
000
HIGH
F1
FADE
000
L2
KEY:
LO
F#1
FADE
000
HIGH
C3
FADE
000
L3
KEY: LO
C#3
FADE
000
HIGH
F#4
FADE
000
L4
KEY: LO
G4
FADE
000
HIGH
C6
FADE
000
If two layers do overlap, both will play as shown in the next example.
188 E-MU Systems
C6
Preset Edit Menu
Defining the Velocity Crossfade Range
To Stack Layers
If the ranges of two or more Layers overlap it is called stacking layers. All
Layers assigned to a key sound when the key is played. This is shown in the
following diagram. It’s very easy to stack layers. Simply duplicate the key
ranges for any layers you want to stack.
C0
C1
C2
C3
C4
C5
C6
Layer 1
Layer 2
L1
L2
Defining the Velocity
Crossfade Range
KEY: LO
C0
FADE
000
HIGH
C6
FADE
000
KEY: LO
C0
FADE
000
HIGH
C6
FADE
000
Velocity is a measure of how hard the key is pressed. Velocity Range lets you
control the volume of the layers using velocity. Using this function you can
crossfade or cross-switch between layers according to how hard you play
the keyboard.
Set the velocity range of the layer by defining the high and low velocity
values. Values range from 0 (off) to 127 (hardest).
L2
VEL: LO
36
FADE
012
HIGH
96
FADE
012
XL-7 Operation Manual 189
Preset Edit Menu
Defining the Velocity Crossfade Range
The Fade fields define the velocity crossfade range for the currently selected
layer. The first Fade field defines the Fade In range for the low velocity
value. The second defines the Fade Out range for the high velocity value.
Velocity
0
Layer 1
Layer 2
Fade
36
127
Layer 3
Fade
Layer 4
Switch
96
With soft playing, Layer 1 sounds. As you play harder, Layer 1 gradually fades out and
Layer 2 fades in. When the keyboard is played hard, Layer 3 plays.
To Set Up a Velocity Crossfade Between Layers
Set the velocity fades so that layer 1 fades out with higher key velocity,
while layer 2 fades in. At a velocity of 64, the two sounds are equal volume.
You may want to adjust the fade in and fade out points to achieve a natural
sounding crossfade. These parameters vary depending on the sounds.
Layer
Layer 1
1
Layer
2 2
Layer
L1
L2
190 E-MU Systems
127
Increasing Velocity
0
VEL: LO
000
FADE
000
HIGH
127
FADE
127
VEL: LO
000
FADE
127
HIGH
127
FADE
000
Preset Edit Menu
Defining the Real-time Crossfade Range
Defining the
Real-time Crossfade
Range
The Real-time Crossfade window lets you control the volume of the four
layers using a real-time controller such as a front panel knob, a pedal or an
LFO or Envelope generator. The controller is defined by the PatchCord
parameter (see “PatchCords” on page 211).
The Fade fields define the crossfade range in velocity for the currently
selected layer. The first Fade field defines the Fade In amount for the low
Real-time Control value. The second defines the Fade Out amount for the
high Real-time Control value. The Fade value range is from 0 to 127.
Realtime Control Value
0
Layer 1
Layer 2
Fade
127
Layer 3
Fade
Layer 4
Switch
After the Ranges and Fades have been adjusted for each layer in the Realtime Crossfade screen, you must assign a real-time controller to RTXfade
(Real-time Crossfade) on each Layer in the PatchCord screen. Set the
PatchCord Amounts to +100.
To Set Up a Real-time Crossfade Between Two Layers
As the real-time control (knob, pedal, LFO, etc.) is increased, Layer 1 fades
out as Layer 2 fades in. This example only uses two of the possible four
layers. Refer to the screen diagrams below.
L1
L2
1.
2.
3.
RT: LO
000
RT: LO
000
FADE
000
FADE
127
HIGH
127
FADE
127
HIGH
127
FADE
000
Select a preset.
Press the Preset Edit button to access the Preset Edit menu.
Go to the Instrument page and select instruments for Layers 1 and 2.
XL-7 Operation Manual 191
Preset Edit Menu
Defining the Real-time Crossfade Range
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Press Enter, then use the data entry control to advance to the Real-time
Crossfade page.
Define the High and Low range of each Layer. In this example the entire
range of 0-127 is used.
Define the Fades for each Layer. This is just an initial setting. The Range
and Fade parameters may have to be adjusted later to get a smooth
crossfade.
Press Home/Enter and use the data entry control to advance to the
PatchCord page. Select Layer 1.
Select the modulation source for the crossfade (knob, pedal, LFO,
Envelope) and set the destination to RTXfade. Set the Cord Amount to
+100.
Select Layer 2. Select the same source and destination for the crossfade
and set the Cord Amount to +127.
L1
PATCHCORD
MidiA
->
RTXfade
10.
#01
+100
Play the keyboard while adjusting the real-time controller. Go back to
the Real-time Crossfade screens to fine tune the crossfade if necessary.
Decreasing the fade size will narrow the region where both layers are
sounding.
To Randomly Cross-Switch Between Four Layers
In certain situations, you may want to switch between several layers
randomly. Crossfade Random is a modulation source specifically designed
to handle this situation. Unlike the other random sources, Crossfade
Random generates one random number for all layers each time a key is
pressed.
To set up a four layer Cross-Switch, simply assign each of the four layers to
a different Real-time Crossfade range, then assign XfdRnd to RTXfade in
the PatchCords for each layer.
Realtime Control Value
0
16
32
Layer 1
64
Layer 2
Switch
192 E-MU Systems
48
80
96
Layer 3
Switch
112
Layer 4
Switch
127
Preset Edit Menu
Defining the Real-time Crossfade Range
1.
2.
3.
Press the Preset Edit button to access the Preset Edit menu.
Go to the Instrument screen and select Instruments for Layers 1
through 4.
Press Enter, then use the data entry control to advance to the Real-time
Crossfade page.
L1
4.
5.
6.
7.
RT: LO
000
FADE
000
HIGH
031
FADE
000
L2
RT: LO
032
FADE
000
HIGH
063
FADE
000
L3
RT: LO
064
FADE
000
HIGH
095
FADE
000
L4
RT: LO
096
FADE
000
HIGH
127
FADE
000
Define the High and Low range of each Layer as shown above.
Press Home/Enter and use the data entry control to advance to the
PatchCord page. Select Layer 1.
Select XfdRnd as the modulation source and RTXfade as the destination. Set the Cord Amount to +100.
Repeat step 6 for the remaining three layers.
XL-7 Operation Manual 193
Preset Edit Menu
Transposing the Instrument
L1
PATCHCORD
XfdRand -> RTXfade
8.
Transposing the
Instrument
#01
+100
That’s it! Now set each Layer up the way you want. Try radically
different instruments, filter settings, or tunings. Or you can make each
layer just slightly different for a more natural effect. Try adjusting the
Fades or overlapping the ranges if you want more than one layer to play
at once.
The Transpose parameter lets you transpose the key of the current layer’s
Instrument. Transpose works by shifting the keyboard position in semitone
intervals relative to middle C. Use this parameter to transpose different
layers apart by semitone intervals. For example, by transposing one layer by
+7 semitones, it will track other layers at a perfect fifth interval.
C-2
C-1
C0
C1
C2
C3
C4
C5
The range of transposition is -36 to +36 semitones.
L1
TRANSPOSE
+36 semitones
194 E-MU Systems
C6
C7
C8
G8
Preset Edit Menu
Tuning
Tuning
The Tuning parameter changes the pitch of the key in semitone and 1/64
semitone intervals.
L1
TUNING
Coarse:
+36
Fine:
+63
Use the Coarse field to shift the tuning by semitone intervals. Use the Fine
field to shift tuning by 1/64 semitones (or 1.56 cents) intervals.
Background: Transpose vs. Coarse Tuning
Transpose works by shifting the keyboard assignment of the Instrument (as
if you were sliding the keyboard up and down with the Instrument
remaining in the same position). Coarse Tuning keeps the instrument
placement on the keyboard and actually tunes the samples up using a
digital process called interpolation. Use Course Tuning on drum instruments to change the pitch while keeping sample placement constant.
Coarse Tuning can also be useful to slightly change the timbre of the
instrument.
Amplifier
This parameter sets the initial volume and pan position of the current layer.
These values can be changed using any Real-time Controller set up in the
PatchCords. The value range for the volume is from -96 dB to +10 dB. 0 dB
is the default setting. Routinely turning the volume up to +10 dB is not
recommended because it doesn’t allow other modulation sources to
increase the volume further.
L1
AMPLIFIER
Volume: +10dB
Pan: 48L
This field determines the initial Pan value for the current layer. The value
range for Pan is from 64L to 0 (left) and 0 to 63R (right). Pan adjusts the
volume into the left and right output channels relative to the Pan setting in
the main Preset Select screen (see “Channel Pan” on page 46). So, if you, for
example, set the Pan value in the Preset Select screen to 64L and set this
Pan value to 63R, the actual pan amount would be 0 as these two pan
parameters are relative to each other.
XL-7 Operation Manual 195
Preset Edit Menu
Volume Envelope
Volume Envelope
An envelope can be described as a “contour” which is used to shape the
sound over time. The Volume Envelope controls the volume of the sound in
the current layer over time. The way the volume of a sound evolves has a
profound effect on how we perceive the sound.
Each instrument has its own Factory preset Volume Envelope setting. The
Volume Envelope allows you to program your own envelope settings.
Selecting the Mode
O
Factory Mode is useful
for Instruments containing
multiple drums, since each drum
can have its own envelope
settings.
A factory drum kit envelope
actually contains a separate
envelope for every voice on every
key instead of a single global
envelope.
_
If two adjacent segments
have the same level in a “timebased” envelope, the segment
will be skipped. Adjacent
segments must have different
levels for the rate control to
work.
The Mode field determines whether the layer will use the instrument’s
default envelope (Factory) or use the user-programmed Volume Envelope.
There are three mode options and repeat.
• Factory: Uses the factory preset envelope contained in each instrument.
If you select the “Factory” mode, the Volume Envelope parameters are
disabled and the factory defined settings are used instead.
L1
VOLUME ENVELOPE
Mode: factory
• Time-based: Defines the Volume Envelope rates from 0 to 127 (approximately 1 ms to 160 seconds). The Master clock has no affect on timebased rates.
• Tempo-based: The Volume Envelope times vary based on the master
tempo setting. Note values are displayed instead of a number when the
time corresponds to an exact note value. Tempo-based envelopes are
useful when using external sequencers and arpeggiators because the
envelope rates compress and expand according to the Master Tempo setting, keeping the envelopes in sync with the sequence or arpeggio.
Tempo-Based Envelopes
= Initial Setting
= Increase Master Tempo
= Decrease Master Tempo
Tempo-based envelope rates change according to the Master Tempo rate.
196 E-MU Systems
Preset Edit Menu
Volume Envelope

See the Programming
Basics section of this manual for
detailed information about how
the Envelopes work.
Defining the Volume Envelope
The Volume Envelope controls the volume of the layer over time. The
Volume Envelope has six stages to the contour: Attack 1, Attack 2, Decay 1,
Decay 2, Release 1 and Release 2. When a key is pressed, the Envelope goes
through the first four stages. If you continue to hold down the key, the
envelope holds at the Decay 2 level. When the key is released, the envelope
continues through the Release stages ending at the Release 2 level.
L1
VOL ENV
Attack 1
RATE
LEVEL
84
100%
As soon as the Attack 1 level is reached, the Attack 2 phase begins. When
the Attack 2 Level is reached, the Decay 1 phase begins. When the key is
released, the envelope immediately jumps to the Release 1 stage, then the
Release 2 stage finally ending at the Release 2 level.
If you have selected the factory mode, the Volume Envelope parameter
screen looks like the following illustration.
L1
VOL ENV
RATE
(using factory envelope)
LEVEL
_
y1
Dcy2
Rl
s1
At
k1
2
Atk
Dc
If the Release 2 level is
set at a value other than zero,
the note will continue to sound
after the key is released. This
might be useful for drone effects,
but the channel won’t stop
sounding until all channels are
used up.
Sustain
Level
Rls2
level
time
Key
Down
Key
Released
On the Volume Envelope, levels can only be set to positive values.
The value range is from 0 to +100.
XL-7 Operation Manual 197
Preset Edit Menu
Chorusing the Layer
Chorusing the Layer
_
WARNING: Because it
works by doubling instruments,
Chorusing halves the number of
notes you can play.
Chorusing “thickens” the sound by doubling the sound in stereo and then
detuning it. Every layer with chorus turned on uses twice the polyphony
for that layer.
L1
CHORUS
off
WIDTH
100%
The first field in this screen turns Chorus On or Off and allows you to adjust
the amount of detuning (1 to 100%). The Width parameter controls the
stereo spread. 0% reduces the chorus to mono and 100% provides the most
stereo separation.
Sound Start Offset
and Delay
Sound Start sets where the instrument begins playing when you hit a key.
Setting the Start Offset amount to “0” plays the sample from the beginning.
Higher values move the Sample Start Point further into the sample toward
the end. There is also a PatchCord source which can be used to change the
Sound Start point at note-on time.
L1
SOUND
START
127
DELAY
127
Sample
Start
Controlling the Sound Start using Key Velocity (< Amt -) brings in the attack of the wave
only when you play hard. This is especially effective with percussion instruments.
Delay defines the time between when you hit a key (note-on) and the onset
of the current layer’s note and the start of the envelopes (if applicable).
Delay values below zero are Tempo-based values, meaning the time is based
on the Master Tempo setting. Note values are displayed by adjusting the
Delay Time value below zero. The sound will be delayed by the selected
note value based on the master clock.
198 E-MU Systems
Preset Edit Menu
Non-Transpose Mode
Non-Transpose
Mode
This function turns keyboard transposition On or Off for the current layer.
With Nontranspose “on,” the keyboard will not control the pitch of the
instrument. This is a useful function for drones, attack “chiffs,” or other
sound effects which you may not want to track the keyboard.
L1
NONTRANSPOSE
off
Solo Mode
Provides the playing action of a monophonic instrument such as a lead
synthesizer by preventing more than one note from sounding at once.
There are eight different solo modes provided. Try setting up different
layers with different solo mode and glide rates or combine solo mode with
polyphonic playing modes.
L1
SOLO MODE
synth (low)
O
In order to define a
monophonic glide (see the
Portamento parameter), you
must be in Solo mode.
The Solo modes are:
Multiple Trigger: Last note priority. No key-up action. Retriggers
envelopes and samples when a key is pressed.
Melody (last): Last note priority. No key-up action.
First solo note: Envelopes start at Attack segment from zero. Samples
start at the beginning.
If previous note is releasing: Envelopes start at Attack segment, but from
current level. Samples start at the beginning.
When playing “Legato”: Envelopes continue from current segment and
level. Samples start at the loop or the beginning if unlooped.
Melody (low): Same as Melody (last), but with low note priority. Newly
played keys which are higher than the lowest solo key held do not sound.
Melody (high): Same as Melody (last), but with high note priority. Newly
played keys which are lower than the highest solo key held do not sound.
Synth (last): Similar to Melody (last) but this mode has key-up action.
When you release the currently sounding solo key while holding other keys
down, the highest held solo key sounds in a Legato fashion.
XL-7 Operation Manual 199
Preset Edit Menu
Assign Group
Synth (low): Same as Synth (last) but with low note priority. When you
release the currently sounding solo key while holding other keys down, the
lowest held solo key sounds in a Legato fashion (MiniMoog).
Synth (high): Same as Synth (last) but with high note priority. When you
release the currently sounding solo key while holding other keys down, the
highest held solo key sounds in a Legato fashion.
Fingered Glide: Same as Synth (last), except that Glide is disabled when
playing Staccato, enabled when playing Legato.
Assign Group
Use the Assign Group parameter to assign a certain number of channels to
each layer. By assigning all voices in the preset to assign groups, important
parts are protected from being “stolen” by more recently played keys. Or
you can assign a voice, such as an open high hat, to a mono channel so it is
cancelled by a closed high hat on the same mono channel. Layers rotate
within their assigned “bin” of channels, not interfering with other bins.
L1
ASSIGN GROUP
poly all
The modes are:
Poly All: Notes are played polyphonically with dynamic channel
assignment using all 64 channels.
Poly 16 A-B: Two bins of 16 channels each. Notes are played polyphonically with dynamic channel assignment using no more than 16 channels.
Poly 8 A-D: Four bins of 8 channels each. Notes are played polyphonically
with dynamic channel assignment using no more than 8 channels each.
Poly 4 A-D: Four bins of 4 channels each. Notes are played polyphonically
with dynamic channel assignment using no more than 4 channels each.
Poly 2 A-D: Four bins of 2 channels each. Notes are played polyphonically
with dynamic channel assignment using no more than 2 channels each.
Mono A-I: Nine monophonic channels. Any layers assigned to the same
letter interrupt each other without affecting other layers.
200 E-MU Systems
Preset Edit Menu
Glide
Glide creates a smooth transition from one note to the next instead of the
normal instantaneous change in pitch when a new key is pressed. This
effect is commonly heard on slide guitars, synthesizers and violins.
L1
GLIDE RATE
0.000 sec/oct
CURVE
linear
The front panel Glide Button LED comes on when the any layer of the
current preset has a glide rate greater than 0.000 seconds (regardless of if a
PatchCord is connected or not). Pressing the button turns the LED and
glide off. Pressing the front panel glide button when all layers are set to a
glide of 0.000 turns glide on with a rate of 0.142 seconds/octave.
The Glide Rate parameter defines the time it takes to glide to the new pitch
(the larger the value, the slower the glide rate) The glide rate value range is
from 0 through 32.738 seconds (zero means off).
The Glide Curve describes how the glide accelerates as it slides between
notes. Because of the ear’s non-linear response to pitch, a linear glide
sounds slow at the beginning and speeds up toward the end. Exponential
curves actually sound smoother and more linear. Eight exponential curves
are provided. Choose one that suits your style.
Last
Note
New
Note
Exp1
Last
Note
Glide Speed
Glide Speed
Linear
Glide Speed
Glide
New
Note
Last
Note
Exp8
New
Note
Glide can be either polyphonic or monophonic depending of the state of
Solo Mode.
1.
2.
3.
4.
To Set up a Glide Rate Knob:
Set at least one layer to the minimum setting of 0.002 sec/oct. (This
forces the Glide LED to come on.)
Connect the MIDI controller of your choice to Glide Rate on the layers
you’d like to glide. Adjust the Cord Amount for the desired range.
Disconnect the MIDI controller from whatever else it was connected to
before you started mucking about.
The Glide button turns Glide on/off and the knob controls the rate.
XL-7 Operation Manual 201
Preset Edit Menu
Z-Plane Filters
Z-Plane Filters
A filter is a device which changes the output of a signal (sound) by
removing certain elements of the signal based on the frequency and
amplitude. The “Order” of a filter defines the number of filter elements it
contains. The more elements, the more complex the filter.
XL-7 contains 50 different types of E-MU’s celebrated Z-plane filters. In
addition to the standard Low pass, High pass and Band pass filters, XL-7
contains Swept Octave Equalizers, Phasers, Flangers, Vocal Formant Filters,
and digital models of classic synthesizer filters.
In the filter chart below you will notice that the “Order” of the filters varies
from 2 to 12 order. Higher order filters have more sections and can produce
more complex formants. XL-7 can produce 128 filters of up to 6th order or
64 filters of 12th order complexity. Therefore, if you decided to use all 12th
order filters, XL-7 would be limited to 64 voices.
XL-7 Filter Types
This screen allows you to choose the type of filter for the current layer.
L1
FILTER
Phazer 2 E4
Ord
6
Type
PHA
Filter Name
Order
Type
Description
Smooth
02
LPF
Typical OB type low-pass filter with a shallow
12 dB/octave slope.
Classic
04
LPF
4-pole low-pass filter, the standard filter on
classic analog synths. 24 dB/octave rolloff.
Steeper
06
LPF
6-pole low-pass filter which has a steeper slope
than a 4-pole low-pass filter.
36 dB/octave rolloff!
MegaSweepz
12
LPF
“Loud” LPF with a hard Q. Tweeters beware!
EarlyRizer
12
LPF
Classic analog sweeping with hot Q and
Lo-end.
Millennium
12
LPF
Aggressive low-pass filter. Q gives you a
variety of spiky tonal peaks.
KlubKlassik
12
LPF
Responsive low-pass filter sweep with a wide
spectrum of Q sounds
VOW Vowel/ formant
BassBox-303
12
LPF
Pumped up lows with TB-like squelchy Q
factor.
EQ+
EQ boost
Shallow
02
HPF
2-pole high-pass filter. 12 dB/octave slope.
EQ-
EQ cut
Deeper
04
HPF
Classic 4-pole high-pass filter. Cutoff sweep
progressively cuts 4th Order High-pass.
SFX
Special Effect
Band-pass1
02
BPF
Band-pass filter with 6 dB/octave rolloff on
either side of the passband and Q control.
Band-pass2
04
BPF
Band-pass filter with 12 dB/octave rolloff on
either side of the passband and Q control.
Filter Types
LPF
Low-pass filter
PHA
Phaser
HPF
High-pass filter
FLG
Flanger
BPF
Band-pass filter
202 E-MU Systems
Preset Edit Menu
XL-7 Filter Types
Filter Name
Order
Type
Description
ContraBand
06
BPF
A novel band-pass filter where the frequency
peaks and dips midway in the frequency range.
Swept1>1oct
06
EQ+
Parametric filter with 24 dB of boost or cut and
a one octave bandwidth.
Swept2>1oct
06
EQ+
Parametric filter with 24 dB of boost or cut. The
bandwidth of the filter is two octaves wide at
the low end of the audio spectrum, gradually
changing to one octave wide at the upper end.
Swept3>1oct
06
EQ+
Parametric filter with 24 dB of boost or cut. The
bandwidth of the filter is three octaves wide at
the low end of the audio spectrum, gradually
changing to one octave wide at the upper end.
DJAlkaline
12
EQ+
Band accentuating filter, Q shifts “ring”
frequency.
AceOfBass
12
EQ+
Bass-boost to bass-cut morph
TB-OrNot-TB
12
EQ+
Great Bassline “Processor.”
BolandBass
12
EQ+
Constant bass boost with mid-tone Q
control.
BassTracer
12
EQ+
Low Q boosts bass. Try sawtooth or square
waveform with Q set to 115.
RogueHertz
12
EQ+
Bass with mid-range boost and smooth Q.
Sweep cutoff with Q at 127.
RazorBlades
12
EQ-
Cuts a series of frequency bands.
Q selects different bands.
RadioCraze
12
EQ-
Band limited for a cheap radio-like EQ
AahAyEeh
06
VOW
Vowel formant filter which sweeps from “Ah”
sound, through “Ay” sound to “Ee” sound at
maximum frequency setting. Q
varies the apparent size of the mouth cavity.
Ooh-To-Aah
06
VOW
Vowel formant filter which sweeps from “Oo”
sound, through “Oh” sound to “Ah” sound at
maximum frequency setting.
Q varies the apparent size of mouth cavity.
MultiQVox
12
VOW
Multi-Formant, Map Q To velocity.
Ooh-To-Eee
12
VOW
Oooh to Eeee formant morph.
TalkingHedz
12
VOW
“Oui” morphing filter. Q adds peaks.
Eeh-To-Aah
12
VOW
“E” to “Ah” formant movement.
Q accentuates “peakiness.”
UbuOrator
12
VOW
Aah-Uuh vowel with no Q. Raise Q for throaty
vocals.
DeepBouche
12
VOW
French vowels! “Ou-Est” vowel at low Q.
PhazeShift1
06
PHA
Recreates a comb filter effect typical of phase
shifters. Frequency moves position of notches.
Q varies the depth of the notches.
XL-7 Operation Manual 203
Preset Edit Menu
XL-7 Filter Types
Filter Name
Order
Type
Description
PhazeShift2
06
PHA
Comb filter with slightly different notch
frequency moving the frequency of notches.
Q varies the depth of the notches.
FreakShifta
12
PHA
Phasey movement. Try major 6 interval and
maximum Q.
CruzPusher
12
PHA
Accentuates harmonics at high Q.
Try with a sawtooth LFO.
FlangerLite
06
FLG
Contains three notches. Frequency moves frequency and spacing of notches.
Q increases flanging depth.
AngelzHairz
12
FLG
Smooth sweep flanger. Good with vox waves.
eg. I094, Q =60
DreamWeava
12
FLG
Directional Flanger. Poles shift down at low Q
and up at high Q.
MeatyGizmo
12
REZ
Filter inverts at mid-Q.
DeadRinger
12
REZ
Permanent “Ringy” Q response.
Many Q variations.
ZoomPeaks
12
REZ
High resonance nasal filter.
AcidRavage
12
REZ
Great analog Q response. Wide tonal range. Try
with a sawtooth LFO.
BassOMatic
12
REZ
Low boost for basslines. Q goes to
distortion at the maximum level.
LucifersQ
12
REZ
Violent mid Q filter! Take care with Q
values 40-90.
ToothComb
12
REZ
Highly resonant harmonic peaks shift in
unison. Try mid Q.
EarBender
12
WAH
Midway between wah & vowel. Strong
mid-boost. Nasty at high Q settings.
FuzziFace
12
DST
Nasty clipped distortion. Q functions as
mid-frequency tone control.
BlissBatz
06
SFX
Bat phaser from the Emulator 4.
KlangKling
12
SFX
Ringing Flange filter. Q “tunes” the ring
frequency.
Filter Parameters
The Freq and Q parameters control various elements of the filter depending
on the type of filter used. See the table in the Filter Types section for details
about what the Freq and Q fields control in each filter.
L1
FILTER
Freq:
255
204 E-MU Systems
Q:
019
Preset Edit Menu
Filter Envelope
Filter Envelope
The Filter Envelope is normally used to control the filter frequency and has
six stages. Unlike the Volume Envelope, the Filter Envelope must be
patched to the Filter Frequency using a PatchCord. In this respect, it can be
thought of as a general purpose envelope generator which is normally
patched to control the filter. The Filter Envelope Levels can be negative as
well as positive.
There are three mode options:
• Time-based: Defines the Filter Envelope rates from 0 to 127 (approximately 1 ms to 160 seconds). The Master clock has no affect on timebased rates.
L1
FILT ENV
Attack 1
RATE
84
LEVEL
100%
• Tempo-based: The Filter Envelope times vary based on the master tempo
setting and are displayed in values such as 1, 2, 3, etc. Note values are
displayed instead of a number when the time corresponds to an exact
note value. Tempo-based envelopes are useful when using arpeggiators
and sequencers because the envelope rates compress and expand according to the Master Tempo setting, keeping the envelopes in sync with the
music. See the illustration on page 158.
L1
FILT ENV
Attack 1
RATE
1/4
LEVEL
100%
• Envelope Repeat: The Envelope Generators can also be made to repeat.
When the envelope repeat function is On, the Attack (1&2) and Decay
(1&2) stages will continue to repeat as long as the key is held. As soon as
the key is released, the envelope continues through its normal Release
stages (1 & 2). For more information see page 158.
1.
To Turn on Envelope Repeat:
Move the cursor until it is underneath the Mode field as shown below.
L1
FILTER ENVELOPE
Mode: time-based
2.
Turn the data entry control clockwise. The lower line changes to:
XL-7 Operation Manual 205
Preset Edit Menu
Auxiliary Envelope
L1
FILTER ENVELOPE
Repeat: off
3.
+100
1
y1
0
Sustain
k2
At
Dc
The default PatchCord
settings connect the Filter
Envelope to Filter Frequency but
the envelope can be routed to
any real-time control destination
using a PatchCord.
Rls

The Filter Envelope controls the filter frequency of the layer over time. The
Envelope has six stages to the contour: Attack 1, Attack 2, Decay 1, Decay 2,
Release 1 and Release 2. When a key is pressed, the Envelope goes through
the first four stages. If the key continues to be held, the envelope holds at
the Decay 2 level. When the key is released, the envelope immediately
jumps to the Release 1 stage, then the Release 2 stage finally ending at the
Release 2 level.
k1
See the Programming
Basics section of this manual for
detailed information about how
the Envelopes work.
Defining the Filter Envelope
At

Move the cursor underneath the on/off field, then turn the data entry
control clockwise so that Repeat is On.
time
Rl
s2
Dcy
2
-100
Key Down
Auxiliary Envelope
206 E-MU Systems
Key Released
The Auxiliary Envelope is a supplementary general purpose envelope that
can be routed to any real-time control destination in the PatchCords. It is
identical to the filter envelope generator. See “Filter Envelope” on page 205
for full details.
Preset Edit Menu
Low Frequency Oscillators (LFOs)
Low Frequency
Oscillators (LFOs)
A Low Frequency Oscillator or LFO, is simply a wave that repeats at a slow
speed. XL-7 has two LFOs per layer identified on the display as LFO1 and
LFO2.
An LFO can be routed to any real-time control destination using a
PatchCord. LFOs have a myriad of uses, some of which probably haven’t
been thought of yet. The following examples show a few common uses.
• Control the pitch of the sound (LFO -> Pitch). This effect is called
“vibrato” and is an important performance tool. Many presets use this
routing with the modulation wheel controlling “how much” modulation is applied.
• Create a “tremolo” effect by routing the LFO to control the volume
(LFO -> AmpVolume).
• Add a bit of animation to the sound by routing the LFO to control the
filter. Set the PatchCord amount low for a subtle effect.
The LFOs have five parameters: Shape, Sync, Rate, Delay and Variation.
Shape
LFO waveforms have different shapes. The shape of the waveform determines the effect of the LFO. LFOs have traditionally been used to add
vibrato or repeating movement to a sound. These new shapes offer a lot of
new programming possibilities.
L1
LFO1
SHAPE
sawtooth
SYNC
key sync
If you modulate the pitch of an instrument, it’s easy to visualize the shape
of the waveform. For example, the sine wave has a smooth, rolling shape
that changes the pitch smoothly. The square waveform changes between
two pitches abruptly. A sawtooth waveform increases the pitch smoothly,
then abruptly changes back down. The available waveforms are shown
below.
XL-7 Operation Manual 207
Preset Edit Menu
Low Frequency Oscillators (LFOs)
R a n do m
T ri a n g l e
S a wtooth
LFO Tricks & Tips:
• The Random LFO wave is truly
random and is different for
each voice and layer.
Si n e
Squ a re
3 3 % Pu ls e
25% Pulse
16% Pulse
1 2 % Pu ls e
• The Pattern (Pat) waveforms
will sound the same on
different layers and voices.
• Sine + Noise is very useful for
simulating trumpet and flute
vibrato.
★ When routing Hemi-quaver
to Pitch:
+38 = major scale
-38 = phrygian scale
+76 = whole tone scale
(+38) + (+76) = diminished
P a t : Oct a v es
(two cords)
P a t : F i f t h + Oc t a v e
+ Octave
Pa t: S u s 4 tr ip
C
odd amount = S+H sound
F
G
- Octave
P a t : N een er
C
G
C
Si n e 1 , 2
S ine 1 ,3 ,5
C
Note: References to musical
intervals in the pattern LFO
shapes are with the LFO
routed to pitch and a
PatchCord amount of +38.
A#
G
Si n e + N o i s e
Hem i -qu a v er
Sync
LFO Synced to 1/4 Note Clock
The Sync field specifies whether the LFO is synchronized to a key stroke or
is Free Running. Key Sync starts the LFO wave at the beginning of its cycle
each time you press a key on the controller. In Free Run mode, the LFO
wave begins at a random point in its cycle each time you press a key on the
controller.
Rate
The Rate field determines the LFO speed in absolute frequency rate values
or tempo-based note values. All values equal to or greater than zero specify
absolute frequency values from 0.08 Hz to 18.14 Hz.
208 E-MU Systems
Preset Edit Menu
Low Frequency Oscillators (LFOs)
Values less than zero specify tempo-based rates. If you modulate the rate of
a tempo-based LFO, the rates will jump between the tempo-based note
values with each PatchCord increment of “1”. As an example: if the LFO
rate was set to 8/1 and you patched the Mod Wheel to control rate with a
PatchCord amount of +1, turning the Mod Wheel to maximum would
change the LFO rate to 4/1d. Refer to the chart below.
L1
LFO1
RATE
0.08Hz
DELAY
60
Tempo-based Rates
(based on Master Tempo)
Display
octal whole note
8/1
dotted quad whole note
4/1d
octal whole note triplet
8/1t
quad whole note
4/1
dotted double whole note
2/1d
quad whole note triplet
4/1t
double whole note
2/1
dotted whole note
1/1d
double note triplet
2/1t
whole note
1/1
dotted half note
1/2d
whole note triplet
1/1t
half note
1/2
dotted quarter note
1/4d
half note triplet
1/2t
quarter note
1/4
dotted 8th note
1/8d
quarter note triplet
1/4t
8th note
1/8
dotted 16th note
1/16d
8th note triplet
1/8t
16th note
1/16
dotted 32nd note
1/32d
16th note triplet
1/16t
32nd Note
1/32
VAR
020
XL-7 Operation Manual 209
Preset Edit Menu
Low Frequency Oscillators (LFOs)
Delay
The Delay parameter defines the amount of time between hitting a key on
the controller and the onset of the LFO modulation. Delay can be used to
simulate an effect often used by acoustic instrument players where the
vibrato is brought in only after the initial note pitch is established. The
following illustration demonstrates how delay works.
time
Delay
key
down
All Delay values equal to or greater than zero specify absolute time rates
from 0 to 127. Values less than zero specify Tempo-based mode. Refer to the
previous table for times and tempo-based rates.
Variation
LFO Variation sets the amount of random variation of the LFO each time
you press a key on the controller. This creates a chorus or ensemble effect
since each note played has a slightly different modulation rate. The higher
the value entered, the greater the note to note variation in the LFO.
_
The Variation value range is from 0 through 100.
Variation is disabled
when a Tempo-Based LFO is
selected.
LFO variation changes the rate of each note to create an “ensemble” effect.
210 E-MU Systems
Preset Edit Menu
PatchCords
PatchCords
PatchCords tie everything together by connecting modulation sources to
destinations. Each PatchCord has its own Amount control which can be
positive or negative (negative amounts invert the signal). In addition, the
PatchCord amounts themselves can be controlled by any modulation
source. XL-7 provides 24 patches for each layer.
There are three permanently connected control routings: volume envelope
to amplifier, pitch wheel to pitch and key to pitch. All other connections
must be made using the PatchCords.
Modulation
Source
Amount +/-
-
LFO 1
+
Destination
Amp
Volume
Modulation
Source
Destination
LFO 1
LFO 2
Amp Env
Filt Env
Aux Env
Wheel
Pressure
etc.
Amp Vol
Pitch
Pan
LFO Rate
Aux Env
Env Atk
Glide
etc.
Each patch has an amount field which determines how much modulation
is applied to the destination. The modulation amount can be positive or
negative. Negative values invert the input. The amount value range is from
-100 to +100.
L1
PATCHCORD
RlsVel
->
AmpVol
L1
PATCHCORD
Key+
->
FiltRes
#01
+100
#24
-27
XL-7 Operation Manual 211
Preset Edit Menu
PatchCords
Modulator Polarity
You will notice that some of the modulation sources have symbols
following their names. For example, there are three Velocity modulation
sources, Vel +, Vel ±, and Vel <.
Control
Value
+
±
<
0
63
127
Control Value Applied
0
-63
-127
63
0
-63
127
+64
0
+ modulation ADDS to the
initial value. (Normal)
± centers around Zero.
(Use for LFOs, Filt. Freq.)
< modulation SUBTRACTS
from the initial value
“+” Modulation: Uses only the positive half of the range, adding to the
current value. For example, if the filter frequency were set to 100 and you
patched Vel+ to the filter, the filter frequency would increase from 100 as
velocity was applied.
“±” Modulation: Uses both sides (full) range and both adding and
subtracting from the current value. For example, if the filter frequency
were set to 100 and you patched Vel ± to the filter, the filter frequency
would decrease from 100 with key velocities of 63 or less and increase from
100 with key velocities of 64 and above. Therefore with medium velocity,
the Filter frequency is approximately where you set it at 100.
An LFO ± works the same way; on the positive half of the cycle it increases
the initial amount and on the negative half of the cycle it decreases the
initial amount. With a ± modulation source, a value of 64 equals 0.
“<” Modulation: Uses only the negative half of the range, subtracting
from the current value. For example, if the Amplifier Volume were set to
+3 dB and you patched Vel < to AmpVol, the volume would be at +3 dB
only when maximum key velocity were applied. Lower key velocities would
scale back the volume. In general, < modulation is the proper choice when
modulating Volume.
212 E-MU Systems
Preset Edit Menu
PatchCords
Here is a list of all layer modulation sources and destinations in XL-7.
Important! The Touchstrip
is programmed from the
PitchWhl modulation source.
Modulation Sources:
Modulation Destinations
Off
Off
Key (+, +)
KeySust (Key Sustain)
Velocity (+, +, <)
FinePtch (Fine Pitch)
RlsVel (Release Velocity)
Pitch
Gate
Glide
Pressure (Aftertouch)
ChrsAmt (Chorus Amount)
PitchWhl (Pitch Wheel, TouchStrip)
‘SStart (Sample Start) -note-on)
ModWhl (Modulation Wheel)
SLoop (Sample Loop)
Pedal
SRetrig (Sample Retrigger)
MIDI Volume (Controller 7)
FiltFreq (Filter Frequency)
MIDI Pan (Controller 10)
‘FiltRes (Filter Resonance -note-on)
MIDI Expression (Controller 11)
AmpVol (Amplifier Volume)
Note: Flip-Flop Footswitches
1 & 2 remain in their last
condition when a new preset
is selected.
MIDI A-P
AmpPan (Amplifier Pan)
PLagOut (Preset Lag Out)
RTXfade (Real-time Crossfade)
PRampOut (Preset Ramp Out)
VEnvRts (Volume Envelope Rates -all)
FootSw1 - 3 (Foot Switch 1-3)
VEnvAtk (Volume Envelope Attack)
Flip-Flop Footswitch 3 resets
to the Off condition whenever
a new preset is selected.
FootFF (Flip-Flop Foot Switch 1 -3)
VEnvDcy (Volume Envelope Decay)
Note: The Envelope Sustain
parameter controls the Decay 2
Level segment of the envelope
generator.
Key Glide
VEnvSus (Volume Envelope Sustain)
VolEnv +, +, < (Volume Envelope)
VEnvRls (Volume Envelope Release)
FilEnv +, +, < (Filter Envelope)
FEnvRts (Filter Envelope Rates -all)
AuxEnv +, +, < (Auxiliary Envelope)
FEnvAtk (Filter Envelope Attack)
LFO 1 & 2 (+, +)
FEnvDcy (Filter Envelope Decay)
White (White Noise)
FEnvSus (Filter Envelope Sustain)
Pink (Pink Noise)
FEnvRls (Filter Envelope Release)
XfdRand (Crossfade Random)
FEnvTrig (Filter Envelope Trigger)
KeyRand 1 & 2 (Key Random)
AEnvRts (Auxiliary Envelope Rates -all)
Lag 0 sum (summing amp out)
AEnvAtk (Auxiliary Envelope Attack)
Lag 1 sum (summing amp out)
AEnvDcy (Auxiliary Envelope Decay)
Lag 0 & 1 (Lag Processor)
AEnvSus (Auxiliary Envelope Sustain)
Clk Divisors (Octal, Quad, Double
Whole, Whole, Half, Qtr, 8th,16th)
AEnvRls (Auxiliary Envelope Release)
DC (DC Offset)
AEnvTrig (Auxiliary Envelope Trigger)
Summing Amp
LFO 1 & 2 Rate
Switch
LFO 1 & 2 Trigger
Absolute Value
Lag Processor In 0 & 1
Diode
Sum (Summing Amp)
Flip-Flop
Switch
Quantizer
Abs (Absolute Value)
4x Gain
Diode
Quantize
Flip-Flop
Gain 4x
Cord 1-24 Amount
XL-7 Operation Manual 213
Preset Edit Menu
Pitch Bend Range
Pitch Bend Range
Specifies the Pitch Wheel range in semitones for the current layer. Pitch
Wheel is a standard synthesizer control which is transmitted as a MIDI
continuous controller message used (normally) to bend the pitch up and
down.
The PitchBend range is from 0 to +12 semitones or “Master.” A setting of
“0” turns the pitch wheel Off for the current layer. The Master setting uses
the Pitch Bend range defined in the Global menu.
L1
Mix Output
PITCHBEND RANGE
+/- 12 semitones
This feature allows you to program the Effect Send as a part of the preset.
Note that for this feature to work, the Mix Output setting in the Global
menu MUST be set to “Preset” on the selected MIDI channel. If you want to
define output routing by MIDI channel, set it up using the Mix Output page
in the Global menu. See “Mix Output” on page 134 for more information.
L1
MIX OUTPUT
Send2->main
FX Send
Routing
Output
Routing
The Sends function as effect processor inputs (effect sends). The Output
Routing field shows the true routing of the Sends to the Main output.
1.
2.
3.
4.
214 E-MU Systems
To Control the Mix Output from the Preset:
Move the cursor until it is underneath the Layer field and change the
Layer using the data entry control.
Move the cursor until it is underneath the FX Send Routing field and
change the Send (1-4) using the data entry control.
Locate the MIX OUTPUT screen in the Global menu.
Set the MIDI channel you are using to “use preset”.
Preset Edit Menu
Common Preset Parameters
Common
Preset
Parameters
Preset Effects
This section of the Preset Edit menu chapter describes parameters that
affect all layers in the preset.
XL-7 has two stereo effects processors. When playing presets one at a time,
the two processors can be programmed as part of the preset. The diagram
below shows how the effects are integrated into the signal path using a
parallel effects send/return model, similar to a mixing console.
FX Send Amount
Reverb, Delay
Effect
A
Sum
Layers
Main
Outs
Dry Signal
Sum
Effect
B
Chorus, Flange
FX Send Amount
Refer to the Effects chapter for additional information and instructions for
setting up both the Preset Effects and the Master Effects.
XL-7 Operation Manual 215
Preset Edit Menu
Preset Effects
OUTPUT SECTION
& EFFECTS PROCESSORS
FX Sends
PRESET
EDIT MENU
Send 2 10%
Send 3 0%
Send 4 0%
Mix
Output
Send 1
S
E
N
D
1
FX Sends
PRESET
Send 4 15%
Ch 2A
SEND 2
Ch 3A
SEND 3
S
E
S
U
B
1
Jack Detect
2
S
E
3
GLOBAL MENU
Effect
B
N
D
N
D
Ch 16B SEND 4
Chorus
M
A
I
N
Send 1 0%
Send 3 20%
Mix Output
Effect
A
B➟A
Send 2 0%
Ch 1A
Hall 1
Send 1 15%
Jack Detect
S
U
B
2
S
E
N
D
4
The Mix Output setting in the Global Menu determines if the Preset’s Mix
Output routing will be used. This allows the Sends to be programmed by
either MIDI Channel or by Preset, whichever you prefer.
216 E-MU Systems
Preset Edit Menu
FXA Algorithm
FXA Algorithm
This screen selects the effect type for Effect Processor A. The “A” effects
consist of different reverb types and digital delays. Move the cursor to the
lower line of the display and select the effect you want.
FXA ALGORITHM
Lg Concert Pan
A Effect Types
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
Room 1
Room 2
Room 3
Hall 1
Hall 2
Plate
Delay
Panning Delay
Multitap 1
Multitap Pan
3 Tap
3 Tap Pan
Soft Room
Warm Room
Perfect Room
Tiled Room
Hard Plate
Warm Hall
Spacious Hall
Bright Hall
Bright Hall Pan
Bright Plate
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
29.
30.
31.
32.
33.
34.
35.
36.
37.
38.
39.
40.
41.
42.
43.
44.
BBall Court
Gymnasium
Cavern
Concert 9
Concert 10 Pan
Reverse Gate
Gate 2
Gate Pan
Concert 11
Medium Concert
Large Concert
Large Concert Pan
Canyon
DelayVerb 1
DelayVerb 2
DelayVerb 3
DelayVerb 4 Pan
DelayVerb 5 Pan
DelayVerb 6
DelayVerb 7
DelayVerb 8
DelayVerb 9
XL-7 Operation Manual 217
Preset Edit Menu
FXA Parameters
FXA Parameters
The FXA parameters are Decay, High Frequency Damping, and the FxB to
FxA send. Decay sets the length of time it takes an effect to fade out. HF
Damping causes the high frequency energy to fade away more quickly
during the reverb decay. FxB to FxA controls the amount of the “B” effect
sent through effect “A”. This allows you to place the two effects in series
and create setups such as “distortion through reverb” among others. Please
refer to the Effects chapter for more information about the effects.
FXA DECAY
048
FXA Send Amounts
HFDAMP
064
These parameters set the effects amounts for each of the four stereo effects
busses.
FXA SEND AMOUNTS
2: 50%
3: 10%
FXB Algorithm
FxB>FxA
000
1:100%
4: 0%
This screen selects the effect type for Effect Processor A. Move the cursor to
the lower line of the display and select the effect you want.
FXB ALGORITHM
Panning Delay
B Effect Types
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
218 E-MU Systems
Chorus 1
Chorus 2
Chorus 3
Chorus 4
Chorus 5
Doubling
Slapback
Flange 1
Flange 2
Flange 3
Flange 4
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
Flange 5
Flange 6
Flange 7
Big Chorus
Symphonic
Ensemble
Delay
Delay Stereo
Delay Stereo 2
Panning Delay
Delay Chorus
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
29.
30.
31.
32.
PanDelay Chorus 1
PanDelay Chorus 2
Dual Tap 1/3
Dual Tap 1/4
Vibrato
Distortion 1
Distortion 2
Distorted Flange
Distorted Chorus
Distorted Double
Preset Edit Menu
FXB Parameters
FXB Parameters
The FXB parameters are Feedback, LFO Rate and Delay. Feedback sends the
output of the effect back into the input. This creates multiple echoes on a
delay effect and intensifies a chorus or flange effect. LFO Rate allows you to
change the speed of the modulation oscillator for flange and chorus effects.
Delay sets the length of the delay line. This affects the time between
echoes, or the tone of flange effects.
FXB
FXB Send Amounts
FEEDBK
032
LFORATE
003
These parameters set the effects amounts for the four stereo effects busses.
FXB SEND AMOUNTS
2: 50%
3: 10%
Preset Patchcords
DELAY
200ms
1:100%
4: 0%
Preset PatchCords give you real-time control of global parameters. The
effect processors are a powerful synthesis tool and this feature lets you
control and use them in exciting new ways. For example, you can dynamically adjust the effects mix during a sequence or live performance.
There are many exciting performance possibilities using Preset PatchCords
to control Arpeggiator parameters and Effects Sends. The front panel knobs
15 & 16 are usually connected to Arp parameters in factory presets marked
“arp:” Be sure to try out these controls
O
There are 12 Preset PatchCords per preset with a source, a destination and
an amount control. The amount can be set from -100 to +100. The Preset
PatchCord controls are added to the FX Send Amounts set in the Global or
Preset Edit menus. In other words, multiple sources connected to destinations are summed.
To crossfade between
effects.
1) Set FXA Send 1 to 100%.
2) Set FXB Send 1 to 0%.
3) Set FX Cord #1 to FXA Send 1
at -100.
4) Set FX Cord #2 to FXB Send 1
at +100.
PRESET CORDS
Pedal
-> FXBSend2
#01
+100
Increasing the controller amount
will crossfade from FXA to FXB.
XL-7 Operation Manual 219
Preset Edit Menu
Preset Patchcords
Modulation Sources:
Off
PitchWhl (Pitch Wheel)
ModWhl (Modulation Wheel)
Pedal
MIDI Volume (Controller 7)
MIDI Pan (Controller 10)
MIDI A-L
Footswitch 1
Flip-Flop Footswitch 1
Footswitch 2
Flip-Flop Footswitch 2
Footswitch 3
Flip-Flop Footswitch 3
DC
220 E-MU Systems
Modulation Destinations
Off
Effect A Send 1
Effect A Send 2
Effect A Send 3
Effect A Send 4
Effect B Send 1
Effect B Send 2
Effect B Send 3
Effect B Send 4
Preset Lag In
Preset Lag Amount
Preset Lag Rate
Preset Ramp Rate
Arp Resolution
Arp Extension
Arp Velocity
Arp Gate
Arp Interval
Beats Velocity, Group 1-4
Beats Transpose (Xps) Group 1-4
Beats Busy
Beats Variation
Preset Edit Menu
Initial Controller Amount
This parameter sets the initial value of MIDI controllers A-P when the preset
is first selected. The front panel Control Knobs can be thought of as front
panel MIDI controllers because in the XL-7, they are treated just as if they
originated from an external MIDI device. Refer to the following diagram.
There are 4 Initial Controller Amount screens (A-D, E-H, I-L, M-P).
A
0
1
2
31
MIDI
95
Controller
A
0
1
2
MIDI
64
A
-
B
-
C
-
P
-
+
B
31
95
Controller
B
0
1
2
MIDI
64
MIDI
+
C
31
95
Controller
C
0
1
2
MIDI
64
+
P
31
64
95
Controller
P
Cord
Preset Edit
Menu
Cord
16 Control
Knobs
Cord
MIDI
Menu
Cord
Initial Controller
Amount
+
Amount
Patchcord Destinations
Key Sustain
Fine Pitch
Pitch
Glide
Chorus Amount
Sample Start
Sample Loop
Sample Retrigger
Filter Frequency
Filter Q
Amplifier Volume
Amplifier Pan
Amplifier Crossfade
Volume Envelope Rates
Volume Envelope Attack
Volume Envelope Decay
Volume Envelope Release
Filter Envelope Rates
Filter Envelope Attack
Filter Envelope Decay
Filter Envelope Release
Aux. Envelope Rates
Aux. Envelope Attack
Aux. Envelope Decay
Aux. Envelope Release
LFO 1 & 2 Rates
LFO 1 & 2 Trigger
Lag Processor
Summing Amp
Switch
Absolute Value
Diode
Quantizer
4x Gain
Cord 1-24 Amount
FXA Send 1-4
FXB Send 1-4
Preset Lag In
Preset Lag Amount
Preset Ramp Rate
Preset
Cords
External MIDI controller numbers are assigned to the Letters A-P in the
MIDI menu. The Initial Controller Amount value is sent to the PatchCord
destination when the Preset is first selected. If you move the Control Knob,
then that value replaces the initial value. If MIDI controller data is received
it will similarly replace the knob or initial setting.
INITIAL CONTROLLER AMT
A:017
B:112
C:127
D: off
The Initial controller amounts can be set from 000-127 or they can be
turned Off. If set to Off, the current controller value is used when the preset
is first selected. Setting the Initial Amount to “off” uses the values from the
previously selected preset.
XL-7 Operation Manual 221
Preset Edit Menu
Keyboard Tuning
Keyboard Tuning
In addition to the standard equally divided octave tuning, XL-7 contains
twelve factory programmed tunings and 12 user-definable tunings. The
Keyboard Tuning parameter selects which tuning is used by the current
preset. The User Tuning tables are defined in the Global menu.
The factory Keyboard Tuning tables are described in the following table.
Tuning Tables
Description
Equal Temperament
Standard Western tuning
(12 equally spaced notes per octave)
Just C
Just intonation. (Based on small interval ratios. Sweet
and pure, non-beating intervals.)
Vallotti
Valotti & Young non-equal temperament. (Similar to 12
tone equal temperament. Each key has a different
character for a given scale.)
19-Tone
19 tone equal temperament. (19 notes per octave.
Difficult to play, but works well with a sequencer.)
Gamelan
5 tone Slendro and 7 tone Pelog. (Javanese. Pelog are
white keys, Slendro are black keys. Exotic tunings of
Gamelan flavor.
Just C2
Allows you to play the following chords in the key of C:
C, E, F, G, A, B, C#m, D#m, Em, F#m, G#m, Am, Bm
Just C-minor
Allows you to play the following chords in the key of C:
C, E, F, G, A, B, Em, Am, Bm, C#m, D#m, G#m
Just C3
Allows you to play the following chords in the key of C:
C, D, F, Bb, C#m, Dm, Em, F#m, G#m, Am
Werkmeister III
A “well” temperament developed in the 17th century.
Although you can play in all keys, each key sounds
slightly different.
Kirnberger
Another well temperament developed by Johann
Philipp Kirnberger where no pitch is more than 12
cents off from equal temperament.
Scarlatti
A variant of Meantone tuning which was used from the
15th to 18th centuries.
Repeating Octave
Middle C octave is repeated up and down the keyboard.
Link with a preset in equal temperament to form
unusual inversion up and down the keyboard.
User 1-12
Define your own tuning tables (Global menu).
Refer to “User Key Tuning” on page 140 in the Global Menu chapter for
instructions on how to define your own Keyboard Tunings.
222 E-MU Systems
Preset Edit Menu
Keyboard Tuning
The Just C Tuning Tables

XL-7 implements the
MIDI Tuning Dump protocol
which allows you to create
tuning tables on your personal
computer and download them
via MIDI. There are several
computer applications available
on the internet which let you
create and download tuning
tables via MIDI.
Well Tempered and Just were standard keyboard tunings up until the 20thcentury when the current “equal tempered” scale became prevalent. In an
equal tempered scale, the octave is equally divided into 12 parts. In Just or
Well Tempered scales, the 12 notes are separately tuned to produce pure
chords. However, in Just tunings you are limited to playing certain chords
and if you play the wrong chord it may sound very BAD!
XL-7 allows you to modulate between keys by providing you 12 user tuning
tables. Tuning tables can be changed as you play using a program change
(create several presets with the same sound and different tuning tables), by
MIDI SysEx command (using a programmable MIDI footswitch or other
device), or using a continuous controller (link 2 presets and crossfade
between them using a controller).
The Just C2, Just C min, Just C3 Tuning Tables
These new tuning tables take the concept of just intonation a step beyond
previous E-MU products. Fully explaining the mysteries of just intonation is
beyond the scope of this manual, but the subject is covered exhaustively in
Hermann Helmholtz’s On the Sensations of Tone, available at most libraries
and bookstores.
The new tables are called Just C2, Just C3, and Just C Minor. Try playing in
the key of C/Cm using each table. You’ll quickly discover both the wonders
and the frustrations of just intonation! In Just C, for example, you’ll find
that the chords C, Em, F, G, and Am sound beautiful. If you hold one of
these chords, you’ll hear no “beating”. After playing for a few minutes,
switch back to Equal Temperament for a rude awakening!
At this point you might wonder why anyone would use Equal Temperament to begin with. For the answer to that question, play a D, Dmi, or Bb
chord!.The intervallic ratios that make the C & G chords sound so pure
make the D chord sound horribly out of tune. That's why we had to include
Just C3. In this tuning, D, Dmi and Bb sound in tune, but the G chord will
sound wrong.
Each of the 4 tables allows you to play a different group of common chords
in just intonation. Sadly, there is no single 12 note tuning that will allow all
of the common chords to be in tune, and of course that's why they
invented the equal temperament tuning system that we use today.
Just C
Play these chords: C,
E, F, G, A, Cm, C#m, Em, F#m, Gm, Am
Just C2
Play these chords: C,
Just C2 minor
Play these chords: C,
Just C3
Play these chords: C,
E, F, G, A, B, C#m, D#m, Em, G#m, Am, Bm
Db, D, Eb, G, Ab, Cm, Em, Fm, Gm
D, F, Bb, C#m, Dm, Em, F#m, G#m, Am
XL-7 Operation Manual 223
Preset Edit Menu
Preset Links
Preset Links
You can link presets to other presets to create layering or keyboard splits.
The current preset can be linked with up to two other presets (Links 1 & 2).
Each linked preset can be assigned to a specific range in order to create
keyboard splits or can be assigned a velocity range to switch links according
to key velocity. In addition, you can specify Volume, Pan, Transpose and
Delay settings for each Link. The modulation parameters specified in each
preset remain in effect for each preset in the link.
LINK 1 Preset
0002 Preset Name
LINK 1
RANGE
C-2
LINK 1
LINK 1
XL-7
KEY
G8
VEL
000-127
VOLUME
+0dB
TRANSPOSE
+00
PAN
00
DELAY
0
Links provide an easy way to create new sounds by combining the existing
presets. Or, you can create your own custom stacked presets with up to 12
layers! We’re talking LARGE sounds here. Of course Links can also be used
when you just want to stack up two sounds.
As an example, let’s stack two presets to create a big sound. Start with a
preset you like, then go into the Links screen and start scrolling through
the preset list while you play to hear both presets together. When you find
a winner, simply Save the preset and you’re finished!
• You can “Split” the keyboard up to 12 ways by using combinations of the
Layers and Links.
• By adjusting the Velocity for the link, you can bring in the link by
playing hard.
• Transposing the Link can radically change the sound.
• The delay parameter lets you create surprise effects, echoes or cascades of
sound as you continue to hold the keys.
224 E-MU Systems
Preset Edit Menu
Preset Tempo Offset
Preset Tempo Offset
This function allows you to double or halve the Master Tempo as it applies
to this preset. When playing or sequencing several presets in Multimode,
the Master Tempo may be too fast or slow for one preset. Using this feature,
you can adjust the tempo for the misbehaving preset. The Tempo Offset can
use the current tempo or be set to half or twice the current tempo.
TEMPO OFFSET
use current tempo x 2
Audition Riff
Selection
O
A Riff is a short pre-recorded musical phrase which can be anything from a
single note to a full 16-track sequence. This function allows you to assign a
Riff to a Preset. The Preset Riff will be used when the front panel Audition
button is pressed.
Listening to the Riffs is a
quick way to learn the sounds in
XL-7. If a preset has hidden
tricks or controllers, these will be
shown off in the Riff.
The Riffs themselves cannot be modified.
Play Solo Layers
When constructing multilayer sounds it is often useful to turn off one or
more of the layers so you can hear what you’re doing! This feature allows
you to temporarily solo individual layers or listen to them in any combination. This screen differs from the other Preset Edit screens in that it is
NOT saved with the preset. The values reset each time you exit the Preset
Edit menu.
AUDITION SELECTION
Plays:KEY-MiddleC
Solo is activated by setting any layer to On (On = the layer is being Soloed).
Any layers set to On will play and any layers set to Off will be muted. If all
layers are set to Off, then Solo mode ends and all layers play normally.
When you exit the Preset Edit menu, all layers play normally.
PLAY SOLO LAYERS
1: off
2: off
3: off
4: off
XL-7 Operation Manual 225
Preset Edit Menu
Play Solo Layers
226 E-MU Systems
Arpeggiator/Beats Menu
Arpeggiator/Beats Menu
XL-7 can run up to 32 simultaneously synced arpeggiators, each with a
different preset sound. The arpeggiators can either play one of 7 chord
arpeggios or can be set to play a pattern, which is a stored sequence of
notes. Combined with sequencer, the number of musical permutations is
staggering!
Beats mode allows you to trigger, latch and unlatch synced loops and
grooves from separate keys on your keyboard. Simply select a bts: preset
and play the 16 trigger keys to bring specific Parts in and out. This is MacroMusic!
To
enable the Arpeggiator/Beats menu
Press the Arp button, lighting the LED. The Arp screen displays the menu
page most recently selected since powering up XL-7. The cursor appears
below the first character of the screen heading on line one.
To
select a new screen
Press the Home/Enter button or press the Cursor button repeatedly until
the cursor is below the screen title heading on the top line of the display.
Rotate the data entry control to select another screen.
To

modify a parameter
Press either Cursor button repeatedly (or hold down the right cursor button
while turning the data entry control) until the cursor is below the desired
parameter value. Rotate the data entry control to change the value.
Arp parameters are
automatically saved to the
current multisetup when you exit
the menu, but you may wish to
save to another location.
To
If another Multisetup is
“Restored” any unsaved
changes will be lost if you
haven’t saved the Multisetup.
To
access a submenu
The Master Arpeggiator screens have submenus which are accessed by
pressing the cursor buttons to move the cursor to the lower left corner of
the display. Select the submenu function using the data entry control.
save Arpeggiator parameters
Press the Save/Copy button and scroll to “Save Setup To”. Select a Setup
number and press Enter. See “Saving Multisetups” on page 131.
To
return to the previously selected Mode/View screen
Press the Arp button, turning off the LED.
XL-7 Operation Manual 227
Arpeggiator/Beats Menu
Arpeggiators
Arpeggiators
An arpeggiator moves a pattern of notes sequentially over a range of the
keyboard. XL-7 has the unique ability to play a different arpeggiator on
each MIDI channel!
Arpeggiator settings can be defined as part of the preset (using the Arp
parameters in the Preset Edit menu), or globally in the Arpeggiator menu.
The preset and master arpeggiators have the same parameters which we
define in this chapter.
The Arp field in the main screen defines which arpeggiator settings will be
used. “M” uses the master Arpeggiator settings and on/off status (as defined
in the Arpeggiator menu). “P” uses the preset’s arpeggiator settings and on/
off status (as defined in the Edit menu). Choosing “On” uses the preset’s
arpeggiator settings regardless of whether or not it is turned on in the Edit
menu and Off turns off the arpeggiator regardless of the settings and status
specified in either menu.
_
SAVE your Arp setups
and name them using the “Save
Setup To” function located in the
Global menu. See“Saving
Multisetups” on page 131.
Arp Settings in the
Preset are Used
C01A
0473
V127
P00
A:P
USER
arp: Sine Drum
All arpeggiators share XL-7’s master clock and its current setting. The
master clock can be XL-7’s internal clock or an external MIDI clock
(page 144). Although the arpeggiators use the master clock setting, the
tempo divisor can be unique for each arpeggiator setup.
Arpeggiator modes include up, up/down, forward assign, backward assign,
forward/backward assign and random as well as play Patterns. Patterns are
pre-recorded sequences of notes and rests. All key-on notes play the
pattern. For example, if you play a chord, all the notes in the chord play the
pattern in harmony. XL-7 contains 200 factory patterns and 100 user
definable patterns.
228 E-MU Systems
Arpeggiator/Beats Menu
Arp Controllers
Arp Controllers
The Arpeggiators can be controlled using the front panel real-time
controllers or external MIDI continuous controllers. Controllers are
patched to Arps via the Preset PatchCords located in the Preset Edit menu.
See “Preset Patchcords” on page 219. The following Preset PatchCord destinations control the Arpeggiators.
Arpeggiator Resolution (ArpRes)
This control changes the Arpeggiator Note Value, which defines the length
of the notes when playing arpeggiated chords. It adds to the note value set
in the Arpeggiator Note Value screen. See “Note Value” on page 231.
Arpeggiator Extension (ArpExt)
This control changes the Arpeggiator Extension Count. It adds to the
extension count programmed in the Arpeggiator Note Value screen. See
“Extension Count” on page 233.
Arpeggiator Velocity (ArpVel)
This control changes the Arpeggiator Velocity Value. It scales the velocity
value set in the Arpeggiator Note Value screen. See “Velocity” on page 232.
Arpeggiator Gate (ArpGate)
This control changes the Arpeggiator Gate Time. It adds to the gate time set
in the Arpeggiator Gate Time screen. See “Gate Time” on page 232.
Arpeggiator Interval (ArpIntvl)
This control modulates the Arpeggiator Extension Interval. It adds to the
extension programmed in the Arpeggiator Extension Interval screen. See
“Extension Interval” on page 233.
Master
Arpeggiator
Parameters
The Master Arpeggiator is defined in the Arp menu. The Arpeggiator mode
selected on the Main Screen determines whether the Master arpeggiator or
the Preset menu arpeggiator settings are used.
To
1.
2.
3.
4.
Access the Master Arpeggiator Parameters
Press the Arp menu button lighting the LED. The Arpeggiator menu
screen displays the menu page most recently selected since powering up
XL-7. The cursor appears below the first character of the screen heading
on line one.
Use the right cursor button to advance the cursor to the first field in the
bottom line of the screen.
Now, use the data entry control to access the various Master
Arpeggiator parameters.
Save your Arpeggiator settings using the “Save Setup” function on the
Save/Copy menu.
XL-7 Operation Manual 229
Arpeggiator/Beats Menu
Status
Status
The Status parameter turns the Master Arpeggiator on and off. The Channel
Arpeggiator setting in the main screen overrides this setting. For example, if
you set the Arpeggiator in the main screen to “off,” and turn it “on” here, it
still will not play.
MASTER ARPEGGIATOR
Status
Mode
off
The Mode parameter determines the direction or pattern mode of the
arpeggiated notes.
MASTER ARPEGGIATOR
Mode
up
The eight arpeggiator modes are:
230 E-MU Systems
•
Up
Held notes arpeggiate continuously from lowest to
highest pitch.
•
Down
Held notes arpeggiate continuously from highest to
lowest pitch.
•
Up/Down
Held notes arpeggiate continuously from lowest to
highest pitch, then from highest to lowest, then repeat
this cycle.
•
Fwd Assign
Held notes arpeggiate continuously in the order in
which the keys were pressed.
•
Bkwd Assign
Held notes arpeggiate continuously in the reverse order
in which the keys were pressed.
•
Fwd/Bkwd
Held notes arpeggiate continuously in the order in
which the keys were pressed, then arpeggiate in the
reverse order that they were pressed. The cycle is then
repeated.
•
Random
Held notes arpeggiate continuously in a random
fashion.
•
Pattern
Held notes play the selected pattern (see “Pattern” on
page 231 for details).
Arpeggiator/Beats Menu
Note Value
Note Value
The Note Value determines the duration of each note played. This
parameter is used in non-pattern mode only.
MASTER ARPEGGIATOR
Note Value

Note value has no effect
when the mode is set to
“pattern.”
1/8 dot
Following is a list of possible Note Values and the relative number of clocks
used for each.
Note Value
MIDI Clock
Double Whole Note......................192
Dotted Whole Note........................ 144
Double Note Triplet ....................... 128
Whole Note.....................................96
Dotted Half Note.............................. 72
Whole Note Triplet .......................... 64
Half Note ........................................48
Dotted Quarter Note ........................ 36
Half Note Triplet .............................. 32
Quarter Note...................................24
Dotted Eighth Note.......................... 18
Quarter Note Triplet......................... 16
8th Note..........................................12
Dotted 16th Note ............................... 9
8th Note Triplet.................................. 8
16th Note..........................................6
Dotted 32nd Note ........................... 4.5
16th Note Triplet................................ 4
32nd Note .........................................3
Arpeggiator Pattern
Speed
The Arpeggiator Pattern Speed parameter lets you change the playback rate
of Patterns by 1/4x, 1/2x, 1x (normal), 2x or 4x normal speed.
Pattern
This field lets you choose the pattern used when the arpeggiator Mode is set
to “Pattern.” There are 200 factory programmed patterns and you can
create an additional 100 user definable patterns (see “Editing a User Arpeggiator Pattern” on page 238).
MASTER ARPEGGIATOR
Pattern
991 Pattern Name
XL-7 Operation Manual 231
Arpeggiator/Beats Menu
Velocity
Velocity
The Velocity parameter determines the velocity at which each note arpeggiates. Velocity can be defined by the velocity value specified (from 1
through 127), or by the actual velocity of the played note (played). Bear in
mind that velocity values do not have an effect on the sound unless the
preset is programmed to respond to velocity.
MASTER ARPEGGIATOR
Velocity
Gate Time
The Gate Time parameter works together with the Note Value parameter.
Just as Note Value defines the length of a note, the Gate Time sets the
percentage of the Note Value time played. This can have a dramatic effect
on the sound depending on how the envelope generators are programmed.
MASTER ARPEGGIATOR
Gate

The note-on time is used
for the start-of-time when
calculating note durations. See
“Duration” on page 235.
played
100%
With a Gate Time setting of 100% the note is held on until the next note
starts. The envelope generators never advance to the Release stages. With a
Gate Time setting of 50%, the note is released halfway through the note
cycle and the envelope generators proceed to their release stages until the
next note occurs. Refer to the following illustration.
Selected Note Value (8th notes, 16th notes, etc.)
Gate
Time
100%
75%
50%
25%
232 E-MU Systems
key-on
time
key-on
time
key-on
time
Arpeggiator/Beats Menu
Extension Count
Extension Count
The Extension Count parameter specifies how many times the Extension
Interval is carried out. With an Extension Count of 0, the arpeggio plays
only the notes pressed. With an Extension Count of 1, the arpeggio plays
the notes pressed, then plays the same notes (in the same order), transposed by the Extension Interval amount. The cycle is then repeated.
MASTER ARPEGGIATOR
Extension Count
4
For example, with the Extension Interval set to 12 (an octave) and an
Extension Count of 2, and with the Arpeggiator Mode set to Fwd Assign, if
you played E2, then C2, then G2, the arpeggiated sequence would consist
of: E2, C2, G2, then E3, C3, G3, and then E4, C4, G4. The Extension Count
values range from 0 through 15. Refer to the following illustration.
Back
2
1
3
5
4
6
Extend 1
8
7
9
Extend 2
Played
Extension Interval
The Extension Interval specifies the additional intervals played when you
press a key. For example, suppose you played C2 with an Interval of 7 (a
Major 5th), Up mode, and an Extension Count of 2. The arpeggio alternates
between C2 and G2.
The Extension Interval values range from 1 through 16.
MASTER ARPEGGIATOR
Extension Interval
7
XL-7 Operation Manual 233
Arpeggiator/Beats Menu
Sync
Sync
The Sync parameter defines when a note is played in relation to when the
key is pressed. When set to “Key Sync”, the note sounds the instant a key is
pressed. When set to “Quantized”, the note does not sound until the next
occurrence of the selected note value.
MASTER ARPEGGIATOR
Sync
key sync
The following diagram illustrates how Key Sync and Quantize work.
Key
Pressed
Note Sounds
Immediately
Key Sync
Quarter Notes
Note Doesn't Sound until
the Next Quarter Note
Quantize
Quarter Notes
Pre-Delay
The Pre-Delay value determines how long the arpeggiator is delayed before
becoming active after the first “note-on.” During the pre-delay period,
notes are played normally (as if the arpeggiator was off). After the pre-delay
period has elapsed, the arpeggiator kicks in. Once you release all the keys
on the controller, the pre-delay starts over with the next note-on. In combination with the Duration parameter, Pre-Delay lets you create many more
variations in the arpeggio patterns. Please refer to the diagram on page 236.
You can play the preset normally as long as you don’t hold the notes longer
than the Pre-Delay. If you do, the arpeggiator starts in. When used in
conjunction with multiple arpeggiators, Pre-Delay allows you to offset the
time between the different patterns.
MASTER ARPEGGIATOR
Pre-Delay
234 E-MU Systems
off
Arpeggiator/Beats Menu
Duration
Duration
This parameter defines how long the arpeggiator plays before stopping. The
Duration is specified in note values. Therefore if an arpeggio were running
at a 16th Note Value and the Duration were set to a whole note, the arpeggiator would play 16 steps before stopping. After the duration has elapsed,
the arpeggiator remains inactive until the key is released. If Duration is set
to Off, the arpeggio repeats as long as the notes are held (Infinite Duration).
MASTER ARPEGGIATOR
Duration
1 / 1d
Duration can be used to modify the patterns and increase the possible
pattern combinations and variations. Because this parameter limits the
length of arpeggiator play time, it can change the arpeggio pattern when
the Duration is less than the length of the arpeggio. You can set the
arpeggio to repeat continuously using the Recycle function described below.
Post-Delay
This parameter is only relevant when both the “Duration” and “Recycle”
parameters are not in the “Off” state. The Post-Delay value determines how
long the arpeggiator is delayed after the Duration period. Please refer to the
diagram on page 236. During the post-delay period, notes are played
normally (as if the arpeggiator was off). After the post-delay period has
elapsed, the arpeggiator either jumps to the beginning of the Pre-Delay
period or to the beginning of the Duration period depending on the
Recycle setting.
If the arpeggiator is playing an extension when the Duration expires, the
notes in the extension will continue to sound during the Post-Delay (and
Pre-Delay if on). On the next pass through the Duration period, the
extension continues where it left off.
Post-Delay increases the number of possible variations in the beat and
allows the recycle loop to be set to an exact measure of time.
MASTER ARPEGGIATOR
Post-Delay
off
XL-7 Operation Manual 235
Arpeggiator/Beats Menu
Recycle
Keys
Pressed
Notes Sound
Arp Plays
Notes Sound
Pre-Delay
Duration
Post-Delay
ec
R
R
ec
Recycle
yc
le o
n
y c l e o N o - Pre Dly
n/
Recycle enables the pattern or arpeggio to repeat. This parameter works
together with the Duration and Pre/Post Delay parameters to allow the loop
to be set to an exact measure of time. The “on/No-PreDelay” option
bypasses the predelay period. With Recycle turned Off, the pattern or
arpeggio stops at the end of the Post-Delay period.
MASTER ARPEGGIATOR
Recycle
on/No-PreDly
Keyboard Thru
When enabled, Keyboard Thru merges the notes not arpeggiated with the
notes being produced by the arpeggiator. This gives the effect of two parts
playing at once.
MASTER ARPEGGIATOR
Keyboard Thru
Latch
With Latch mode On, any notes you play remain on until you press them
again. Latched notes can also be halted by turning Latch off in this screen,
or by turning off the Arpeggiator for the channel in the main screen.
MASTER ARPEGGIATOR
Latch
236 E-MU Systems
off
on
Arpeggiator/Beats Menu
Send MIDI System Exclusive Data
Use the Key Range parameter to set the keyboard range for the arpeggiator.
Notes inside the range will arpeggiate while notes outside the specified
range will not arpeggiate. Use the Extensions parameters to exceed the
upper boundary of the Key Range (see the information about Extensions
beginning on page 233).
MASTER ARPEGGIATOR
Key Range
C-2->G8
Move the cursor under the first key and use the data entry control to define
the lowest key to be arpeggiated. Move the cursor under the second key
value and use the data entry control to define the highest key to be arpeggiated.
Send MIDI
System
Exclusive Data
Transmits the Arpeggiator Patterns via the MIDI out port as MIDI System
Exclusive data to another XL-7 or to a computer/sequencer for backup.
Using the cursor key and the data entry control, select the MIDI data you
want to transmit. See Send MIDI System Exclusive Data in the Master chapter
for additional details about recording SysEx.
User Patterns
Transmits all the User patterns.
000 to 990

Send data as you would
a regular sequence. Sending
data in one huge chunk may
clog the MIDI input buffer on XL7.
Transmits only the individual pattern you have selected.
SEND MIDI SYSEX DATA
All User Arp Patterns
XL-7 Operation Manual 237
Arpeggiator/Beats Menu
Editing a User Arpeggiator Pattern
Editing a User
Arpeggiator Pattern
XL-7 lets you create and edit your own arpeggiator patterns. Using the Edit
User Pattern menu, you can create up to 100 user patterns and each pattern
can be up to 32 steps in length.
When you edit a pattern, you are writing directly into memory—no Save
command is required (however you must exit the Arp module). This is
different from the Edit menu where you must Save a preset before it will be
overwritten. If you want to modify an existing pattern and keep the
original, you must first COPY the pattern you want to edit to another
location using the function in the Save/Copy menu (See page 274). Refer to
the instructions below and the following parameter descriptions to create
your own patterns.
Bank 0 = User Patterns
Bank 1 = Factory Patterns
Bank 2 = Factory Patterns
O
Before editing a Pattern,
select Master Arpeggiator (M) in
the main screen and set the
Arpeggiator to the Pattern you
are editing. This lets you hear
the Pattern as you edit it.
EDIT USER PATTERN
011 DRUMnBASS 1
To
1.
2.
Select the Pattern to Edit
From the Edit User Pattern screen shown above, move the cursor to the
bottom line and select the pattern you want to edit. The Enter LED
begins flashing. Press Enter to move back to the Home position.
Select the next screen in the list, “User Pattern Edit”. This is where you
edit the currently selected pattern.
PTRN
S01
Pattern Step
number
3.
KEY
+0
VEL
ply
DUR
1/8
Key offset
Velocity
Duration
RPT
2
Repeat
Move the cursor to the lower line of the display. For each step, you can
select: key, velocity, duration, and number of repeats.
Pattern Step Number
You can set up to 32 steps for each arpeggiator pattern. This field selects
which step you will be editing from 1 to 32.
Key
This parameter defines what happens during the current step. The Key
parameter can do one of five different operations. Following is a description
of each of the key functions and how to use them.
238 E-MU Systems
Arpeggiator/Beats Menu
Key
Key Offset
This parameter defines not the actual note of the arpeggiator playback, but
instead specifies the amount of offset, in semitones, from the original note
played. You can set a Key Offset from -48 to +48 for each step. For example,
if you play a “C” on the keyboard with the Key Offset amount for the first
step set to “+1,” the first step in the pattern will be “C#.”
-48
-36
-24
Offset
-12
0
Played
Note
+12
+24
+36
+48
+ Offset
Tie
_
This function extends the duration of notes beyond the values given in the
duration field by “tying” notes together. You can tie together any number
of consecutive steps.
IMPORTANT: The Gate
function in the arpeggiator
MUST be set to 100% when
using the tie function, otherwise
the tied note is retriggered
instead of extended.
+2
tie
-5
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Rest
Instead of playing a note, you can define the step as a Rest. The Duration
parameter specifies the length of the rest. Rests can be tied together to form
longer rests.
Skip
This command simply removes the step from the pattern. The Skip feature
makes it easy to remove an unwanted step without rearranging the entire
pattern. You’ll be happy to know that the velocity, duration and repeat
parameters are remembered if you decide to put the step back later.
End
This command signals the end of the pattern. Any steps programmed after
the step containing the End command are ignored.
XL-7 Operation Manual 239
Arpeggiator/Beats Menu
Velocity
Velocity
Each note in the pattern plays using either a preset velocity value (from
1 through 127), or using the actual velocity of the played note (ply).
Note: Velocity values will not have an effect on the sound unless velocity is
programmed to do something in the preset.
Duration
This parameter sets the length of time for the current step, defined as a note
value, based on the Master Tempo. The selectable note durations are
described below.
1/32
1/16t
1/32d
1/16
1/8t
1/16d
1/8
1/4t
1/8d
1/4
Repeat
1/2t
1/4d
1/2
1/1d
1/1t
1/2d
1/1
2/1t
2/1
Half Note Triplet
Dotted Quarter Note
Half Note
Dotted Whole Note
Whole Note Triplet
Dotted Half Note
Whole Note
Double Whole Note
Triplet
Double Whole Note
Each step can be played from 1 to 32 times. A repeat setting of “1” indicates
the step will be played one time (not repeated one time or played twice).
To
1.
2.
3.
4.
240 E-MU Systems
32nd Note
16th Note Triplet
Dotted 32nd Note
16th Note
8th Note Triplet
Dotted 16th Note
8th Note
Quarter Note Triplet
Dotted Eighth Note
Quarter Note
Edit a User Pattern
The first field in the Edit User Pattern field defines the pattern’s step
number. Start with the pattern Step 01.
Define the Key Offset, Velocity, Duration and Repeat values.
Repeat steps 1 and 2 until you have setup the desired number of steps
in the pattern.
Set the Key Offset to “End” on the last step in the pattern.
Arpeggiator/Beats Menu
User Pattern Name
User Pattern Name
The User Pattern Name page lets you enter a name for any User Arpeggiator
Pattern.
PTRN
S01
To
1.
2.
KEY
+0
VEL
ply
DUR
1/8
RPT
2
Name a User Pattern
From the Pattern Edit screen shown above, position the cursor under
the PTRN field.
Turn the data entry control clockwise. The following screen appears.
USER PATTERN NAME
000 Mod Sycle
3.
4.
5.
6.
Multichannel
Arpeggiating
Move the cursor to the bottom line and edit the Pattern name using
the data entry control and Cursor keys.
Move the cursor to the “Home” position (shown above) by pressing the
Home/Enter button.
Turn the data entry control counter-clockwise one click to return to
the Pattern Edit screen.
Turn the data entry control counterclockwise multiple clicks to jump
back to the main Arpeggiator menu screen.
Presets with the arpeggiator assigned will play when they receive MIDI
note-on data from the keypad, internal sequencer or external MIDI source.
Please refer to the instructions on page 28 to learn one way to perform
using multiple arpeggiators.
XL-7 Operation Manual 241
Arpeggiator/Beats Menu
Multichannel Arpeggiating
Beats
O
Remember to SAVE your
preset once you assign a BTS or
KIT riff.
a 16-track play-only sequencer optimized for live performance and groove
creation. BTS riffs, which are permanently stored in sound ROM, are
special multi-part Audition Riffs. By playing keyboard or trigger keys you
trigger, latch and unlatch different parts of these synced loops and grooves.
Any preset can be selected and used by assigning a BTS riff (or KIT riff) in
the Preset Edit menu.
Here’s
1.
2.
3.
4.
_
Beats (bts:) Riffs are
special 16-part riffs made
especially for use with Beats
mode. KIT riffs may have four or
five parts.
Other riffs usually have only one
part recorded.
O
By assigning Trigger
Buttons to the keyboard Beats
Layout Keys, you can trigger
Beats and MIDI notes using the
Trigger buttons.
242 E-MU Systems
how it works:
Select a bts: preset, …or assign a BTS riff to one of the percussion
presets in the Preset Edit Menu. KIT riffs also have several tracks.
Set the “Trigger Buttons Function” in the Controllers menu to Play
Beats Parts.
Select Triggers in the Command Functions section.
Each of the Beats Parts is assigned to a trigger key. Bring each part in or
out by pressing that key. Keys can also be Latched (press the key once to
turn the part on, press it again to turn the part off). Other control keys
allow you to Mute All Parts, Clear All Parts, and Start & Stop the beat.
For BTS Riffs the 16 parts are arranged in the following manner:
Main Groove
Alt. Groove
1. Kick1
2. Snare1
3. Hihat1
4. Perc1
5. Kick2
6. Snare2
7. Hihat2
8. Perc2
Perc / Fills
9. Perc3/Fill1
10. Perc4/Fill2
11. Perc5/Fill3
12. Perc6/Inst.
Instr/Wild
13. Inst1/Wild1
14. Inst2/Wild2
15. Inst3/Wild3
16. Bass
For each Beats Riff, you have 2 Grooves, 4 Fills which correspond to the
four parts of the Main and Alternate groove, and 4 Instrument parts. By
adding and removing parts, you control the complexity of the groove.
Each part can also be scaled by Key Velocity, allowing you to fade parts in
and out (if velocity is routed to volume) as you play, or can be Transposed
over a six octave range. Each part can be assigned to any one of four Groups,
which allow multiple parts to be triggered from a single key. You can only
access Groups using the keyboard trigger keys. See the Factory Setup
diagram on the next page.
The factory BTS riffs range from 4-16 bars long, using 4 to 16 tracks each.
Normally you’ll use the Command Function buttons to bring parts in and
out. Beat Parts can also be assigned to groups so that multiple parts can be
triggered from a single key press. The Group Triggers, Clear Parts, Trigger
Hold and Mute keys are only accessible via MIDI or the keypads.
Trigger layouts are saved with the Multisetup. The Factory Multisetup (63)
has all the Beats controls assigned to the keyboard as shown in the diagram
on the following page. These MIDI note numbers have been placed below
the lowest key on the keyboard so as not to interfere with normal playing.
Setting the Beats Keys Offset function (page 250) to +48 will allow you to
access these hidden control keys.
Arpeggiator/Beats Menu
Multichannel Arpeggiating
Factory Setup
Group 3
Inst 2/Wild 2
Inst 4/Wild 4
HiHat 2
Perc 3/Fill 1
Perc 5/Fill 3
Snare 1
Perc 1
Clear Parts
Trig. Hold
Multisetup 63
Main
Groove
C-2
C-1
Start/Stop
Mute
Kick 1
HiHat 1
Kick 2
Snare 2
Perc 2
Perc 4/Fill 2
Perc 6/Fill 4
Inst 1/Wild 1
Inst 3/Wild 3
Group 1
Group 2
Group 4
Alternate
Groove
C0
The chart above shows the Factory Multisetup assignment of each Part, the 4 Groups and
the Control Keys. These assignments can be modified to suit your personal preference,
then saved in one of the Multisetup locations.
O
Starting Beats mode
with the Start/Stop key allows
you to start the sequencer rolling
silently. Then you can bring Parts
in and out using the “Busy”
control.
• Start/Stop Trigger
• Clear Parts
O
If Mute is set to 1-bar,
the Part mutes for 1 bar then
un-mutes.
• Mute
• Trig Hold
Starts the beat sequencer from the beginning of
the sequence. When latched, pressing once starts
and pressing again stops. When unlatched, the
sequence runs as long as the key is held.
Once the Beats sequencer is started, it continues to
run even if no triggers are active.
Start/Stop doesn’t clear latched parts when it stops
the sequencer. Any trigger played after stopping
will not only start the sequencer and play that trigger's part, but also play all previously latched parts.
Clears any enabled parts. This control provides a
quick and easy way to shut off all latched Parts.
Latch mode has no effect on this key.
Mutes all Parts while held, but the Beats sequencer
continues running.
When this key is held, all other Trigger Keys
behave as if they were in Latch mode.
XL-7 Operation Manual 243
Arpeggiator/Beats Menu
Beats Mode
The Beats sequencer plays as long as any Beats triggers are active. Beats riffs
can also be Restarted using a MIDI Song Start command even if the Beats
channel is not currently selected. The Audition LED illuminates whenever
the Beats sequencer is running (even if no Parts are playing).
Pressing the Audition button plays the riff assigned to the preset. BTS and
KIT riffs have multiple parts. Other riffs usually have one part. Pressing the
Audition button or starting a Demo causes the Beats sequencer to stop.
All Arp/Beats parameters are saved with the Multisetup.
Beats Mode
This screen turns Beats mode on and has several other features which allow
flexible control over Beats mode. There are several status modes that
determine when Beats will be turned on and which Riff will be used.
Beats and BEAT Triggers can be set to different MIDI channels. This allows
you to perform on two MIDI channels at once with a keyboard that only
transmits on a single MIDI channel.
BEATS MODE
BtsCh: Basic

The Basic Channel is the
MIDI channel currently displayed
in the Main Screen.
Status: P
TrigCh:Basic
Status
• Off . . . . . . . Beats mode off.
• On . . . . . . . . Beats mode on. The Riff assigned in the preset is used.
• P . . . . . . . . . Beats mode is turned on ONLY if the Riff assigned in the
preset is a “bts:” riff. The Riff assigned in the preset is used.
(Default setting)
• M. . . . . . . . . Beats mode on. The Master Riff is used (Arp/Beats menu).
BEATS MODE
BtsCh: Basic
Status: P
TrigCh:Basic
Beats Channel (BtsCh)
• 01-16 . . . . . Selects the MIDI channel on which Beats play.
• Basic . . . . . . Beats play on the MIDI channel displayed in the Main Screen.
Trigger Channel (TrigCh)
• 01-16 . . . . . . . Selects the MIDI channel on which Trigger Keys will be active.
• Basic . . . . . . . . Sets the Trigger Keys to the MIDI channel displayed on the
Main Screen.
244 E-MU Systems
Arpeggiator/Beats Menu
Beats Mode
_
The TRIGGER BUTTONS
FUNCTION is a new screen
which changes the 16 trigger
buttons into “Beats Part Mute”
buttons.
Beats Setup:
Set the Trigger Buttons to Beats Mode
1. Press the Controllers button on the front panel.
2. Turn the data entry control clockwise until you find the “TRIGGER
BUTTONS FUNCTION” screen.
3. Set the lower line of the display to read, “Play Beats Parts”.
4. Press the Controllers button on the front panel again to exit the menu.
Set the Trigger Buttons to be Triggers
5. Press the Triggers button in the Command Functions section of the
front panel. OK, now you’re ready to start playing Beats.
_
You can create your
own Beats presets by assigning
a BTS riff in the Preset Edit
menu.
• If you don’t select a preset with
a BTS or KIT riff assigned, only
the first trigger key may work.
• Riffs marked “BTS” have 16
parts. KIT riffs usually have 4
parts.
Playing Beats:
Selecting Beats Presets (see sidebar)
1. Press the right cursor button twice so that the cursor is located
beneath the Category field.
2.
3.
4.
Turn the data entry control until bts: is shown in the Category field.
Press the right cursor button so that the cursor is underneath the
Preset Name field.
Now turning the data entry control selects ONLY bts: presets!
Play Beats
5. Press any of the sixteen front panel Trigger Buttons. Notice that each
button brings in a specific part. The chart below shows which buttons
control which part in bts: presets.
6.
7.
Main Groove
Alt. Groove
1. Kick1
2. Snare1
3. Hihat1
4. Perc1
5. Kick2
6. Snare2
7. Hihat2
8. Perc2
Perc / Fills
Instr/Wild
9. Perc3/Fill1
10. Perc4/Fill2
11. Perc5/Fill3
12. Perc6/Inst.
13. Inst1/Wild1
14. Inst2/Wild2
15. Inst3/Wild3
16. Bass
Also notice that the Audition LED comes on when Beats begin playing.
Beats are simply multitrack Audition Riffs. You can use the Audition
button to turn Beats on and off.
Try out a few different bts: presets.
Get Busy!
The Controller knobs can be programmed to control Beats. Check it out!
8.
Scroll to the Preset PatchCords screen in the Preset Edit menu. The
screen below appears.
XL-7 Operation Manual 245
Arpeggiator/Beats Menu
Beats Mode
PRESET PATCHCORDS
Midi O
-> ArpVel
9.
10.
11.
#01
+100
Move the cursor under the Cord destination and change it to BtsVari.
Exit the Preset Edit menu.
Turn controller Knob 15 /O with a Beats Riff playing. This knob now
controls the Beats Variation parameter. Beats Variation changes which
parts are playing without changing the number of parts. This makes it
easy to try out different combinations of Beat Parts.
Try hooking controller knobs up to other Beats controls such as Beats
Busy. See “Beats Controllers” on page 247 for more information.
To Play Beats on a different MIDI channel:
Beats can be assigned to a certain MIDI channel while you play the
keyboard on another channel. (Make sure you have Beats mode set up correctly
as described in “Beats Setup” on page 245.)
1.
Press the Arp button and turn the data entry control until the screen
shown below appears.
BEATS MODE
BtsCh: Basic
2.
3.
4.
O
Wrong FX? In Omni
mode, the FX assigned to
channel 2 will be used. In Multi
mode, the Master FX settings
will be used.
5.
6.
7.
8.
246 E-MU Systems
Status: P
TrigCh:Basic
Set the Beats Channel (BtsCh) to 01.
Select any bts: preset on channel 1 (main screen).
Press any of the sixteen Beats buttons to start your Beat playing. (Do
NOT start Beats by pressing the Audition button.)
Press the + Channel button to the left of the LCD to select channel 2.
Select a preset to jam along with the Beat.
The Trigger Keys now play Beats and the other keys play the preset on
channel 2.
The Audition button can be used to turn the Beat off. (If you try to use it
to turn Beats on while on channel 2, the Riff on channel 2 will play.)
Arpeggiator/Beats Menu
Beats Controllers
Beats can be controlled using the front panel real-time controllers or
external MIDI continuous controllers. Controllers are patched to Beats
via the Preset PatchCords located in the Edit menu. The following Preset
PatchCord destinations control Beats.
Beat Velocity Group 1-4 (BtsVelG1 -> BtsVelG4)
Parts assigned to one of the four Beats groups can have their velocity scaled
by the controller input. Since most “bts” presets have velocity controlling
volume, this control can be used to mix the relative levels of the Groups.
Beats velocity works as a percent addition. An input value of 0 (or no Cord)
means change the velocity by 0%. A full scale modulation setting of 100%
in the PatchCord adds 100% to the velocity value 100% + 100% = 200%. A
PatchCord setting of -100% subtracts 100% from the velocity (making it 0).
Beat velocity scalings are reset with a preset change.
Beat Xpose Group 1-4 (BtsXpsG1 -> BtsXpsG4)
Parts assigned to one of the four Beats groups are transposed by the
controller input. Transpose works by shifting the keyboard position and
not by changing the tuning of individual notes. Therefore, on a Beats
presets (bts), where different instruments are assigned to each key,
Transpose has the effect of changing the instrument used by a particular
part. This control ADDS to the Part Transpose set in the Beats Transpose
screen (page 251). Beat transpose offsets are reset with a preset change.
Kick
Tick
909 Click
Machine Kick
Kick
Snare
808 Snare
Simmons Tom
909 Tom
Tom Wave
909 Tom
Waver Tom
909 Tom
Cymbal
Ride Cymbal
Splash Cymbal
Splashy Cymbal
Ride Cymbal
Bongo Tone
Bongo Tip
Low Conga
Timbale 3
Agogo Hi-Tone
Cabasa
Guiro
Guiro
Guiro
Wood Block
Wood Block
Triangle Mute
Triangle Open
Original Transposed
Part
+12
Fun Scratch
Beats Controllers
Crowd
Beat Busy (BtsBusy)
This destination determines which parts are enabled. Beat Busy will accept
either positive or negative values.
• Positive values Add parts to whatever parts are triggered
• Negative values Remove parts that are triggered.
XL-7 Operation Manual 247
Arpeggiator/Beats Menu
Beats Controllers
O
A PatchCord amount of
50% is enough to drive Beat
Busy to the maximum setting.
O
Hot Tip!
Bidirectional Mod Knob:
Set Controller M to BtsBusy with
a Cord amount of +100, then
add a DC bias to BtsBusy with a
Cord amount of -50. The
controller knob now adds or
subtracts “Busyness”.
Suppose the pitch wheel (which can output both positive and negative values)
were connected to Beat Busy and four Key Triggers are down. As the pitch
wheel is moved from center to fully up, the remaining parts will be enabled
until the pitch wheel is fully up and all parts are playing. Moving the pitch
wheel from center to fully down, the four triggered parts are sequentially
removed until at the most negative position of the wheel, no parts are
playing.
The Busy control acts on the Beats condition whenever the control is
changed. Playing more triggers without changing the Busy control simply
adds them until the Busy control is changed again, at which point it will
possibly add or subtract parts as needed.
The interaction between the Busy control, Triggers, Part Velocity and Group
Velocity can get complicated, but works according to this simple rule:
WHICHEVER CONTROL WAS LAST CHANGED TAKES OVER
When interacting with the Group Velocity scale control, the Busy control
ignores group velocity even when it is set to zero, enabling and disabling
parts as necessary. If the Group Velocity is changed after the Busy control, it
takes control, scaling parts as it deems necessary.
The Busy control does take the Part velocity into account when adding and
subtracting parts. If a part has a velocity of 0%, it is removed from the list of
parts that the Busy control adds or subtracts. Therefore, you can use the
Part Velocity control to remove parts you don’t want to hear.
O
Cool Tip! Connecting
Key Pressure to Beat Busy at
50% increases BEAT complexity
the harder you press.
Brings in Parts
Beat
Busy
Removes Parts
Played
Positive controller values bring in new Parts and negative controller values remove
Parts that are latched or held. In this example, the Pitch Wheel is connected to
Beat Busy since it outputs negative as well as positive values.
Beat Variation (BtsVari)
Beat Variation varies which Parts are brought in and out using the Beat
Busy control. Increasing this control mixes up the order in which Parts are
brought in and out, thus providing even more permutations to the Beat.
248 E-MU Systems
Arpeggiator/Beats Menu
Beats Keys/Trigger Layout
Beats Keys/Trigger
Layout
_
Save your Beats Keys
Layouts and all other Arp/Beats
parameters using “Save Setup”
function in the Global menu.
This screen assigns the 16 Beats Triggers to keyboard notes on the Beats
channel. For each Part, Group and Control Key you can select the following
options:
• Key . . . . . . . . .
• Latch . . . . . . . .
• Unlatch . . . . . .
• 1-bar . . . . . . . .
Selects which keyboard key triggers the Part
The first key press turns the Part on, the next turns it off.
The Part plays only while the key is held.
The Part plays for one bar then stops.
BEATS KEYS LAYOUT
Part 1
Key: C1
unlatch
1-Bar Trigger Option
The 1-bar option requires a bit of explanation. When a trigger key is pressed
before the last beat of the measure, the part will continue playing until the
end of the measure. If the Trigger Key is pressed after the last beat of the
measure, the part waits until the next measure before playing. Then it plays
for the entire measure and stops. The time signature and the measure
bounds are determined by the particular Beats Riff you are playing.
Trig Key
pressed before
the last beat
1
2
Part continues
to end of measure
then stops.
3
4
1
Measure 1
2
3
Measure 1
3
4
Measure 2
Trig Key
pressed
here
1
2
4
Part begins at
next measure and
plays entire measure
1
2
3
4
Measure 2
XL-7 Operation Manual 249
Arpeggiator/Beats Menu
Beats Keys Offset
Beats Keys Offset
This function slides the Beats Trigger keys (assigned in the previous screen) up
and down the keyboard. This makes it easy to change the keyboard location
of the trigger keys without having to re-assign each key. A positive offset
moves the group of triggers up the keyboard by the designated number of
keys. Negative offsets move the trigger group lower on the keyboard.
BEATS KEYS OFFSET
+000 keys
Negative Offset
Positive Offset
Trigger
Keys
Beats Keys Offset slides the entire group of beats triggers up or down the keyboard.
Beats Part Velocity
O
Each note of a Beats Riff can have its recorded velocity scaled by a value
(from 0 to 120%) of the recorded velocity or the actual played velocity of
the trigger key can be used (trigger vel). For example, if a note’s velocity is
80, scaling by 110% will increase the note’s velocity to 88. This feature
allows you to control the mix of the different parts in advance or “on-thefly” as you play. If a part’s velocity is set to 0%, that part will be removed
from the mix.
Use Beats Part Velocity to
adjust the volume of Beats
relative to volume of the Pattern
or Song.
Select Part
P1
BEATS PART VELOCITY
Scaled by: trigger vel
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
250 E-MU Systems
To Set the Velocity for each Part:
Press the left cursor button to move the cursor under the Part field.
Select the Part number using the Data Entry Control. Parts 1-16 can be
selected. (All parts, shown as an “A”, can be edited at once if “Edit All
Layers” is enabled in the Master menu.)
Move the cursor to the bottom line using the cursor keys and adjust the
Velocity Scaling percentage using the Data Entry Control.
Repeat steps 1 through 3 for all the Parts you wish to adjust.
Press the Enter/Home button or use the cursor keys to move the cursor
back to the screen heading.
Arpeggiator/Beats Menu
Beats Part Transpose
Each Part of a Beat Riff can be transposed up to 36 semitones up or down.
Transpose works by shifting the keyboard position and not by changing the
tuning of individual notes. Therefore, on a Beats preset (bts:), where
different instruments are assigned to each key, Transpose has the effect of
changing the instrument used by a particular part. On a preset where a
single sound covers the entire keyboard, Transpose will actually transpose
the sound.
Select Part
P1
BEATS PART TRANSPOSE
+00 semitones
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
To set the Transposition for each Part:
Press the left cursor button to move the cursor under the Part field.
Select the Part number using the Data Entry Control. Parts 1-16 can be
selected. (All parts, shown as an “A”, can be edited at once if “Edit All
Layers” is enabled in the Master menu.)
Move the cursor to the bottom line using the cursor keys and adjust the
Transposition in semitones using the Data Entry Control.
Repeat steps 1 through 3 for all the Parts you wish to adjust.
Press the Enter/Home button or use the cursor keys to move the cursor
back to the screen heading.
Kick
Tick
909 Click
Machine Kick
Kick
Snare
808 Snare
Simmons Tom
909 Tom
Tom Wave
909 Tom
Waver Tom
909 Tom
Cymbal
Ride Cymbal
Splash Cymbal
Splashy Cymbal
Ride Cymbal
Bongo Tone
Bongo Tip
Low Conga
Timbale 3
Agogo Hi-Tone
Cabasa
Guiro
Guiro
Guiro
Wood Block
Wood Block
Triangle Mute
Triangle Open
Original Transposed
Part
+12
Fun Scratch
Beats Part Transpose
Crowd
XL-7 Operation Manual 251
Arpeggiator/Beats Menu
Beats Part Group
Beats Part Group
This screen is where you assign Parts to one of the four Groups. By
grouping, you can play multiple parts with a single key. A part can be in
one and only one group, or in no groups.
Select Part
P1
BEATS PART GROUP
Group: 2
_
All Parts assigned to a
Group will stop playing when
the Group key is triggered, then
untriggered even if the individual
Parts in the Group are latched.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Master Riff
Press the left cursor button to move the cursor under the Part field.
Select the Part number using the Data Entry Control. Parts 1-16 can be
selected. (All parts, shown as an “A”, can be edited at once if “Edit All
Layers” is enabled in the Master menu.)
Move the cursor to the bottom line using the cursor keys and select the
Group (1-4 or none) using the Data Entry Control.
Repeat steps 1 through 3 for all the Parts you wish to assign.
Press the Enter/Home button or use the cursor keys to move the cursor
back to the screen heading.
The Master Riff is selected from this screen. The Master Riff is used when
Master (M) is selected for Beats in Beats mode enable screen.
1.
2.
3.
4.
252 E-MU Systems
To Assign a Part to a Group:
To Assign the Master Riff:
Use the cursor buttons to move the cursor to the lower line of the
display.
Select the desired Riff using the Data Entry Control. (Beats Riffs are
identified by the bts: prefix.)
If there is more than one ROM in you can select Riffs from any ROM
set. Move the cursor under the ROM ID and select using the Data Entry
Control.
Press the Enter/Home button or use the cursor keys to move the cursor
back to the screen heading.
Arpeggiator/Beats Menu
Riff Tempo
Riff Tempo
This setting determines whether Riff Tempo (the tempo stored with each
Riff) or the Current Tempo (the Base Tempo from the Master Clock) will be
used for Beats. Use “Current Tempo” if you want to synchronize Beats with
the Pattern/Song sequencer.
To control the Riff Tempo from MIDI clock, set Riff Tempo to “use current
tempo” and Base Tempo to “use MIDI”.
RIFF TEMPO
use riff tempo
1.
2.
3.
Riff Controllers
To Set the Riff Tempo Mode:
Use the cursor buttons to move the cursor to the lower line of the
display.
Select “use riff tempo” or “use current tempo” using the Data Entry
Control.
Press the Enter/Home button or use the cursor keys to move the cursor
back to the screen heading.
Riffs contain preprogrammed real-time control information. This function
allows you to turn these controllers On or Off for the Riffs. This control
affects Audition Riffs as well as Beats Riffs.
RIFF CONTROLLERS
use riff controllers
1.
2.
3.
To Turn Riff Controllers On or Off:
Use the cursor buttons to move the cursor to the lower line of the
display.
Select “use riff controllers” or “ignore riff controllers” using the Data
Entry Control.
Press the Enter/Home button or use the cursor keys to move the cursor
back to the screen heading.
XL-7 Operation Manual 253
Arpeggiator/Beats Menu
Riff Controllers
254 E-MU Systems
Effects
Effects
Overview
XL-7 has two stereo effects processors. When playing presets one at a time,
the two processors can be programmed as part of the preset. When the
MIDI Mode is set to “multi,” the XL-7 uses a global effects assignment
(Master Effects). The diagram below shows how the effects are integrated
into the signal path using a parallel effects send/return model, similar to a
mixing console.
FX Send Amount
Reverb, Delay
Effect
A
Sum
Preset
Main
Outs
Dry Signal
Sum
Effect
B
Chorus, Flange
FX Send Amount
The Effects Sends
On a mixing console you can control the amount of signal each channel
Sends to the effect bus. This allows each channel to be placed in a slightly
different “sonic space” which creates an airy, open sound.
XL-7 uses this basic concept, but works in a slightly different manner. There
are four effects busses: Send1-Send4. Each preset or each MIDI channel (you
determine which), can be directed to one of the four busses. Each effect
processor has four Send Amounts which allow you to set the wet/dry mix
on each of the four busses going into the effect. A setting of 0% is
completely dry (no effect). A setting of 50% contains an equal mix of
affected and normal (dry) signal.
XL-7 Operation Manual 255
Effects
Effects Overview
Send 2 and Send 3 are also used to route sounds to the Sub 1 and 2 outputs
on the back panel. When a plug is inserted into the associated Submix jack
on the back panel, the Dry portion of the Send is disconnected from the
effects processor and the Dry signal is routed directly to the output jack.
The Arrow (->) in the display points to the actual output routing. The
Dry Send is disconnected from the Effects Processors even if only one plug is
inserted into a Submix pair.
The Effects Send is programmed for each layer in the Preset Edit menu.
These routings can be overruled in the Global menu Mix Output screen by
changing the submix setting from “preset”, which uses the preset routing,
to Send1-Send4. In the diagram below, MIDI channel 1A is programmed to
obey the preset routing which in this case is Send 1.
OUTPUT SECTION
& EFFECTS PROCESSORS
FX Sends
Send 2 10%
Send 3 0%
Send 4 0%
Mix
Output
Send 1
S
E
N
D
1
FX Sends
PRESET
Send 4 15%
Ch 2A
SEND 2
Ch 3A
SEND 3
S
E
S
U
B
1
Jack Detect
2
S
E
3
GLOBAL MENU
Effect
B
N
D
N
D
Ch 16B SEND 4
Chorus
M
A
I
N
Send 1 0%
Send 3 20%
Mix Output
Effect
A
B➟A
Send 2 0%
Ch 1A
Hall 1
Send 1 15%
PRESET
EDIT MENU
Jack Detect
S
U
B
2
S
E
N
D
4
Individual layers or entire MIDI channels can be routed to any of the four busses.
The four Effect Sends allow you to get the most out of the two effect
processors. For example, with Effect B set to an echo algorithm, you could
route one MIDI channel to Send 3 and set the effect amount to 80%.
Another MIDI channel could be routed to Send 4 with an effect amount of
only 5%. This is almost like having two different effects!
The Mix Output function is also useful when sequencing since it lets you
route specific MIDI channels (and thus sequencer tracks) to specific Sub
outputs (on the back panel) where there they can be processed with EQ or
other outboard effects.
256 E-MU Systems
Effects
Effect Types
Effect Types
A Effect Types
Room 1-3
Hall 1 & 2
Plate
Delay
Panning Delay
Multitap 1
Multitap Pan
3 Tap
3 Tap Pan
Soft Room
Warm Room
Perfect Room
Tiled Room
Hard Plate
Warm Hall
Spacious Hall
Bright Hall
Bright Hall Pan
Bright Plate
BBall Court
Gymnasium
Cavern
Concert 9
Concert 10 Pan
Reverse Gate
Gate 2
Gate Pan
Concert 11
Effect Parameters
Medium Concert
Large Concert
Large Concert Pan
Canyon
DelayVerb 1-3
DelayVerb 4-5 Pan
DelayVerb 6-9
B Effect Types
Chorus 1-5
Doubling
Slapback
Flange 1-7
Big Chorus
Symphonic
Ensemble
Delay
Delay Stereo
Delay Stereo 2
Panning Delay
Delay Chorus
Pan Delay Chorus 1 & 2
Dual Tap 1/3
Dual Tap 1/4
Vibrato
Distortion 1 & 2
Distorted Flange
Distorted Chorus
Distorted Double
“A” Effect types contain Reverb and Delay effects. “B” Effect types contain
Chorus, Flange and Distortion effects. There are 44 “A” effects and 32 “B”
effects. In addition to the effect type, there are user adjustable parameters
for each effect. The “A” effects have programmable Decay and High
Frequency Damping. The “B” effects have user programmable Feedback,
LFO Rate, and Delay Time.
XL-7 Operation Manual 257
Effects
Effect Types
Decay
The Decay parameter is used when setting “A” type effects. Decay sets the
length of time it takes an effect to fade out. When setting up reverb effects,
Decay controls the room size and the reflectivity of the room. For larger
room sizes and greater reflectivity, set the Decay value higher. When setting
up delay effects, the Decay parameter controls how many echoes are
produced or how long the echoes last. The greater the value, the more
echoes and longer lengths of time.
The Decay value range is from 0 through 90.
High Frequency Damping
The HF Damping parameter is used when setting “A” type effects. High
Frequency energy tends to fade away first as a sound is dissipated in a room.
the HF Damping parameter adjusts the amount of damping applied to the
signal’s high frequency elements which, in turn, changes the characteristics
of the room. Rooms with smooth, hard surfaces are more reflective and
have less high frequency damping. Rooms filled with sound absorbing
materials, such as curtains or people, have more high frequency damping.
The value range for High Frequency Damping is from 0 through 127.
Feedback
The Feedback parameter is used when setting “B” type effects. The Chorus
and Flange effects have a controllable feedback loop after the delay
element. Feeding back a small amount of the signal intensifies the effect by
creating multiple cancellations or images. Higher feedback values increase
the amount of the Feedback loop.
The Feedback value range is from 0 to 127.
LFO Rate
The LFO Rate parameter is used when setting “B” type effects. Both Chorus
and Flange effects use a Low Frequency Oscillator (LFO) to animate the
effect. LFO applied to a chorus effect creates the slight changes necessary
for a realistic choral effect. Applied to a flanger effect, the LFO moves the
comb filter notches and adds animation to the sound.
The LFO Rate value range is from 0 to 127.
Delay
Flanging, chorus and echoes are all based on a delay line where the signal is
delayed by some time period and then mixed back with the unaltered
signal. This parameter specifies the how much time passes before you hear
the delayed signal. On some effects, this value cannot be changed. In this
case, the field contains a dash.
The Delay value range is from 0ms to 635ms.
258 E-MU Systems
Effects
Effects Programmed in the Preset
Effects
Programmed
in the Preset
Effects are normally programmed as part of the preset allowing you to have
a different effect for each. This section describes how to program and
modify XL-7’s preset effects.
1.
2.
To Program the Effects as Part of the Preset:
Press the Preset Edit button. The LED illuminates and the Preset Edit
screen appears.
Use the data entry control to select the FXA Algorithm screen.
FXA ALGORITHM
Lg Concert Pan
3.
4.
Select an Effect. Do not select the “Master Effect” setting or the global
effects set up in the Global menu will be used instead of the Preset
Effect settings.
Use the data entry control to select the FXA parameter screen.
FXA
DECAY
90
HFDAMP
127
FxB>FxA
127
The FxB -> FxA parameter lets you route the B effect through the A effect.
See “Effect B Into Effect A” on page 264.
5.
6.
Set the other effect parameters to your preference. Refer to the information in the last section for detailed descriptions of these parameters.
Use the data entry control to select the FXB Algorithm screen.
FXB ALGORITHM
Distorted Flange
7.
8.
Select an Effect. Do not select the “Master Effect” setting or the global
effects set up in the Global menu will be used instead of the Preset
Effect settings.
Use the data entry control to select the FXB parameter screen.
XL-7 Operation Manual 259
Effects
Master Effects
FXB
9.
10.
Master Effects
FEEDBK
127
LFORATE
127
DELAY
635ms
Set the other effect parameters to your preference. Refer to the information in the last section for detailed descriptions of these parameters.
Save the preset. The programmed effects setting will be saved along
with the preset.
When playing single presets, the effects are normally programmed as part
of the preset. In Multimode, and when selecting effects via the sequencer,
the Master effects are used, since there are only two effect processors to
serve 32 MIDI channels.
You might also want the effects to be programmed on a global basis when
in Omni or Poly modes. You could choose your favorite reverb, for
example, and have it applied to any preset you select.
1.
2.
To Program the Master Effects
Press the Global menu button. The LED illuminates and the Global
screen appears.
Use the data entry control to select the FXA Algorithm screen.
FXA ALGORITHM
Lg Concert Pan
3.
4.
Select an Effect.
Use the data entry control to select the FXA parameter screen.
FXA
DECAY
90
HFDAMP
127
FxB>FxA
127
The FxB -> FxA parameter lets you route the B effect through the A effect.
See “Effect B Into Effect A” on page 264.
260 E-MU Systems
Effects
Master Effects
5.
6.
Set the other effect parameters to your preference. Refer to the information in the last section for detailed descriptions of these parameters.
Use the data entry control to select the FXB Algorithm screen.
FXB ALGORITHM
Distorted Flange
7.
8.
Select an Effect.
Use the data entry control to select the FXB parameter screen.
FXB
9.
10.
11.
_
The MIDI mode (MIDI
Menu) must be set to Omni or
Poly mode in order to select the
effects in the preset.
FEEDBK
127
LFORATE
127
DELAY
145ms
Set the other effect parameters to your preference. Refer to the information in the last section for detailed descriptions of these parameters.
Press the Preset Edit menu button. The LED illuminates and the Preset
Edit menu displays the last screen used.
Use the data entry control to access the FXA Algorithm page and select
“Master Effect A.”
FXA ALGORITHM
Master Effect A
12.
13.
Repeat step 11 for the FXB Algorithm
Save the preset. The Master effects routing will be saved along with the
preset.
XL-7 Operation Manual 261
Effects
Master Effects
Effects Mode
This control provides a true bypass of the effects engine. Bypass is a useful
feature if you are using external effects at the mixing console and want to
turn the effects off for all presets.
1.
2.
To Bypass the Effects:
Press the Global menu button. The LED lights and the last Global
parameter screen used is displayed.
Use the data entry control to select the Effects Mode screen.
FX MODE
enabled
3.
4.
5.
Use the cursor button to advance the cursor to the bottom line in the
screen.
Use the data entry control to change the value.
Press the Enter key to save the settings.
The Effects Mode values are “enabled” and “bypassed.” Enabling the Effects
Mode turns on effects. Selecting “bypassed” turns off the effects.
Flexible Effects
Control
The effects processor controls are very flexible. The effects can be controlled
in three different ways to suit your personal preference and to adapt to
different situations.
When in Omni or Poly mode, effects are normally programmed as part of
the preset. In Multi mode, the two effects processors can be controlled
using the Master settings or by using the effects settings of a preset on a
specific MIDI channel. Effects can be programmed in the following ways:

You can create special
“Effects Presets” which are
assigned to the FX Multi mode
Control channel, then use
standard MIDI Program Change
commands to switch effects
during sequence playback.
262 E-MU Systems
1.
Programmed as part of the preset when playing single presets
(Omni or Poly Modes).
2.
Programmed from the Master Effects Section when playing
either single presets (preset Effect Type set to “Master”) or
when in Multi Mode. This is the typical mode when using the
sequencer because the master effects settings are saved with
each pattern.
3.
Programmed from the designated control preset when in Multi
Mode.
Effects
Master Effects
Refer to the following diagram for a look at how effects are programmed.
1
Master
FX
Preset
FX
Effects are part
of the Preset
(Omni or Poly Mode)
2
Master
FX
Preset
Ch 1A FX
Master Effects
3
Selected by Sequencer
(Multi mode)
Preset
Ch 16B FX
Master
FX
Preset
Ch 1A FX
(Multi mode)
Selected FX Control Channel
1.
2.
Preset
FX
Ch 16B
One Channel's
Preset determines
the Effect Settings
To Program the Effects Globally for all Presets in Multi Mode:
Press the MIDI menu button. The LED illuminates and the MIDI menu
screen appears.
Use the data entry control to select the MIDI mode page. Choose
“multi” for the mode.
MIDI MODE
multi
CHANGE
accepted
XL-7 Operation Manual 263
Effects
Master Effects
3.

The Master effects are
selected by the sequencer. If you
want the sequencer to set the
effects, set Multimode Control to
“Use Master Settings”.
Move the cursor to the Multi mode Effects Control page using the data
entry control.
FX MULTIMODE CONTROL
use master settings
4.
5.
Set the Effect Control channel to use master settings using the data entry
control.
Press the Enter key to save the settings and return to the main screen.
Using the Effects Channel Settings in Multi Mode
In Multi mode, the two effects processors can be controlled from the Master
Effects settings or they can follow the effects settings of the preset on a
special MIDI channel. The effect settings on this special channel will be
applied to all the other MIDI channels. This allows the effects to be
changed during a sequence simply by changing the preset on a specified
MIDI channel.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Effect B Into Effect A
To Program the Effects by Channel Number in Multi Mode
Press the MIDI menu button. The LED illuminates and the MIDI menu
screen appears.
Use the data entry control to select the MIDI mode page. Choose
“multi” for the mode.
Move the cursor to the Multi mode Effects Control field using the data
entry control
Set the Effect Control to “preset on Channel #” (where # is replaced by
the actual channel number from 1A through 16B) using the data entry
control.
Press Enter to save the settings and return to the main screen.
The output of effects processor B can be routed into effects processor A.
This connects the effects in series instead of their normal parallel configuration. Two effects connected in series sound very different than the same
two effects in parallel. For example, a chorus patched through reverb can
turn a bland string section into a lush wall of sound. The B –>A amount can
also be controlled for even more flexibility.
To Send the Output of Effect B through Effect A:
In this example, 100% of Effect B will be sent into Effect A.
1.
264 E-MU Systems
Access the FXA parameter screen (in either the Global or Preset Edit
menus) that contains the FXB –>FXA parameter.
Effects
Master Effects
FXA
2.
3.
DECAY
127
HFDAMP
127
FxB>FxA
127
Set this amount to 127. Press the cursor button to return the cursor to
the top line in the display.
Use the data entry control to select the FXA submix routing parameter
screen.
FXA SEND AMOUNTS
2: 20%
3: 30%
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
1: 10%
4: 40%
Press the cursor buttons to advance the cursor to the Main field.
Set the Main send amount to any amount other than zero.
Press the cursor button again to return the cursor to the FXA title. Use
the data entry control to advance to the FXB Algorithm page.
Select an effect.
Advance to the FXB submix routing page and set the Main FXB send
percentage to zero.
Play the keyboard and you should hear the B Effect running through
Effect A. This patch is shown below.
Main Send
50%
Effect B
Main Send
0%
B➟A
Effect A
100%
XL-7 Operation Manual 265
Effects
General Effect Descriptions
General Effect
Descriptions
Reverb
Reverberation is a simulation of a natural space such as a room or hall. The
reverb algorithms in XL-7 simulate various halls, rooms and reverberation
plates. In addition, there are several other reverb effects such as Gated
Reverbs, Multi Tap (early reflections), Delay and Panning effects. There are
two adjustable parameters on the reverb effects - Decay Time and High
Frequency Damping.
AMPLITUDE
Decay time defines the time it takes for the reflected sound from the room
to decay or die away. The diagram below shows a generalized reverberation
envelope.
Pre
Reflex
Delay Cluster
TIME
Reverb
Decay Time
After an initial pre-delay period, the echoes from the closest walls or ceiling
are heard. These first echoes, or the early reflection cluster, vary greatly
depending on the type of room. Roughly 20 milliseconds after the early
reflection cluster, the actual reverberation begins and decays according to
the time set by the Decay Time parameter.
High frequency energy tends to fade away first as a sound is dissipated in a
room. The High Frequency Damping parameter allows you adjust the
amount of high frequency damping and thus change the characteristics of
the room. Rooms with smooth, hard surfaces are more reflective and have
less high frequency damping. Rooms filled with sound absorbing materials
such as curtains or people have more high frequency damping.
General Descriptions of the Reverb Types
Room: Programs simulate small rooms with high frequency absorption
caused by drapes and furniture.
Plates: Simulates plate type reverbs with their tight, dense, early
reflections and sharp reverb buildup.
Hall: Presets recreate the open, spacious ambience of large concert halls.
Gated Reverbs: Add ambience only while the original signal is still
sounding. As soon as the signal falls below a threshold, reverb is cut off.
Delay: Programs can be used to create echo and doubling effects.
Multi Tap: Programs consist of the reflection cluster only without the
reverb decay.
266 E-MU Systems
Effects
General Effect Descriptions
Chorus
The function of a chorus device is to thicken the sound or to make one
voice sound like many. This effect is usually created by mixing one or more
delayed versions of the signal with the original. The delay times used are
too short to be perceived as an echo, but long enough so that comb filtering
does not occur. In addition, the delay time is varied via a low frequency
oscillator to simulate the random differences which occur when multiple
instruments are playing together. A slight amount of feedback improves the
effect by creating multiple images of the sound as it recirculates again and
again.
All the choruses are true stereo using two separate delay lines controlled by
a single set of controls. The delay times are slightly different for each
channel and the LFO phase is inverted on one channel to help contribute
to the overall chorus effect. The LFO Rate and Depth settings are critical to
achieving a realistic effect, with faster LFO rates generally requiring less LFO
amount and vice-versa.
Doubling
When a copy of a sound delayed by about 26 milliseconds is added back to
the original, two audio images are perceived by your brain. When the
delayed image is slightly varied or modulated, the illusion of two voices is
created.
Slapback
Slapback is a single short echo in the range of 50-60 milliseconds. A sound
delayed by this length of time is perceived as a discrete and separate image
which is useful for a thickening effect or as a pre-delay for reverb simulating
a hard, reflective surface such a gymnasium wall.
Stereo Flanger
A flanger consists of a short audio delay line whose output is mixed
together with the original signal. Mixing the delayed and original signals
results in multiple frequency cancellations called a comb filter. Since the
flanger is a type of filter, it works best with harmonically rich sounds.
This is the frequency response of a Comb Filter.
Flanging was originally created using two tape recorders playing identical
recordings. By exactly synchronizing the two decks and then slowing the
speed of one by grasping the tape reel flanges, the flanging effect was born.
XL-7 Operation Manual 267
Effects
General Effect Descriptions
The XL-7 flanger is a stereo device consisting of two separate delay lines
controlled by a single set of controls. A Low Frequency Oscillator (LFO)
varies this initial delay setting, changing the frequency of the notches and
adding animation to the sound. LFO Rate controls the rate of change and
LFO Depth controls how much the LFO changes the delay.
The Feedback control sends some of the delayed signal through the delay
line again. When feedback is used the comb filter notches are deepened.
Delay
Delay is an effect which can be used for doubling, reverb pre-delay, or
echoes.
Delay Time is variable from 0-635 mS and controls the time between
echoes. Feedback and determines how long the echoes continue sounding.
“Infinite” delay effects are also possible without the risk of runaway.
Stereo Delay
Similar to delay except that the delay line outputs a stereo signal from the
mono input. The two output signals are a few milliseconds apart to create a
stereo image. The delay times are variable from 0-635 mS.
Panning Delay
A panning delay is similar to the normal delay lines except that the echoes
bounce back and forth between the two stereo speakers.
Dual Tap
These are delay lines where the signal is “tapped off” at two unevenly
spaced locations. When feedback is used, multiple complex echoes are
produced. The fraction in some of the algorithm names (i.e. 1/3, 1/4) refers
to the time ratio between the taps.
Vibrato
Basically, this a delay line modulated by an LFO, but with none of the
original signal added in. The LFO modulation creates a Doppler shift and a
resultant cyclical pitch shift. The vibrato created in this manner sounds
very different than vibrato created by frequency modulating the sample.
Distortion
Distortion uses a technique called “soft-clipping” to create additional
harmonics in the signal. As the level increases, the top of the waveform
becomes somewhat squared. As the level increases further, it transforms
into a true square wave.
Soft clipping gradually squares the edges of the waveform as the amplitude is increased.
268 E-MU Systems
Save/Copy Menu
The Save/Copy button is used to save changes to a pattern, song, preset,
copy data between presets, randomize presets and to move other types of
data. The menu is context-sensitive and will start at the appropriate save
screen. If multiple items need to be saved, then the screens have the
following priority: pattern, song, preset. Use the data entry control to
navigate to other pages that support copying information.
Save Pattern
Changes made to the current pattern are not made permanent until the
pattern is saved. The upper right corner of the display shows the percent of
memory available for saving patterns. When the display reads 0%, you are
out of memory and will not be able to save until you have erased other data
from the sequencer.
When a pattern (or song) has been edited and needs to be saved, an asterisk
(*) appears in the display. The asterisk and your edits remain on the edited
pattern even if you change patterns. Edits are only erased by saving the
pattern, editing another pattern, invoking the “Revert To Saved” feature
(page 93), or turning the unit off.
SAVE PATTERN to
0000 Any Pattern Number

Examine interesting
presets to learn how they work
using the Edit menu.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
20%
To Save a Sequencer Pattern
With the Mode/View selector in “pattern” mode, select the pattern
you want to save.
Press the Save/Copy menu button.
Move the cursor to the bottom line on the display and select a destination pattern location.
Press Enter when you have made your selection. The Enter LED is
flashing indicating that XL-7 is waiting for your response.
The Sequencer Pattern is now saved into the chosen location.
XL-7 Operation Manual 269
Save/Copy Menu
Saving a Preset
Saving a Preset

Any time you make a change to a preset, either using the Preset Edit menu
or by changing the Controller Knobs in Quick Edit mode, you must save
the preset in order for the change to become permanent. When you save a
preset it erases any existing preset information in that location. Make sure
that the destination location does not contain preset information you want
to keep.
Each time you change a
preset parameter, an asterisk
appears in the preset name and
the Save/Copy button LED
illuminates reminding you to
save your work.
SAVE PRESET to
0201 Destination Preset
1.
2.
3.
4.
270 E-MU Systems
User
To Save a Preset
Press the Save/Copy menu button.
Move the cursor to the bottom line on the display.
Select the new preset location using the data entry control.
Press the Home/Enter button.
Save/Copy Menu
Copy Preset
Copying
Information
Copy Preset
The Copy operations let you copy information from any preset or layer to
any other preset or layer. To use the copy command, first select the preset or
layer to which you want to copy (the destination location). Then, from the
copy screen, select the preset or layer you want to copy to the currently
selected location (the source location). Using the copy commands you can
copy preset, layer, PatchCord and arpeggiator information.
The Copy Preset command lets you copy all of the preset information from
one location into the preset of the current location. The preset information
in the source location (the preset location from which you want to copy) is
not deleted from the original location, just copied to the destination
location.
COPY PRESET from
0093 pad: Dreamer

All the Sound Navigator
features work when using the
Copy functions.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Copy Layer
XL-7
To Copy a Preset
Select the Preset you want to copy information into.
Press the Save/Copy menu button.
Select “Copy Preset from” using the data entry control.
Select the preset you want to copy using the data entry control. The
ROM Bank, Preset Number, Bank Number, Category and Preset Name
fields are all selectable.
Press the Home/Enter button.
A warning appears asking you to confirm once more. Press the Home/
Enter button to copy the selected preset into the current location.
The Copy Layer command lets you copy any layer information from one
preset into any layer of the current preset location. The layer information
in the source location (the layer location from which you want to copy) is
not deleted from the original location, just copied to the destination
location.
COPY LAYER
User
1
020 Source Preset
L1 -> L4
XL-7 Operation Manual 271
Save/Copy Menu
Copy PatchCords
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Copy PatchCords
To Copy a Layer
Select the Preset and Layer you want to copy information into.
Press the Save/Copy menu button.
Move the cursor to the bottom line on the display.
Select the preset location using the data entry control, of the preset
containing the information you want to copy into the current preset.
Move the cursor to the top line in the display.
Select the layer of the source preset in the first field on the right.
Select the destination layer in the second field.
Press the Home/Enter button.
The Copy Patch Cord command lets you copy the PatchCord settings from
one layer of the preset location into the current layer of the current preset
location. The preset information in the source location (the preset location
from which you want to copy) is not deleted from the original location, just
copied to the destination location.
COPY CORDS
User
1
020 Source Preset
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
272 E-MU Systems
L1 -> L4
To Copy a PatchCord
Select the Preset and Layer you want to copy information into.
Press the Save/Copy menu button.
Move the cursor to the bottom line on the display.
Select the preset location using the data entry control, of the preset
containing the information you want to copy into the current preset.
Move the cursor to the top line in the display.
Select the layer of the source preset in the first field on the right.
Select the destination layer in the second field.
Press the Home/Enter button.
Save/Copy Menu
Copy Preset PatchCords
Copy Preset
PatchCords
The Copy Preset PatchCord command lets you copy the preset patchcord
settings from one preset location into the current preset location. The
preset information in the source location (the preset location from which
you want to copy) is not deleted from the original location, just copied to
the destination location.
COPY PRESET CORDS
0201 Source Preset
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Copy Arpeggiator
Settings
User
To Copy a Preset PatchCord
Select the Preset you want to copy information into.
Press the Save/Copy menu button.
Move the cursor to the bottom line on the display.
Select the preset containing the information you want to copy.
Press the Home/Enter button.
This function lets you copy the Arpeggiator settings from any ROM or RAM
preset location into the current RAM (User) preset.
COPY ARP SET from
0520 syn: Syn Chaos
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
XL-7
To Copy the Arpeggiator Settings
From the Preset View display, select the User Preset you want to copy
the Arp setting into.
Press the Save/Copy menu button.
Move the cursor to any of the fields on the bottom line on the display.
Use the data entry control to select the preset you want to copy from.
Press Enter when you have made your selection. The Enter LED is
flashing indicating that XL-7 is waiting for your response.
The Arp Settings are copied into the current preset.
XL-7 Operation Manual 273
Save/Copy Menu
Copy Arpeggiator Pattern
Copy Arpeggiator
Pattern
This function lets you copy the Arpeggiator pattern from any ROM or RAM
preset to any RAM (user) pattern.
COPY ARP PAT from
961 TRANCED
1.
2.
3.
4.
XL-7
To Copy the Arpeggiator Pattern
Press the Save/Copy menu button.
Move the cursor to any of the fields on the bottom line on the display.
Use the data entry control to select the preset you want to copy from.
Press Enter when you have made your selection.
Overwrite pattern:
000 No Control
5.
Copy Preset Bank
Press Enter. The Arp Pattern is copied into the selected User Pattern.
The Copy Preset Bank command lets you copy an entire bank from any
ROM or RAM bank location to any RAM (user) bank. This function can be
especially useful after installing a new sound SIMM.
COPY BANK
From: XL-7 2
ROM or RAM
Preset Location
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
274 E-MU Systems
To: User
Bank No.
1
Destination
Bank No.
To Copy a Preset Bank
Press the Save/Copy menu button.
Move the cursor to the “From” field on the bottom line on the display.
Use the data entry control to select the preset bank you want to copy
from.
Move the cursor to the “To” field on the bottom line on the display.
Use the data entry control to select the User preset bank you want to
copy into.
Press the Home/Enter button to overwrite the bank.
Save/Copy Menu
Copy Sequencer Pattern
Copy Sequencer
Pattern
This function lets you copy a sequencer pattern from any location into the
current pattern location.
COPY PATTERN from
961 TRANCED
1.
2.
3.
4.
30%
To Copy the Sequencer Pattern
Press the Save/Copy menu button.
Move the cursor to any of the fields on the bottom line on the display.
Use the data entry control to select the pattern you want to copy from.
Press Enter when you have made your selection.
press ENTER to overwrite
0630 No Control
5.
Save Song
Press Enter. The pattern is copied into the current Pattern location.
Changes made to the current song are not made permanent until the song
is saved.
When a song (or pattern) has been edited and needs to be saved, an asterisk
(*) appears in the display. The asterisk and your edits remain on the edited
song even if you change songs. Edits are only erased by saving the song,
editing another song, invoking the “Revert To Saved” feature (page 114), or
turning the unit off.
SAVE SONG to
004 :Blank
1.
2.
3.
4.
30%
To Save a Song
Press the Save/Copy menu button.
Move the cursor to the bottom line of the display.
Use the data entry control to select the new location for the song. The
Enter LED will be flashing.
Press Enter when you have made your selection. The display will
momentarily flash “Saving Song”, and the song will be saved.
XL-7 Operation Manual 275
Save/Copy Menu
Copy Song
Copy Song
This function lets you copy a song from any location into the current song
location.
COPY SONG from
002 ENTRANCED
1.
2.
3.
4.
To Copy the Song
Press the Save/Copy menu button.
Move the cursor to any of the fields on the bottom line on the display.
Use the data entry control to select the song you want to copy from.
Press Enter when you have made your selection.
press
5.
276 E-MU Systems
30%
ENTER
to
overwrite
Press Enter. The song is copied into the current song location.
Save/Copy Menu
Copy Song
Sound
Authoring
Copy User Bank
to Flash
This is a special purpose function to be used with the Flash sound
authoring feature. Flash Sound SIMMs created on an EOS Ultra sampler can
be used as a custom XL-7 bank. Presets are then created in a User bank.
When the bank of presets is finished, it can be copied, using this function,
to the Flash SIMM. Flash SIMMs contain two separate memory locations.
One of these memories contains the sound samples and the other memory
can hold four banks of 128 presets.
WARNING: dangerous voltages are exposed inside XL-7! Make sure
power is completely disconnected from XL-7 before removing the top
panel. Replace the top panel before restoring power to the unit. The two
sound SIMM sockets inXL-7, marked 0 and 1, are located behind the
controller knobs on the circuit board.The destination Flash SIMM must
be placed in SIMM socket 1.
COPY USER BANK TO FLASH
From: User0
To: Flash2
_
If there is no Flash SIMM
in the unit, the error message,
“Requires Flash SIMM” will be
displayed.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
To Copy a User Bank to Flash
Make sure a Flash SIMM is inserted into the extra SIMM socket.
Press the Save/Copy menu button.
Rotate the data entry control to select the “Copy User Bank” function
shown above.
Move the cursor to the “From” field and select the User bank that you
want to copy to the Flash SIMM.
Move the cursor to the “To” field and select the Flash bank that you
want to contain the User bank.
Press Enter. The Enter LED will flash and the screen below appears.
Press ENTER to Overwrite
Flash SIMM Presets
7.
Press Enter again to confirm. The following screen appears:
COPYING USER BANK TO FLASH
Done. Please Reboot Now.
8.
The Flash presets cannot be used until XL-7 is rebooted (power off then
on). Reboot the XL-7 and verify that the new Flash bank has been
properly copied.
XL-7 Operation Manual 277
Save/Copy Menu
Rename Flash SIMM
Rename Flash SIMM

This utility allows you to rename the Flash SIMM and change its ID
number. Flash SIMMs can have any five letter name you choose. Each Flash
SIMM in a XL-7 unit must have a unique ID number (106-119).
The field in the upper right corner selects between multiple Flash SIMMs. If
only one Flash SIMM is installed, the field cannot be modified.
The Flash ID is the MSB
of the MIDI Bank Select
command used to select the
Sound Bank.
_
If there is no Flash SIMM
in the unit, the error message,
“Requires Flash SIMM” will be
displayed.
RENAME FLASH SIMM
New Name: Drums
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Flash
ID: 110
Make sure a Flash SIMM is inserted in a XL-7 SIMM socket.
Press the Save/Copy menu button.
Rotate the data entry control to select the “Rename Flash SIMM”
function shown above.
Move the cursor to the “New Name” field and rename the SIMM using
the data entry control to select the letter and the cursor keys to select
the position.
Set the Sound ID number for the SIMM. It doesn’t matter which
number you choose as long as the same number isn’t used in another
SIMM.
Press Enter. The following screen appears and the Enter LED will be
flashing.
Press ENTER to Update
Flash SIMM data
7.
Press Enter again to confirm or any other button to abort. The
following screen appears:
CHANGING SIMM NAME & ID
(takes about 2 minutes)
8.
278 E-MU Systems
The Flash presets cannot be used until XL-7 is rebooted (power off then
on). Reboot the XL-7 and verify that the new Flash bank has been
properly renamed.
Save/Copy Menu
Duplicate Flash
Duplicate Flash
This utility allows you to duplicate Flash SIMMs using XL-7. Both Sound
and Preset data is copied when a Flash SIMM is duplicated. A factory sound
SIMM cannot be copied using this utility.
WARNING: dangerous voltages are exposed inside XL-7! Make sure
power is completely disconnected from XL-7 before removing the top
panel. Replace the top panel before restoring power to the unit.
The two sound SIMM sockets in XL-7 are marked 0 and 1. These are located
behind the controller knobs on the circuit board. The Flash SIMM you want
to copy MUST be placed into SIMM Socket 0. The destination Flash SIMM
must be placed in SIMM socket 1.
DUPLICATE SLOT 0 FLASH
Start
1.
_
If there are no Flash
SIMMs in the unit, or if the
SIMMs are in the wrong slots,
an error message will be
displayed.
2.
3.
4.
Make sure the two Flash SIMM are located in the required XL-7 SIMM
sockets.
Press the Save/Copy menu button.
Rotate the data entry control to select the “Duplicate Flash SIMM”
screen shown above.
Move the cursor to the bottom line and press Enter. The following
screen appears and the Enter LED will be flashing.
Press ENTER to overwrite
the Flash SIMM in Slot 1
5.
Press Enter again to confirm or any other button to abort. The
following screen appears and the SIMM is copied.
DUPLICATING SLOT 0 -> SLOT 1
(Takes about 5 minutes)
6.
When XL-7 has finished duplicating the SIMM, turn power off, remove
the copied SIMM, then reboot. That’s it!
XL-7 Operation Manual 279
Save/Copy Menu
Duplicate Flash
Create
Random
Preset
This is a great feature which creates a new preset using portions of the ROM
presets as source material. By merging random presets, really great
sounding presets can be generated with ease. Use this feature to generate
wild new sounds, get new programming ideas or just for fun.
RANDOMIZE PRESET
0000 Any User Preset

Examine interesting
presets to learn how they work
using the Edit menu.
1.
2.
3.
4.
280 E-MU Systems
User
To Create a Random Preset
Press the Save/Copy menu button.
Move the cursor to the bottom line on the display and press Enter.
A new random preset will be created.
Don’t like the sound? Press Enter again and a new random sound will
be generated.
Preset Programming
There is so much you can do with the XL-7 it’s impossible to describe it all.
This chapter is will give you a few ideas for programming your own custom
sounds and contains step-by-step instructions to help you get started. In
order to get the most from this chapter, we recommend you actually try
each example.
Editing
Presets
One of the easiest ways to make a new preset is to edit an existing preset.
This is also an excellent way of becoming familiar with XL-7. If you don’t
like what you hear, simply select a new preset, then XL-7 reverts to the
original sound. Changes are not permanent until you Save them (see
“Saving a Preset” on page 270).
Let’s experiment and modify a few parameters of an existing preset. We’ll
start with functions that have an obvious effect on the sound: Instrument
Select, Tuning, and Chorus.
Changing the
Instrument
Changing the instrument is the easiest and most dramatic way to modify
an existing preset.
1.
2.
O
The Preset Edit Jump
Buttons are located in the
“Command Functions” section
of the front panel.
To Change the Instrument for the Current Layer
Choose any cool preset, then press the Preset Edit button.
Press the #1 Jump button twice to jump directly to the Instrument
page. See “Preset Menu Jump Keys” on page 41.
L1
INSTRUMENT
0099 wal:Audity 1
3.
4.
5.
ROM:XL-7
Move the cursor down to the bottom line (using a Cursor button).
Use the data entry control to change the instrument. This changes the
instrument for the current layer (in this case it’s L1).
Play the keyboard as you scroll through the various instruments.
XL-7 Operation Manual 281
Preset Programming
Editing Presets
6.
7.
To Change the Instrument for any Layer in the Preset
Move the cursor back up to the first field in the first line (the layer).
Use the data entry control to select the layer you want.
L2
INSTRUMENT
0513 vox:Orch
8.
ROM:XL-7
Repeat steps 3 and 4 for each selected layer. Find an instrument that
sounds good when combined with the previous instruments selected.
With all these great instruments to work with, you really can’t go wrong.
Now let’s play with the tuning.
Changing the
Tuning of an
Instrument
Tuning the selected layer of the preset changes the pitch of the key on the
controller. If the numbers are “00,” it means that the instruments are tuned
to concert pitch (A=440 Hz). The Coarse tuning value represents whole
semitone intervals. The Fine tuning value shifts the pitch in 1/64 semitones
(or 1.56 cents).
1.
To Tune the Instrument of the Current Layer
Press the #3 Jump button twice to jump directly to Tuning page.
L1
2.
3.
TUNING
Coarse: +36
Fine:
+6
Move the cursor to the Coarse field (using the cursor button).
Set the value to +12 to shift the pitch up a whole octave. To shift the
pitch in smaller units than a semitone, use the Fine field.
Try tuning one of the instruments to a perfect fifth above the other by
setting the Coarse value to +7.
Tuning an instrument far out of its normal range completely changes the
character of the sound. For example, if you tune a bass guitar up 2 octaves,
it's going to sound rather petite. On the other hand, if you tune it down 2
octaves, you can probably rattle plaster off the walls! Experiment with
radical pitch shifting. You'll be surprised at the results.
282 E-MU Systems
Preset Programming
Editing Presets
Chorus
_
WARNING: Since it
works by doubling the
instruments, Chorusing halves
the number of notes you can
play on XL-7.
This is an easy one. Chorus works by doubling the instruments and
detuning them slightly. The larger the chorus value, the more detuning
occurs. The Width parameter controls the stereo spread. A Width value of
0% reduces the chorus to mono, a value of 100% provides the most stereo
separation. Chorus is useful when you want to “fatten up” a part quickly
and easily.
1.
2.
To Chorus a Layer
Press the #5 Jump button to jump directly to the Chorus page.
Use the cursor buttons to advance the cursor to the Chorus field (the
first field in the bottom line of the display). Use the data entry control
to turn on chorus.
L1
3.
CHORUS
off
WIDTH
100%
Select a Width value based on the amount of detuning you want.
Smaller numbers mean less detuning, larger ones more.
You can select various amounts of chorusing for each of the instruments,
just play around with the Chorus and Width parameter until you like what
you hear.
Volume Envelope
Every sound you hear, whether it’s a piano note, a drum, or a bell, has a
characteristic volume curve or envelope. This Volume Envelope shapes the
volume of the sound which grows louder or softer in various ways during
the course of the sound. The volume envelope of a sound is one of the clues
our brain uses to determine what type of sound is being produced.
An envelope shapes the sound or volume of the sound over time. The
envelope generators in XL-7 all have six stages to the contour: Attack 1,
Attack 2, Decay 1, Decay 2, Release 1 and Release 2. When you press a key
on the keyboard, the envelope goes through each of the first four stages,
advancing to the next stage when the defined Level for each is reached. As
long as you continue to hold the key down, the envelope continues
through the first four stages holding at the end of the Decay 2 level until
the key is released. When you release the key, the envelope jumps to the
Release stages (no matter where the envelope is when you release the key)
ending at the Release 2 level.
XL-7 Operation Manual 283
Preset Programming
Editing Presets
2
y1
Dc
Atk
Piano
Rl
k1
s1
At
level
Dcy2
Rls2
Sustain
time
Organ
Strings
Percussion
Key Down
Key Released
Every instrument in XL-7 has it's own predetermined volume envelope
which is used when the Volume Envelope parameter is set to “factory.” By
setting the Volume Envelope to “time-based” or “tempo-based,” we can
reshape the instrument's natural volume envelope any way we want. By
reshaping the volume envelope of a instrument, you can dramatically
change the way the sound is perceived. For example, you can make
“bowed” pianos or backward gongs. The diagrams to the left show the
characteristic volume envelopes of a few common sounds.
In preparation for this experiment choose almost any of the standard organ
presets which continues to sustain when the key is held down. Go to the
Instrument page and set it to “None” on all layers except Layer 1. Now
you’re ready to play with the Volume Envelope.
1.
To Setup the Volume Envelope
Go to the Volume Envelope mode screen, by pressing the “Amp” jump
button, and set the Volume Envelope mode to “time-based.”
L1
VOLUME ENVELOPE
Mode: time-based
2.

Front panel knobs 5-8
are routed to the volume
envelope parameters and thus
affect the settings. You may
want to disconnect the
PatchCords to gain total control
of the envelope parameters.
(Alternately, you can create a
completely blank preset and
start from there.)
284 E-MU Systems
Now move on to the next screen to set the Volume Envelope
parameters.
L1
VOL ENV
Attack 1
3.
TIME
50
LEVEL
100%
Increase the Attack 1 time value and play a note. The attack controls
the time it takes for the sound to reach the Attack level when a key is
pressed and held.
Preset Programming
Editing Presets
4.
5.
Move the cursor to the first field in the bottom line and use the cursor
buttons to advance to the Release pages.
Increase the Release 1 and 2 times. Note the effect as you release the key
on the controller. The Release stages controls the time it takes for the
sound to die away when a note is released.
To Setup the Volume Envelope as an ADSR
The classic synthesizer ADSR (Attack-Decay-Sustain-Release) envelope is
easy to create using the XL-7 six segment envelope generators. The trick is
to only use segments: Attack1, Decay2, and Release1.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Set Atk1, Atk2 & Dcy1 levels to 100.
Set Rls1 & Rls2 levels to 0.
Set Atk2, Dcy1 and Rls2 rates to 0.
Program the Atk1, Dcy2 and Rls1 segments as you wish. Decay 2 level is
your Sustain level.
Dc
Atk
1
y2
level
Used
Unused
Atk1
Dcy2
Rls1
Atk2
Dcy1
Rls2
Sustain
Level
Rls1
time
Key
Down
Working with Filters
Key
Released
The filters make it possible to remove certain components of the sound. A
low pass filter removes the high frequency components or put another way,
it “lets the low frequencies pass.” A high-pass filter removes the low
frequency components from the sound letting only the high frequencies
pass. See “XL-7 Filter Types” on page 202 for a complete list of XL-7’s filters
and their descriptions.
In preparation for the next tutorial, select the Blank Preset. (Select the
Preset Category and spin the data entry control all the way to the left).
1.
1.
Go to the Instrument screen (Preset Edit menu) and select Instrument
#124 - Interference. This is a harmonically rich sound. Since filters work
by removing or accentuating certain frequencies, we want to make sure
that we have a lot of frequencies to start with.
Advance to the Filter Type screen using the data entry control. Select
the Classic 4th order filter.
XL-7 Operation Manual 285
Preset Programming
Editing Presets
L1
FILTER
Classic

Front panel knobs 1-2
are routed to the filter
parameters and will affect the
initial settings made here. You
may want to disconnect the
PatchCords to gain total control
over the filter parameters.
2.
Ord
4
Type
LPF
Go to the Filter Frequency and Q screen. Position the cursor in the Freq:
field as shown in the following illustration.
L1
FILTER
Freq: 255
Q: 000
The Frequency parameter determines the filter cutoff frequency or the
frequency the filter uses as the highest frequency allowed to pass.
If you play the keyboard now, you should hear the raw sound. Slowly
decrease the filter cutoff frequency value as you play the keyboard. The
sound gets more and more dull as you remove more and more high
frequencies from the sound. At some point, the sound completely disappears. (You have filtered out everything.) The chart on the following page
illustrates what you just did.
Cutoff Frequency
100
Amplitude
80
Output of Filter
60
40
20
40
80
160 360 720 1440 2880 ...
Frequency
3.
4.
5.
286 E-MU Systems
Open the filter back up to 255, then move the cursor to the Q field.
Set the Q to 10, then move the cursor back under the Freq value. As you
change the frequency, notice that the sound now has a sharp, nasal
quality. A high Q boosts or amplifies the frequencies at the cutoff
frequency (Fc).
Reset the cutoff frequency to the lowest setting and the Q to 00.
Preset Programming
Editing Presets
Adding the Filter Envelope
Now let's modulate the Filter Frequency with the Filter Envelope. The Filter
Envelope is a device that can automatically change the filter frequency
during the course of the note. Before we define the Filter Envelope, we need
to patch the Filter Envelope to the Filter Frequency.
1.
To Setup the Filter Envelope
Go to the PatchCord screen by pressing the Cords Jump Key.
L1
PATCHCORD
RlsVel ->
AmpVol
2.
3.
4.
#01
+100
Move the cursor below the first field in the bottom line of the display.
This is the Source field. Use the data entry control to change the
Source to “FiltEnv” as shown in the following illustration.
Advance the cursor to the next field. This is the Destination field. Use
the data entry control to change the destination to “FiltFreq.”
Move the cursor to the last field in the line. This is the Amount field.
The Amount field determines the amount of modulation applied. Set
this value to “+100.”
L1
PATCHCORD
FiltEnv+
->
FiltFreq
#01
+100
This setup connects the Filter Envelope Generator to the Filter Cutoff as
shown in the following diagram.
Instrument
R
Filter
Fc
DCA
Pan
Q
L
Filter Env.
5.
Now, return to the Filter Envelope Mode screen. Set the Mode to
“time-based.”
XL-7 Operation Manual 287
Preset Programming
Editing Presets
L1
FILTER ENVELOPE
Mode: time-based
6.
Advance to the Filter Envelope parameter page.
L1
FILT ENV
Attack1
7.
FILT ENV
Attack1
9.
LEVEL
100%
Move the cursor underneath the time field and change the value to
about +50. Now when you press a key the filter slowly sweeps up.
L1
8.
RATE
50
RATE
50
LEVEL
+88%
Change the attack rate and note the change in the sound.
Set the envelope parameters as shown in the following table.
Envelope Phase
Time
Level %
Attack 1
40
65
Attack 2
65
100
Decay 1
80
85
Decay 2
25
50
Release 1
97
20
Release 2
73
0
With the above setup, the filter sweeps up, then Decays back down to
the Decay 2 Level until you release the key. Then it sweeps down at the
Release rates. Play with the envelope parameters for awhile to get a feel
for their function. (If you're having trouble understanding the Envelope
Generators, please refer to the Programming Basics section in this
manual.)
288 E-MU Systems
Preset Programming
Editing Presets
Changing Filter Types
Go back to the Filter Type screen shown below and move the cursor down
the lower line of the display. Change the filter type while playing the
keyboard. There are 50 different filter types.
L1
FILTER
Aah-Ay-Eeh
Ord
6
Type
VOW
These filters are extremely powerful and have been carefully crafted to offer
maximum flexibility and musical control. You may want to change the
Envelope (PatchCord) Amount, Q and/or the Filter Frequency to get the
right sound for each filter and instrument. These three controls, coupled
with the Filter Envelope, are perhaps the most important controls on any
synthesizer. Take the time to learn how they interact with each other and
you will be able to create sounds beyond imagination.
Envelope Repeat
The Envelope Generator can also be made to repeat. When the envelope
repeat function is On, the Attack (1&2) and Decay (1&2) stages will
continue to repeat as long as the key is held.
1.
2.
To Make the Filter Envelope Repeat:
Go to the Filter Envelope Mode screen shown below.
Move the cursor to the Mode field.
L1
FILTER ENVELOPE
Mode:
time-based
3.
Turn the data entry control clockwise. The Mode field will change to
Repeat as shown below.
L1
FILTER ENVELOPE
Repeat: on
4.
5.
Move the cursor to the on/off field and turn Envelope Repeat On.
Play a key on the keyboard. You should now hear the envelope
repeating.
XL-7 Operation Manual 289
Preset Programming
Editing Presets
6.
Practice Modulating
290 E-MU Systems
Go back to the envelope parameter page and adjust the Attack 1&2,
and Decay 1&2 parameters. The repeating envelope cycles through
these four stages as long as the key is held.
• Try modulating the pitch with the Filter Envelope generator.
• Use Velocity to modulate the Filter Envelope PatchCord or the Filter
Frequency. This brightens the sound as you play harder.
• Program the LFO to modulate Filter Frequency and Volume (PatchCord screen).
• Modulate the LFO with the other LFO, with Velocity, and with the
Touchstrip or Pitch Wheel.
• Examine the Factory presets to learn how they’re constructed. There
are lots of cool synthesis tricks you can use in your own presets.
• We’ve programmed the front panel knobs our way, but since they’re
completely programmable there’s no reason why you can’t create
your own custom controls.
• Think of ten exotic modulation routings, then try them out.
Experimentation is the key to learning how to control XL-7.
Preset Programming
Editing Presets
Troubleshooting
A common source of confusion when working with the filter envelope is
that the Attack or Release parameters might not seem to be working
correctly. If you are not getting the expected result, try to analyze the
situation. There will be many times when you will have to stop for a
minute and think, “What am I trying to do and why isn't it working?”
When this happens (and it will), don't panic. Troubleshooting is a normal
part of the synthesis process. Simply examine the various parameters and
try to be as analytical as possible as you solve the problem. The solution is
usually simple. (“The filter is already wide open and can't open any more.”
or “Another PatchCord is connecting something to the parameter and
affecting it.”) Learning to play any instrument takes a little patience and
practice.
Referring to the diagram below which shows the XL-7 signal flow, notice
that the DCA comes after the Filter. The DCA controls the final volume of
the sound, so if the filter's release is longer than the release for the DCA,
you won't hear it, because the DCA has already shut off the sound.
Instrument
Z-Plane
Filter
R
DCA
Pan
L
You’re getting the general idea by now. Remember not to select a new
preset before saving the current one or all your changes will be lost (the
preset reverts to the last saved version). If you want to save your creation,
select the Save/Copy menu and select a destination preset location for your
masterpiece, then press Enter.
Because you can save your work, it’s worth spending time to get the sound
just right. When designing sounds you become an instrument builder as
well as a musician. With XL-7 you can design the custom radical instruments you’ve always wanted!
XL-7 Operation Manual 291
Preset Programming
Linking Presets
Linking
Presets
Using the Link pages in the Edit menu is a quick and easy way to create new
sounds. Use the Links to “layer” presets and to “split” a keyboard into
sections containing different sounds.
1.
2.
O
3.
To Layer Two Presets
Select the first preset you want to layer.
Press the Preset Edit button.
Go to the Link screen by pressing the Links Jump Key.
See “Preset Links” on
page 224 for more information.
LINK 1
off
4.
5.
1.
2.
4.
To Create a Split Keyboard Using Links
Follow steps 1 through 4 above.
Press Enter and use the Jump Key to advance to the next page.
C-2
292 E-MU Systems
KEY
B4
VEL
000 127
Set the keyboard range of the linked preset as desired.
Press Enter and use the data entry control to go to the Key Range page
using the Ranges jump key.
L1 KEY:LO
C5
5.
XL-7
Move the cursor to the second line of the display. Select the preset you
want to link with the preset you selected in step 1. Play the keyboard as
you scroll through the various presets to hear the results.
If you want the link to be a permanent part of the preset, be sure to save
the preset. Otherwise, simply change the preset to erase your work.
LINK 1
RANGE
3.
PRESET
FADE
000
HIGH
G8
FADE
000
Set the range of the original preset so it fills the remaining keyboard
area. Save the preset.
Appendix
This section provides some of the more technical information about XL-7.
In this appendix, you will find information about velocity curves, MIDI
commands and PatchCord charts.
Front Panel
Knob
Functions
The front panel knob functions are standardized for most of the factory
presets. The typical functions of the controller knobs are described below.
Match the controller knobs on an external MIDI controller to the Realtime
Controller Assignments in the MIDI menu if you want to externally control
these functions.
XL-7 Operation Manual 293
Appendix
Presets
Knob Controller
Descriptions
Filter Cutoff ............... Filter Frequency
Filter Q ....................... Filter Resonance
Filter Attack................ Filter Envelope Attack Rate
Filter Decay ................ Filter Envelope Decay and Release Rate

The Front Panel Knobs
can be reprogrammed for each
preset and stored in any of the
User Presets. The functions
shown here are the factory
programmed settings.
Amp Attack ................ Volume Envelope Attack Rate
Amp Decay................. Volume Envelope Decay Rate
Amp Sustain ............... Volume Envelope Sustain Level
Amp Release............... Volume Envelope Release Rate
Velocity -> Amp.......... Key Velocity to Volume
Velocity -> Filter ......... Key Velocity to Filter Frequency
LFO 2 Amount ............ LFO 2 Amount
LFO 2 Rate.................. LFO 2 Frequency
Mod 1......................... Alternate Modulation Parameter 1
Mod 2......................... Alternate Modulation Parameter 2
Presets
XL-7 Preset
Categories
294 E-MU Systems
The XL-7 presets are organized in categories according to the types of
sound. Listed below are the categories and their three letter prefixes:
arp: Arpeggiated
air:
bas: Basses
bel: Bells
bpm: Synchro-sonic, clocks
bts: BEATS presets
edg: Edgy, cutting
gtr:
hit: Shorter
key: Keyboard instrument, organ
kit:
led: Leads
Drum kit
Wind noise instrument
Guitar
pad: Sustained, pad-like
nse: Noises
raw: Playable, vanilla
prc: Percussion
syn: Complex, harmonically rich
sfx: Sound Effects
wal: Dense, harmonically complex
vox: Vocals
Appendix
Preset Listing
Preset Listing
User Bank 0, XL-7 Bank 0
0. kit:K-0
43. kit:K-13 QP-Dly
86. hit:Nice 1
1. kit:K-1
44. kit:K-14 D-Down
87. hit:Nice 2
2. kit:K-2
45. kit:K-15 D-D2
88. hit:Nice 3
3. kit:K-3
46. kit:K-16 Tremor
89. hit:Logger
4. kit:K-4
47. kit:808 Delay
90. hit:Dance 1
5. kit:K-5
48. kit:Envelope
91. hit:Dance 2
6. kit:K-6
49. prc:Kicks 1
92. hit:Dance 3
7. kit:K-7
50. prc:Kicks 2
93. hit:Dance 4
8. kit:K-8
51. prc:Solo Kick 1
94. hit:Dance 8
9. kit:K-9
52. prc:Solo Kick 2
95. hit:Dance 11
10. kit:K-10
53. prc:Snares 1
96. hit:Dance 12
11. kit:K-11
54. prc:Snares 2
97. hit:Dance 14
12. kit:K-12
55. prc:Snares 1 +7
98. hit:Dance 16
13. kit:K-13
56. prc:Snares 2 Eff
99. hit:Dance 20
14. kit:K-14
57. prc:Snares 2 Rev
100. hit:Dance 21
15. kit:K-15
58. prc:Snare Fill 1
101. hit:Dance 22
16. kit:K-16
59. prc:Snare Fill 2
102. hit:Dance 23
17. kit:K-17
60. prc:Ambi Snare
103. hit:Dance 24
18. kit:K-808
61. prc:Toms & Stuff
104. hit:Dance 25
19. kit:K-909
62. prc:Congas etc 1
105. hit:Dance 26
20. kit:Acoustic 1
63. prc:Congas etc 2
106. hit:Organ 3
21. kit:Acoustic 2
64. prc:Hats 1
107. hit:Organ 4
22. kit:Hybrid
65. prc:Hats 2
108. hit:Organ 5
23. kit:Hard 1
66. prc:Solo Hat 1
109. hit:Organ 6
24. kit:Hard 2
67. prc:Solo Hat 2
110. hit:UnisonString
25. kit:K-1 HPF
68. prc:Tambs
111. hit:Unison Brass
26. kit:K-1 up 9
69. prc:Cymbals
112. hit:Brass 6
27. kit:K-2 millini
70. prc:Shakers etc.
113. hit:Brass 7
28. kit:K-3 LFO~LPF
71. prc:Bells
114. hit:Brass 9
29. kit:K-4 LFO~AMP
72. prc:Blocks
115. hit:Brass 18
30. kit:K-5 Octave
73. prc:Claps/Snaps
116. hit:Trumpet FX 1
31. kit:K-5 up 7
74. prc:Misc
117. hit:Trumpet FX 2
32. kit:K-5 Klub
75. prc:Warehouse
118. hit:Sax FX
33. kit:K-6 Chorus
76. prc:Scratches 1
119. hit:Blipp
34. kit:K-7 LFO~REZ
77. prc:Scratches 2
120. hit:Buzz Blip
35. kit:K-8 16tsPan
78. prc:Tic a Tak
121. hit:Game
36. kit:K-8~8 go
79. prc:Ubu Delay FX
122. hit:Bell
37. kit:K-9 D-Pan
80. hit:Enrezzle
123. hit:CMI
38. kit:K-9 up 12
81. hit:PLATINUM
124. hit:Bass Stab
39. kit:K-10 D-Up
82. hit:Voxy
125. hit:H G
40. kit:K-10 High Q
83. hit:Krunchy
126. hit:H G Dive
41. kit:K-11 T-Dly
84. hit:Dreamer Tags
127. hit:Drum Stab
42. kit:K-12 Q-Dly
85. hit:Boink-King
XL-7 Operation Manual 295
Appendix
Preset Listing
Preset Listing
User Bank 1, XL-7 Bank 1
0.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
29.
30.
31.
32.
33.
34.
35.
36.
37.
38.
39.
40.
41.
42.
296 E-MU Systems
syn:Basic Saw
syn:ORiON
syn:Spiders
syn:Nordica
syn:Sync4Sequenc
syn:Tink Or Toy
syn:Kyng Doam
syn:70-64
syn:12-30
syn:Trancer
syn:MortalSynth
syn:The Grid
syn:Calmer
syn:Cyborg
syn:South Euro 1
syn:South Euro 2
syn:Big E
syn:Riverdancing
syn:Air Age
syn:Trem String
syn:OBX
syn:40-10
syn:12-20
syn:3 O 3
syn:Geaxoils
syn:XtoZ
syn:Munster
syn:Booty Qooty
syn:Uborator
syn:Prophety
syn:Raved Pass
syn:D Pee
syn:Jesuasynth
syn:Wavetable
syn:Minor Evil
syn:Profit Brass
syn:Sweepy
syn:Glider
syn:Grumpy
syn:Gothica
syn:Too Big
syn:Echoing
syn:Screamer
43. syn:Electric
86. led:PureSaw
44. syn:CZ BIG
87. led:Wormsine
45. syn:SinEnsemble
88. led:Technoval
46. syn:BigDandyBoy
89. led:Falling
47. syn:Willy 4
90. led:Scizy 2
48. syn:R&B Stegas
91. pad:Rumble Pad
49. syn:60-30
92. pad:Super Pad
50. syn:SweetDream
93. pad:ARK Covet
51. led:Wet
94. pad:E P I C
52. led:Cyber 1
95. pad:Sleepy
53. led:Cyber 5
96. pad:Tecnorise
54. led:Cyber 6
97. pad:Cvox
55. led:Cyber 7
98. pad:Soft Trace
56. led:Saturn
99. pad:Ice Dreams
57. led:More Senses
100. pad:Big Chief
58. led:Wormy 2
101. pad:Slow Dance
59. led:Wormy 3
102. pad:Warm&Lush
60. led:Zeaxy 2
103. pad:Art Deko
61. led:Brixx 2
104. pad:Daddy's Girl
62. led:Apoly 1
105. pad:Strings Box
63. led:Fat S12
106. pad:Hi&LowLight
64. led:Fat CL1
107. pad:Vespers
65. led:Fat INT
108. pad:Ambi Pad
66. led:Groove Wow
109. pad:Pure Synth
67. led:Alter 4
110. pad:HarmonicLift
68. led:Alter 6
111. pad:Lunar Trail
69. led:Synrg 7
112. pad:Cryo Stasus
70. led:Synrg 9
113. pad:Genesis
71. led:Fat Saw
114. pad:Dark City
72. led:Scizy 2
115. pad:SlogritStrng
73. led:Scizy 4
116. pad:SaturnRings
74. led:Jungle X
117. pad:Smoovie
75. led:Hypass Ditty
118. pad:Aki's World
76. led:Heavy
119. pad:Low Back
77. led:Dreamlead
120. pad:www.f mono
78. led:Duzbe 2
121. pad:Spelunkers
79. led:Fuzzer
122. pad:Lifedream
80. led:Weezel
123. pad:Perception
81. led:Noise F
124. pad:Involved
82. led:P Mod 1
125. pad:Lo Fi String
83. led:DesertTrance
126. pad:AmbString 1
84. led:TB 2
127. pad:AmbString 2
85. led:Metallic
Appendix
Preset Listing
Preset Listing
User Bank 2, XL-7 Bank 2
0.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
29.
30.
31.
32.
33.
34.
35.
36.
37.
38.
39.
40.
41.
42.
bas:Top Tri
bas:UK shoota
bas:Love Bee
bas:Jump Up
bas:Sub Duh
bas:Hybrid Phase
bas:A.D. 3033
bas:Vortex
bas:Saws Normal
bas:1 Shot
bas:Hard X
bas:Pinhead
bas:Go Long
bas:Square V
bas:H20
bas:Interference
bas:B-Acer
bas:P-dg
bas:Fatso
bas:F16
bas:Acid 7
bas:Sonic
bas:Bullit
bas:Dance II
bas:Rippedbass
bas:Depth
bas:Arplikebass
bas:Fat Arc
bas:PPX 1
bas:PPX 2
bas:Jungle Sub
bas:Fat Juno
bas:Smooth
bas:Heavy B
bas:Sub E
bas:S-Bass
bas:Thwip
bas:Log Bass
bas:Disser
bas:Sunny
bas:HardHouse
bas:Garage Sub
bas:Planet X
43. edg:Boxt
86. wal:Luscious
44. edg:Matrix
87. nse:Interfear
45. edg:Honker
88. nse:Diffuser
46. edg:Analog Beast
89. nse:Radon Shield
47. edg:Zorkon
90. nse:That'sCreepy
48. edg:AudKlav
91. nse:Future Steps
49. edg:Scrape
92. nse:LittleWeasel
50. edg:Hlywd Native
93. nse:Martians
51. edg:Ringer
94. nse:Cast
52. edg:Bare Edge
95. nse:SpottedWhite
53. edg:Spawn
96. nse:Heavy Mental
54. edg:Rez Zip
97. nse:Hadrian's
55. edg:FuzzGrinder
98. nse:Machined
56. edg:Love All
99. nse:Rezawrect
57. edg:Squeake
100. nse:Massive
58. edg:2 Flange
101. nse:Soline 7x
59. edg:Teeth
102. nse:Quiet Wall
60. edg:Slicer
103. nse:Bottom Floor
61. edg:Skreecher
104. nse:Distructor
62. edg:Love Hurts
105. nse:Undertaker
63. wal:Strangled
106. nse:Coyote
64. wal:The Macheen
107. nse:Turbonic
65. wal:Duckfuzz
108. nse:GrainyPixel
66. wal:C-Ride
109. nse:Faucet Drip
67. wal:HoverCraft
110. nse:Psychic Sea
68. wal:Clavonate
111. nse:Aarno Ldt
69. wal:DailyBread
112. key:Smarm Organ
70. wal:I made it
113. key:Disca Queen
71. wal:Backdraft
114. key:Rave Organ
72. wal:Mammoth
115. key:Organik
73. wal:Maryland
116. key:SynhissOrgan
74. wal:Thickets
117. key:Deep Organ
75. wal:Ice Ring
118. key:P-soul
76. wal:Silkness
119. key:TechnoGrand
77. wal:Byzantine
120. key:Ocean
78. wal:Raverotic
121. key:HybridTine
79. wal:Ripped
122. key:EP Roll 1
80. wal:Balls2The..
123. key:EP Roll 2
81. wal:W6 3sEvEn
124. key:EP Fog
82. wal:Abyss
125. gtr:Guit Hits
83. wal:GoSpeedRacer
126. gtr:Univibe
84. wal:Tension
127. gtr:Clicky Picky
85. wal:Big Wall
XL-7 Operation Manual 297
Appendix
Preset Listing
Preset Listing
User Bank 3, XL-7 Bank 3
0.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
29.
30.
31.
32.
33.
34.
35.
36.
37.
38.
39.
40.
41.
42.
298 E-MU Systems
arp:Deeper Love
arp:Glider
arp:Alloy M
arp:JUNOsis
arp:A Trip
arp:Dreamer
arp:Palomar
arp:Raving
arp:Robo Trace
arp:Glory II
arp:Hollographic
arp:Pele
arp:Lust II
arp:Bottom Perc
arp:You Know It
arp:X-light II
arp:OrbisTabula
arp:OrbisPitcher
arp:The Grind
arp:Tron X
arp:Dry Wastland
arp:Axis One
arp:Bouchete
arp:Saw Standard
arp:Phrophetics
arp:Sine Drum
arp:Gutter Punk
arp:MooGie-D
arp:No Lo
arp:Sanctuary
arp:Pissto Hi
arp:T-2000
bpm:Bouncerette
bpm:Traveler
bpm:Boogy Synth
bpm:Lighter
bpm:End
bpm:E Room
bpm:Monster
bpm:Peak 7
bpm:Cult-feel
bpm:Love II
bpm:Synthex 90'
43. bpm:Underclass
86. vox:Lushorch Vox
44. bpm:Tempo LFOs
87. vox:Toxic Vox
45. bpm:Carpe Diem
88. vox:Zephyr
46. bpm:L Room
89. vox:Air Voices
47. bpm:Reepeter
90. vox:SIRRUS
48. bpm:Solace
91. vox:Future Vox
49. bpm:GRITS
92. vox:Bliss
50. bpm:TRIPPER
93. vox:ARMAGEDDON
51. bpm:Higher Power
94. vox:ANGELIKA
52. bpm:Trashy
95. vox:Galaxal
53. bpm:Vision
96. vox:Bandvoxxe
54. bpm:Wading
97. vox:Exploration
55. bpm:Grinded
98. vox:AfterShock
56. bpm:Electon
99. vox:Surfacing
57. bpm:Bubbler
100. vox:Ethereal
58. bpm:End
101. vox:Suffocating
59. bpm:Wicked Low
102. vox:Space Voxxal
60. bpm:RadioDaze
103. sfx:Moby's Trip
61. bpm:Panhandel
104. sfx:Odd Quasar
62. bpm:Minator
105. sfx:S-METAL
63. bpm:Lucy-Q
106. sfx:Zoned
64. air:Bat Pann
107. sfx:OverTheEdge
65. air:GhostStories
108. sfx:Granules
66. air:Breath Stack
109. sfx:Glassers
67. air:Tibet
110. sfx:Alienator
68. air:Futura
111. sfx:Ripped Lazer
69. air:Air Surf
112. sfx:FoldingSpace
70. air:Eastern Mist
113. sfx:Uncertainty
71. air:Vampirella
114. sfx:CosmicCompny
72. air:Floater
115. sfx:REZA'S LaB
73. air:Warm Chill
116. sfx:TerrorZoNE
74. air:Digital Noiz
117. sfx:LupeDeKool
75. air:Scary Noise
118. sfx:CyberSience
76. air:StickyFinger
119. bel:Modular Ring
77. air:LeaveMeAlone
120. bel:Efemm Bellsa
78. air:Breathless
121. bel:Mult-A-Metal
79. air:FluteState
122. bel:Mystery Bell
80. vox:LuciferDom
123. bel:NordicCalm
81. vox:Upper Bottom
124. bel:Rainbellz
82. vox:QVoxDelay
125. bel:Agualla Bell
83. vox:Aah Eeh
126. bel:Capsulate
84. vox:Choirish
127.
85. vox:Ooh,Voices!
:XL-7 default
Appendix
Preset Listing
XL-7 Pattern Layout
The XL-7 factory patterns range from 4-16 bars long using 8 to 16 tracks
each. Use the Track Enable/Mute buttons to bring parts in and out.All
instrument tracks are in the key of C.
Pattern Track List
Kick 1
Snare 1
Hi-Hat 1
Perc 1
or Fill 1
Kick 2
Snare 2
Hi-Hat 2
Perc 2
or Fill 2
Instr or
Perc 1
Instr or
Perc 2
Instr or
Perc 3
Instr or
Perc 4
Instr or
Perc 5
Instr or
Perc 6
Instr or
Perc 7
Instr or
Perc 8
Main
Bass
Main
Lead
Main
Comp
MAIN GROOVE
Track 1 / Channel 1
Kick Pattern 1
Track 2 / Channel 2
Snare Pattern 1
Track 3 / Channel 3
Hat Pattern 1
Track 4 / Channel 4
Percussion 1 or Fill 1
ALTERNATE GROOVE
Track 5 / Channel 5
Kick Pattern 2
Track 6 / Channel 6
Snare Pattern 2
Track 7 / Channel 7
Hat Pattern 2
Track 8 / Channel 8
Percussion 2 or Fill 2
WILD - Instruments or Percussion
Track 9 / Channel 9
Instr or Percussion 1 (Main Bass)
Track 10 / Channel 10
Instr or Percussion 2 (Main Lead)
Track 11 / Channel 11
Instr or Percussion 3 (Main Comp)
Track 12 / Channel 12
Instrument or Percussion 4
Track 13 / Channel 13
Instrument or Percussion 5
Track 14 / Channel 14
Instrument or Percussion 6
Track 15 / Channel 16
Instrument or Percussion 7
Track 16 / Channel 16
Instrument or Percussion 8
XL-7 Operation Manual 299
Appendix
Pattern Listing
Pattern Listing
0.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

The number after the
pattern name is the tempo in
beats per minute.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
29.
30.
31.
32.
33.
34.
35.
36.
37.
38.
39.
40.
41.
42.
43.
300 E-MU Systems
Arctic Drift 140
Beat Pusher 138
Lily's Love 140
Body Groove 134
Cool Down 135
Dream Punk 130
Es Paradis 160
Future Man 137
Hard In Motion 145
K E M 160
Joya 129
Big Brother 138
Ambideep 140
Ibiza's Strobe 140
In The Air 135
Club Luv 139
Millennium 138
Flyer 140
You Want It 140
Over Ground 139
Home Free 145
Metallic 134
Lo Fi 145
Commandment 135
Bee Hive 140
Side By Side 140
Tantra 125
Trance Date 140
Trancer 139
Traveler 138
Two Tales 140
Her Glory 140
Rafters 140
Organ Donor 138
X Mox 132
Four AM 130
Peak 132
Magic Blue 133
My Hero 140
Mood One 125
Perception 135
Pod Racer 140
Smooth 135
Storm Bringer 150
44. The E Room 125
88. Heaven 140
45. Underground 138
89. Humana 135
46. Amsterdam 130
90. Light R 137
47. Basshead 125
91. Lily's Rose 135
48. Beat Freak 125
92. Organic Cube 136
49. Clap and Stop 123
93. Outer Wall 139
50. Diamond Hip 132
94. Rocket 134
51. House Of Tec 135
95. Voice Farm 135
52. Insane One 134
96.
53. Insane Two 134
97. Hurt 125
54. Beautify 134
98. Oh Yea 122
55. Lola 128
99. Deep Sleep 120
56. Phatt Boy E 122
100. Mood Two 117
57. Sunset Flight 134
101. Closer 115
58. Midnight 160
102. Mind Game 115
59. Living Free 156
103. Dark Dream 110
60. Bass Scape 166
104. Floppy 107
61. Outer Body 148
105. Euro One 105
62. Particle Beam 180
106. Lost Joy 105
63. Trip Steppin One 168
107. Mood Three 105
64. Trip Steppin Two 168
108. Slow Trip 94
65. UK Limited 160
109. Decoder 90
66. Zodiac 150
110. Vodo Lounge 133
67. Fire Fly 158
111. Crow Bar 126
68. Soot 158
112. Level Twenty 126
69. Chill Bee 160
113. Luv Parade 126
70. Dark Flower 158
114. Krave 129
71. Seasoning 153
115. Good Life 130
72. Serene 85
116. Opium Gardens 125
73. New World 150
117. PLUR 132
74. Deep Space One 160
118. Garage One 130
75. Deep Space Two 160
119. Garage Two 130
76. Doggy Style 140
120. Tequila Mix 125
77. Electro Dream 160
121. Industry Jump125
78. Hard House One 146
122. Front Line 125
79. Hard House Two 146
123. Red Corner 136
80. Zolo 145
124. Tekno Tribe 135
81. East Tenth 145
125. Unhooked 130
82. Elevate 132
126. Total Chaos 145
83. Big Break 130
127. Stepper 94
84. Break Beat 137
85. Encore 142
86. Exciter 140
87. Germania 140
My Goodness 129
Appendix
Riff Listing
Riff Listing
0. KEY-C3.mid
44. BTS-Dark Hero 1
88. HIT-Enrezzle
1. AIR-Bat Pann
45. BTS-Dist Treo 1
89. HIT-Guit Hits
2. AIR-Breathless
46. BTS-DoFi 1
90. HIT-Orgy Hitts
3. AIR-Futura
47. BTS-Drumatic 1.mid
91. HIT-Tite
4. BAS-1 Shot
48. BTS-Elbowroom 1
92. KEY-C Triad.mid
5. BAS-2600x
49. BTS-Europiavis1
93. KEY-C2 (2 Bars)
6. BAS-3O3x
50. BTS-Frantikk 1.mid
94. KEY-C2 (4 Bars)
7. BAS-Acid Mono
51. BTS-Ginger 1
95. KEY-C3 (2 Bars).mid
8. BAS-BadTubex
52. BTS-Groove II 1
96. KEY-C3 (4 Bars).mid
9. BAS-Bullit
53. BTS-Groove IT 1
97. KEY-C4.mid
10. BAS-Dist TB1
54. BTS-HBtoo 3
98. KEY-Cm7.mid
11. BAS-DistortoTBx
55. BTS-Heaven 3
99. KEY-Cm9.mid
12. BAS-DoFi
56. BTS-HiHo 1
100. KEY-Cmaj7.mid
13. BAS-Filter 1
57. BTS-Indy-T 1
101. KEY-CUp-Down.mid
14. BAS-Filter 2
58. BTS-Jump Hard 1
102. KEY-Cs Up.mid
15. BAS-Filter 3
59. BTS-Kraftwork 1
103. KEY-DxJx
16. BAS-Heavy M
60. BTS-L-101 1
104. KEY-Groove
17. BAS-Interfear
61. BTS-Light-R 1.smf
105. KEY-Organik
18. BAS-Lo-Za
62. BTS-Lo-Z 1
106. KEY-Synhiss
19. BAS-Metal Heartx
63. BTS-LoFi 1
107. KIT-80's 4track
20. BAS-Mini Morex
64. BTS-Logic1
108. KIT-Boom 4track
21. BAS-Pdg
65. BTS-Mind Game 2
109. KIT-Compre 4track
22. BAS-Q Bassx
66. BTS-Mind Game 3
110. KIT-Dirt 5track
23. BAS-SE Microx
67. BTS-Peak777 1
111. KIT-G 4track
24. BAS-Say Whatx
68. BTS-Perception 1
112. KIT-Hide 4track
25. BAS-Shiftx
69. BTS-RollerGirl 1.mid
113. KIT-K'werk 4track
26. BAS-Sub Corex
70. BTS-Rush 1
114. KIT-Mant 4track
27. BEL-Bellsa
71. BTS-Semi-Time 2
115. LED-Boxt mono
28. BEL-Modular
72. BTS-System X 1
116. LED-Krane
29. BEL-Mystery
73. BTS-TeknoTribe 1
117. LED-More S
30. BPM-Boogy
74. BTS-The Beast 1.mid
118. LED-Tunnel
31. BPM-Bounce
75. BTS-Trancer 1
119. LED-Wet
32. BPM-UnderC
76. BTS-TranzAmbient
120. NSE-LucyF
33. BTS-007 1
77. BTS-Unhooked 1
121. PAD-BP Strings
34. BTS-4am flyin 1
78. BTS-X-Mox 1.smf
122. PAD-Danube
35. BTS-808 Street 1
79. BTS-Xie-racy 1
123. PAD-Dark City
36. BTS-Acid 1
80. BTS-HI-NRG
124. PRC-Construct
37. BTS-Big Body 1
81. BTS-Trance Date 1
125. PRC-Crash Head
38. BTS-Big Shaker 1
82. BTS-Club it 1
126. RAW-Drama
39. BTS-BlackHouse1
83. BTS-Lily's Rage
127. SYN- 7064
40. BTS-D&B Smooth 2
84. BTS-Rocket
128. SYN-4 track a
41. BTS-D&B Tight 1
85. EDG-Boxt filter
129. SYN-4 track b
42. BTS-D-House 1
86. EDG-FilterQ
130. SYN-Basic
43. BTS-DJ-A.mid
87. GTR-Chuckinx
131. SYN-Compu X
XL-7 Operation Manual 301
Appendix
Riff Listing
Riff Listing
302 E-MU Systems
132. SYN-Enviroment
149. WAL-Raverot
166. BTS-Peak777 1
133. SYN-Grind Me
150. XTR-Booty Q
167. BTS-Perception 1
134. SYN-Nordica
151. BTS-C-Man
168. BTS-placeholder
135. SYN-Octivate
152. BTS-Humana
169. BTS-Rocket
136. SYN-Orion
153. BTS--Indy-T 1
170. BTS-RollerGirl 1
137. SYN-Quadra
154. BTS-Jump Hard 1
171. BTS-Rush 1
138. SYN-Saint
155. BTS-Kraftwork 1
172. BTS-Semi-Time 2
139. SYN-Sinner
156. BTS-L-101 1
173. BTS-System X 1
140. SYN-South E2
157. BTS-Light-R 2
174. BTS-TeknoTribe 1
141. SYN-Tran 3track
158. BTS-Lily’s Rage
175. BTS-The Beast 1
142. SYN-Tripper
159. BTS-Lo-Z 1
176. BTS-Trance Date
143. VOX-Bliss
160. BTS-LoFi 1
177. BTS-Trancer 1
144. VOX-Zephr
161. BTS-Logic1
178. BTS-TranzAmbient
145. WAL-Abyss
162. BTS-Metallic
179. BTS-Unhooked 1
146. WAL-CRide
163. BTS-Mind Game 2
180. BTS-X-Mox 3
147. WAL-Love 2bee
164. BTS-Mind Game 3
181. BTS-Xie-racy 1
148. WAL-Mammoth
165. BTS-Organic Cube
Appendix
Instrument Listing
Instrument
Listing
This section lists the raw instruments in the XL-7 ROM set.
Instruments consist of either multisamples or single samples.
0. None
40. Audity Synth 1
80. Zodiac Bass 2
1. Sine Wave
41. Audity Synth 2
81. Prodigal Bass
2. Saw Wave
42. Audity Synth 3
82. Zeek Bass
3. Square Wave
43. Audity Synth 4
83. Audity Bell 1
4. Triangle Wave
44. Audity Synth 5
84. Audity Bell 2
5. Audity Saw
45. Audity Synth 6
85. Audity Bell 3
6. Audity Square
46. Audity Synth 7
86. Audity Bell 4
7. Audity Blend
47. Audity Synth 8
87. Audity Bell 5
8. Audity Sync
48. Audity Synth 9
88. Vox Humana
9. Audity Sync
49. Audity Synth 10
89. Vapor Vox
10. Audity Sync 1
50. Audity Synth 11
90. Chronic Vox
11. Audity Sync 2
51. Audity Synth 12
91. Vox Wave 1
12. Audity Sync 3
52. Audity Synth 13
92. Vox Wave 2
13. Audity PWM 1
53. Audity Synth 14
93. Vox Wave 3
14. Audity PWM 2
54. Audity Bass 1
94. Vox Wave 4
15. Audity PWM 3
55. Audity Bass 2
95. Vox Wave 5
16. Ring Mod 1
56. Audity Bass 3
96. Vox Wave 6
17. Ring Mod 2
57. Acid Bass 1
97. White Noise
18. Ring Mod 3
58. Acid Bass 2
98. Pink Noise
19. Metal Wave
59. Acid Bass 3
99. Audity Wall 1
20. Jungle Lead
60. Acid Bass 4
100. Audity Wall 2
21. Metalik
61. Acid Bass 5
101. Audity Wall 3
22. Brass Lead 1
62. Acid Bass 6
102. Audity Wall 4
23. Brass Lead 2
63. Acid Bass 7
103. Audity Wall 5
24. Audity Lead 1
64. Acid Bass 8
25. Audity Lead 2
65. Acid Bass 9
26. Audity Lead 3
66. Acid Bass 10
27. Audity Lead 4
67. Hybrid Bass 1
28. Audity Lead 5
68. Hybrid Bass 2
109. Sonar
29. Audity Lead 6
69. Hybrid Bass 2b
110. Audity Edge 1
30. Audity Lead 7
70. Dance Bass 1
111. Audity Edge 1b
31. Audity Lead 8
71. Dance Bass 2
112. Audity Edge 1c
32. Audity Lead 9
72. Mikro Bass
113. Audity Edge 2
33. Audity Lead 10
73. Shush Bass
114. Audity Edge 3
34. Audity Lead 11
74. Fuzz Bass
115. Future World
35. Classic Lead 1
75. Flange Bass
116. Grinder
36. Classic Lead 2
76. Buzz Bass
117. Growly
37. Classic Lead 3
77. Booty Q Bass 1
38. Classic Lead 4
78. Booty Q Bass 2
39. Digi Lead
79. Zodiac Bass 1
104. Audity Wall 6
105. Audity Wall 7
106. Noise Tunnel
107. Air Pipe
108. Crystal Cavern
118. Cricket
119. Fuzz Ball
120. Droid Scrape
XL-7 Operation Manual 303
Appendix
Instrument Listing
Instrument Listing
304 E-MU Systems
121. Rez Honk
166. Looped Perc 27
211. 1 Shot Perc 20
122. Krunchy Hit
167. Looped Perc 28
212. 1 Shot Perc 21
123. Turbo
168. Looped Perc 29
213. 1 Shot Perc 22
124. Interference
169. Looped Perc 30
214. 1 Shot Perc 23
125. 1 Shot Bass
170. Looped Perc 31
215. 1 Shot Perc 24
126. 1 Shot Dis Bass 1
171. Looped Perc 32
216. 1 Shot Perc 25
127. 1 Shot Dis Bass 2
172. Looped Perc 33
217. 1 Shot Perc 26
128. 1 Shot Dis Bass 3
173. Looped Perc 34
218. 1 Shot Perc 27
129. 1 Shot Perc Bass
174. Looped Perc 35
219. 1 Shot Perc 28
130. 1 Shot Grind
175. Looped Perc 36
220. 1 Shot Perc 29
131. 1 Shot Siren
176. Looped Perc 37
221. 1 Shot Perc 30
132. 1 Shot Turbine
177. Looped Perc 38
222. 1 Shot Perc 31
133. 1 Shot Alien
178. Looped Perc 39
223. 1 Shot Perc 32
134. 1 Shot Laser Rip
179. Looped Perc 40
224. 1 Shot Perc 33
135. 1 Shot Aud Vox
180. Looped Perc 41
225. 1 Shot Perc 34
136. 1 Shot Scratch 1
181. Looped Perc 42
226. 1 Shot Perc 35
137. 1 Shot Scratch 2
182. Looped Perc 43
227. 1 Shot Perc 36
138. 1 Shot Scratch 3
183. Looped Perc 44
228. 1 Shot Perc 37
139. 1 Shot Scratch 4
184. Looped Perc 45
229. 1 Shot Perc 38
140. Looped Perc 1
185. Looped Perc 46
230. 1 Shot Perc 39
141. Looped Perc 2
186. Looped Perc 47
231. 1 Shot Perc 40
142. Looped Perc 3
187. Looped Perc 48
232. 1 Shot Perc 41
143. Looped Perc 4
188. Looped Perc 49
233. 1 Shot Perc 42
144. Looped Perc 5
189. Looped Perc 50
234. 1 Shot Perc 43
145. Looped Perc 6
190. Looped Perc 51
235. 1 Shot Perc 44
146. Looped Perc 7
191. Looped Perc 52
236. 1 Shot Perc 45
147. Looped Perc 8
192. 1 Shot Perc 1
237. 1 Shot Perc 46
148. Looped Perc 9
193. 1 Shot Perc 2
238. 1 Shot Perc 47
149. Looped Perc 10
194. 1 Shot Perc 3
239. 1 Shot Perc 48
150. Looped Perc 11
195. 1 Shot Perc 4
240. 1 Shot Perc 49
151. Looped Perc 12
196. 1 Shot Perc 5
241. 1 Shot Perc 50
152. Looped Perc 13
197. 1 Shot Perc 6
242. 1 Shot Perc 51
153. Looped Perc 14
198. 1 Shot Perc 7
243. 1 Shot Perc 52
154. Looped Perc 15
199. 1 Shot Perc 8
244. 1 Shot Perc 53
155. Looped Perc 16
200. 1 Shot Perc 9
245. 1 Shot Perc 54
156. Looped Perc 17
201. 1 Shot Perc 10
246. 1 Shot Perc 55
157. Looped Perc 18
202. 1 Shot Perc 11
247. 1 Shot Perc 56
158. Looped Perc 19
203. 1 Shot Perc 12
248. 1 Shot Perc 57
159. Looped Perc 20
204. 1 Shot Perc 13
249. 1 Shot Perc 58
160. Looped Perc 21
205. 1 Shot Perc14
250. 1 Shot Perc 59
161. Looped Perc 22
206. 1 Shot Perc 15
251. 1 Shot Perc 60
162. Looped Perc 23
207. 1 Shot Perc 16
252. 1 Shot Perc 61
163. Looped Perc 24
208. 1 Shot Perc 17
253. 1 Shot Perc 62
164. Looped Perc 25
209. 1 Shot Perc 18
254. 1 Shot Perc 63
165. Looped Perc 26
210. 1 Shot Perc 19
255. 1 Shot Perc 64
Appendix
Instrument Listing
Instrument Listing
256. 1 Shot Perc 65
301. Lowness
346. Q Attack Sub
257. 1 Shot Perc 66
302. Ice
347. Sonics
258. 1 Shot Perc 67
303. Analow
348. Perco
259. 1 Shot Perc 68
304. Moog Tri
349. Not So Mini
260. 1 Shot Perc 69
305. Moog Sub
350. Spitt
261. 1 Shot Perc 70
306. Moogy
351. Tap
262. 1 Shot Perc 71
307. Fat Sun
352. Juno Sub
263. 1 Shot Perc 72
308. Analog
353. Complex Sub
264. 1 Shot Perc 73
309. Q 1
354. Full Octave
265. 1 Shot Perc 74
310. Q 2
355. Deep Pocket
266. 1 Shot Perc 75
311. Q 3
356. JP4
267. 1 Shot Perc 76
312. Planet
357. Synth Hits
268. 1 Shot Perc 77
313. 2600
358. DX 1
269. 1 Shot Perc 78
314. Synth 1
359. DX 2
270. 1 Shot Perc 79
315. Synth 2
360. DX 3
271. 1 Shot Perc 80
316. Synth 3
361. EP 1
272. 1 Shot Perc 81
317. Synth 4
362. EP 2
273. Audity Scratches
318. Synth 5
363. EP 3
274. El Perc Kit 1
319. Synth 6
364. Home 1
275. El Kit 1 Looped
320. Synth 7
365. Home 2
276. Kit 1 Env Loops
321. Synth 8
366. Street
277. El Perc Kit 2
322. Synth 9
367. Pure
278. El Kit 2 Looped
323. Synth 10
368. Fing&Harms 1
279. Kit 2 Env Loops
324. TB 1
369. Fing&Harms 2
280. Hybrid Perc
325. TB 2
370. All Purpose
281. Warehouse Perc
326. TB 3
371. Standard
282. Acoustic Perc A
327. TB 4
372. Fretless 1
283. Ac Kick+Snare B
328. CZ101
373. Fretless 2
284. Acoustic Kit A+B
329. PPG
374. Fretless 3
285. Hardcore Kit 1
330. Mini 1
375. Fretless 4
286. Hardcore Kit 2
331. Mini 2
376. Upright 1
287. Hardcore Kit 3
332. Mini 3
377. Upright 2
288. Hum
333. Mini 4
378. Slap 1
289. Below Sub
334. Saw
379. Slap 2
290. Super Sub
335. Ultimate 1
380. Gruzzy Pop
291. SE Sub 1
336. Ultimate 2
381. Pop Slide 1
292. SE Sub 2
337. Micro Moog
382. Pop Slide 2
293. SE Sub 3
338. DB9 1
383. Pop Slide 3
294. SE Sub 4
339. DB9 2
384. Pop Slide 4
295. SE Sub 5
340. Phlappy
385. Funk Hits
296. SE Sub 6
341. Power Q
386. Organ 1
297. SE Sub 7
342. Big Sync
387. Organ 2
298. Hit
343. Buzzer
388. Mutes
299. Subtle
344. Saw Sync
389. Power 1
300. Mem Moog
345. Pocket
390. Power 2
XL-7 Operation Manual 305
Appendix
Instrument Listing
Instrument Listing
306 E-MU Systems
391. Power Hit
435. Wild Synth
479. CZ Synstring
392. Synth Axe
436. Spacey Keys
480. Ensemble
393. Hits
437. Digi Buzz
481. Rezzy Wave
394. Pipe Organ
438. Rast Keys
482. Heavy
395. DrawbarOrgan
439. ARP Sync
483. Rezzy
396. Perc Organ
440. Narrow Synth
484. Hi Octaves
397. Org Day
441. Fat Attack
485. Dreemy
398. Disco Organ
442. ARP Lead
486. Phat
399. DX Organ
443. Synthetic
487. Tekno
400. JX Organ
444. Overtone
488. Life
401. Tone Organ
445. Buzz Saw
489. Classic
402. Simple Organ
446. Blipper
490. Dreamer
403. Org Lite
447. Full Synth
491. Paddy
404. Org Nod
448. Bass Synth
492. Dance Chord
405. Full Organ
449. Mini Lead
493. Zoom
406. Synth Organ
450. Sawtooth
494. Keyngdom
407. BreathyOrgan
451. M12 Lead
495. Oddd Organ
408. Dance Organ
452. Sync Wave 1
496. Mood Strings
409. Farfisa 1
453. Sync Wave 2
497. Brazz
410. Farfisa 2
454. Sync Wave 3
498. Synthy
411. Vox Organ
455. Sync Wave 4
499. P5
412. Synth Cheeze
456. Sync Wave 5
500. Bari Wave
413. Organ Hits 1
457. Sync Wave 6
501. Sax Wave
414. Organ Hits 2
458. Pop Square
502. Mute Trumpet
415. Tine EP
459. Juno Square
503. Trumpet FX 1
416. Pretty EP
460. SquareAttack
504. Trumpet FX 2
417. Classic EP
461. Square Lead
505. Cool Loops
418. FM EP 1
462. SquareChorus
506. Sax Riff
419. FM EP 2
463. Sinusoid
507. Boink
420. EP Hits
464. Worm Lead 1
508. Classic Hit
421. Clavinet
465. Worm Lead 2
509. Hits 1
422. Piano Wave
466. Worm Lead 3
510. Hits 2
423. Xylo Pad
467. Worm Lead 4
511. Jax Breath
424. Pure H20
468. Worm Lead 5
512. Synth
425. Log Hit
469. Worm Lead 6
513. Orch
426. Pluck Tone
470. Harmonica
514. Soul Oohs
427. Hollow Deep
471. Synth Flute
515. CMI Breath
428. Bell Synth
472. Soft Synth
516. Breathy
429. Syn Tone
473. Hi String
517. Tarzana
430. Perc Axe
474. OBX Saws
518. Gothic
431. Whine
475. Big Planet
519. Oow
432. CZ101 Digi
476. JP6 Pad
520. Vox 1
433. CZ Lead
477. Saw Sweep
521. Vox 2
434. CZ Echo Lead
478. Juno Pulse
522. Strings
Appendix
Instrument Listing
Instrument Listing
526. Music Crowd
570. Vibraslap
614. Dance 22
527. Lawn Mower
571. Guiro
615. Dance 23
528. Riff Trip
572. Cowbell
616. Dance 24
529. Cyber Pan
573. Agogos
617. Dance 25
530. Groove Thing
574. Misc 1
618. Dance 26
531. Science
575. Misc 2
619. Dance 27
532. Under Pad FM
576. kit:1
620. Organ 1
533. Sci Fi
577. kit:2
621. Organ 2
534. Synth Siren
578. kit:3
622. Organ 3
535. Metal
579. kit:4
623. Organ 4
536. Vinyl 1
580. kit:5
624. Organ 5
537. Vinyl 2
581. kit:6
625. Organ 6
538. Vinyl 3
582. kit:7
626. UnisonString
539. Vinyl 4
583. kit:8
627. Unison Brass
540. Pink
584. kit:9
628. Brass 1
541. White
585. kit:10
629. Brass 2
542. Scratches 1
586. kit:11
630. Brass 3
543. Scratches 2
587. kit:12
631. Brass 4
544. Kicks 1
588. kit:13
632. Brass 5
545. Kicks 2
589. kit:14
633. Brass 6
546. Snares 1
590. kit:15
634. Brass 7
547. Snares 2
591. kit:16
635. Brass 8
548. Toms 1
592. GM Dance
636. Brass 9
549. Toms 2
593. Dance 1
637. Brass 10
550. Timbales 1
594. Dance 2
638. Brass 11
551. Timbales 2
595. Dance 3
639. Brass 12
552. Congas etc 1
596. Dance 4
640. Brass 13
553. Congas etc 2
597. Dance 5
641. Brass 14
554. Hats 1
598. Dance 6
642. Brass 15
555. Hats 2
599. Dance 7
643. Brass 16
556. Cymbals 1
600. Dance 8
644. Brass 17
557. Cymbals 2
601. Dance 9
645. Brass 18
558. Shakers
602. Dance 10
646. Brass 19
559. Maracas
603. Dance 11
647. Brass 20
560. Bells 1
604. Dance 12
648. Trumpet FX 1
561. Bells 2
605. Dance 13
649. Trumpet FX 2
562. Blocks 1
606. Dance 14
650. Trumpet FX 3
563. Blocks 2
607. Dance 15
651. Trumpet FX 4
564. Tams 1
608. Dance 16
652. Trumpet FX 5
565. Tams 2
609. Dance 17
653. Sax FX 1
566. Claps 1
610. Dance 18
654. Sax FX 2
567. Claps 2
611. Dance 19
655. Sax FX 3
568. Snaps
612. Dance 20
656. Blipp
569. Clave
613. Dance 21
657. Buzz Blip
XL-7 Operation Manual 307
Appendix
Instrument Listing
Instrument Listing
308 E-MU Systems
658. Game
703. Gtr Wawa 1
748. Snare
659. Disssss
704. Gtr Wawa 2
749. Tite
660. Siren Loop
705. Gtr Wawa 3
750. Wazzup?
661. Bell
706. Gtr Wawa 4
751. Barker
662. Klank
707. Gtr Wawa 5
752. Plunger
663. Metal
708. Gtr Wawa 6
753. Skipper
664. Slinky Q
709. Heavy Guitar
754. Fast
665. Space Whip
710. HeavyGtrDive
755. Kick 1
666. Short Quack
711. Drum Stab
756. Kick 2
667. Quack Ahhh
712. Guit On It
757. Kick 3
668. Bowser Bark
713. Jazz Short
758. Kick 4
669. Chiffin
714. Blamp
759. Kick 5
670. CMI Hot Air
715. Bass Slide
760. Kick 6
671. L9000 Noise
716. Hip Hop
761. Kick 7
672. Comon Vox
717. Drum Stall
762. Kick 8
673. Odd Vox
718. Stalled
763. Kick 9
674. Mmm Hmm
719. Wind Down 1
764. Kick 10
675. Ah Hah
720. Wind Down 2
765. Kick 11
676. EP Roll 1
721. Ripped
766. Kick 12
677. EP Roll 2
722. Space Wiggle
767. Kick 13
678. EP Roll 3
723. Sqweal Rev
768. Kick 14
679. EP Fog
724. Draggit
769. Kick 15
680. Fat Low Syn
725. MC
770. Kick 16
681. Bass Stab 1
726. Fun
771. Kick 17
682. Bass Stab 2
727. SSSSystem 1
772. Kick 18
683. Gtr Hi Chuck
728. SSSSystem 2
773. Kick 19
684. Gtr UpStroke
729. Here
774. Kick 20
685. Gtr Scratch1
730. On It
775. Kick 21
686. Gtr Scratch2
731. Diss
776. Kick 22
687. KleanGtrChuk
732. Bow Wow
777. Kick 23
688. Gtr Jangle
733. Diva Scratch
778. Kick 24
689. Gtr Riff 1
734. Organ Blip
779. Kick 25
690. Gtr Riff 2
735. Classic Tape
780. Kick 26
691. Gtr Riff 3
736. Out!
781. Kick 27
692. Gtr FunkyHit
737. Punch It
782. Kick 28
693. Another Gtr
738. Ork
783. Kick 29
694. Jazz Riff 1
739. Tape Stop
784. Kick 30
695. Jazz Riff 2
740. Zip
785. Kick 31
696. Jazz Riff 3
741. Tape Pull
786. Kick 32
697. GtrSlideRiff
742. Wild
787. Kick 33
698. Gtr PopSlide
743. Up
788. Kick 34
699. Guitar Pop
744. Away
789. Kick 35
700. Chord Chuck
745. Frenzy
790. Kick 36
701. Guitar Slide
746. Kick 1
791. Kick 37
702. Sad Guitar
747. Kick 2
792. Kick 38
Appendix
Instrument Listing
Instrument Listing
793. Kick 39
837. Snare 26
881. Snare 70
794. Kick 40
838. Snare 27
882. Snare 71
795. Kick 41
839. Snare 28
883. Snare 72
796. Kick 42
840. Snare 29
884. Snare 73
797. Kick 43
841. Snare 30
885. Snare 74
798. Kick 44
842. Snare 31
886. Snare 75
799. Kick 45
843. Snare 32
887. Snare 76
800. Kick 46
844. Snare 33
888. Snare 77
801. Kick 47
845. Snare 34
889. Snare 78
802. Kick 48
846. Snare 35
890. Snare 79
803. Kick 49
847. Snare 36
891. Snare 80
804. Kick 50
848. Snare 37
892. Snare 81
805. Kick 51
849. Snare 38
893. Snare 82
806. Kick 52
850. Snare 39
894. Snare 83
807. Kick 53
851. Snare 40
895. Snare 84
808. Kick 54
852. Snare 41
896. Snare 85
809. Kick 55
853. Snare 42
897. Snare 86
810. Kick 56
854. Snare 43
898. Snare 87
811. Kick 57
855. Snare 44
899. Snare 88
812. Snare 1
856. Snare 45
900. Snare 89
813. Snare 2
857. Snare 46
901. Snare 90
814. Snare 3
858. Snare 47
902. Snare 91
815. Snare 4
859. Snare 48
903. Snare 92
816. Snare 5
860. Snare 49
904. Snare 93
817. Snare 6
861. Snare 50
905. Snare 94
818. Snare 7
862. Snare 51
906. Snare 95
819. Snare 8
863. Snare 52
907. Snare 96
820. Snare 9
864. Snare 53
908. Snare 97
821. Snare 10
865. Snare 54
909. Snare 98
822. Snare 11
866. Snare 55
910. Snare 99
823. Snare 12
867. Snare 56
911. Snare 100
824. Snare 13
868. Snare 57
912. Snare 101
825. Snare 14
869. Snare 58
913. Snare 102
826. Snare 15
870. Snare 59
914. Snare 103
827. Snare 16
871. Snare 60
915. Snare 104
828. Snare 17
872. Snare 61
916. Snare 105
829. Snare 18
873. Snare 62
917. Snare 106
830. Snare 19
874. Snare 63
918. Tom 1
831. Snare 20
875. Snare 64
919. Tom 2
832. Snare 21
876. Snare 65
920. Tom 3
833. Snare 22
877. Snare 66
921. Tom 4
834. Snare 23
878. Snare 67
922. Tom 5
835. Snare 24
879. Snare 68
923. Tom 6
836. Snare 25
880. Snare 69
924. Tom 7
XL-7 Operation Manual 309
Appendix
Instrument Listing
Instrument Listing
310 E-MU Systems
925. Tom 8
969. Hat 3
1013. Hat 47
926. Tom 9
970. Hat 4
1014. Hat 48
927. Tom 10
971. Hat 5
1015. Hat 49
928. Tom 11
972. Hat 6
1016. Hat 50
929. Tom 12
973. Hat 7
1017. Hat 51
930. Tom 13
974. Hat 8
1018. Hat 52
931. Tom 14
975. Hat 9
1019. Hat 53
932. Tom 15
976. Hat 10
1020. Hat 54
933. Tom 16
977. Hat 11
1021. Hat 55
934. Tom 17
978. Hat 12
1022. Hat 56
935. Tom 18
979. Hat 13
1023. Hat 57
936. Tom 19
980. Hat 14
1024. Hat 58
937. Tom 20
981. Hat 15
1025. Hat 59
938. Tom 21
982. Hat 16
1026. Hat 60
939. Tom 22
983. Hat 17
1027. Hat 61
940. Tom 23
984. Hat 18
1028. Hat 62
941. Tom 24
985. Hat 19
1029. Hat 63
942. Tom 25
986. Hat 20
1030. Hat 64
943. Tom 26
987. Hat 21
1031. Hat 65
944. Timbale 1
988. Hat 22
1032. Hat 66
945. Timbale 2
989. Hat 23
1033. Hat 67
946. Timbale 3
990. Hat 24
1034. Hat 68
947. Timbale 4
991. Hat 25
1035. Hat 69
948. Timbale 5
992. Hat 26
1036. Hat 70
949. Timbale 6
993. Hat 27
1037. Hat 71
950. Conga 1
994. Hat 28
1038. Hat 72
951. Conga 2
995. Hat 29
1039. Hat 73
952. Conga 3
996. Hat 30
1040. Hat 74
953. Conga 4
997. Hat 31
1041. Hat 75
954. Conga 5
998. Hat 32
1042. Hat 76
955. Conga 6
999. Hat 33
1043. Hat 77
956. Conga 7
1000. Hat 34
1044. Hat 78
957. Conga 8
1001. Hat 35
1045. Cymbal 1
958. Conga 9
1002. Hat 36
1046. Cymbal 2
959. Conga 10
1003. Hat 37
1047. Cymbal 3
960. Bongo 1
1004. Hat 38
1048. Cymbal 4
961. Bongo 2
1005. Hat 39
1049. Cymbal 5
962. Bongo 3
1006. Hat 40
1050. Cymbal 6
963. Bongo 4
1007. Hat 41
1051. Cymbal 7
964. Bongo 5
1008. Hat 42
1052. Cymbal 8
965. Bongo 6
1009. Hat 43
1053. Cymbal 9
966. Bongo 7
1010. Hat 44
1054. Cymbal 10
967. Hat 1
1011. Hat 45
1055. Cymbal 11
968. Hat 2
1012. Hat 46
1056. Cymbal 12
Appendix
Instrument Listing
Instrument Listing
1057. Cymbal 13
1102. Bell 9
1147. Clap 3
1058. Cymbal 14
1103. Bell 10
1148. Clap 4
1059. Cymbal 15
1104. Bell 11
1149. Clap 5
1060. Cymbal 16
1105. Bell 12
1150. Clap 6
1061. Cymbal 17
1106. Bell 13
1151. Clap 7
1062. Cymbal 18
1107. Bell 14
1152. Clap 8
1063. Shaker 1
1108. Bell 15
1153. Clap 9
1064. Shaker 2
1109. Bell 16
1154. Clap 10
1065. Shaker 3
1110. Bell 17
1155. Clap 11
1066. Shaker 4
1111. Bell 18
1156. Clap 12
1067. Shaker 5
1112. Bell 19
1157. Clap 13
1068. Shaker 6
1113. Bell 20
1158. Clap 14
1069. Shaker 7
1114. Bell 21
1159. Clap 15
1070. Shaker 8
1115. Bell 22
1160. Clap 16
1071. Shaker 9
1116. Bell 23
1161. Clap 17
1072. Shaker 10
1117. Bell 24
1162. Snap 1
1073. Shaker 11
1118. Bell 25
1163. Snap 2
1074. Shaker 12
1119. Bell 26
1164. Snap 3
1075. Shaker 13
1120. Bell 27
1165. Snap 4
1076. Shaker 14
1121. Bell 28
1166. Snap 5
1077. Shaker 15
1122. Bell 29
1167. Snap 6
1078. Shaker 16
1123. Bell 30
1168. Misc 1
1079. Shaker 17
1124. Bell 31
1169. Misc 2
1080. Shaker 18
1125. Block 1
1170. Misc 3
1081. Shaker 19
1126. Block 2
1171. Misc 4
1082. Shaker 20
1127. Block 3
1172. Misc 5
1083. Shaker 21
1128. Block 4
1173. Misc 6
1084. Shaker 22
1129. Block 5
1174. Misc 7
1085. Shaker 23
1130. Block 6
1175. Misc 8
1086. Shaker 24
1131. Block 7
1176. Misc 9
1087. Shaker 25
1132. Block 8
1177. Misc 10
1088. Shaker 26
1133. Block 9
1178. Misc 11
1089. Shaker 27
1134. Block 10
1179. Misc 12
1090. Vibraslap
1135. Block 11
1180. Misc 13
1091. Flexitone
1136. Block 12
1181. Misc 14
1092. Bell Tree
1137. Tam 1
1182. Misc 15
1093. Slay Bells
1138. Tam 2
1183. Misc 16
1094. Bell 1
1139. Tam 3
1184. Misc 17
1095. Bell 2
1140. Tam 4
1185. Misc 18
1096. Bell 3
1141. Tam 5
1186. Misc 19
1097. Bell 4
1142. Tam 6
1187. Misc 20
1098. Bell 5
1143. Tam 7
1188. Misc 21
1099. Bell 6
1144. Tam 8
1189. Misc 22
1100. Bell 7
1145. Clap 1
1190. Misc 23
1101. Bell 8
1146. Clap 2
1191. Misc 24
XL-7 Operation Manual 311
Appendix
Instrument Listing
Instrument Listing
312 E-MU Systems
1192. Misc 25
1199. Misc 32
1206. Misc 39
1193. Misc 26
1200. Misc 33
1207. Misc 40
1194. Misc 27
1201. Misc 34
1208. Misc 41
1195. Misc 28
1202. Misc 35
1209. Misc 42
1196. Misc 29
1203. Misc 36
1210. Misc 43
1197. Misc 30
1204. Misc 37
1198. Misc 31
1205. Misc 38
Appendix
Velocity Curves
This section provides diagrams and descriptions of the XL-7 velocity curves.
120
Result Velocity
Result Velocity
120
100
Linear
80
60
40
20
0
100
Curve 1
80
60
40
20
0
0
20
40
60
80 100 120
0
Played Velocity
40
60
80 100 120
Compresses velocity range.
120
120
Result Velocity
Result Velocity
20
Played Velocity
Linear, no change to velocity.
100
Curve 2
80
60
40
20
0
100
80
60
Curve 3
40
20
0
0
20
40
60
80 100 120
0
Played Velocity
20
40
60
80 100 120
Played Velocity
Expands velocity range.
Soft -> Loud
Expands dynamics in low range,
emphasizing medium velocity values
and compressing high velocity values.
120
100
80
60
Curve 4
40
20
Result Velocity
120
Result Velocity
Velocity
Curves
100
Curve 5
80
60
40
20
0
0
0
20
40
60
80 100 120
Played Velocity
Expands velocity range.
Outputs high values.
0
20
40
60
80 100 120
Played Velocity
Shifts velocity values upward.
Good dynamic range.
XL-7 Operation Manual 313
Appendix
Velocity Curves
Velocity Curves
120
Result Velocity
120
100
Curve 6
80
60
40
20
100
60
40
20
0
0
0
20
40
60
80 100 120
0
20
40
60
80 100 120
Played Velocity
Played Velocity
Shifts velocity values up while
compressing the midde range.
Similar to Curve 6.
120
Result Velocity
y
120
100
Curve 8
80
60
40
20
0
100
Curve 9
80
60
40
20
0
0
20
40
60
80 100 120
0
20
40
60
80 100 120
Played Velocity
Played Velocity
Similar to Curve 6 with more
emphasis on the middle range.
Extreme dynamic range
compression.
120
y
Result Velocity
120
100
Curve 10
80
60
40
20
100
Curve 11
80
60
40
20
0
0
0
20
40
60
80 100 120
Played Velocity
Extreme dynamic range
compression. Outputs low values.
314 E-MU Systems
Curve 7
80
0
20
40
60
80 100 120
Played Velocity
Extreme dynamic range compress
but doesn't output low values
Appendix
PatchCord Amount Chart
120
Result Velocity
Result Velocity
120
100
Curve 12
80
60
40
20
0
80
60
Curve 13
40
20
0
0
PatchCord
Amount Chart
100
20
40
60
80 100 120
0
20
40
60
80 100 120
Played Velocity
Played Velocity
Less severe version of Curve 11.
Extreme expansion of
velocity range.
The following chart shows the PatchCord “Amount” settings in order to get
semitone intervals when modulation sources are connected to pitch.
Semitone
PatchCord
Amount
Semitone
PatchCord
Amount
1
3
21
66
2
6
22
69
3
approx. 9
23
approx. 72.5
4
approx. 12
24
approx. 76
5
16
25
79
6
19
26
82
7
22
27
88
8
25
28
91
9
28
29
approx. 95
10
approx. 31
30
98
11
35
31
12
38
32
13
41
33
14
44
34
15
47
35
16
50
36
17
approx. 53
37
18
57
38
19
60
39
20
63
40
XL-7 Operation Manual 315
Appendix
Rhythmic Notation
Rhythmic
Notation
This extremely brief overview is intended solely as a refresher and memory
jogger; for a detailed description of rhythmic notation, see any good book
on music theory.
Measures
A piece of music is divided into measures, and each measure is divided into
notes. The number of notes, and rhythmic value of the notes, depends both
on the composition and the time signature (see Appendix C).
Note values
With a measure written in 4/4, there are four beats per measure, with each
beat representing a quarter note. Thus, there are four quarter notes per
measure of 4/4 music.
There are two eighth notes per quarter note. Thus, there are eight eighth
notes per measure of 4/4 music.
There are four sixteenth notes per quarter note. Thus, there are sixteen
sixteenth notes per measure of 4/4 music.
There are eight thirty-second notes per quarter note. Thus, there are thirtytwo thirty second notes per measure of 4/4 music.
There are also notes which span a greater number of beats than quarter
notes. A half-note equals two quarter notes. Therefore, there are two halfnotes per measure of 4/4 music. A whole note equals four quarter notes.
Therefore, there is one whole note per measure of 4/4 music.
Triplets
The above notes divide measures by factors of 2. However, there are some
cases where you want to divide a beat into thirds, giving three notes per
beat. Dividing a quarter note by three results in eighth note triplets. The
reason why we use the term “eighth note triplets” is because the eighth
note is closest to the rhythmic value which we want. Dividing an eighth
note by three results in sixteenth note triplets. Dividing a sixteenth note by
three results in thirty-second note triplets.
Time
Signatures
A time signature (also called metric signature) describes the meter of a piece
of music. It consists of two numbers arranged like a fraction, such as 3/4, 4/
4, etc. The top number (numerator) indicates the number of beats in each
measure, while the bottom number (denominator) indicates the rhythmic
value of each beat. For example, with a 3/4 time signature the numerator
indicates that there are three notes per measure, while the denominator
indicates that each of these notes is a quarter note. 4/4 indicates that each
measure includes 4 quarter notes. Usually the downbeat (1st beat) of each
measure is emphasized by a metronome to help you get a feel for the meter.
3/4 and 4/4 are the most common time signatures, but they are by no
means the only ones. In jazz, both 5/4 (where each measure has five 1/4
notes) and 7/4 (where each measure has seven 1/4 notes) are often used. In
practice, complex time signatures are played like a combination of simpler
time signatures; for example, some 7/4 compositions would have you count
each measure not as “1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7” but as “1, 2, 3, 4, 1, 2, 3”. It’s often
easier for musicians to think of 7/4 as one bar of 4/4 and one bar of 3/4,
since as we mentioned, 4/4 and 3/4 are extremely common time signatures.
316 E-MU Systems
Appendix
Block Diagrams
Block
Diagrams
These block diagrams show the internal signal routings and the functions
of the various screens. They should prove highly useful when programming
complex setups or for troubleshooting.
Synth
Engine
Sequencer
Recording
Input
B - LOCAL CONTROL (Controllers menu)
A - KNOBS OUTPUT MIDI (MIDI menu)
Off
Local
Control
On
Vol/Pan
B
Off
A
Knobs
Transmit
MIDI
On
Out A
Out B
MIDI Out
(0-31)
Volume & Pan
XL-7 Operation Manual 317
318 E-MU Systems
Off
Off
E - CHANNEL ASSIGN (Pattern/Song Edit menu)
D - RECHANNELIZE INPUT (MIDI menu)
C - LOCAL CONTROL (Controllers menu)
B - KEYBOARD OUTPUTS MIDl (MIDI menu)
On
Local
Control
C
Kybd
Transmit
MIDI
B
On
Off
Rechan
On/Off
D
On
Sequencer
Track
Routing
E
Sequencer
Recording
Input
Synth
Engine
Out A
Out B
MIDI Out
(0-31)
Pads Routing
A - KEYBOARD CHANNEL (Controllers menu)
Pads
Channel
A
Appendix
Block Diagrams
Block Diagrams
Off
D - CHANNEL ASSIGN (Pattern/Song Edit menu)
C - MIDI IN CHANNELS (MIDI menu)
B - MERGE MIDl IN TO OUT (MIDI menu)
A - RECHANNELIZE INPUT (MIDI menu)
MIDI In
Rechan
On/Off
On
C
B
MIDI In
A or B
On
A
D
On
Channel +16
Sequencer
Track
Routing
Soft
Thru B
Off
B
Sequencer
Recording
Input
Synth
Engine
MIDI Out
(0-31)
Out A
Out B
MIDI In
A
Soft
Thru A
Off
B
Appendix
Block Diagrams
Block Diagrams
XL-7 Operation Manual 319
320 E-MU Systems
Per
Knob
Channel
A
B
Int
Int/Ext
Both/Seq
Seq
E - CHANNEL ASSIGN (Pattern/Song Edit menu)
D - RECHANNELIZE INPUT (MIDI menu)
C - LOCAL CONTROL (Controllers menu)
Local
Control
Off
C
Local
Control
Ext
Off
Both
B - PROG. KNOBS/TRIGGERS (Controllers menu)
A - KEYBOARD CHANNEL (Controllers menu)
Programmable
Knobs
Triggers
Per
Trigger
C
On
On
Rechan
On/Off
Off
D
On
E
Sequencer
Track
Routing
Triggers &
Programmable
Knobs
Synth
Engine
Out A
Out B
MIDI Out
(0-31)
Sequencer
Recording
Input
Appendix
Block Diagrams
Block Diagrams
Basic
Channel
Local
Control
Off
B
On
Rechan
On/Off
E - KNOBS PRESET QUICK EDIT (Controllers menu)
Off
C
D - CHANNEL ASSIGN (Pattern/Song Edit menu)
C - RECHANNELIZE INPUT (MIDI menu)
B - LOCAL CONTROL (Controllers menu)
A - KNOBS OUTPUT MIDI (MIDI menu)
Quick Edit
On
On
Sequencer
Track
Routing
D
E
Knobs
Quick
Edit
Off
On
Sequencer
Recording
Input
Preset
Edit
Synth
Engine
Out A
Out B
MIDI Out
(0-31)
Quick Edit
Off
Knobs
Transmit
MIDI
A
Appendix
Block Diagrams
Block Diagrams
XL-7 Operation Manual 321
Appendix
E-MU Expansion Sound Sets
E-MU
Expansion
Sound Sets
Eleven different ROM expansions are currently available, with more being
developed every day. ROM expansions typically add 32MB of sound data
and 512 additional presets. Adding new sounds is like getting a new
instrument and a sure way to spark your creativity. ROM Expansions are
available from your E-MU dealer. Also check out the official E-MU website:
www.emu.com for the latest sounds.
Orchestral Sessions VOLUME 1
The Orchestral Sessions Vol. 1 expansion 32 MB ROM offers you the most
realistic and comprehensive collection of section strings available,
complete with legato, spiccato, pizzicato and tremolande samples, and
includes special presets for 4 speaker applications.
Orchestral Sessions VOLUME 2
The Orchestral Sessions Vol. 2 expansion 32 MB ROM offers you the most
realistic and comprehensive collection of woodwinds, brass, percussion,
and solo strings available, complete with velocity switching between p/mf/
ff samples, special presets for 4 speaker applications and a percussion
battery with over 20 instruments.
Siedlaczek Orchestra Special Edition
The Peter Siedlaczek Advanced Orchestra Special Edition puts 32 MB of his
finest ensembles onto a single expansion ROM. String, brass, woodwind
and percussion ensembles are included in a variety of styles (i.e. vibrato,
tremolo, pizzicato, sordino, etc.), to give you a diverse collection of
samples.
Protozoa
E-MU presents the 16 MB Protozoa expansion ROM—the ultimate sound
compilation containing presets from the ground breaking Proteus sound
modules, all optimized for your ’s advanced synthesis and filter architecture.
Sounds of the ZR
The Sounds of the ZR Expansion ROM faithfully reproduces the diverse
sounds of ENSONIQ’s popular ZR-76 keyboard, including William Coakley’s
Perfect Piano. You’ll find everything from synths and orchestral instruments to one of the finest pianos ever sampled in one soundset.
Definitive B-3
John Novello and E-MU present the 32 MB Definitive B-3 expansion ROM,
a diverse collection of tone wheel organ drawbar settings sampled direct
and with rotary speakers (chorale and tremolo) to give you the most
versatile and playable B-3 available!
322 E-MU Systems
Appendix
X-Lead
The X-Lead soundset consists primarily of analog, noise and modern
synthesizer waveforms. These sounds are rich in harmonic texture and are a
perfect match with the Z-plane filters in your Proteus® family sound
module. With the included software upgrade, you now have access to
dynamic and rhythmic features not found on any other instrument. (Note:
This sound set is installed in the XL-7.)
PURE PHATT
The 32 MB Pure Phatt is E-MU’s latest Hip-Hop soundset that produces the
freshest and newest sounds and grooves from top notch producers from the
East, Southeast and West coasts. Pumping leads and basses, silky pads and
those unique hits, scratches and drones that your mix needs to bring it to
the next level are ready to provide the love. (Note: This sound set is installed
in the MP-7.)
World Expedition
An amazing collection of traditional instruments from the four corners of
the globe including exotic stringed instruments, winds, percussion, and
chromatic percussion. World Expedition provides you with the most
realistic ethnic soundset in the world. Discover a world of sounds to bring
to your music.
Techno Synth
Rob Papen and E-MU introduce the 32 MB Techno Synth Construction Yard
Expansion ROM, a compilation of synth, techno, and ambient sounds from
one of Europe’s finest programmers. From atmospheric pads to punchy subbasses and crunch drum loops, these sounds will help you tear up the dance
floor!
Beat Garden
Dutch sound designer Rob Papen and E-MU introduce the 32 MB Beat
Garden expansion ROM, a diverse palette of all-new Electronica/Dance
beats, synths, basses, drumkits, acoustic and electronic percussion.
Experience the Beat Garden for yourself and add a unique dimension to
your tracks.
XL-7 Operation Manual 323
Appendix
Installing Sound SIMMs
Installing
Sound SIMMs
XL-7 can be easily expanded to contain up to 128 MB of sound data
(4 SIMMs). The sound SIMM sockets are located inside the unit.
1.
Open the Unit
IMPORTANT: Unplug power from the unit before opening!
2. Carefully turn the unit keypad-side down on a soft, padded surface.
3. The bottom panel is secured by eight phillips head screws — four along the rear
edge and four along the front edge. Remove the eight screws and place them
where they won’t roll away or get lost.
4. Holding the bottom panel and the top piece together, carefully turn the entire
unit right-side up again.
5. Carefully lift the rear of the top panel, tilting it upward. Do this slowly so as not
to stress the ribbon cables.
6. Continue to open the unit as if you were opening a book, so that the top piece
is resting on the buttons and knobs as shown below. Take care not to stress or
damage the fragile ribbon cables.
The service position for XL-7. The Sound ROM sockets can be seen at lower left.
1.
To Remove ROM SIMMs (if necessary):
Orient the unit so that the rear panel is facing you. Ground yourself by
touching a grounded object. (Such as the chassis of another piece of
equipment connected to the wall socket with a three-prong power plug.)
2. On each end of the SIMM socket there is a silver or plastic tab. Use a screwdriver
or a ball point pen to squeeze the tabs toward the outside of the socket while
gently nudging the SIMM toward the right side of the unit. The old SIMM
should “hinge” to the right and can now be removed.
324 E-MU Systems
Appendix
Installing Sound SIMMs

ROMs can be installed in
any available SIMM location.
The physical position of the
sound set does not affect the
order that they appear in the
LCD.
1.
2.
Install a New ROM SIMM
Ground yourself by touching a grounded object, then remove the
memory SIMM modules from the static protected packaging.
Notice that one end of the SIMM connector is notched. This notch should be
oriented towards the rear panel of the unit. When installing multiple
SIMMS, install the SIMM into the lowest numbered socket first (i.e. first CN-5,
then CN-6, then CN-7, then CN-8).
Notch
u
r
8
CN
of
7
CN
r
ea
t
ni
1. Set SIMM into
socket with the
notch toward rear
of unit.
6
CN
5
CN
2. Tilt the SIMM up
so that both tabs
click and lock the
SIMM into place.
it
f
to
un
n
fro
3. Gently set the SIMM deep into the SIMM socket at a 45º angle with the notch
toward the rear of the unit. Without forcing the insertion, let the board rest in
the socket as deep as it will go. It should rest naturally in place at this 45° angle.
Refer to the diagram on the previous page.
4. While applying a slight downward pressure on the top of the SIMM to keep it
from popping out of the socket, tilt the SIMM board into a vertical position.
You should hear an audible click. Make sure both sides of the silver tabs have
latched.
1.
Reassemble the Unit
Lift the top panel into a vertical position so you have some slack on the
ribbon cables.
2. Press on the ribbon cable connectors to ensure they are properly seated before
closing the unit.
3. Replace the top panel and all eight screws. The screws are all identical. Make
sure to replace all eight screws or grounding problems could result.
XL-7 Operation Manual 325
Appendix
Installing Sound SIMMs
Test It
The installation is almost finished.
1.
Turn the unit right-side up and plug in the power cord.
2. Turn on power.
3. Press the Preset View button.
4. Move the cursor under the ROM field and turn the data entry control to verify
that your new sound ROM has been recognized.
5. Play the presets on the new ROM banks and verify that they sound OK.
Problems?
1.
Disconnect power immediately.
2. Open the unit, and try re-seating the ROM SIMMs. If you’re still having
problems, return the unit to its original configuration and call EMU / ENSONIQ
Customer Service at (831) 438-1921. Telephone support hours are 8:00-5:00
PST, Monday through Friday.
326 E-MU Systems
Appendix
MIDI
MIDI
MIDI Implementation Chart (part 1)
MIDI Information
Transmitted
Recognized
Remarks
MIDI Channels
1-16A, 1-16B
1-16
32 MIDI Chan.
Note Numbers
0-127
0-127
Program Change
0-127
0-127
Bank Select Response?
No
Yes
Modes: Omni (Mode 1)
Mono (Mode 2)
Poly (Mode 3)
Mode 4 (Y/N)
Multi (Mode 5)
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Note On Velocity
Yes
Yes
Note Off Velocity
No
Yes
Channel Aftertouch
Yes
Yes
Poly (Key) Aftertouch
Yes
No
Pitch Bend
Yes
Yes
Active Sensing
No
No
System Reset
No
No
Tune Request
No
No
System Exclusive
Sample Dump Standard
File Dump
MIDI Tuning
Master Volume
Master Balance
Notation Information
Turn GM1 System On
Turn GM2 System On
Turn GM1 System Off
Other (See Remarks)
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
No
NRPNs
No
No
RPN 00 (Pitch Bend Sensi.)
RPN 01 (Chan. Fine Tune)
RPN 02 (Chan Coar. Tune)
RPN 03 (Tuning Prog Sel.)
RPN 04 (Tuning Bank Sel.)
RPN 05 (Mod Depth Rang)
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
MIDI Clock
Yes
Yes
Song Position Pointer
Yes
Yes
Song Select
No
No
MSB + LSB
MIDI Timing & Sync
Received only
when synced to
MIDI clock
XL-7 Operation Manual 327
Appendix
MIDI
MIDI Information
Transmitted
Recognized
Remarks
Start
Continue
Stop
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Start/Continue
response only
from the stopped
transport state.
MIDI Time Code
No
No
MIDI Machine Control
No
No
MIDI Show Control
No
No
General MIDI Compat?
Is GM default mode?
No
No
No
No
DLS compatible?
Import DLS Files?
Export DLS Files?
No
No
No
No
No
No
Import Std MIDI files
Export Std MIDI files
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Extension Capability
328 E-MU Systems
Appendix
MIDI
MIDI Implementation Chart (part 2 - Controllers)
Control #
Function
Transmitted
Recognized
0
Bank Select MSB
Yes
Yes
1
Mod Wheel MSB
Yes
Yes
2
Breath Cntrl MSB
No
No
3
Yes
Remarks
* see note
*
4
Foot Cntrl MSB
Yes
No
*
5
Portamento MSB
No
No
*
6
Data Entry MSB
No
No
*
7
Chan Volume MSB
Yes
Yes
*
8
Balance MSB
No
No
*
9
*
10
Pan MSB
Yes
Yes
*
11
Expression MSB
No
Yes
*
12
Effect Cntrl 1 MSB
No
No
*
13
Effect Cntrl 2 MSB
No
No
*
14
*
15
*
16
GenPur Ctrl 1 MSB
*
17
GenPur Ctrl 2 MSB
*
18
GenPur Ctrl 3 MSB
*
19
GenPur Ctrl 4 MSB
*
20
*
21
*
22
*
23
* see note
24
*
25
™
Yes
Yes
* Filt Attck
26
™
Yes
Yes
* Filt Decy
27
*
28
*
29
*
30
*
31
*
32
Bank Select LSB
*
33
Mod Wheel LSB
*
34
Breath Cntrl LSB
*
35
36
*
Foot Cntrlr LSB
*
XL-7 Operation Manual 329
Appendix
MIDI
Control #
Function
Transmitted
Recognized
37
Portamento LSB
*
38
Data Entry LSB
*
39
Chan Volume LSB
*
40
Balance LSB
*
41
330 E-MU Systems
Remarks
*
42
Pan LSB
*
43
Expression LSB
*
44
Effect Cntrl 1 LSB
*
45
Effect Cntrl 2 LSB
*
46
*
47
*
48
Gen Pur Ctrl 1 LSB
*
49
Gen Pur Ctrl 2 LSB
*
50
Gen Pur Ctrl 3 LSB
*
51
Gen Pur Ctrl 4 LSB
*
52
*
53
*
54
*
55
*
56
*
57
*
58
*
59
*
60
*
61
* see note
62
*
63
*
64
Sustain Pedal
Yes
Yes
*
65
Portamento on/off
No
No
*
66
Sostenuto
No
No
*
67
Soft Pedal
*
68
Legato Footswitch
*
69
Hold 2
*
70
Variation
71
Timbre/Har Inten
Yes
72
Release Time
Yes
*
73
Attack Time
Yes
*
74
Brightness
Yes
*
*
Yes
*
Appendix
MIDI
Control #
Function
Transmitted
Recognized
Remarks
75
Sound Cntrlr 6 ™
Yes
Yes
* Decay
76
Sound Cntrlr 7
77
Sound Cntrlr 8 ™
Yes
Yes
* Vel->Filt
78
Sound Cntrlr 9 ™
Yes
Yes
* Vel->amp
79
Sound Cntrlr 10
Yes
Yes
See note
Yes
Yes
*
See note
80
Gen Purp Cntrlr 5
81
Gen Purp Cntrlr 6
82
Gen Pur Ctrlr 7 ™
Yes
Yes
* Arp Vel
83
Gen Pur Ctrlr 8 ™
Yes
Yes
* Arp Gate
84
Portamento Cntrl
Yes
Yes
85
™
*
*
* Sustain
86
*
87
*
88
*
89
*
90
*
91
Effects 1 Depth
*
92
Effects 2 Depth
*
93
Effects 3 Depth
*
94
Effects 4 Depth
*
95
Effects 5 Depth
*
96
Data Increment
97
Data Decrement
98
NRPN (LSB)
99
NRPN (MSB)
100
RPN (LSB)
101
RPN (MSB)
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
XL-7 Operation Manual 331
Appendix
MIDI
Control #
Function
Transmitted
Recognized
Remarks
120
All Sound Off
No
Yes
See note
121
Reset All Contlrs
No
Yes
122
Local Cntrl on/off
No
No
123
All Notes Off
No
Yes
124
Omni Mode Off
No
Yes if enabled
125
Omni Mode On
No
Yes if enabled
126
Poly Mode Off
No
Yes if enabled
127
Poly Mode On
No
Yes if enabled
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
NOTES:
* XL-7 can transmit and receive ANY continuous controller number
from 1 to 95. Because of XL-7’s powerful synth engine, many of the
standard MIDI controllers can be user programmed to provide the
desired function. A “Yes” response in this chart means that a
controller is programmed by default in XL-7.
Controller 79 is hard-coded to the Mix Output parameter.
0=Use Preset, 1=Send 1, 2=Send 2, 3=Send 3, 4=Send 4
Controller 80 is hard-coded to the Arp Status parameter.
0=Off, 1=On, 2=P (preset), 3=M (master)
Value of 0 = reset all except vol & pan; value of 127 = reset all.
Other: Pan: -64 = hard left, +63 = hard right
332 E-MU Systems
Appendix
MIDI
Product ID for XL-7 = 0F (15)
MIDI Device Inquiry Responses
Family
MSB 0x04 (Musical Instruments)
LSB
0x04 (ROM Players)
Members
MSB 0x00 (Proteus 2000 series)
LSB
0x02 Audity 2000
0x03 Proteus 2000
0x04 B-3
0x05 XL-1
0x06 Virtuoso 2000
0x07 Mo’Phatt
0x08 B-3 Turbo
0x09 XL-1 Turbo
0x0A Mo’Phatt Turbo
0x0B Planet Earth
0x0C Planet Earth Turbo
0x0D XL-7
0x0E MP-7
0x0F Proteus 2500
0x10 Orbit 3
There is only one edit buffer which is used by the current preset (the preset
shown in the display). You can edit only one preset at a time via SysEx
commands, although these presets can be edited independently of the
current preset edited using the Front Panel. Remote Preset selection is
independent of the edit buffer. Changing the current preset erases the edit
buffer.
XL-7 Operation Manual 333
Appendix
MIDI
Received Channel
Commands
Channels number (n) = 0-15. Message bytes are represented in hex. All
other numbers are decimal. Running Status is supported.
Command
Message
Comments
Note Off
8n kk vv
Note On
9n kk vv
velocity 0 = note off
Key Aftertouch
An kk vv
kk = 0-127 vv = 0-127
Program Change
Cn vv
0-127
Channel Aftertouch
Dn vv
0-127
Pitch Bend
En ll mm
l = lsb, m = msb
Real-time Controller
Bn cc vv
cc = 00-31, 64-95
Footswitch
Bn cc vv
cc = 64-79, vv ≥ 64 = on
Volume
Bn 07 vv
0-127
Pan
Bn 0A vv
0=left, 127=right, 64=center
All Sound Off
Bn 78 00
turns all sound off
Reset All Controllers
Bn 79 00
ignored in omni mode
All Notes Off
Bn 7B 00
ignored in omni mode
Omni Mode Off*
Bn 7C 00
forces all notes & controls off
Omni Mode On*
Bn 7D 00
forces all notes & controls off
Mono Mode On (Poly Off)*
Bn 7E 00
forces all notes & controls off
Poly Mode On (Mono Off)*
Bn 7F 00
forces all notes & controls off
Bank Select MSB
Bn 00 bb
bb = bank MSB (see page 180)
Bank Select LSB
Bn 20 bb
bb = bank LSB (see page 180)
Special Notes:
• From Omni Mode .......... Omni Off turns Poly On.
• From Poly Mode............. Omni On turns Omni On; Mono On turns
Mono On.
• From Mono Mode .......... Mono Off turns Poly On; Omni On turns
Omni On.
• From Multi Mode........... Omni On turns Omni On; Omni Off or Mono
Off turns Poly On; Mono On turns Mono On.
• All other changes have no effect.
SysEx Specification
334 E-MU Systems
XL-7 contains an extensive set of MIDI SysEx commands. (Virtually every
parameter is controllable via SysEx.) Because of the size and technical nature
of the System Exclusive specification, it is beyond the scope of this manual.
The complete SysEx specification for XL-7 is available on the official E-mu
Systems, Inc. web site: www.emu.com
Appendix
Technical Specifications
Technical
Specifications
Audio Channels:
128
MIDI:
MIDI In, (2) MIDI Out
MIDI Channels:
32
Presets:
512 user presets. (The number of ROM
presets is determined by the sound SIMMs
installed.)
Sequencer
Timing Resolution:
1/384 quarter note
Tracks:
16 tracks +1 song track (16 channels/track)
Patterns:
1024 pattern locations
Songs:
512 song locations
Filters:
2nd order to 12th order filters
(50 different types)
Audio Outputs:
6 polyphonic analog outputs
Submix Inputs:
4 analog inputs (sum to main outs)
Digital Output:
S/PDIF stereo (AES-pro compatible)
Max. Output Level:
+4 dB
Output Impedance:
1000 Ohms
Sound Memory:
64 MB (expandable to 128 MB)
Data Encoding:
16-bit linear data
Effects Engine:
24-bit internal processing
Sample Playback Rate:
44.1 kHz
Signal to Noise:
>92 dB
Dynamic Range:
>90 dB
Frequency Response:
20 Hz - 20 kHz (+2/-1 dB)
THD + Noise:
< 0.02% (1kHz sine wave, A-weighting)
IMD
< 0.05%
Stereo Phase
Phase Coherent +/- 1º at 1 kHz
Power Consumption:
20 Watts
Voltage Input:
90VAC-260VAC at 50Hz-60Hz
XL-7 Operation Manual 335
Appendix
Warranty
Warranty
Please read this warranty, as it gives
you specific legal rights.
Limited Warranty
This product is warranted, to the original consumer purchaser, to be free of
all defects in workmanship and materials for a period of one (1) year
(warranty period is two (2) years in the European Union, effective Jan-12002), from the date of such purchase from an authorized E-MU/ ENSONIQ
dealer, provided that: (a) the Warranty Registration Card is filled out and
returned to E-MU / ENSONIQ within 14 days of the purchase date; (b) the
E-MU / ENSONIQ service center is provided a copy of the consumer
purchaser’s sales receipt; and (c) E-MU / ENSONIQ has confirmed the
validity of the subject unit's serial number.
Warranty
Restrictions
Specifically, but without limitation, E-MU / ENSONIQ does not provide
warranty service for:
• Damages due to improper or inadequate maintenance, accident, abuse,
misuse, alteration, unauthorized repairs, tampering, or failure to follow
normal operating procedures as outlined in the owner’s manual;
• Deterioration or damage of the cabinet;
• Damages occurring during any shipment of the unit;
• Any unit which has been modified by anyone other than
E-MU / ENSONIQ.
• Any unit with an invalid or wholly or partially obliterated serial number.
NO OTHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTY IS MADE, AND E-MU /
ENSONIQ SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY OF
MERCHANTABILITY, SATISFACTORY QUALITY, AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE. E-MU / ENSONIQ’S LIABILITY UNDER
WARRANTY IS LIMITED TO REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT OF THE UNIT, OR
REFUND, AT EMU’S OPTION. IN NO EVENT WILL E-MU / ENSONIQ BE
LIABLE FOR LOSS OF REVENUE OR SAVINGS, LOSS OF TIME, INTERRUPTION OF USE, OR ANY OTHER CONSEQUENTIAL, INDIRECT,
INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL OR EXEMPLARY DAMAGES.
The foregoing will apply notwithstanding the failure of essential purpose of
any remedy provided herein. Some jurisdictions do not allow the exclusion
of implied warranties or conditions, or limitations on how long an implied
warranty or condition may last, so the above limitations may not apply.
This warranty gives you specific legal rights. You may have other rights
which vary from jurisdiction to jurisdiction.
336 E-MU Systems
Appendix
Warranty
How To Obtain
Warranty Service
All E-MU / ENSONIQ products are manufactured with the highest standards
of quality. If you find that your unit does require service, it may be done by
any authorized E-MU / ENSONIQ service center. If you are unable to locate
a service center in your area, please contact EMU’s Service Department at
(831) 438-1921. They will either refer you to an authorized service center in
your area or ask that you return your unit to the E-MU / ENSONIQ factory.
When returning your unit to the E-MU / ENSONIQ factory, you will be
issued a Return Merchandise Authorization (RMA) number. Please label all
cartons, shipping documents and correspondence with this number.
E-MU / ENSONIQ suggests you carefully and securely pack your unit for
return to the factory. (Do not send the power cord or operation manual.)
Send the unit to E-MU Systems, Inc., 1600 Green Hills Road, Scotts Valley,
CA 95066. You must pre-pay shipping charges to E-MU / ENSONIQ.
E-MU / ENSONIQ will pay return shipping charges. You will be responsible
for any damage or loss sustained during shipment in any direction.
3/9
XL-7 Operation Manual 337
Appendix
Warranty
338 E-MU Systems
Index
Symbols
Index
Symbols
“+” modulation polarity 212
“±” modulation polarity 212
Numerics
12VDC Lamp 15, 31
19-tone tuning 222
1-bar trigger 249
1st Pattern Only 99
2-pole filters 174
4-pole filters 174
6-pole filters 174
A
A effect types 257, 258
Absolute Value Processor 163
AC Power Switch 31
AC Receptacle 16
ADSR Envelopes 285
AES Pro Output Format 140
Aftertouch
mono 155
Algorithm
FXA 259, 260
FXB 259, 261
master FXA 137
master FXB 138
All Layers 183, 185
All Notes Off, MIDI 36
All Patterns 99
All Sound Off, MIDI command 36
Alternate Tunings 140, 222
Amount
patchcord 178, 211
quantization 73
Amplifier 195
Amplitude 202, 284
envelope 196
modulation 154
Arpeggiator 46
button 36
channel 46
controllers 229
copy pattern 274
copy settings 273
copying settings 274
delay 234, 235
duration 240
enabling in song mode 99
extension 229
extension count 233
extension interval 233
factory patterns 231
gate 229
gate time 232
guided tour 27
interval 229
key offset 239
key range 237
keyboard thru 236
latch mode 236
master parameters 229
MIDI song start 237
mode 230
modes 228
note value 231, 235
patchcord connections 220
pattern 228, 231
pattern naming 241
pattern speed 231
resolution 229
status 230
user patterns 238
velocity 229, 232
Assign
group 200
tracks to MIDI channels 86, 87, 110
Asterisk
in pattern name 51, 269, 275
in preset name 44, 270
in song name 275
removing from pattern 93
removing from song 114
Attack
envelope 197, 206, 213, 288
Audition
beats 244
button 36
patterns in song step record 95
patterns while recording songs 95
preset 24
riff 225
Auto Mode
pattern step mode 68
Auto-correct
description 55
pattern 73
song 101
XL-7 Operation Manual 339
Index
B
Automated Mixing
in pattern mode 61
in song mode 97
Automated Pan
in a pattern 61
in song mode 98
Automatic Channel Assignment,
sequencer 62
Automating Volume Changes 61
Aux Channel Assign 88
Auxiliary Envelope 157, 206
B
B Effect Types 257, 258
Balance 177
Band-Pass Filter 173, 202
Bandwidth 175
Bank Number 26, 44
Bank Select Display 37
Banks 26
selecting 44
selecting via MIDI 45
Bar, song 95
Bar/Beat display 33
Base Tempo 144
Basic Channel 44, 244
Basic Setup 16
Basics, programming 153
Beat Markers 54
Beats 227, 244
busy 247
channel 244
initial setup 245
keys layout 249
keys offset 250
part group 252
part transpose 251
part velocity 250
patchcord connections 220
played using trigger buttons 242
riffs 242
variation 248
example 246
velocity group 1-4 247
xpose group 1-4 247
Bend Range 132
Bi-directional Controller 42
BNC Connector 31
Bounce Tracks
pattern 85
Breath Controller 127
Bts Busy 247
340 E-MU Systems
Button
arpeggiator 36
audition 36
compare 36
controllers 35
cursor 33
glide 42
global 35
home/enter 36, 119, 129, 143, 227
MIDI 36
pattern edit 35
preset edit 35
repeat 43, 62
save/copy 36, 269
song edit 35
touchstrip hold 42
transpose 42
trigger 41
C
Category
instrument 47
preset 47
Center Frequency 175
Change
filter type 289
MIDI preset 148
preset 26, 44
Channel
arpeggiator 46
assign 86
MIDI enable 147
pan 46
selection, MIDI 44
volume 45
Channel Aftertouch
erasing events from a song 104
erasing from a pattern 77
thinning events in a song 103
thinning from a pattern 76
Chorus 257, 267
width 283
Chorus, effect 267
Chorusing 198, 283
Clear Beats Part 242, 243
Clipboard
copy track to 83, 108
cut track to 82, 107
paste to track 84, 109
Clock
divisor 155
MIDI output enable 146
modulation 161
using external MIDI 144
Clogging the Sequencer 97
Index
D
Coarse Tuning 195, 282
Comb Filter 203
Comb Filter, effect 258, 267
Compare Button 36
Conductor Track 92
Connection Examples 115
Connection Instructions 16
Continuous Controller 178
editing
pattern 90
song 112
erasing events from a song 104
erasing from a pattern 77
thinning events in a song 103
thinning from a pattern 76
Contour, envelope 155, 197
Control
data entry 33
effects multi mode 136
keys 243
volume 31
Controller
assigning real-time 147
bi-directional 42
footswitch 16, 17, 127
keypad 42
knobs 37, 38, 39, 40, 126, 179
modes 37
programming 125
menu 119
MIDI 126, 178
MIDI #10 46
MIDI #7 45, 178
MIDI real-time 178
pan knobs 40
programmable knobs 39, 125
quick edit 38
realtime assignment 126
realtime knobs 37
standardized MIDI numbers 126
tempo 127
touchstrip 42
trigger buttons 41, 120
Controllers Button 35
Copy
bar of a pattern 80
layers 271
patchcord 272
preset 271
preset banks 274
preset patchcords 273
track to clipboard 83, 108
Count-in 57
Crossfade
random 156
ranges 191
Current Tempo 144
Cursor
buttons 33
definition 33
Curve
glide 201
velocity 133
volume 283
Cut, track to clipboard 82
Cutoff Frequency 173, 286
D
Damping, high frequency 258, 266
Data Entry Control 33
DC Offset, example 170
DCA 177, 291
Decay
effect A 138, 258
effects 258
envelope 283
Default Assignment, beats 243
Delay
arpeggiator 234, 235
effect B 139
effects 257, 258, 268
layer 198
LFO 210
master FXB 139
preset link 224
Delete
notes from a pattern
grid mode 67
realtime record mode 59
notes from a song
realtime record mode 97
pattern, from a song 95
Demo Sequences 24
Descending Arpeggiator 228
Destinations, modulation 162, 213
Device ID 149
Digital Output Format 140
Diode Processor 164
Disable Tracks 86, 110
Display Edit Button 33
Display, viewing angle 141
Distortion Effect 257, 268
Double & Detune 198, 283
Double Time, grid record 66
Doubling, effect 267
Dual Channel Beats 244
Dual Tap, delay effect 268
XL-7 Operation Manual 341
Index
E
Duration
arp pattern 240
pattern step mode, note-on 68
Dynamic Filter 171
Dynamic Range 335
E
Echo Thru, Local Control on/off 121
Edit All Layers Enable 140
Edit Controls 35
Edit Display Button 33
Edit MIDI notes
in a pattern 89
Editing
arp user patterns 238
MIDI notes
song 111
presets 281
Effect
decay 258
FXA decay 138
FXA HF Damping 138
FXB->FXA 138
type B 139
Effect Diagram 215, 216, 218
Effects
A type 257
B into effect A 264
B submix routing 139
B type 257
busses 255
by channel number 264
chorus 267
decay 258
delay 258, 268
description 266
distortion 268
doubling 267
dual tap delay 268
enabling in song mode 99
feedback 258, 268
flanger 267
FXB feedback 139
FxB->FxA 259
global 263
HF damping 258
LFO rate 139, 258
master 255, 260, 263
A algorithm 137
B algorithm 138
FxB->FxA 260
LFO rate 139
mode, bypass 262
multi mode control 136
panning delay 268
342 E-MU Systems
patchcords 219
preset 215, 259
processor 255
programming in the preset 259
returns 19
reverb 266
routing diagram 135
saved with a pattern 50, 60
saved with a song 52
send amounts 255
sends 134
patchcord connections 220
slapback 267
stereo delay 268
submix routing, A 138, 218, 219
type A 137, 217, 257, 258
type B 139, 218, 258
vibrato 268
Enable
controllers menu 119
MIDI channels 147
quick-edit mode 125
Enter Button 36
Envelope
ADSR, programming 285
attack 197, 206, 213
auxiliary 206
decay 283
filter 205, 287, 290
generator 155, 157
example 174
mode, factory 284
mode, filter 287
release 283
repeat 289
repeating 158
reverberation 266
volume 196, 197, 283, 284
Equal Temperment Tuning 222
Erase
button 43
deleting patterns with 43, 95
in grid record mode 43, 67
controller data 62
in song mode 98
controller data in a pattern 62
entire pattern 59
events 77
from a pattern 59, 67, 77
from a song 97
in a song 98, 104
notes
from a pattern 59, 67
from a song 97
pattern event 90
pattern note 89
song event 112
Index
F
song note 111
tempo changes 93
track 59
Errors, data transmission 150
Event List Editor
pattern 90
song 112
Event Scroll Field 89, 90, 111, 112
Event Source 52, 96, 99
Event Timing 53
Events
thinning in a pattern 76
thinning in a song 103
Extend Sequence Data To 80
Extension
count, arpeggiator 233
interval, arpeggiator 233
External Clock, MIDI 144
External MIDI Keyboard, connection
example 115
External Sequencer, connection
example 117
External Song Start/Stop 146
F
Factory
envelope mode 284
patterns, arpeggiator 231
Fail-Safe Power Off 31
Fc 204, 286
Feedback 258, 268
FXB 139
Feel, adding using swing 73
Fills, beats 242
Filter
2-pole 174
4-pole 174
6-pole 174
bandpass 173, 202
changing type 289
comb 203, 258
definition 172
dynamic 171
envelope 157, 205, 287
attack 288
envelope generator 205, 290
envelope mode 287
frequency 204, 205, 213, 286
highpass 172, 285
lowpass 172
mode 287
morph 176
notch 173
parametric 175
pole 174
programming 285
Q 204, 286
swept EQ 175
troubleshooting 291
tutorial 171
type 285, 289
changing 289
Z-plane 176, 177, 202
Fine Tuning 195, 282
Fingered Glide. solo mode 200
First Key, modulation 166
Flanger Effect 257, 267
Flashing LEDs 54
Flip-Flop Processor 164
Footswitch 127, 155
connecting 16, 17
programming 122
Format, output 140
Free Running LFO 208
Frequency
filter 205, 213
center 175
cutoff 173
instrument 194, 195
Frequency Modulation 154
Front Panel Knobs 37, 125, 293
FX Cords 219
FXA Algorithm 259, 260
FXA Parameters 218
FXB -> FXA 259, 260, 264
FXB Algorithm 218, 259, 261
master 138
FXB Parameters 219
FXB Submix Routing 139
G
Gain Processor 164
Gamelan Tuning 222
Gate 155
pattern step mode 68
time 232
Generator
envelope 155
filter envelope 205, 290
noise & random 155
volume envelope 196
Gig Bag 15
Glide 201
curve 201
key 155
rate 155, 201
XL-7 Operation Manual 343
Index
H
Global
button 35
controller assignments 126
effects 260, 263
menu 129
Grid
editing 51
mode
double time 66
jumping into from play mode 34
velocity change 66
recording, description 63
Grooves, beat 242
Group
beats 242
Group, assigning channels to a 200
H
High Frequency Damping 138, 258, 266
Highpass Filter 172, 285
Home Position 26
Home/Enter Button 36, 119, 129, 143,
227
I
Implementation Chart, MIDI 327, 329
Initial
pan position 195
setup
reloading pattern & song 34, 54, 94
volume 195
Input Quantize 55
Input, rechannelize MIDI 144
Insert
meter changes 93
pattern 95
pattern event 90
track mutes into a song 95
Installing in a Rack 19
Instrument 177, 281
category 47
listing 303
selecting 186
Inverting LFO Waves 160
K
Key
glide 155
layout, beats 249
offset, arpeggiator 239
range
arpeggiator 237
keyboard 188
preset link 224
sync, arpeggiator 234
transpose 194
trigger 249
tuning 140
velocity 155
Keyboard
beats trigger layouts 242
key 155
layering & splitting 292
pressure 155
range 187, 188
semitone transpose 120
splitting 292
thru, arpeggiator 236
transpose 194
on/off 199
tuning 222
19-tone 222
equal temperment 222
gamelan 222
just C 222
Kirnberger 222
repeating octave 222
Scarlatti 222
Vallotti 222
Werkmeister III 222
Keyboard/Knob Channel 120
Keypads 42
Kirnberger Tuning 222
Knob
controller 37, 179
keyboard/knob channel 120
programmable controller 125
typical functions 293
Knob Preset Quick-Edit 125
Knobs Output MIDI 146
L
J
Jump Buttons
preset edit menu 41
using 281
Just C Tuning 222
description 223
Just Intonation 222
344 E-MU Systems
Lag Amount, preset lag 165
Lag Processor 163
Lamp Power Connection 31
Latch
beats part 249
keys in beats 242
mode, arpeggiator 236
triggers 41
Index
M
Layer
copy 271
definition 184
instrument 153
presets 292
selecting 185
LED Display 33
LED View 33
Left/Right Cursor Buttons 33
Legato 199
LFO 207
effect B 139
flanger 268
key sync 208
master FXB rate 139
rate 258
rate, effect 139
tricks & tips 208
trigger 160
variation 210
waveforms 159
waveshape 207
Linking Presets 224, 292
Load, pattern/song setups 34, 54
Local Control On/Off 121, 122
Loop, pattern in song mode 23
Looping Envelopes 158
Low Frequency Oscillator 155, 159, 207
delay 210
free running 208
sync 207, 208
variation 210
Lowpass Filter 172
example 174
M
Master
arpeggiator 27
parameters 229
bend range 132
clock
current tempo 144
modulation 160
effects 136, 255, 260, 263
FXA algorithm 137
FXB algorithm 138
riff 244, 252
tempo, offset 225
Measure, definition 316
Melody Solo Mode
high 199
last 199
low 199
Memory Size, reducing
in pattern 76
in song 103
Meter
definition 316
erasing events from a song 104
erasing from a pattern 77
inserting or editing changes 93
setting in a pattern 71
Metronome 58, 72, 101
MIDI
A-P assignments 126
bank select display 24, 37
channel
routing outputs by 134
tempo controller 127
channel inc/dec
using a footswitch 123
channel selection 44
channel shift 144
channels A or B select 147
clock
output enable 146
continuous controller
assignment 126
continuous controller knobs 125
continuous controllers 155, 178
controller #7 45
device ID 149
enable 147
event step editing
in a song 113
pattern 91
external clock 144
footswitch assign 122, 127
implementation chart 327, 329
inputs A & B 17
knob transmit 146
menu button 36
mode 147, 255
multi mode 152
multichannel data 87
note edit
in a pattern 89
in a song 111
note triggers 41, 123, 124
omni mode 152
out
knob enable 146
pan control #10 46
panic button 36
poly mode 152
port A & B assignments
pattern 86
song 110
real-time controllers 178
receive program change 148
XL-7 Operation Manual 345
Index
N
received channel commands 334
recording sysex data 151
send sysex data 151
sequencer, recording into an
external 121
song start 237
received/ignored 146
standardized controller numbers 126
SysEx data, sending 150
sysex packet delay 150
sysex, send/receive 151
touchstrip transmit 146
MIDI In Channels 147
Minimoog, solo mode 200
Mix
button 32
display 39
enabling in song mode 99
view screen 32
using 61
Mix Output 214
description 134
function 256
programmed in the preset 214
Mod Wheel 155
Mode
arpeggiator 230
latch 236
controller 37
effects 262
factory envelope 284
filter envelope 287
MIDI 147, 255
mono 334
multi 152, 255, 334
non-transpose 199
omni 152, 262, 334
poly 152, 262, 334
solo 199
time-based envelope 287
Mode/View Buttons 32
Modulation 212
amplitude 154
clock 161
definition 154
destinations 162
note-on 162
polarity 212
processors 163, 167
random 156
routing 211
sources 155
sources & destinations 213
wheel 127
Momentary Footswitch 16
Mono Aftertouch 155
346 E-MU Systems
Mono A-I, assign group 200
Mono Mode 334
Morph Filter 176
Multi A/B Channels 86
Multi Channel
arpeggiators 28
MIDI data 87
pan knobs 40
track recording 87
volume knobs 39
Multi Mode 152, 255, 334
effects control 136
Multimode Map
send/receive 150
Multiple Trigger, solo mode 199
Multisetup
definition 130
name 131
restoring 130
saving 131
send/receive 150
Mute Beats 242, 243
N
Name
multisetup 131
pattern 70
preset 184
song 99
user arp pattern 241
Noise & Random Generators 155
Non-Transpose Mode 199
Notch Filter 173
Note & Event order 53
Note Duration
scaling in a pattern 102
shifting in a pattern 102
Note List Editor
pattern 89
song 111
Note Value
arpeggiator 231, 235
definition 316
Note-On Modulation 162
Notes
erasing from a pattern 59, 67, 77
erasing from a song 97, 104
O
Octave Transpose Buttons 42
Offset, arpeggiator key 239
Omni Mode 152, 262, 334
On Record, rechannelize 144
Index
P
Output
format 140
jack 16, 17, 18
jacks 19
mix 134, 214, 256
mono 16
routing 214
Overall Tuning, adjusting 132
Overdub, realtime controller data 97
P
Packet Delay, MIDI sysex 150
Pan 177
automation in a pattern 61
automation in song mode 98
channel 46
enabling in song mode 99
initial 195
knob control of 40
preset link 224
Panic Button, MIDI 36
Panning Delay, effect 268
Parametric Filters 175
Part, beat 242
Paste, clipboard to track 84, 109
Patchcord 156, 211
amount 178, 211
copy 272
example 167
routing 162
Pattern
arpeggiator 228, 231
duration 240
naming 241
repeat 240
speed 231
user 238
velocity 240
audition in song step record 95
edit button 35
edit menu 70
inc/dec
using a footswitch 123
length 70
listing 300
loop in song mode 23
sequencer
information saved with a 60
length 58
changing in a song 95
in main pattern screen 71
mode display 32
number display 33
record modes 34, 51
setup information 50, 60
Pause Mode 34
Pedal 155
Performance Controllers 37, 41, 42, 155
Pink Noise, example 169
Pitch Wheel 155
erasing events from a song 104
erasing from a pattern 77
master bend range 132
range 214
thinning events in a song 103
thinning from a pattern 76
Pitch, shifting 282
Pitchbend Range 214
Play
button 34
pattern 21, 54
patterns & songs 21
solo layers 225
song 23, 94
trigger buttons 124
Play/Stop
using a footswitch 122
Polarity
modulation & LFO 212
ramp rate 166
Pole, filter 174
Poly Aftertouch
erasing events from a song 104
erasing from a pattern 77
thinning events in a song 103
thinning from a pattern 76
Poly All, assign group 200
Poly Mode 152, 262, 334
Poly Pressure Editing
pattern 91
song 113
Poly, assign group 200
Portamento 201
Power Consumption 335
Power Down Sequence 19
Power Switch 16
Pre-sequence Setup 53
Preset
architecture 184
audition 24
category 26, 47
change enable 148
changes, enabling in song mode 99
changing 26
copy 271
edit button 35
editing 281
effects 215, 259
links 224, 225, 292
listing 303
XL-7 Operation Manual 347
Index
Q
menu jump buttons 41
MIDI changes 148
naming 184
random 280
select screen 32
selecting 25, 44
selection 44
tempo offset 225
user 151
view button 32
view screen 44
Preset Lag Processor 165
patchcord connections 220
Preset Ramp Processor 165
patchcord connections 220
Pressure Curves (aftertouch) 120
Processor
4x gain 164
absolute value 163
diode 164
effect 255
flip-flop 164
modulation 167
preset lag 165
preset ramp 165
quantizer 164
Product Description 1
Program Change
editing
pattern 91
song 113
enabling in song mode 99
erasing events from a song 104
erasing from a pattern 77
receive enable 148
Program->Preset Map 148
send/receive 150
Programmable Knobs 125
enabling 39
Programming Basics 153
Punch In & Out 59
using a footswitch 123
Q
Q 173, 203, 204, 286, 289
Quantization, explained 55
Quantize
pattern 73
song 101
Quantized, arp sync 234
Quantizer 164, 170
example 169
Quarter Note Marker 54
348 E-MU Systems
Quick Edit
enabling 125
mode 38
recording in a pattern 60
recording in song mode 98
R
Rack Mounting 19
ears 15
Ramp Rate 166
Random
creating presets 280
crossfade 156
crosswitch 192
generator, noise and 155
modulation sources 156
Range
arp extension count 233
key 187, 188
keyboard 187
pitchbend 214
velocity 189
Rate
effect, LFO 139, 258
glide 201
LFO 208
master FXB LFO 139
Rate/Level Envelopes 157
Realtime Control of Arps 229
Realtime Controller 120
assignment 126, 147
crossfading 191
data
recording in a pattern 60
tutorial 178
Realtime Crossfade 191
Realtime Pattern Record 51, 55
Realtime Song Record 52, 96
Receive Program Change 148
Receiving MIDI SysEx Data 151
Rechannelize Data 86
Rechannelize Input 144
Record
button 34
MIDI sysex data 151
new pattern 58
pattern in step time 68
pattern using grid record 65
quick edits 60
realtime controller data
in a pattern 60
song in realtime mode 96
Record-Pause Mode 34, 97
Rectifier 163
Index
S
Reducing Pattern Size 76
Release Velocity 155
Release, envelope 283
Reload, pattern/song setups 34, 54
Rename, arpeggiator pattern 241
Repeat
arpeggiator pattern 240
button 43
inserting patterns with 95
recording with 62
song event 112
song note 111
Repeat Button
inserting events 90, 112
inserting pattern notes 89
inserting song notes 111
inserting tempo changes 93
Resolution, quantize 73
Resonance, filter 173, 203, 204, 289
Restoring Multisetups 130
via MIDI command 130
Return Signal 18
Return To Zero 34, 54
Reverb 257, 266
envelope 266
Revert to Saved Pattern 93, 114
Riff
assignment 225
controllers 253
listing 301
playing 24, 36
tempo 253
ROM Card Identifier 26
ROM Installation 324
Routing
FXA submix 138, 218, 219
FXB submix 139
modulation 211
output 134, 214, 255
RTZ 54, 94
Rubber Keypads 42
S
S/PDIF
output 17
output format 140
Save
arp menu parameters 130
arp parameters 227
controllers menu parameters 130
global menu parameters 130
MIDI menu parameters 130
multiple arp setup 29
multisetup 131
preset 270
preset/volume/pan/arp
assignments 130
song 96
Save/Copy
button 36, 269
menu 269
Scale/Shift
note duration
in a pattern 75
in a song 102
velocity
in a pattern 79
in a song 106
Scarlatti Tuning 222
Screen Viewing Angle 141
Selecting
control data in a song 99
menus with jump buttons 281
patterns 54
presets 25, 44
Semitones, transpose keyboard by 120
Send
amount 255
FXA 138, 218, 219
FXB 139
effect 134
preset effect 214
Sequencer
controls 34
definitions 50
events, definition 50
metronome 72, 101
name pattern 70
overview 50
pattern
definition 50
erase events 77
grid recording 63
length 70
note duration scale 75, 102
note duration shift 75
paste track 84
step mode
gate 68
step resolution 68
step time record 68
time signature 71
track copy 83
track cut 82
transpose 78
velocity scale 79
velocity shift 79
play button 54
quantize 73
amount 73
XL-7 Operation Manual 349
Index
S
resolution 73
realtime recording a pattern 55
rechannelize 144
RTZ 54
song
track copy 108
track cut 107
songs, definition 52
stop button 54
swing 73
track mute buttons 54
tracks, definition 50
transpose pattern 78
Setting Meter
pattern 71
song 100
Setup
basic 16
performance 18
studio 17
Shift Note Duration
pattern 75
song 102
Signal Path 177, 255
SIMM Installation 324
Slapback 267
Soft Power Switch 31
Solo Layer 225
Solo Mode 199
Song
& pattern buttons 32
auto-correct 101
channel assign screen 110
deleting a pattern 43, 95
edit menu 99
erase events 104
event source 100
events only 99
Inserting a pattern 95
meter 100
name 99
parameters saved with 96
playing 94
quantize 101
realtime mode 96
record modes 34, 52
setup information 52
start, MIDI 237
step recording 94
thin events 103
time signature 100
track 52
transpose 105
velocity scale 106
velocity shift 106
350 E-MU Systems
Song & Pattern
event source 99
Song Mode 94
button 94
display 32
realtime record 52
step Eedit 52
Song Start 146
Sound Memory Installation 324
Sound Navigator 47
selecting instruments 186
Sound Start 198
Sources, modulation 213
Specifications, technical 335
Split Keyboard 224, 292
using links 292
Stack
layers 189
presets 224
Standard MIDI Files 51
Standardized MIDI Controller
Numbers 126, 329
Start/Stop Beats 242, 243
Step Edit
patterns 51
songs 52
Step Number, song 95
Step Recording 68
song mode 94
step-by-step 68
Step-By-Step Preset Programming 281
Stereo Delay, effect 268
Stolen Voices 200
Stop Button 34, 55, 94
Stop/RTZ
using a footswitch 123
Studio Setup 17
Sub Output Jacks 19
Submix Routing
FXB 139
Summing Amp 163, 164
Summing Nodes 154
Swept EQ Filter 175
Swing 73
definition 74
Switch Processor 163, 167
Sync
arp key 234
LFO 207, 208
Synth Solo Mode
high 200
last 199
low 200
Index
T
SysEx
packet delay 150
System Exclusive
device ID 149
erasing from a pattern 77
send data 151
T
Tap Tempo 34, 144
using a footswitch 123
Technical Specifications 335
Tempo
base 144
change
using conductor track 92
change via MIDI controller 127
controller 127
display 33
enabling in song mode 99
erasing events from a song 104
erasing from a pattern 77
offset 225
thinning events in a pattern 76
thinning events in a song 103
Tempo-based Envelope 158, 196, 205,
284
Thin Events
pattern 76
song 103
Ticks 0 & 1 53
Ticks-per-note Chart 68
Time
arpeggiator gate 232
master FXB delay 139
Time Signature
pattern 71
song 100
Time-based Envelope 157, 196, 205, 284,
287
Touchstrip 42, 290
erasing from a pattern 77
hold 42
master bend range 132
thinning events in a song 103
thinning from a pattern 76
transmit MIDI 146
Track
& MIDI channel display 33
copy to clipboard 83
cut to clipboard 82
extending the length of 80
mixing 22
mute buttons 54
mutes
recording into a song 95
muting 22
priority 53
Track/Channel +/- Buttons 33
Transmission Errors 150
Transmit MIDI Clock 146
Transmit MIDI, knob 146
Transpose 132, 194, 195
arpeggiator 233
beat part 251
buttons 42
pattern 78
preset link 224
rubber keypads 120
Trig Hold, beats 243
Trigger Buttons 41, 123, 124
controlling multiple arps 28
Trigger Channel 244
Trigger Key 242
Trigger Mode 41, 124
Triplets, definition 316
Troubleshooting 291
Tune 132
Tuning 195, 282
19-tone 222
coarse 282
equal temperment 222
fine 282
gamelan 222
just C 222
key 140
keyboard 222
Kirnberger 222
repeating octave 222
Scarlatti 222
Vallotti 222
Werkmeister 222
Tutorial
filter 171
synth programming 281
U
Unlatch Beats Part 249
User
banks 26
key tuning 140
presets 151
tuning tables 140
User Pattern
arpeggiator 238
naming 241
repeat 240
velocity 240
XL-7 Operation Manual 351
Index
V
V
Vallotti Tuning 222
Value, metronome 72, 101
Variation
beats 248
Variation, LFO 210
Velocity
arpeggiator 232
changing in grid record 66
crossfade 189, 190
curve 133, 313
key 155
preset link 224
recording in pattern step mode 68
release 155
scale
song 106
scaling in a pattern 79
sensitive keypads 42
shift
song 106
shifting in a pattern 79
user pattern 240
Vibrato, effect processor 268
Viewing Angle, screen 141
Voices, stolen 200
Volume
automation in pattern 61
channel 45
control 31
control #7 45
curve 283
enabling in song mode 99
envelope 157, 177, 196, 197, 283, 284
mixing in song mode 97
preset link 224
W
Waveform
instrument list 303
inverting 160
LFO 159
Werkmeister Tuning 222
Wheel
modulation 155
pitch 155
Width, chorus 283
Z
Z-Plane Filter 176, 177, 202
352 E-MU Systems
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement